Spss Base Users Guide 120

®
SPSS Base 12.0 User’s Guide

For more information about SPSS® software products, please visit our Web site at
http://www.spss.com or contact
SPSS Inc.
233 South Wacker Drive, 11th Floor
Chicago, IL 60606-6412
Tel: (312) 651-3000
Fax: (312) 651-3668
SPSS is a registered trademark and the other product names are the trademarks
of SPSS Inc. for its proprietary computer software. No material describing such
software may be produced or distributed without the written permission of the
owners of the trademark and license rights in the software and the copyrights in
the published materials.
The SOFTWARE and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth
in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software
clause at 52.227-7013. Contractor/manufacturer is SPSS Inc., 233 South Wacker
Drive, 11th Floor, Chicago, IL 60606-6412.
General notice: Other product names mentioned herein are used for identification
purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies.
TableLook is a trademark of SPSS Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
DataDirect, DataDirect Connect, INTERSOLV, and SequeLink are registered
trademarks of DataDirect Technologies.
Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS © 1991-2000, LEAD
Technologies, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
LEAD, LEADTOOLS, and LEADVIEW are registered trademarks of LEAD
Technologies, Inc.
Portions of this product were based on the work of the FreeType Team
(http://www.freetype.org).
SPSS® Base 12.0 User’s Guide
Copyright © 2003 by SPSS Inc.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Preface
SPSS 12.0
SPSS 12.0 is a comprehensive system for analyzing data. SPSS can take data from
almost any type of file and use them to generate tabulated reports, charts and plots of
distributions and trends, descriptive statistics, and complex statistical analyses.
This manual, the SPSS Base 12.0 User's Guide, documents the graphical user
interface of SPSS for Windows. Complete information about using interactive
graphics can be found in SPSS Interactive Graphics 10.0, which is compatible with
release 12.0 of SPSS. Examples using the statistical procedures found in SPSS
Base12.0 are provided in the Help system, installed with the software. Algorithms
used in the statistical procedures are available on the product CD-ROM.
In addition, beneath the menus and dialog boxes, SPSS uses a command language.
Some extended features of the system can be accessed only via command syntax.
(Those features are not available in the Student Version.) Complete command
syntax is documented in the SPSS 12.0 Command Syntax Reference, provided on
the product CD-ROM.
iii
SPSS Options
The following options are available as add-on enhancements to the full (not Student
Version) SPSS Base system:
SPSS Regression Models™ provides techniques for analyzing data that do not fit
traditional linear statistical models. It includes procedures for probit analysis, logistic
regression, weight estimation, two-stage least-squares regression, and general
nonlinear regression.
SPSS Advanced Models™ focuses on techniques often used in sophisticated
experimental and biomedical research. It includes procedures for general linear
models (GLM), linear mixed models, variance components analysis, loglinear
analysis, ordinal regression, actuarial life tables, Kaplan-Meier survival analysis,
and basic and extended Cox regression.
SPSS Tables™ creates a variety of presentation-quality tabular reports, including
complex stub-and-banner tables and displays of multiple response data.
SPSS Trends™ performs comprehensive forecasting and time series analyses with
multiple curve-fitting models, smoothing models, and methods for estimating
autoregressive functions.
SPSS Categories® performs optimal scaling procedures, including correspondence
analysis.
SPSS Conjoint™ performs conjoint analysis.
SPSS CHAID™ simplifies tabular analysis of categorical data, develops predictive
models, screens out extraneous predictor variables, and produces easy-to-read tree
diagrams that segment a population into subgroups that share similar characteristics.
SPSS Exact Tests™ calculates exact p values for statistical tests when small or very
unevenly distributed samples could make the usual tests inaccurate.
SPSS Missing Value Analysis™ describes patterns of missing data, estimates means
and other statistics, and imputes values for missing observations.
SPSS Maps™ turns your geographically distributed data into high-quality maps with
symbols, colors, bar charts, pie charts, and combinations of themes to present not
only what is happening but where it is happening.
iv
SPSS Complex Samples™ allows survey, market, health and public opinion
researchers, as well as social scientists who use sample survey methodology, to
incorporate their complex sample designs into data analysis.
The SPSS family of products also includes applications for data entry, text analysis,
classification, neural networks, and flowcharting.
Compatibility
SPSS is designed to run on many computer systems. See the materials that came with
your system for specific information on minimum and recommended requirements.
Serial Numbers
Your serial number is your identification number with SPSS Inc. You will need
this serial number when you contact SPSS Inc. for information regarding support,
payment, or an upgraded system. The serial number was provided with your Base
system.
Customer Service
If you have any questions concerning your shipment or account, contact your local
office, listed on the SPSS Web site at http://www.spss.com/worldwide/. Please have
your serial number ready for identification.
Training Seminars
SPSS Inc. provides both public and onsite training seminars. All seminars feature
hands-on workshops. Seminars will be offered in major cities on a regular basis. For
more information on these seminars, contact your local office, listed on the SPSS
Web site at http://www.spss.com/worldwide/.
v
Technical Support
The services of SPSS Technical Support are available to registered customers.
Customers may contact Technical Support for assistance in using SPSS products
or for installation help for one of the supported hardware environments. To reach
Technical Support, see the SPSS Web site at http://www.spss.com, or contact your
local office, listed on the SPSS Web site at http://www.spss.com/worldwide/. Be
prepared to identify yourself, your organization, and the serial number of your system.
Additional Publications
Individuals worldwide can order additional product manuals directly from SPSS
Inc. For telephone orders in the United States and Canada, call SPSS Inc. at
800-543-2185. For telephone orders outside of North America, contact your local
office, listed on the SPSS Web site at http://www.spss.com/worldwide.
The SPSS 12.0 Statistical Procedures Companion, by Marija Norusis, is being
prepared for publication by Prentice Hall. It contains overviews of the procedures
in the SPSS Base, plus Logistic Regression, General Linear Models, and Linear
Mixed Models. Further information will be available on the SPSS Web site at
http://www.spss.com (click Store, select your country, click Books).
Tell Us Your Thoughts

Your comments are important. Please let us know about your experiences with SPSS
products. We especially like to hear about new and interesting applications using
the SPSS system. Please send e-mail to suggest@spss.com, or write to SPSS Inc.,
Attn: Director of Product Planning, 233 South Wacker Drive, 11th Floor, Chicago IL
60606-6412.
Contacting SPSS
If you would like to be on our mailing list, contact one of our offices, listed on
our Web site at http://www.spss.com/worldwide/. We will send you a copy of our
newsletter and let you know about SPSS Inc. activities in your area.
vi
Contents
1 Overview 1
What's New in SPSS 12.0? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Variable Names and Variable Labels in Dialog Box Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Subdialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Selecting Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Getting Information about Variables in Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Getting Information about Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Basic Steps in Data Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Statistics Coach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Finding Out More about SPSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Getting Help 13
Using the Help Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Getting Help on Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Getting Help on Output Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using Case Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Copying Help Text from a Pop-Up Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
vii
3 Data Files 19
Opening a Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
To Open Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Data File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Opening File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Reading Excel Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How the Data Editor Reads Older Excel Files and Other Spreadsheets . . . . 22
How the Data Editor Reads dBASE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Reading Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Selecting a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Database Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selecting Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Creating a Parameter Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Defining Variables (Database Wizard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Text Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Saving Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
To Save Modified Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Saving Data Files in Excel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Saving Data Files in SAS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Saving Data Files in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Saving Data: Data File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Saving Subsets of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Saving File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Protecting Original Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
viii
Virtual Active File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4 Distributed Analysis Mode 61

Distributed versus Local Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 Data Editor 73
Data View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Variable View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Go to Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Case Selection Status in the Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Data Editor Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Data Editor Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6 Data Preparation 95
Defining Variable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Copying Data Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Identifying Duplicate Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Visual Bander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Banding Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Automatically Generating Banded Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Copying Banded Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
User-Missing Values in the Visual Bander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ix
7 Data Transformations 127
Computing Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Missing Values in Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Random Number Seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Count Occurrences of Values within Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Recoding Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recode into Same Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recode into Different Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Rank Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Automatic Recode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Time Series Data Transformations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8 File Handling and File Transformations 153

Sort Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Transpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Merging Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
x
Add Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Add Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Aggregate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Split File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Select Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Weight Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Restructuring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9 Working with Output 197

Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Using Output in Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pasting Objects into the Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Pasting Objects from Other Applications into the Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Export Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Viewer Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Saving Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10 Draft Viewer 229

To Create Draft Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
xi
Controlling Draft Output Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fonts in Draft Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
To Print Draft Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
To Save Draft Viewer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11 Pivot Tables 239

Manipulating a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Working with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Showing and Hiding Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Editing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Changing the Appearance of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
To Change Pivot Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table Properties: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
To Change General Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table Properties: Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
To Change Footnote Marker Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Table Properties: Cell Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
To Change Cell Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Table Properties: Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
To Change Borders in a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
To Display Hidden Borders in a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table Properties: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
To Control Pivot Table Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Data Cell Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Cell Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
xii
To Change Cell Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Cell Properties: Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
To Change Value Formats in a Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
To Change Value Formats for a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cell Properties: Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
To Change Alignment in Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cell Properties: Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
To Change Margins in Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Cell Properties: Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
To Change Shading in Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Footnote Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Selecting Rows and Columns in Pivot Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
To Select a Row or Column in a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Modifying Pivot Table Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Printing Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
To Print Hidden Layers of a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Controlling Table Breaks for Wide and Long Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12 Working with Command Syntax 273

Syntax Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Pasting Syntax from Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Copying Syntax from the Output Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Editing Syntax in a Journal File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
To Run Command Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Multiple Execute Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
xiii
13 Frequencies 283
Frequencies Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
To Obtain Frequency Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14 Descriptives 291
Descriptives Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
To Obtain Descriptive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
15 Explore 297
Explore Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
To Explore Your Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
16 Crosstabs 305
Crosstabs Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
xiv
To Obtain Crosstabulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
17 Summarize 315
Summarize Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
To Obtain Case Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
18 Means 323
Means Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
To Obtain Subgroup Means. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
19 OLAP Cubes 329

OLAP Cubes Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
To Obtain OLAP Cubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
20 T Tests 337
Independent-Samples T Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Independent-Samples T Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
To Obtain an Independent-Samples T Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Paired-Samples T Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
xv
Paired-Samples T Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
To Obtain a Paired-Samples T Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
One-Sample T Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
One-Sample T Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
To Obtain a One-Sample T Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
21 One-Way ANOVA 349

One-Way ANOVA Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
To Obtain a One-Way Analysis of Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
22 GLM Univariate Analysis 359

GLM Univariate Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
To Obtain GLM Univariate Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
GLM Contrasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
GLM Profile Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
GLM Post Hoc Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
23 Bivariate Correlations 377

Bivariate Correlations Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
xvi
To Obtain Bivariate Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
24 Partial Correlations 383

Partial Correlations Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
To Obtain Partial Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
25 Distances 387
To Obtain Distance Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Distances Dissimilarity Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Distances Similarity Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
26 Linear Regression 391

Linear Regression Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
To Obtain a Linear Regression Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Linear Regression Variable Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Linear Regression Set Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Linear Regression Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Linear Regression: Saving New Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Linear Regression Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Linear Regression Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
xvii
27 Curve Estimation 407
Curve Estimation Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
To Obtain a Curve Estimation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
28 Discriminant Analysis 413

Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
To Obtain a Discriminant Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
29 Factor Analysis 423

Factor Analysis Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
To Obtain a Factor Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Factor Analysis Descriptives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
To Specify Descriptive Statistics and Correlation Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . 431
To Specify Extraction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
To Specify Rotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
To Specify Factor Score Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
To Specify Factor Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
xviii
30 Choosing a Procedure for Clustering 437
31 TwoStep Cluster Analysis 439

TwoStep Cluster Analysis Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
To Obtain a TwoStep Cluster Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
32 Hierarchical Cluster Analysis 449

Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
To Obtain a Hierarchical Cluster Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Save New Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
33 K-Means Cluster Analysis 457

K-Means Cluster Analysis Data Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
To Obtain a K-Means Cluster Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
K-Means Cluster Analysis Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
K-Means Cluster Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
xix
34 Nonparametric Tests 465
Chi-Square Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Chi-Square Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
To Obtain a Chi-Square Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Binomial Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Binomial Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
To Obtain a Binomial Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Runs Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Runs Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
To Obtain a Runs Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
To Obtain a One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Two-Independent-Samples Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Two-Independent-Samples Tests Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
To Obtain Two-Independent-Samples Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Two-Related-Samples Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Two-Related-Samples Tests Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
To Obtain Two-Related-Samples Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Tests for Several Independent Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Tests for Several Independent Samples Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 491
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
xx
To Obtain Tests for Several Independent Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Tests for Several Related Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Tests for Several Related Samples Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
To Obtain Tests for Several Related Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
35 Multiple Response Analysis 499

Multiple Response Define Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
To Define Multiple Response Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Multiple Response Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Multiple Response Frequencies Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
To Obtain Multiple Response Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Multiple Response Crosstabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Multiple Response Crosstabs Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
To Obtain Multiple Response Crosstabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
36 Reporting Results 511

Report Summaries in Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Report Summaries in Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
37 Reliability Analysis 527

Reliability Analysis Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
xxi
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
To Obtain a Reliability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
RELIABILITY Command Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
38 Multidimensional Scaling 533

Multidimensional Scaling Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
To Obtain a Multidimensional Scaling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Multidimensional Scaling Create Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Multidimensional Scaling Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Multidimensional Scaling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Scaling Command Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
39 Ratio Statistics 541

Ratio Statistics Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
To Obtain Ratio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Ratio Statistics Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
xxii
40 Overview of the Chart Facility 545
Creating and Modifying a Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Chart Definition Global Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
41 ROC Curves 557

ROC Curve Data Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Sample Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
To Obtain an ROC Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
42 Utilities 561
Variable Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Data File Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Variable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Define Variable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Use Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Reordering Target Variable Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
43 Options 567
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Viewer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Draft Viewer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
xxiii
Output Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Chart Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Interactive Chart Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Pivot Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Data Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Currency Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Script Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
44 Customizing Menus and Toolbars 587

Menu Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Customizing Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Show Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
To Customize Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
45 Production Facility 595

Using the Production Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Syntax Rules for the Production Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
User Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Production Macro Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Production Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Format Control for Production Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Running Production Jobs from a Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Publish to Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
SmartViewer Web Server Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
xxiv
46 SPSS Scripting Facility 609
To Run a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Scripts Included with SPSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Autoscripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Creating and Editing Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
To Edit a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Starter Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Creating Autoscripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
How Scripts Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Table of Object Classes and Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
New Procedure (Scripting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Adding a Description to a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
xxv
Scripting Custom Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Debugging Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Script Files and Syntax Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
47 Output Management System 643

OMS Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Appendices
A Database Access Administrator 649
B Customizing HTML Documents 651

To Add Customized HTML Code to Exported Output Documents . . . . . . . . 651
Content and Format of the Text File for Customized HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
To Use a Different File or Location for Custom HTML Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Index 655
xxvi
Chapter
1
Overview
SPSS for Windows provides a powerful statistical analysis and data management
system in a graphical environment, using descriptive menus and simple dialog boxes
to do most of the work for you. Most tasks can be accomplished simply by pointing
and clicking the mouse.
In addition to the simple point-and-click interface for statistical analysis, SPSS for
Windows provides:
Data Editor. A versatile spreadsheet-like system for defining, entering, editing, and
displaying data.
Viewer. The Viewer makes it easy to browse your results, selectively show and hide
output, change the display order results, and move presentation-quality tables and
charts between SPSS and other applications.
Multidimensional pivot tables. Your results come alive with multidimensional pivot
tables. Explore your tables by rearranging rows, columns, and layers. Uncover
important findings that can get lost in standard reports. Compare groups easily by
splitting your table so that only one group is displayed at a time.
High-resolution graphics. High-resolution, full-color pie charts, bar charts, histograms,
scatterplots, 3-D graphics, and more are included as standard features in SPSS.
Database access. Retrieve information from databases by using the Database Wizard
instead of complicated SQL queries.
Data transformations. Transformation features help get your data ready for analysis.
You can easily subset data, combine categories, add, aggregate, merge, split, and
transpose files, and more.
Electronic distribution. Send e-mail reports to others with the click of a button, or
export tables and charts in HTML format for Internet and intranet distribution.
1
2
Chapter 1
Online Help. Detailed tutorials provide a comprehensive overview; context-sensitive

Help topics in dialog boxes guide you through specific tasks; pop-up definitions in
pivot table results explain statistical terms; the Statistics Coach helps you find the
procedures that you need; and Case Studies provide hands-on examples of how to use
statistical procedures and interpret the results.
Command language. Although most tasks can be accomplished with simple
point-and-click gestures, SPSS also provides a powerful command language that
allows you to save and automate many common tasks. The command language also
provides some functionality not found in the menus and dialog boxes.
Complete command syntax documentation is automatically installed when you
install SPSS. To access the syntax documentation:
E From the menus, choose

Help
Command Syntax Reference
What's New in SPSS 12.0?

There are a number of new features in SPSS 12.0.
Improved Charting Features

Better default chart appearance
Support for long text strings and automatic text wrapping
Control of default scale ranges using chart templates
3-D effects for pie and bar charts
Improved color and pattern choices, and much more
New Data Management Features

Longer variable names. The maximum length for variable names is now 64 bytes,
compared to 8 bytes for previous releases. For more information, see “Variable
Names” in Chapter 5 on page 76.
Visual Bander. The Visual Bander is designed to help you “band” scale data into
categorical ranges (for example, age in 10-year ranges). For more information,
see “Visual Bander” in Chapter 6 on page 116.
3
Overview
Duplicate record finder. Identify, flag, report, and filter duplicate records with the
new Identify Duplicate Cases feature. For more information, see “Identifying
Duplicate Cases” in Chapter 6 on page 113.
Output management system. Turn output into input with the new OMS command.
With OMS, you can automatically write selected categories of output to different
output files in different formats, including HTML, XML, text, and SPSS-format
data files. For more information, see “Output Management System” in Chapter
47 on page 643.
Command syntax to delete variables. The new DELETE VARIABLES command
makes it easy to delete variables you do not need anymore, such as temporary
variables used in transformations.
Statistical Enhancements
New options for handling weighted data in the Crosstabs procedure. For more
information, see “Crosstabs Cell Display” in Chapter 16 on page 313.
New stepwise function in Multinomial Logisitic Regression (NOMREG command,
Regression Models option).
New Complex Samples Option
This new add-on module provides the specialized planning tools and statistics that
you need when working with sample survey data. Most conventional statistical
software assumes your data arise from simple random sampling. In most large-scale
surveys, however, simple random sampling generally is not feasible or cost effective.
Using SPSS Complex Samples with sample survey data reduces the risk of reaching
incorrect or misleading inferences. The new SPSS Complex Samples add-on
module enables you to make more statistically valid inferences for a population by
incorporating the sample design into survey analysis. It is an indispensable statistical
tool for survey and market researchers, public opinion researchers or social scientists,
and it enables you to reach more accurate conclusions when working with sample
survey methodology.
Windows
There are a number of different types of windows in SPSS:
4
Chapter 1
Data Editor. This window displays the contents of the data file. You can create new
data files or modify existing ones with the Data Editor. The Data Editor window
opens automatically when you start an SPSS session. You can have only one data
file open at a time.
Viewer. All statistical results, tables, and charts are displayed in the Viewer. You can
edit the output and save it for later use. A Viewer window opens automatically the
first time you run a procedure that generates output.
Draft Viewer. You can display output as simple text (instead of interactive pivot tables)
in the Draft Viewer.
Pivot Table Editor. Output displayed in pivot tables can be modified in many ways with
the Pivot Table Editor. You can edit text, swap data in rows and columns, add color,
create multidimensional tables, and selectively hide and show results.
Chart Editor. You can modify high-resolution charts and plots in chart windows. You
can change the colors, select different type fonts or sizes, switch the horizontal and
vertical axes, rotate 3-D scatterplots, and even change the chart type.
Text Output Editor. Text output not displayed in pivot tables can be modified with the
Text Output Editor. You can edit the output and change font characteristics (type,
style, color, size).
Syntax Editor. You can paste your dialog box choices into a syntax window, where
your selections appear in the form of command syntax. You can then edit the
command syntax to use special features of SPSS not available through dialog boxes.
You can save these commands in a file for use in subsequent SPSS sessions.
Script Editor. Scripting and OLE automation allow you to customize and automate
many tasks in SPSS. Use the Script Editor to create and modify basic scripts.
5
Overview
Figure 1-1
Data Editor and Viewer
Designated versus Active Window

If you have more than one open Viewer window, output is routed to the designated
Viewer window. If you have more than one open Syntax Editor window, command
syntax is pasted into the designated Syntax Editor window. The designated windows
are indicated by an exclamation point (!) in the status bar. You can change the
designated windows at any time.
The designated window should not be confused with the active window, which is
the currently selected window. If you have overlapping windows, the active window
appears in the foreground. If you open a new Syntax Editor or Viewer window, that
window automatically becomes the active window and the designated window.
6
Chapter 1
Changing the Designated Window
E Make the window that you want to designate the active window (click anywhere
in the window).
E Click the Designate Window tool on the toolbar (the one with the exclamation point).
or
E From the menus choose:

Utilities
Designate Window
Figure 1-2
Designate Window tool
Menus
Many of the tasks that you want to perform with SPSS start with menu selections.
Each window in SPSS has its own menu bar with menu selections appropriate for
that window type.
The Analyze and Graphs menus are available on all windows, making it easy to
generate new output without having to switch windows.
Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of each SPSS window provides the following information:
Command status. For each procedure or command that you run, a case counter
indicates the number of cases processed so far. For statistical procedures that require
iterative processing, the number of iterations is displayed.
Filter status. If you have selected a random sample or a subset of cases for analysis,
the message Filter on indicates that some type of case filtering is currently in effect
and not all cases in the data file are included in the analysis.
7
Overview
Weight status. The message Weight on indicates that a weight variable is being used
to weight cases for analysis.
Split File status. The message Split File on indicates that the data file has been split into
separate groups for analysis, based on the values of one or more grouping variables.
Showing and Hiding the Status Bar

View
Status Bar
Dialog Boxes
Most menu selections open dialog boxes. You use dialog boxes to select variables
and options for analysis.
Dialog boxes for statistical procedures and charts typically have two basic
components:
Source variable list. A list of variables in the working data file. Only variable types
allowed by the selected procedure are displayed in the source list. Use of short string
and long string variables is restricted in many procedures.
Target variable list(s). One or more lists indicating the variables that you have chosen
for the analysis, such as dependent and independent variable lists.
Variable Names and Variable Labels in Dialog Box Lists

You can display either variable names or variable labels in dialog box lists.
To control the display of variable names or labels, choose Options from the Edit
menu in any window.
To define or modify variable labels, use Variable View in the Data Editor.
For data imported from database sources, field names are used as variable labels.
8
Chapter 1
For long labels, position the mouse pointer over the label in the list to view
the entire label.
If no variable label is defined, the variable name is displayed.
Figure 1-3
Variable labels displayed in a dialog box
Dialog Box Controls

There are five standard controls in most dialog boxes:
OK. Runs the procedure. After you select your variables and choose any additional
specifications, click OK to run the procedure. This also closes the dialog box.
Paste. Generates command syntax from the dialog box selections and pastes the
syntax into a syntax window. You can then customize the commands with additional
features not available from dialog boxes.
Reset. Deselects any variables in the selected variable list(s) and resets all
specifications in the dialog box and any subdialog boxes to the default state.
Cancel. Cancels any changes in the dialog box settings since the last time it was
opened and closes the dialog box. Within a session, dialog box settings are persistent.
A dialog box retains your last set of specifications until you override them.
Help. Context-sensitive Help. This takes you to a Help window that contains
information about the current dialog box. You can also get help on individual dialog
box controls by clicking the control with the right mouse button.
9
Overview
Subdialog Boxes
Since most procedures provide a great deal of flexibility, not all of the possible
choices can be contained in a single dialog box. The main dialog box usually contains
the minimum information required to run a procedure. Additional specifications
are made in subdialog boxes.
In the main dialog box, controls with an ellipsis (...) after the name indicate that a
subdialog box will be displayed.
Selecting Variables
To select a single variable, you simply highlight it on the source variable list and
click the right arrow button next to the target variable list. If there is only one target
variable list, you can double-click individual variables to move them from the source
list to the target list.
You can also select multiple variables:

To select multiple variables that are grouped together on the variable list, click the
first one and then Shift-click the last one in the group.
To select multiple variables that are not grouped together on the variable list, use
the Ctrl-click method. Click the first variable, then Ctrl-click the next variable,
and so on.
Getting Information about Variables in Dialog Boxes

E Right-click on a variable in the source or target variable list.
E Select Variable Information in the pop-up context menu.

10
Chapter 1
Figure 1-4
Variable information with right mouse button
Getting Information about Dialog Box Controls

E Right-click the control you want to know about.
E Select What's This? on the pop-up context menu.
A pop-up window displays information about the control.

11
Overview
Figure 1-5
Right mouse button “What's This?” pop-up Help for dialog box controls
Basic Steps in Data Analysis

Analyzing data with SPSS is easy. All you have to do is:
Get your data into SPSS. You can open a previously saved SPSS data file; read a
spreadsheet, database, or text data file; or enter your data directly in the Data Editor.
Select a procedure. Select a procedure from the menus to calculate statistics or to
create a chart.
Select the variables for the analysis. The variables in the data file are displayed in a
dialog box for the procedure.
Run the procedure and look at the results. Results are displayed in the Viewer.
12
Chapter 1
Statistics Coach
If you are unfamiliar with SPSS or with the statistical procedures available in SPSS,
the Statistics Coach can help you get started by prompting you with simple questions,
nontechnical language, and visual examples that help you select the basic statistical
and charting features that are best suited for your data.
To use the Statistics Coach, from the menus in any SPSS window choose:
Help
Statistics Coach
The Statistics Coach covers only a selected subset of procedures in the SPSS Base
system. It is designed to provide general assistance for many of the basic, commonly
used statistical techniques.
Finding Out More about SPSS

For a comprehensive overview of SPSS basics, see the online tutorial. From any
SPSS menu choose:
Help
Tutorial
Chapter
2
Getting Help
Online Help is provided in several ways:

Help menu. Every window has a Help menu on the menu bar. Topics provides access
to the Contents and Index tabs, which you can use to find specific Help topics. Tutorial
provides access to the introductory tutorial.
Dialog box context menu Help. Right-click on any control in a dialog box and select
What's This? from the context menu to display a description of the control and
directions for its use.
Dialog box Help buttons. Most dialog boxes have a Help button that takes you directly
to a Help topic for that dialog box. The Help topic provides general information and
links to related topics.
Pivot table context menu Help. Right-click on terms in an activated pivot table in
the Viewer and select What's This? from the context menu to display definitions
of the terms.
Case Studies. The Case Studies item on the Help menu in the Viewer window provides
hands-on examples of how to create various types of statistical analyses and how to
interpret the results. The sample data files used in the examples are also provided so
that you can work through the examples to see exactly how the results were produced.
Tutorial. Select Tutorial on the Help menu in any window to access the online
introductory tutorial.
Command Syntax Reference. Detailed command syntax reference information is
available in PDF format. (It is not available with some versions.)
Note: The Help system requires Internet Explorer 5 or later, and the SPSS Command
Syntax Reference requires Adobe Acrobat. Installable versions of both are provided
on the CD.
13
14
Chapter 2
Using the Help Table of Contents

E In any window, from the menus choose:
Help
Topics
E Click the Contents tab.
E Double-click items with a book icon to expand or collapse the contents.
E Click an item to go to that Help topic.
Figure 2-1
Help window with Contents tab displayed
Using the Help Index

Help
Topics
E Click the Index tab.
E Enter a term to search for in the index.

15
Getting Help
E Double-click the topic that you want.
The Help index uses incremental search to find the text that you enter and selects
the closest match in the index.
Figure 2-2
Index tab and incremental search
Getting Help on Dialog Box Controls

E Right-click on the dialog box control that you want information about.
E Choose What's This? from the pop-up context menu.
A description of the control and how to use it is displayed in a pop-up window.

General information about a dialog box is available from the Help button in the
dialog box.
16
Chapter 2
Figure 2-3
Dialog box control Help with right mouse button
Getting Help on Output Terms

E Double-click the pivot table to activate it.
E Right-click on the term that you want to be explained.
E Choose What's This? from the context menu.
A definition of the term is displayed in a pop-up window.

17
Getting Help
Figure 2-4
Activated pivot table glossary Help with right mouse button
Using Case Studies

E Right-click on a pivot table in the Viewer window.
E Choose Case Studies from the pop-up context menu.
Copying Help Text from a Pop-Up Window

E Right-click anywhere in the pop-up window.
E Choose Copy from the context menu.
The entire text of the pop-up window is copied.

Chapter
3
Data Files
Data files come in a wide variety of formats, and this software is designed to handle
many of them, including:
Spreadsheets created with Lotus 1-2-3 and Excel
Database files created with dBASE and various SQL formats
Tab-delimited and other types of ASCII text files
Data files in SPSS format created on other operating systems
SYSTAT data files
SAS data files
Opening a Data File

In addition to files saved in SPSS format, you can open Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, dBASE,
and tab-delimited files without converting the files to an intermediate format or
entering data definition information.
To Open Data Files

File
Open
Data...
E In the Open File dialog box, select the file that you want to open.
E Click Open.
19
20
Chapter 3
Optionally, you can:

Read variable names from the first row for spreadsheet and tab-delimited files.
Specify a range of cells to read for spreadsheet files.
Specify a sheet within an Excel file to read (Excel 5 or later).
Data File Types

SPSS. Opens data files saved in SPSS format, including SPSS for Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, and also the DOS product SPSS/PC+.
SPSS/PC+. Opens SPSS/PC+ data files.
SYSTAT. Opens SYSTAT data files.
SPSS Portable. Opens data files saved in SPSS portable format. Saving a file in
portable format takes considerably longer than saving the file in SPSS format.
Excel. Opens Excel files.
Lotus 1-2-3. Opens data files saved in 1-2-3 format for release 3.0, 2.0, or 1A of Lotus.
SYLK. Opens data files saved in SYLK (symbolic link) format, a format used by
some spreadsheet applications.
dBASE. Opens dBASE-format files for either dBASE IV, dBASE III or III PLUS,
or dBASE II. Each case is a record. Variable and value labels and missing-value
specifications are lost when you save a file in this format.
SAS Long File Name. SAS version 7-8 for Windows, long extension.
SAS Short File Name. SAS version 7-8 for Windows, short extension.
SAS v6 for Windows. SAS version 6.08 for Windows and OS2.
SAS v6 for UNIX. SAS version 6 for UNIX (Sun, HP, IBM).
SAS Transport. SAS transport file.
Text. ASCII text file.
21
Data Files
Opening File Options

Read variable names. For spreadsheets, you can read variable names from the first row
of the file or the first row of the defined range. The values are converted as necessary
to create valid variable names, including converting spaces to underscores.
Worksheet. Excel 5 or later files can contain multiple worksheets. By default, the
Data Editor reads the first worksheet. To read a different worksheet, select the
worksheet from the drop-down list.
Range. For spreadsheet data files, you can also read a range of cells. Use the same
method for specifying cell ranges as you would with the spreadsheet application.
Reading Excel Files

Read variable names. You can read variable names from the first row of the file or the
first row of the defined range. Values that don't conform to variable naming rules are
converted to valid variable names, and the original names are used as variable labels.
Worksheet. Excel files can contain multiple worksheets. By default, the Data Editor
reads the first worksheet. To read a different worksheet, select the worksheet from
the drop-down list.
Range. You can also read a range of cells. Use the same method for specifying cell
ranges as you would in Excel.
How the Data Editor Reads Excel 5 or Later Files

The following rules apply to reading Excel 5 or later files:
Data type and width. Each column is a variable. The data type and width for each
variable is determined by the data type and width in the Excel file. If the column
contains more than one data type (for example, date and numeric), the data type is set
to string, and all values are read as valid string values.
Blank cells. For numeric variables, blank cells are converted to the system-missing
value, indicated by a period. For string variables, a blank is a valid string value, and
blank cells are treated as valid string values.
22
Chapter 3
Variable names. If you read the first row of the Excel file (or the first row of the
specified range) as variable names, values that don't conform to variable naming rules
are converted to valid variable names, and the original names are used as variable
labels. If you do not read variable names from the Excel file, default variable names
are assigned.
How the Data Editor Reads Older Excel Files and Other
Spreadsheets
The following rules apply to reading Excel files prior to version 5 and other
spreadsheet data:
Data type and width. The data type and width for each variable are determined by the
column width and data type of the first data cell in the column. Values of other types
are converted to the system-missing value. If the first data cell in the column is blank,
the global default data type for the spreadsheet (usually numeric) is used.
Blank cells. For numeric variables, blank cells are converted to the system-missing
value, indicated by a period. For string variables, a blank is a valid string value, and
blank cells are treated as valid string values.
Variable names. If you do not read variable names from the spreadsheet, the column
letters (A, B, C, ...) are used for variable names for Excel and Lotus files. For SYLK
files and Excel files saved in R1C1 display format, the software uses the column
number preceded by the letter C for variable names (C1, C2, C3, ...).
How the Data Editor Reads dBASE Files

Database files are logically very similar to SPSS-format data files. The following
general rules apply to dBASE files:
Field names are converted to valid variable names.
Colons used in dBASE field names are translated to underscores.
Records marked for deletion but not actually purged are included. The software
creates a new string variable, D_R, which contains an asterisk for cases marked
for deletion.
23
Data Files
Reading Database Files

You can read data from any database format for which you have a database driver. In
local analysis mode, the necessary drivers must be installed on your local computer.
In distributed analysis mode (available with the server version), the drivers must be
installed on the remote server. For more information, see “Distributed Analysis
Mode” in Chapter 4 on page 61.
To Read Database Files

File
Open Database
New Query...
E Select the data source.
E Depending on the data source, you may need to select the database file and/or enter a
login name, password, and other information.
E Select the table(s) and fields.
E Specify any relationships between your tables.

Specify any selection criteria for your data.
Add a prompt for user input to create a parameter query.
Define any variable attributes.
Save the query you have constructed before running it.
To Edit Saved Database Queries

File
Open Database
Edit Query...
24
Chapter 3
E Select the query file (*.spq) that you want to edit.
E Follow the instructions for creating a new query.
To Read Database Files with Saved Queries

File
Open Database
Run Query...
E Select the query file (*.spq) that you want to run.
E Depending on the database file, you may need to enter a login name and password.
E If the query has an embedded prompt, you may need to enter other information (for
example, the quarter for which you want to retrieve sales figures).
Selecting a Data Source

Use the first dialog box to select the type of data source to read into the software.
After you have chosen the file type, the Database Wizard may prompt you for the
path to your data file.
If you do not have any data sources configured, or if you want to add a new data
source, click Add Data Source. In distributed analysis mode (available with the server
version), this button is not available. To add data sources in distributed analysis
mode, see your system administrator.
25
Data Files
Data sources. A data source consists of two essential pieces of information: the driver
that will be used to access the data and the location of the database that you want to
access. To specify data sources, you must have the appropriate drivers installed. For
local analysis mode, you can install drivers from the CD-ROM for this product:
SPSS Data Access Pack. Installs drivers for a variety of database formats.
Available on the AutoPlay menu.
Microsoft Data Access Pack. Installs drivers for Microsoft products, including
Microsoft Access. To install the Microsoft Data Access Pack, double-click
Microsoft Data Access Pack in the Microsoft Data Access Pack folder on the
CD-ROM.
Figure 3-1
Database Wizard dialog box
26
Chapter 3
Example. Let's say you have a Microsoft Access 7.0 database that contains data about
your employees and about the regions in which they work, and you want to import
that data. Select the MS Access 7.0 Database icon, and click Next to proceed. You will
see the Select Database dialog box. Specify the path to your database and click OK.
Database Login
If your database requires a password, the Database Wizard will prompt you for
one before it can open the data source.
Figure 3-2
Login dialog box
Selecting Data Fields

The Select Data dialog box controls which tables and fields are read into the software.
Database fields (columns) are read as variables.
If a table has any field(s) selected, all of its fields will be visible in the following
Database Wizard windows, but only those fields selected in this dialog box will be
imported as variables. This enables you to create table joins and to specify criteria
using fields that you are not importing.
27
Data Files
Figure 3-3
Select Data dialog box
Displaying field names. To list the fields in a table, click the plus sign (+) to the left of
a table name. To hide the fields, click the minus sign (–) to the left of a table name.
To add a field. Double-click any field in the Available Tables list, or drag it to the
Retrieve Fields in This Order list. Fields can be reordered by dragging and dropping
them within the selected fields list.
To remove a field. Double-click any field in the Retrieve Fields in This Order list,
or drag it to the Available Tables list.
Sort field names. If selected, the Database Wizard will display your available fields
in alphabetical order.
Example. Assume that you want to import from a database with two tables, Employees
and Regions. The Employees table contains information about your company's
employees, including the region they work in, their job category, and their annual
28
Chapter 3
sales. Employees are each assigned a region code (REGION), while those who do
not have a home region get the special code of 0. The Regions table holds a large
amount of data about the areas in which your company operates and prospective
markets. It uses a region code (REGION) to identify the area and provides the average
per capita income for the area, among other things. To relate each employee's sales
to the average income in the region, you would select the following fields from the
Employees table: ID, REGION, and SALES. Then, select the following fields from
the Regions table: REGION and AVGINC. Click Next to proceed.
Creating a Relationship between Tables

The Specify Relationships dialog box allows you to define the relationships between
the tables. If fields from more than one table are selected, you must define at least
one join.
Figure 3-4
Specify Relationships dialog box
29
Data Files
Establishing relationships. To create a relationship, drag a field from any table onto the
field to which you want to join it. The Database Wizard will draw a join line between
the two fields, indicating their relationship. These fields must be of the same data type.
Auto Join Tables. Attempts to automatically join tables based on primary/foreign keys
or matching field names and data type.
Specifying join types. If outer joins are supported by your driver, you can specify
either inner joins, left outer joins, or right outer joins. To select the type of join,
click the join line between the fields, and the software will display the Relationship
Properties dialog box.
You can also use the icons in the upper right corner of the dialog box to choose
the type of join.
Relationship Properties
This dialog box allows you to specify which type of relationship joins your tables.
Figure 3-5
Relationship Properties dialog box
Inner joins. An inner join includes only rows where the related fields are equal.
Example. Continuing with our data, suppose that you want to import data only for
those employees who work in a fixed region and only for those regions in which your
company operates. In this case, you would use an inner join, which would exclude
traveling employees and would filter out information about prospective regions in
which you do not currently have a presence.
30
Chapter 3
Completing this would give you a data set that contains the variables ID, REGION,
SALES95, and AVGINC for each employee who worked in a fixed region.
Figure 3-6
Creating an inner join
Outer joins. A left outer join includes all records from the table on the left and only
those records from the table on the right in which the related fields are equal. In a
right outer join, this relationship is switched, so that the software imports all records
from the table on the right and only those records from the table on the left in which
the related fields are equal.
Example. If you wanted to import data only for those employees who worked in fixed
regions (a subset of the Employees table) but needed information about all of the
regions, a right outer join would be appropriate. This results in a data set that contains
the variables ID, REGION, SALES95, and AVGINC for each employee who worked
in a fixed region, plus data on the remaining regions in which your company does
not currently operate.
31
Data Files
Figure 3-7
Creating a right outer join
Limiting Retrieved Cases

The Limit Retrieved Cases dialog box allows you to specify the criteria to select
subsets of cases (rows). Limiting cases generally consists of filling the criteria grid
with one or more criteria. Criteria consist of two expressions and some relation
between them. They return a value of true, false, or missing for each case.
If the result is true, the case is selected.
If the result is false or missing, the case is not selected.
32
Chapter 3
Most criteria use one or more of the six relational operators (<, >, <=, >=,
=, and <>).
Expressions can include field names, constants, arithmetic operators, numeric
and other functions, and logical variables. You can use fields that you do not
plan to import as variables.
Figure 3-8
Limit Retrieved Cases dialog box
To build your criteria, you need at least two expressions and a relation to connect them.
E To build an expression, put your cursor in an Expression cell. You can type field
names, constants, arithmetic operators, numeric and other functions, and logical
variables. Other methods of putting a field into a criteria cell include double-clicking
the field in the Fields list, dragging the field from the Fields list, or selecting a field
from the drop-down menu that is available in any active Expression cell.
33
Data Files
E The two expressions are usually connected by a relational operator, such as = or >. To
choose the relation, put your cursor in the Relation cell and either type the operator
or select it from the drop-down menu.
To modify our earlier example to retrieve data only about employees who fit into
job categories 1 or 3, create two criteria in the criteria grid, and prefix the second
criteria with the connector OR.
Criteria 1: 'EmployeeSales'.'JOBCAT' = 1
Criteria 2: 'EmployeeSales'.'JOBCAT' = 3
Functions. A selection of built-in arithmetic, logical, string, date, and time SQL
functions are provided. You can select a function from the list and drag it into
the expression, or you can enter any valid SQL function. See your database
documentation for valid SQL functions.
Use Random Sampling. Selects a random sample of cases from the data source.
For large data sources, you may want to limit the number of cases to a small,
representative sample. This can significantly reduce the time that it takes to run
procedures. Native random sampling, if available for the data source, is faster than
SPSS random sampling, since SPSS random sampling must still read the entire
data source to extract a random sample.
Approximately. Generates a random sample of approximately the specified
percentage of cases. Since this routine makes an independent pseudo-random
decision for each case, the percentage of cases selected can only approximate
the specified percentage. The more cases there are in the data file, the closer the
percentage of cases selected is to the specified percentage.
Exactly. Selects a random sample of the specified number of cases from the
specified total number of cases. If the total number of cases specified exceeds
the total number of cases in the data file, the sample will contain proportionally
fewer cases than the requested number.
Prompt for Value. You can embed a prompt in your query to create a parameter query.
When users run the query, they will be asked to enter information specified here. You
might want to do this if you need to see different views of the same data. For example,
you may want to run the same query to see sales figures for different fiscal quarters.
Place your cursor in any Expression cell, and click Prompt for Value to create a prompt.
34
Chapter 3
Creating a Parameter Query

Use the Prompt for Value dialog box to create a dialog box that solicits information
from users each time someone runs your query. It is useful if you want to query the
same data source using different criteria.
Figure 3-9
Prompt for Value dialog box
To build a prompt, you need to enter a prompt string and a default value. The prompt
string is displayed each time a user runs your query. It should specify the kind of
information to enter, and, if the user is not selecting from a list, it should give hints
about how the input should be formatted. For example, “Enter a Quarter (Q1, Q2,
Q3, ...)”.
Allow user to select value from list. If this is selected, you can limit the user to the
values you place here, which are separated by carriage returns.
Data type. Specify the data type here, either number, string, or date.
35
Data Files
The final result looks like this:

Figure 3-10
User-defined prompt dialog box
Defining Variables (Database Wizard)

Variable names and labels. The complete database field (column) name is used as the
variable label. Unless you modify the variable name, the Database Wizard assigns
variable names to each column from the database in one of two ways:
If the name of the database field forms a valid, unique variable name, it is used
as the variable name.
If the name of the database field does not form a valid, unique variable name,
the software creates a unique name.
Click any cell to edit the variable name.
Converting strings to numeric values. Check the Value Labels box for a string variable if
you want to automatically convert it to a numeric variable. String values are converted
to consecutive integer values based on alphabetic order of the original values. The
original values are retained as value labels for the new variables.
36
Chapter 3
Figure 3-11
Define Variables dialog box
Results
The Results dialog box displays the SQL Select statement for your query.
You can edit the SQL Select statement before you run the query, but if you
click the Back button to make changes in previous steps, the changes to the
Select statement will be lost.
You can save the query for future use with Save query to a file.
Select Paste it into the syntax editor for further modification to paste complete GET
DATA syntax into a syntax window. Copying and pasting the Select statement
from the Results window will not paste the necessary command syntax.
37
Data Files
Cache data locally. A data cache is complete copy of the data file, stored in temporary
disk space. Caching the data file can improve performance.
Figure 3-12
Results dialog box
Text Wizard
The Text Wizard can read text data files formatted in a variety of ways:
Tab-delimited files
Space-delimited files
Comma-delimited files
Fixed-field format files
For delimited files, you can also specify other characters as delimiters between
values, and you can specify multiple delimiters.
38
Chapter 3
To Read Text Data Files

File
Read Text Data
E Select the text file in the Open dialog box.
E Follow the steps in the Text Wizard to define how to read the data file.
Text Wizard Step 1

Figure 3-13
Text Wizard Step 1
The text file is displayed in a preview window. You can apply a predefined format
(previously saved from the Text Wizard) or follow the steps in the Text Wizard
to specify how the data should be read.
39
Data Files
Text Wizard Step 2

Figure 3-14
Text Wizard Step 2
This step provides information about variables. A variable is similar to a field in a

database. For example, each item in a questionnaire is a variable.
How are your variables arranged? To read your data properly, the Text Wizard needs to
know how to determine where the data value for one variable ends and the data value
for the next variable begins. The arrangement of variables defines the method used to
differentiate one variable from the next.
Delimited. Spaces, commas, tabs, or other characters are used to separate
variables. The variables are recorded in the same order for each case but not
necessarily in the same column locations.
Fixed width. Each variable is recorded in the same column location on the same
record (line) for each case in the data file. No delimiter is required between
variables. In fact, in many text data files generated by computer programs, data
40
Chapter 3
values may appear to run together without even spaces separating them. The
column location determines which variable is being read.
Are variable names included at the top of your file? If the first row of the data file
contains descriptive labels for each variable, you can use these labels as variable
names. Values that don't conform to variable naming rules are converted to valid
variable names.
Text Wizard Step 3: Delimited Files

Figure 3-15
Text Wizard Step 3 for delimited files
This step provides information about cases. A case is similar to a record in a database.
For example, each respondent to a questionnaire is a case.
41
Data Files
The first case of data begins on which line number? Indicates the first line of the data
file that contains data values. If the top line(s) of the data file contain descriptive
labels or other text that does not represent data values, this will not be line 1.
How are your cases represented? Controls how the Text Wizard determines where
each case ends and the next one begins.
Each line represents a case. Each line contains only one case. It is fairly common
for each case to be contained on a single line (row), even though this can be a
very long line for data files with a large number of variables. If not all lines
contain the same number of data values, the number of variables for each case is
determined by the line with the greatest number of data values. Cases with fewer
data values are assigned missing values for the additional variables.
A specific number of variables represents a case. The specified number of variables
for each case tells the Text Wizard where to stop reading one case and start
reading the next. Multiple cases can be contained on the same line, and cases can
start in the middle of one line and be continued on the next line. The Text Wizard
determines the end of each case based on the number of values read, regardless
of the number of lines. Each case must contain data values (or missing values
indicated by delimiters) for all variables, or the data file will be read incorrectly.
How many cases do you want to import? You can import all cases in the data file, the
first n cases (n is a number you specify), or a random sample of a specified percentage.
Since the random sampling routine makes an independent pseudo-random decision
for each case, the percentage of cases selected can only approximate the specified
percentage. The more cases there are in the data file, the closer the percentage of
cases selected is to the specified percentage.
42
Chapter 3
Text Wizard Step 3: Fixed-Width Files

Figure 3-16
Text Wizard Step 3 for fixed-width files
This step provides information about cases. A case is similar to a record in a database.
For example, each respondent to questionnaire is a case.
The first case of data begins on which line number? Indicates the first line of the data
file that contains data values. If the top line(s) of the data file contain descriptive
labels or other text that does not represent data values, this will not be line 1.
How many lines represent a case? Controls how the Text Wizard determines where
each case ends and the next one begins. Each variable is defined by its line number
within the case and its column location. You need to specify the number of lines
for each case to read the data correctly.
43
Data Files
How many cases do you want to import? You can import all cases in the data file, the
first n cases (n is a number you specify), or a random sample of a specified percentage.
Since the random sampling routine makes an independent pseudo-random decision
for each case, the percentage of cases selected can only approximate the specified
percentage. The more cases there are in the data file, the closer the percentage of
cases selected is to the specified percentage.
Text Wizard Step 4: Delimited Files

Figure 3-17
Text Wizard Step 4 for delimited files
This step displays the Text Wizard's best guess on how to read the data file and allows
you to modify how the Text Wizard will read variables from the data file.
44
Chapter 3
Which delimiters appear between variables? Indicates the characters or symbols that
separate data values. You can select any combination of spaces, commas, semicolons,
tabs, or other characters. Multiple, consecutive delimiters without intervening data
values are treated as missing values.
What is the text qualifier? Characters used to enclose values that contain delimiter
characters. For example, if a comma is the delimiter, values that contain commas
will be read incorrectly unless there is a text qualifier enclosing the value, preventing
the commas in the value from being interpreted as delimiters between values.
CSV-format data files exported from Excel use a double quotation mark (“) as a text
qualifier. The text qualifier appears at both the beginning and the end of the value,
enclosing the entire value.
Text Wizard Step 4: Fixed-Width Files

Figure 3-18
Text Wizard Step 4 for fixed-width files
45
Data Files
This step displays the Text Wizard's best guess on how to read the data file and allows
you to modify how the Text Wizard will read variables from the data file. Vertical
lines in the preview window indicate where the Text Wizard currently thinks each
variable begins in the file.
Insert, move, and delete variable break lines as necessary to separate variables. If
multiple lines are used for each case, select each line from the drop-down list and
modify the variable break lines as necessary.
Note: For computer-generated data files that produce a continuous stream of data
values with no intervening spaces or other distinguishing characteristics, it may
be difficult to determine where each variable begins. Such data files usually rely
on a data definition file or some other written description that specifies the line
and column location for each variable.
Text Wizard Step 5

Figure 3-19
Text Wizard Step 5
46
Chapter 3
This steps controls the variable name and the data format that the Text Wizard will
use to read each variable and which variables will be included in the final data file.
Variable name. You can overwrite the default variable names with your own
variable names. If you read variable names from the data file, the Text Wizard will
automatically modify variable names that don't conform to variable naming rules.
Select a variable in the preview window and then enter a variable name.
Data format. Select a variable in the preview window and then select a format from the
drop-down list. Shift-click to select multiple contiguous variables or Ctrl-click to
select multiple noncontiguous variables.
Text Wizard Formatting Options
Formatting options for reading variables with the Text Wizard include:
Do not import. Omit the selected variable(s) from the imported data file.
Numeric. Valid values include numbers, a leading plus or minus sign, and a decimal
indicator.
String. Valid values include virtually any keyboard characters and embedded blanks.
For delimited files, you can specify the number of characters in the value, up to a
maximum of 255. By default, the Text Wizard sets the number of characters to the
longest string value encountered for the selected variable(s). For fixed-width files,
the number of characters in string values is defined by the placement of variable
break lines in step 4.
Date/Time. Valid values include dates of the general format dd-mm-yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy,
dd.mm.yyyy, yyyy/mm/dd, hh:mm:ss, and a variety of other date and time formats.
Months can be represented in digits, Roman numerals, or three-letter abbreviations,
or they can be fully spelled out. Select a date format from the list.
Dollar. Valid values are numbers with an optional leading dollar sign and optional
commas as thousands separators.
Comma. Valid values include numbers that use a period as a decimal indicator and
commas as thousands separators.
Dot. Valid values include numbers that use a comma as a decimal indicator and
periods as thousands separators.
47
Data Files
Note: Values that contain invalid characters for the selected format will be treated
as missing. Values that contain any of the specified delimiters will be treated as
multiple values.
Text Wizard Step 6

Figure 3-20
Text Wizard Step 6
This is the final step of the Text Wizard. You can save your specifications in a file for
use when importing similar text data files. You can also paste the syntax generated
by the Text Wizard into a syntax window. You can then customize and/or save the
syntax for use in other sessions or in production jobs.
Cache data locally. A data cache is complete copy of the data file, stored in temporary
disk space. Caching the data file can improve performance.
48
Chapter 3
File Information
A data file contains much more than raw data. It also contains any variable definition
information, including:
Variable names
Variable formats
Descriptive variable and value labels
This information is stored in the dictionary portion of the data file. The Data Editor
provides one way to view the variable definition information. You can also display
complete dictionary information for the working data file or any other data file.
To Obtain Data File Information

E From the menus in the Data Editor window choose:
File
Display Data File Information
E For the currently open data file, choose Working File.
E For other data files, choose: External File, and then select the data file.
The data file information is displayed in the Viewer.
Saving Data Files

Any changes that you make in a data file last only for the duration of the current
session—unless you explicitly save the changes.
To Save Modified Data Files

E Make the Data Editor the active window (click anywhere in the window to make it
active).

File
Save
49
Data Files
The modified data file is saved, overwriting the previous version of the file.
Saving Data Files in Excel Format

You can save your data in one of three Microsoft Excel file formats. The choice of
format depends on the version of Excel that will be used to open the data. The Excel
application cannot open an Excel file from a newer version of the application. For
example, Excel 5.0 cannot open an Excel 2000 document. However, Excel 2000
can easily read an Excel 5.0 document.
There are a few limitations to the Excel file format that don't exist in SPSS. These
limitations include:
Variable information, such as missing values and variable labels, is not included
in exported Excel files.
When exporting to Excel 97 and later, an option is provided to include value
labels instead of values.
Because all Excel files are limited to 256 columns of data, only the first 256
variables are included in the exported file.
Excel 4.0 and Excel 5.0/95 files are limited to 16,384 records, or rows of data.
Excel 97–2000 files allow 65,536 records. If your data exceed these limits, a
warning message is displayed and the data are truncated to the maximum size
allowed by Excel.
Variable Types
The following table shows the variable type matching between the original data in
SPSS and the exported data in Excel.
SPSS Variable Type Excel Data Format
Numeric 0.00; #,##0.00;...
Comma 0.00; #,##0.00;...
Dollar $#,##0_);...
Date d-mmm-yyyy
Time hh:mm:ss
String General
50
Chapter 3
Saving Data Files in SAS Format

Special handling is given to various aspects of your data when saved as a SAS file.
These cases include:
Certain characters that are allowed in SPSS variable names are not valid in SAS,
such as @, #, and $. These illegal characters are replaced with an underscore
when the data are exported.
SPSS variable labels containing more than 40 characters are truncated when
exported to a SAS v6 file.
Where they exist, SPSS variable labels are mapped to the SAS variable labels.
If no variable label exists in the SPSS data, the variable name is mapped to
the SAS variable label.
SAS allows only one value for system-missing, whereas SPSS allows numerous
system-missing values. As a result, all system-missing values in SPSS are
mapped to a single system-missing value in the SAS file.
Save Value Labels
You have the option of saving the values and value labels associated with your data
file to a SAS syntax file. For example, when the value labels for the cars.sav data file
are exported, the generated syntax file contains:
libname library 'd:\spss\' ;
proc format library = library ;
value ORIGIN /* Country of Origin */
1 = 'American'
2 = 'European'
3 = 'Japanese' ;
value CYLINDER /* Number of Cylinders */
3 = '3 Cylinders'
4 = '4 Cylinders'
5 = '5 Cylinders'
6 = '6 Cylinders'
51
Data Files
8 = '8 Cylinders' ;
value FILTER__ /* cylrec = 1 | cylrec = 2 (FILTER) */
0 = 'Not Selected'
1 = 'Selected' ;
proc datasets library = library ;
modify cars;
format ORIGIN ORIGIN.;
format CYLINDER CYLINDER.;
format FILTER__ FILTER__.;
quit;
This feature is not supported for the SAS transport file.
Variable Types
The following table shows the variable type matching between the original data
in SPSS and the exported data in SAS:
SPSS Variable Type SAS Variable Type SAS Data Format
Numeric Numeric 12
Comma Numeric 12
Dot Numeric 12
Scientific Notation Numeric 12
Date Numeric (Date) for example,
MMDDYY10,...
Date (Time) Numeric Time18
Dollar Numeric 12
Custom Currency Numeric 12
String Character $8
52
Chapter 3
Saving Data Files in Other Formats

active).

File
Save As...
E Select a file type from the drop-down list.
E Enter a filename for the new data file.
To write variable names to the first row of a spreadsheet or tab-delimited data file:
E Click Write variable names to spreadsheet in the Save Data As dialog box.
To save value labels instead of data values in Excel 97 format:
E Click Save value labels where defined instead of data values in the Save Data As
dialog box.
To save value labels to a SAS syntax file (active only when a SAS file type is selected):
E Click Save value labels into a .sas file in the Save Data As dialog box.
Saving Data: Data File Types

You can save data in the following formats:
SPSS (*.sav). SPSS format. Data files saved in SPSS format cannot be read by
versions of the software prior to version 7.5. When using data files with variable
names longer than eight bytes in SPSS 10.x or 11.x, unique, eight byte versions of
variable names are used—but the original variable names are preserved for use in
release 12.0 or later. In releases prior to SPSS 10, the original long variable names are
lost if you save the data file.
SPSS 7.0 (*.sav). SPSS 7.0 for Windows format. Data files saved in SPSS 7.0 format
can be read by SPSS 7.0 and earlier versions of SPSS for Windows but do not include
defined multiple response sets or Data Entry for Windows information.
53
Data Files
SPSS/PC+ (*.sys). SPSS/PC+ format. If the data file contains more than 500
variables, only the first 500 will be saved. For variables with more than one defined
user-missing value, additional user-missing values will be recoded into the first
defined user-missing value.
SPSS Portable (*.por). SPSS portable format that can be read by other versions of
SPSS and versions on other operating systems (for example, Macintosh or UNIX).
Variable names are limited to eight bytes and are automatically converted to unique
eight byte names if necessary.
Tab-delimited (*.dat). ASCII text files with values separated by tabs.
Fixed ASCII (*.dat). ASCII text file in fixed format, using the default write formats for
all variables. There are no tabs or spaces between variable fields.
Excel 2.1(*.xls). Microsoft Excel 2.1 spreadsheet file. The maximum number of
variables is 256, and the maximum number of rows is 16,384.
Excel 97 and later (*.xls). Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP spreadsheet file. The maximum
number of variables is 256, and the maximum number of rows is 65,536.
1-2-3 Release 3.0 (*.wk3). Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet file, release 3.0. The maximum
number of variables that you can save is 256.
1-2-3 Release 2.0 (*.wk1). Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet file, release 2.0. The maximum
1-2-3 Release 1.0 (*.wks). Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet file, release 1A. The maximum
SYLK (*.slk). Symbolic link format for Microsoft Excel and Multiplan spreadsheet
files. The maximum number of variables that you can save is 256.
dBASE IV (*.dbf). dBASE IV format.
dBASE III (*.dbf). dBASE III format.
dBASE II (*.dbf). dBASE II format.
SAS v6 for Windows (*.sd2). SAS v6 file format for Windows/OS2.
SAS v6 for UNIX (*.ssd01). SAS v6 file format for UNIX (Sun, HP, IBM).
SAS v6 for Alpha/OSF (*.ssd04). SAS v6 file format for Alpha/OSF (DEC UNIX).
54
Chapter 3
SAS v7+ Windows short extension (*.sd7). SAS version 7-8 for Windows short
filename format.
SAS v7+ Windows long extension (*.sas7bdat). SAS version 7-8 for Windows long
filename format.
SAS v7+ for UNIX (*.ssd01). SAS v8 for UNIX.
SAS Transport (*.xpt). SAS transport file.
Saving Subsets of Variables

Figure 3-21
Save Data As Variables dialog box
For data saved as an SPSS data file, the Save Data As Variables dialog box allows you
to select the variables that you want to be saved in the new data file. By default, all
variables will be saved. Deselect the variables that you don't want to save, or click
Drop All and then select the variables that you want to save.
To Save a Subset of Variables

active).
55
Data Files

File
Save As...
E Select SPSS (*.sav) from the list of file types.
E Click Variables.
E Select the variables that you want to save.
Saving File Options

For spreadsheet and tab-delimited files, you can write variable names to the first
row of the file.
Protecting Original Data

To prevent the accidental modification/deletion of your original data, you can mark
the file as read-only.
E From the Data Editor menus choose:

File
Mark File Read Only
If you make subsequent modifications to the data and then try to save the data file, you
can save the data only with a different filename; so the original data are not affected.
You can change the file permissions back to read/write by selecting Mark File
Read Write from the File menu.
Virtual Active File

The virtual active file enables you to work with large data files without requiring
equally large (or larger) amounts of temporary disk space. For most analysis and
charting procedures, the original data source is reread each time you run a different
procedure. Procedures that modify the data require a certain amount of temporary
disk space to keep track of the changes, and some actions always require enough disk
space for at least one entire copy of the data file.
56
Chapter 3
Figure 3-22
Temporary disk space requirements
C O M P U T E v6 = …
R E C O D E v4… S O RT C A S E S B Y …
A ction G E T F ILE = 'v1-5 .sav'. R E G R E S S IO N … or
F R E Q U E N C IE S … /S AV E Z P R E D. C AC H E
v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 zpre v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 zp re
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 1
Virtual 21 22 23 24 25 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
A ctive 31 32 33 34 35 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 31 32 33 34 35 36 3
File 41 42 43 44 45 41 42 43 44 45 46 4 41 42 43 44 45 46 4
51 52 53 54 55 51 52 53 54 55 56 5 51 52 53 54 55 56 5
61 62 63 64 65 61 62 63 64 65 66 6 61 62 63 64 65 66 6
D ata v4 v6 zpre v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 zp re
Stored 14 16 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 1
in 24 26 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
Tem porary N one 34 36 3 31 32 33 34 35 36 3
D isk 44 46 4 41 42 43 44 45 46 4
Space 54 56 5 51 52 53 54 55 56 5
64 66 6 61 62 63 64 65 66 6
Actions that don't require any temporary disk space include:

Reading SPSS data files
Merging two or more SPSS data files
Reading database tables with the Database Wizard
Merging an SPSS data file with a database table
Running procedures that read data (for example, Frequencies, Crosstabs, Explore)
Actions that create one or more columns of data in temporary disk space include:
Computing new variables
Recoding existing variables
Running procedures that create or modify variables (for example, saving
predicted values in Linear Regression)
Actions that create an entire copy of the data file in temporary disk space include:
Reading Excel files
Running procedures that sort data (for example, Sort Cases, Split File)
Reading data with GET TRANSLATE or DATA LIST commands
57
Data Files
Using the Cache Data facility or the CACHE command

Launching other applications from SPSS that read the data file (for example,
AnswerTree, DecisionTime)
Note: The GET DATA command provides functionality comparable to DATA LIST,
without creating an entire copy of the data file in temporary disk space. The SPLIT
FILE command in command syntax does not sort the data file and therefore does not
create a copy of the data file. This command, however, requires sorted data for
proper operation, and the dialog box interface for this procedure will automatically
sort the data file, resulting in a complete copy of the data file. (Command syntax is
not available with the Student Version.)
Actions that create an entire copy of the data file by default:

Reading databases with the Database Wizard
Reading text files with the Text Wizard
The Database Wizard and the Text Wizard provide an optional setting to automatically
cache the data. By default, this option is selected. You can turn it off by deselecting
Cache data locally.
Creating a Data Cache

Although the virtual active file can vastly reduce the amount of temporary disk space
required, the absence of a temporary copy of the “active” file means that the original
data source has to be reread for each procedure. For large data files read from an
external source, creating a temporary copy of the data may improve performance. For
example, for data tables read from a database source, the SQL query that reads the
information from the database must be reexecuted for any command or procedure that
needs to read the data. Since virtually all statistical analysis procedures and charting
procedures need to read the data, the SQL query is reexecuted for each procedure
you run, which can result in a significant increase in processing time if you run a
large number of procedures.
If you have sufficient disk space on the computer performing the analysis (either
your local computer or a remote server), you can eliminate multiple SQL queries and
improve processing time by creating a data cache of the active file. The data cache is
a temporary copy of the complete data.
58
Chapter 3
Note: By default, the Database Wizard automatically creates a data cache, but if you
use the GET FILE command in command syntax to read a database, a data cache is not
automatically created. (Command syntax is not available with the Student Version.)
To Create a Data Cache

File
Cache Data...
E Click OK or Cache Now.
OK creates a data cache the next time the program reads the data (for example, the
next time you run a statistical procedure), which is usually what you want since it
doesn't require an extra data pass. Cache Now creates a data cache immediately, which
shouldn't be necessary under most circumstances. Cache Now is useful primarily
for two reasons:
A data source is “locked” and can't be updated by anyone until you end your
session, open a different data source, or cache the data.
For large data sources, scrolling through the contents of the Data view in the Data
Editor will be much faster if you cache the data.
To Cache Data Automatically
You can use the SET command to automatically create a data cache after a specified
number of changes in the active data file. By default, the active data file is
automatically cached after 20 changes in the active data file.

File
New
Syntax
E In the syntax window type SET CACHE n. (where n represents the number of changes
in the active data file before the data file is cached).
59
Data Files
E From the menus in the syntax window choose:

Run
All
Note: The cache setting is not persistent across sessions. Each time you start a new
session, the value is reset to the default of 20.
Chapter
4
Distributed Analysis Mode
Distributed analysis mode allows you to use a computer other than your local (or
desktop) computer for memory-intensive work. Since remote servers used for
distributed analysis are typically more powerful and faster than your local computer,
appropriate use of distributed analysis mode can significantly reduce computer
processing time. Distributed analysis with a remote server can be useful if your
work involves:
Large data files, particularly data read from database sources.
Memory-intensive tasks. Any task that takes a long time in local analysis mode
might be a good candidate for distributed analysis.
Distributed analysis affects only data-related tasks, such as reading data, transforming
data, computing new variables, and calculating statistics. It has no effect on tasks
related to editing output, such as manipulating pivot tables or modifying charts.
Note: Distributed analysis is available only if you have both a local version and access
to a licensed server version of the software installed on a remote server.
Distributed versus Local Analysis

Following are some guidelines for choosing distributed or local analysis mode:
Database access. Jobs that perform database queries may run faster in distributed
mode if the server has superior access to the database or if the server is running on
the same machine as the database engine. If the necessary database access software
is available only on the server, or if your network administrator does not permit
you to download large data tables, you will be able to access the database only in
distributed mode.
61
62
Chapter 4
Ratio of computation to output. Commands that perform a lot of computation and

produce small output results (for example, few and small pivot tables, brief text
results, or few and simple charts) have the most to gain from running in distributed
mode. The degree of improvement depends largely on the computing power of
the remote server.
Small jobs. Jobs that run quickly in local mode will almost always run slower in
distributed mode because of inherent client/server overhead.
Charts. Case-oriented charts, such as scatterplots, regression residual plots, and
sequence charts, require raw data on your local computer. For large data files or
database tables, this can result in slower performance in distributed mode because the
data have to be sent from the remote server to your local computer. Other charts are
based on summarized or aggregated data and should perform adequately because the
aggregation is performed on the server.
Interactive graphics. Since it is possible to save raw data with interactive graphics
(an optional setting), this can result in large amounts of data being transferred from
the remote server to your local computer, significantly increasing the time it takes to
save your results.
Pivot tables. Large pivot tables may take longer to create in distributed mode. This is
particularly true for the OLAP Cubes procedure and tables that contain individual
case data, such as those available in the Summarize procedure.
Text output. The more text that is produced, the slower it will be in distributed mode
because this text is produced on the remote server and copied to your local computer
for display. Text results have low overhead, however, and tend to transmit quickly.
Server Login
The Server Login dialog box allows you to select the computer that processes
commands and runs procedures. This can be either your local computer or a remote
server.
63
Figure 4-1
Server Login dialog box
You can add, modify, or delete remote servers in the list. Remote servers usually
require a user ID and a password, and a domain name may also be necessary. Contact
your system administrator for information about available servers, a user ID and
password, domain names, and other connection information.
You can select a default server and save the user ID, domain name, and password
associated with any server. You are automatically connected to the default server
when you start a new session.
Adding and Editing Server Login Settings
Use the Server Login Settings dialog box to add or edit connection information for
remote servers for use in distributed analysis mode.
64
Chapter 4
Figure 4-2
Server Login Settings dialog box
Contact your system administrator for a list of available servers, port numbers for
the servers, and additional connection information. Do not use the Secure Sockets
Layer unless instructed to do so by your administrator.
Name. A server “name” can be an alphanumeric name assigned to a computer (for
example, hqdev001) or a unique IP address assigned to a computer (for example,
202.123.456.78).
Port Number. The port number is the port that the server software uses for
communications.
Description. Enter an optional description to display in the servers list.
Connect with Secure Sockets Layer. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encrypts requests
for distributed analysis when they are sent to the remote SPSS server. Before you
use SSL, check with your administrator. SSL must be configured on your desktop
computer and the server for this option to be enabled.
65
To Select, Switch, or Add Servers

File
Switch Server...
To select a default server:
E In the server list, select the box next to the server that you want to use.
E Enter the user ID, domain name, and password provided by your administrator.
Note: You are automatically connected to the default server when you start a new
session.
To switch to another server:
E Select the server from the list.
E Enter your user ID, domain name, and password (if necessary).
Note: When you switch servers during a session, all open windows are closed. You
will be prompted to save changes before the windows are closed.
To add a server:
E Get the server connection information from your administrator.
E Click Add to open the Server Login Settings dialog box.
E Enter the connection information and optional settings and click OK.
To edit a server:
E Get the revised connection information from your administrator.
E Click Edit to open the Server Login Settings dialog box.
E Enter the changes and click OK.

66
Chapter 4
Opening Data Files from a Remote Server

Figure 4-3
Open Remote File dialog box
In distributed analysis mode, the Open Remote File dialog box replaces the standard
Open File dialog box.
The list of available files, folders, and drives is dependent on what is available
on or from the remote server. The current server name is indicated at the top of
the dialog box.
You will not have access to files on your local computer in distributed analysis
mode unless you specify the drive as a shared device or the folders containing
your data files as shared folders.
If the server is running a different operating system (for example, you are running
Windows and the server is running UNIX), you probably won't have access to
local data files in distributed analysis mode even if they are in shared folders.
Only one data file can be open at a time. The current data file is automatically closed
when a new data file is opened. If you want to have multiple data files open at the
same time, you can start multiple sessions.
To Open Data Files from a Remote Server
E If you aren't already connected to the remote server, log in to the remote server.
67
E Depending on the type of data file that you want to open, from the menus choose:
File
Open
Data...
or
File
Open Database
or
File
Read Text Data...
Saving Data Files from a Remote Server

Figure 4-4
Save Remote File dialog box
In distributed analysis mode, the Save Remote File dialog box replaces the standard
Save File dialog box.
The list of available folders and drives is dependent on what is available on or from
the remote server. The current server name is indicated at the top of the dialog box.
You will not have access to folders on your local computer unless you specify the
drive as a shared device and the folders as shared folders. If the server is running a
different operating system (for example, you are running Windows and the server is
running UNIX), you probably will not have access to local data files in distributed
68
Chapter 4
analysis mode even if they are in shared folders. Permissions for shared folders must
include the ability to write to the folder if you want to save data files in a local folder.
To Save Data Files from a Remote Server
E Make the Data Editor the active window.

File
Save (or Save As...)
Data File Access in Local and Distributed Analysis Mode

The view of data files, folders (directories), and drives for both your local computer
and the network is based on the computer you are currently using to process
commands and run procedures—which is not necessarily the computer in front of you.
Local analysis mode. When you use your local computer as your “server,” the view of
data files, folders, and drives that you see in the file access dialog box (for opening
data files) is similar to what you see in other applications or in the Windows Explorer.
You can see all of the data files and folders on your computer and any files and
folders on mounted network drives that you normally see.
Distributed analysis mode. When you use another computer as a “remote server” to
run commands and procedures, the view of data files, folders, and drives represents
the view from the perspective of the remote server computer. Although you may
see familiar folder names such as Program Files and drives such as C, these are
not the folders and drives on your computer; they are the folders and drives on the
remote server.
69
Figure 4-5
Local and remote views
Local View
Remote View
In distributed analysis mode, you will not have access to data files on your local
computer unless you specify the drive as a shared device or the folders containing
your data files as shared folders. If the server is running a different operating system
(for example, if you are running Windows and the server is running UNIX), you
probably won't have access to local data files in distributed analysis mode even
if they are in shared folders.
Distributed analysis mode is not the same as accessing data files that reside on
another computer on your network. You can access data files on other network
devices in local analysis mode or in distributed analysis mode. In local mode, you
access other devices from your local computer. In distributed mode, you access other
network devices from the remote server.
70
Chapter 4
If you're not sure if you're using local analysis mode or distributed analysis mode,
look at the title bar in the dialog box for accessing data files. If the title of the
dialog box contains the word Remote (as in Open Remote File), or if the text Remote
Server: [server name] appears at the top of the dialog box, you're using distributed
analysis mode.
Note: This affects only dialog boxes for accessing data files (for example, Open Data,
Save Data, Open Database, and Apply Data Dictionary). For all other file types (for
example, Viewer files, syntax files, and script files), the local view is always used.
To Set Sharing Permissions for a Drive or Folder
E In My Computer, click the folder (directory) or drive that you want to share.
E On the File menu, click Properties.
E Click the Sharing tab, and then click Shared As.
For more information about sharing drives and folders, see the Help for your
operating system.
Availability of Procedures in Distributed Analysis Mode

In distributed analysis mode, only procedures installed on both your local version
and the version on the remote server are available. You cannot use procedures
installed on the server that are not also installed on your local version, and you
cannot use procedures installed on your local version that are not also installed on
the remote server.
While the latter situation may be unlikely, it is possible that you may have optional
components installed locally that are not available on the remote server. If this is the
case, switching from your local computer to a remote server will result in the removal
of the affected procedures from the menus, and the corresponding command syntax
will result in errors. Switching back to local mode will restore all affected procedures.
71
Using UNC Path Specifications

With the Windows NT server version of SPSS, relative path specifications for data
files are relative to the current server in distributed analysis mode, not relative to
your local computer. In practical terms, this means that a path specification such as
c:\mydocs\mydata.sav does not point to a directory and file on your C drive; it points
to a directory and file on the remote server's hard drive. If the directory and/or file do
not exist on the remote server, this will result in an error in command syntax, as in:
GET FILE='c:\mydocs\mydata.sav'.
If you are using the Windows NT server version of SPSS, you can use universal
naming convention (UNC) specifications when accessing data files with command
syntax. The general form of a UNC specification is:
\\servername\sharename\path\filename
Servername is the name of the computer that contains the data file.
Sharename is the folder (directory) on that computer that is designated as a
shared folder.
Path is any additional folder (subdirectory) path below the shared folder.
Filename is the name of the data file.
For example:
GET FILE='\\hqdev001\public\july\sales.sav'.
If the computer does not have a name assigned to it, you can use its IP address, as in:
GET FILE='\\204.125.125.53\public\july\sales.sav'.
Even with UNC path specifications, you can access data files only from devices and
folders designated as shared. When you use distributed analysis mode, this includes
data files on your local computer.
UNIX servers. On UNIX platforms, there is no equivalent of the UNC path, and all
directory paths must be absolute paths that start at the root of the server; relative paths
are not allowed. For example, if the data file is located in /bin/spss/data and the
current directory is also /bin/spss/data, GET FILE='sales.sav' is not valid; you must
specify the entire path, as in:
GET FILE='/bin/data/spss/sales.sav'.
Chapter
5
Data Editor
The Data Editor provides a convenient, spreadsheet-like method for creating and
editing data files. The Data Editor window opens automatically when you start a
session.
The Data Editor provides two views of your data:

Data view. Displays the actual data values or defined value labels.
Variable view. Displays variable definition information, including defined variable
and value labels, data type (for example, string, date, and numeric), measurement
level (nominal, ordinal, or scale), and user-defined missing values.
In both views, you can add, change, and delete information contained in the data file.
Data View
Figure 5-1
Data view
73
74
Chapter 5
Many of the features of the Data view are similar to those found in spreadsheet
applications. There are, however, several important distinctions:
Rows are cases. Each row represents a case or an observation. For example, each
individual respondent to a questionnaire is a case.
Columns are variables. Each column represents a variable or characteristic being
measured. For example, each item on a questionnaire is a variable.
Cells contain values. Each cell contains a single value of a variable for a case. The
cell is the intersection of the case and the variable. Cells contain only data values.
Unlike spreadsheet programs, cells in the Data Editor cannot contain formulas.
The data file is rectangular. The dimensions of the data file are determined by
the number of cases and variables. You can enter data in any cell. If you enter
data in a cell outside the boundaries of the defined data file, the data rectangle
is extended to include any rows and/or columns between that cell and the file
boundaries. There are no “empty” cells within the boundaries of the data file. For
numeric variables, blank cells are converted to the system-missing value. For
string variables, a blank is considered a valid value.
Variable View
Figure 5-2
Variable view
75
Data Editor
The Variable view contains descriptions of the attributes of each variable in the
data file. In the Variable view:
Rows are variables.
Columns are variable attributes.
You can add or delete variables and modify attributes of variables, including:
Variable name
Data type
Number of digits or characters
Number of decimal places
Descriptive variable and value labels
User-defined missing values
Column width
Measurement level
All of these attributes are saved when you save the data file.
In addition to defining variable properties in the Variable view, there are two other
methods for defining variable properties:
The Copy Data Properties wizard provides the ability to use an external SPSS
data file as a template for defining file and variable properties in the working data
file. You can also use variables in the working data file as templates for other
variables in the working data file. Copy Data Properties is available on the
Data menu in the Data Editor window.
Define Variable Properties (also available on the Data menu in the Data Editor
window) scans your data and lists all unique data values for any selected
variables, identifies unlabeled values, and provides an auto-label feature. This is
particularly useful for categorical variables that use numeric codes to represent
categories—for example, 0 = Male, 1 = Female.
To Display or Define Variable Attributes

76
Chapter 5
E Double-click a variable name at the top of the column in the Data view, or click the
Variable View tab.
E To define new variables, enter a variable name in any blank row.
E Select the attribute(s) that you want to define or modify.
Variable Names
The following rules apply to variable names:
The name must begin with a letter. The remaining characters can be any letter,
any digit, a period, or the symbols @, #, _, or $.
Variable names cannot end with a period.
Variable names that end with an underscore should be avoided (to avoid conflict
with variables automatically created by some procedures).
The length of the name cannot exceed 64 bytes. Sixty-four bytes typically means
64 characters in single-byte languages (for example, English, French, German,
Spanish, Italian, Hebrew, Russian, Greek, Arabic, Thai) and 32 characters in
double-byte languages (for example, Japanese, Chinese, Korean).
Blanks and special characters (for example, !, ?, ', and *) cannot be used.
Each variable name must be unique; duplication is not allowed.
Reserved keywords cannot be used as variable names. Reserved keywords are:
ALL, AND, BY, EQ, GE, GT, LE, LT, NE, NOT, OR, TO, WITH.
Variable names can be defined with any mixture of upper and lower case
characters, and case is preserved for display purposes.
When long variable names need to wrap on to multiple lines in output, SPSS
attempts to break lines at underscores, periods, and a change from lower to
upper case.
77
Data Editor
Variable Measurement Level

You can specify the level of measurement as scale (numeric data on an interval
or ratio scale), ordinal, or nominal. Nominal and ordinal data can be either string
(alphanumeric) or numeric. Measurement specification is relevant only for:
Custom Tables procedure and chart procedures that identify variables as scale or
categorical. Nominal and ordinal are both treated as categorical. (Custom Tables
is available only in the Tables add-on component.)
SPSS-format data files used with AnswerTree.
You can select one of three measurement levels:

Scale. Data values are numeric values on an interval or ratio scale—for example, age
or income. Scale variables must be numeric.
Ordinal. Data values represent categories with some intrinsic order (for example,
low, medium, high; strongly agree, agree, disagree, strongly disagree). Ordinal
variables can be either string (alphanumeric) or numeric values that represent distinct
categories (for example, 1 = low, 2 = medium, 3 = high).
Note: For ordinal string variables, the alphabetic order of string values is assumed
to reflect the true order of the categories. For example, for a string variable with
the values of low, medium, high, the order of the categories is interpreted as high,
low, medium—which is not the correct order. In general, it is more reliable to use
numeric codes to represent ordinal data.
Nominal. Data values represent categories with no intrinsic order—for example, job
category or company division. Nominal variables can be either string (alphanumeric)
or numeric values that represent distinct categories—for example, 1 = Male, 2 =
Female.
78
Chapter 5
Figure 5-3
Scale and categorical variables in a chart procedure
For SPSS-format data files created in earlier versions of SPSS products, the following
rules apply:
String (alphanumeric) variables are set to nominal.
String and numeric variables with defined value labels are set to ordinal.
Numeric variables without defined value labels but less than a specified number
of unique values are set to ordinal.
Numeric variables without defined value labels and more than a specified number
of unique values are set to scale.
The default number of unique values is 24. To change the specified value, change
the interactive chart options (from the Edit menu, choose Options and click the
Interactive tab).
Variable Type
Variable Type specifies the data type for each variable. By default, all new variables
are assumed to be numeric. You can use Variable Type to change the data type. The
contents of the Variable Type dialog box depend on the data type selected. For some
79
Data Editor
data types, there are text boxes for width and number of decimals; for others, you can
simply select a format from a scrollable list of examples.
Figure 5-4
Variable Type dialog box
The available data types are as follows:

Numeric. A variable whose values are numbers. Values are displayed in standard
numeric format. The Data Editor accepts numeric values in standard format or in
scientific notation.
Comma. A numeric variable whose values are displayed with commas delimiting every
three places, and with the period as a decimal delimiter. The Data Editor accepts
numeric values for comma variables with or without commas; or in scientific notation.
Dot. A numeric variable whose values are displayed with periods delimiting every
three places, and with the comma as a decimal delimiter. The Data Editor accepts
numeric values for dot variables with or without dots; or in scientific notation.
Scientific notation. A numeric variable whose values are displayed with an imbedded
E and a signed power-of-ten exponent. The Data Editor accepts numeric values for
such variables with or without an exponent. The exponent can be preceded either
by E or D with an optional sign, or by the sign alone—for example, 123, 1.23E2,
1.23D2, 1.23E+2, and even 1.23+2.
Date. A numeric variable whose values are displayed in one of several calendar-date
or clock-time formats. Select a format from the list. You can enter dates with slashes,
hyphens, periods, commas, or blank spaces as delimiters. The century range for
two-digit year values is determined by your Options settings (from the Edit menu,
choose Options and click the Data tab).
80
Chapter 5
Custom currency. A numeric variable whose values are displayed in one of the
custom currency formats that you have defined in the Currency tab of the Options
dialog box. Defined custom currency characters cannot be used in data entry but are
displayed in the Data Editor.
String. Values of a string variable are not numeric, and hence not used in calculations.
They can contain any characters up to the defined length. Uppercase and lowercase
letters are considered distinct. Also known as an alphanumeric variable.
To Define Variable Type
E Click the button in the Type cell for the variable that you want to define.
E Select the data type in the Variable Type dialog box.
Input versus Display Formats
Depending on the format, the display of values in the Data view may differ from the
actual value as entered and stored internally. Following are some general guidelines:
For numeric, comma, and dot formats, you can enter values with any number of
decimal positions (up to 16), and the entire value is stored internally. The Data
view displays only the defined number of decimal places, and it rounds values
with more decimals. However, the complete value is used in all computations.
For string variables, all values are right-padded to the maximum width. For a
string variable with a width of 4, a value of 'No' is stored internally as 'No '
and is not equivalent to ' No '.
For date formats, you can use slashes, dashes, spaces, commas, or periods as
delimiters between day, month, and year values, and you can enter numbers,
three-letter abbreviations, or complete names for month values. Dates of
the general format dd-mmm-yy are displayed with dashes as delimiters and
three-letter abbreviations for the month. Dates of the general format dd/mm/yy
and mm/dd/yy are displayed with slashes for delimiters and numbers for the
month. Internally, dates are stored as the number of seconds from October 14,
81
Data Editor
1582. The century range for dates with two-digit years is determined by your
Options settings (from the Edit menu, choose Options and click the Data tab).
For time formats, you can use colons, periods, or spaces as delimiters between
hours, minutes, and seconds. Times are displayed with colons as delimiters.
Internally, times are stored as the number of seconds from October 14, 1582.
Variable Labels
You can assign descriptive variable labels up to 256 characters long (128 characters
in double-byte languages), and variable labels can contain spaces and reserved
characters not allowed in variable names.
To Specify Variable Labels
E Double-click a variable name at the top of the column in the Data view or click the
Variable View tab.
E Enter the descriptive variable label in the Label cell for the variable.
Value Labels
You can assign descriptive value labels for each value of a variable. This is
particularly useful if your data file uses numeric codes to represent non-numeric
categories (for example, codes of 1 and 2 for male and female).
Value labels can be up to 60 characters long.
Value labels are not available for long string variables (string variables longer
than 8 characters).
82
Chapter 5
Figure 5-5
Value Labels dialog box
To Specify Value Labels
E Click the button in the Values cell for the variable that you want to define.
E For each value, enter the value and a label.
E Click Add to enter the value label.
Inserting Line Breaks in Labels

Variable and value labels automatically wrap to multiple lines in pivot tables and
charts if the cell or area isn't wide enough to display the entire label on one line, and
you can edit results to insert manual line breaks if you want the label to wrap at a
different point. You can also create variable and value labels that will always wrap at
specified points and display on multiple lines:
E For variable labels, select the Label cell for the variable in the Variable view in the
Data Editor.
E For value labels, select the Values cell for the variable in the Variable view in the Data
Editor, click the button that appears in the cell, and then select the label you want to
modify in the Value Labels dialog box.
E At the place in the label where you want the label to wrap, type \n.
83
Data Editor
The “\n” does is not displayed in pivot tables or charts; it is intrepreted as a line
break character.
Missing Values
Missing Values defines specified data values as user-missing. It is often useful
to know why information is missing. For example, you might want to distinguish
between data missing because a respondent refused to answer and data missing
because the question didn't apply to that respondent. Data values specified as
user-missing are flagged for special treatment and are excluded from most
calculations.
Figure 5-6
Missing Values dialog box
You can enter up to three discrete (individual) missing values, a range of missing
values, or a range plus one discrete value.
Ranges can be specified only for numeric variables.
You cannot define missing values for long string variables (string variables longer
than eight characters).
Missing values for string variables. All string values, including null or blank values,
are considered valid values unless you explicitly define them as missing. To define
null or blank values as missing for a string variable, enter a single space in one
of the fields for Discrete missing values.
84
Chapter 5
To Define Missing Values
E Click the button in the Missing cell for the variable that you want to define.
E Enter the values or range of values that represent missing data.
All string values, including null or blank values, are considered valid values unless
you explicitly define them as missing. To define null or blank values as missing for a
string variable, enter a single space in one of the fields for Discrete missing values.
Column Width
You can specify a number of characters for the column width. Column widths can
also be changed in the Data view by clicking and dragging the column borders.
Column formats affect only the display of values in the Data Editor. Changing
the column width does not change the defined width of a variable. If the defined
and actual width of a value are wider than the column, asterisks (*) are displayed
in the Data view.
Variable Alignment
Alignment controls the display of data values and/or value labels in the Data view.
The default alignment is right for numeric variables and left for string variables. This
setting affects only the display in the Data view.
Applying Variable Definition Attributes to Multiple Variables

Once you have defined variable definition attributes for a variable, you can copy one
or more attributes and apply them to one or more variables.
Basic copy and paste operations are used to apply variable definition attributes.
You can:
Copy a single attribute (for example, value labels) and paste it to the same
attribute cell(s) for one or more variables.
85
Data Editor
Copy all the attributes from one variable and paste them to one or more other
variables.
Create multiple new variables with all the attributes of a copied variable.
Applying Variable Definition Attributes to Other Variables
To apply individual attributes from a defined variable:
E In the Variable view, select the attribute cell that you want to apply to other variables.

Edit
Copy
E Select the attribute cell(s) to which you want to apply the attribute. You can select
multiple target variables.

Edit
Paste
If you paste the attribute to blank rows, new variables are created with default
attributes for all but the selected attribute.
To apply all attributes from a defined variable:
E In the Variable view, select the row number for the variable with the attributes that
you want to use. The entire row is highlighted.

Edit
Copy
E Select the row number(s) for the variable(s) to which you want to apply the attributes.
You can select multiple target variables.

Edit
Paste
86
Chapter 5
Generating Multiple New Variables with the Same Attributes
E In the Variable view, click the row number for the variable with the attributes that you
want to use for the new variable. The entire row is highlighted.

Edit
Copy
E Click the empty row number beneath the last defined variable in the data file.

Edit
Paste Variables...
E Enter the number of variables that you want to create.
E Enter a prefix and starting number for the new variables.
The new variable names will consist of the specified prefix plus a sequential number
starting with the specified number.
Entering Data
You can enter data directly in the Data Editor in the Data view. You can enter data
in any order. You can enter data by case or by variable, for selected areas or for
individual cells.
The active cell is highlighted.
The variable name and row number of the active cell are displayed in the top
left corner of the Data Editor.
When you select a cell and enter a data value, the value is displayed in the cell
editor at the top of the Data Editor.
Data values are not recorded until you press Enter or select another cell.
To enter anything other than simple numeric data, you must define the variable
type first.
If you enter a value in an empty column, the Data Editor automatically creates a new
variable and assigns a variable name.
87
Data Editor
Figure 5-7
Working data file in the Data view
To Enter Numeric Data

E Select a cell in the Data view.
E Enter the data value. The value is displayed in the cell editor at the top of the Data
Editor.
E Press Enter or select another cell to record the value.
To Enter Non-Numeric Data

E Double-click a variable name at the top of the column in the Data view or click the
Variable View tab.
E Click the button in the Type cell for the variable.
E Select the data type in the Variable Type dialog box.
E Click OK.
88
Chapter 5
E Double-click the row number or click the Data View tab.
E Enter the data in the column for the newly defined variable.
To Use Value Labels for Data Entry

E If value labels aren't currently displayed in the Data view, from the menus choose:
View
Value Labels
E Click on the cell in which you want to enter the value.
E Select a value label from the drop-down list.
The value is entered and the value label is displayed in the cell.
Note: This works only if you have defined value labels for the variable.
Data Value Restrictions in the Data Editor

The defined variable type and width determine the type of value that can be entered in
the cell in the Data view.
If you type a character not allowed by the defined variable type, the Data Editor
beeps and does not enter the character.
For string variables, characters beyond the defined width are not allowed.
For numeric variables, integer values that exceed the defined width can be
entered, but the Data Editor displays either scientific notation or asterisks in the
cell to indicate that the value is wider than the defined width. To display the value
in the cell, change the defined width of the variable. (Note: Changing the column
width does not affect the variable width.)
Editing Data
With the Data Editor, you can modify data values in the Data view in many ways.
You can:
Change data values.
89
Data Editor
Cut, copy, and paste data values.

Add and delete cases.
Add and delete variables.
Change the order of variables.
Replacing or Modifying Data Values

To delete the old value and enter a new value:
E In the Data view, double-click the cell. The cell value is displayed in the cell editor.
E Edit the value directly in the cell or in the cell editor.
E Press Enter (or move to another cell) to record the new value.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Data Values

You can cut, copy, and paste individual cell values or groups of values in the Data
Editor. You can:
Move or copy a single cell value to another cell.
Move or copy a single cell value to a group of cells.
Move or copy the values for a single case (row) to multiple cases.
Move or copy the values for a single variable (column) to multiple variables.
Move or copy a group of cell values to another group of cells.
Data Conversion for Pasted Values in the Data Editor
If the defined variable types of the source and target cells are not the same, the Data
Editor attempts to convert the value. If no conversion is possible, the system-missing
value is inserted in the target cell.
Numeric or Date into String. Numeric (for example, numeric, dollar, dot, or comma)
and date formats are converted to strings if they are pasted into a string variable cell.
The string value is the numeric value as displayed in the cell. For example, for
90
Chapter 5
a dollar format variable, the displayed dollar sign becomes part of the string value.
Values that exceed the defined string variable width are truncated.
String into Numeric or Date. String values that contain acceptable characters for the
numeric or date format of the target cell are converted to the equivalent numeric
or date value. For example, a string value of 25/12/91 is converted to a valid date
if the format type of the target cell is one of the day-month-year formats, but it
is converted to system-missing if the format type of the target cell is one of the
month-day-year formats.
Date into Numeric. Date and time values are converted to a number of seconds if
the target cell is one of the numeric formats (for example, numeric, dollar, dot, or
comma). Since dates are stored internally as the number of seconds since October 14,
1582, converting dates to numeric values can yield some extremely large numbers.
For example, the date 10/29/91 is converted to a numeric value of 12,908,073,600.
Numeric into Date or Time. Numeric values are converted to dates or times if the value
represents a number of seconds that can produce a valid date or time. For dates,
numeric values less than 86,400 are converted to the system-missing value.
Inserting New Cases

Entering data in a cell on a blank row automatically creates a new case. The Data
Editor inserts the system-missing value for all the other variables for that case. If
there are any blank rows between the new case and the existing cases, the blank rows
also become new cases with the system-missing value for all variables.
You can also insert new cases between existing cases.
To Insert New Cases between Existing Cases
E In the Data view, select any cell in the case (row) below the position where you want
to insert the new case.

Data
Insert Cases
A new row is inserted for the case and all variables receive the system-missing value.
91
Data Editor
Inserting New Variables

Entering data in an empty column in the Data view or in an empty row in the Variable
view automatically creates a new variable with a default variable name (the prefix
var and a sequential number) and a default data format type (numeric). The Data
Editor inserts the system-missing value for all cases for the new variable. If there are
any empty columns in the Data view or empty rows in the Variable view between
the new variable and the existing variables, these also become new variables with
the system-missing value for all cases.
You can also insert new variables between existing variables.
To Insert New Variables between Existing Variables
E Select any cell in the variable to the right of (Data view) or below (Variable view)
the position where you want to insert the new variable.

Data
Insert Variable
A new variable is inserted with the system-missing value for all cases.
To Move Variables
E Click the variable name in the Data view or the row number for the variable in the
Variable view to select the variable.
E Drag and drop the variable to the new location.
E If you want to place the variable between two existing variables, in the Data view
drop the variable on the variable column to the right of where you want to place the
variable. In the Variable view, drop it on the variable row below where you want to
place the variable.
92
Chapter 5
To Change Data Type

You can change the data type for a variable at any time using the Variable Type dialog
box in the Variable view, and the Data Editor will attempt to convert existing values to
the new type. If no conversion is possible, the system-missing value is assigned. The
conversion rules are the same as those for pasting data values to a variable with a
different format type. If the change in data format may result in the loss of missing
value specifications or value labels, the Data Editor displays an alert box and asks if
you want to proceed with the change or cancel it.
Go to Case
Go to Case goes to the specified case (row) number in the Data Editor.
Figure 5-8
Go to Case dialog box
To Find a Case in the Data Editor


Data
Go to Case...
E Enter the Data Editor row number for the case.

93
Data Editor
Case Selection Status in the Data Editor

If you have selected a subset of cases but have not discarded unselected cases,
unselected cases are marked in the Data Editor with a vertical line through the row
number.
Figure 5-9
Filtered cases in the Data Editor
Filtered
(excluded)
cases
Data Editor Display Options

The View menu provides several display options for the Data Editor:
Fonts. Controls the font characteristics of the data display.
Grid Lines. Toggles the display of grid lines.
Value Labels. Toggles between the display of actual data values and user-defined
descriptive value labels. This is only available in the Data view.
Data Editor Printing

A data file is printed as it appears on screen.
The information in the currently displayed view is printed. In the Data view, the
data are printed. In the Variable view, data definition information is printed.
94
Chapter 5
Grid lines are printed if they are currently displayed in the selected view.
Value labels are printed in the Data view if they are currently displayed.
Otherwise, the actual data values are printed.
Use the View menu in the Data Editor window to display or hide grid lines and toggle
between the display of data values and value labels.
Printing Data Editor Contents

E Select the tab for the view that you want to print.

File
Print...
Chapter
6
Data Preparation
Once you've opened a data file or entered data in the Data Editor, you can start creating
reports, charts, and analyses without any additional preliminary work. However, there
are some additional data preparation features that you may find useful, including:
Assign variable properties that describe the data and determine how certain
values should be treated.
Identify cases that may contain duplicate information and exclude those cases
from analyses or delete them from the data file.
Create new variables with a few distinct categories that represent ranges of values
from variables with a large number of possible values.
Variable Properties
Data simply entered in the Data Editor in the Data view or read into SPSS from an
external file format (for example, an Excel spreadsheet or a text data file) lack certain
variable properties that you may find very useful, such as:
Definition of descriptive value labels for numeric codes (for example, 0 = Male
and 1 = Female).
Identification of missing values codes (for example, 99 = Not applicable).
Assignment of measurement level (nominal, ordinal, or scale).
95
96
Chapter 6
All of these variable properties (and others) can be assigned in the Variable view of
the Data Editor. There are also several utilities that can assist you in this process:
Define Variable Properties can help you define descriptive value labels and
missing values. This is particularly useful for categorical data with numeric
codes used for category values.
Copy Data Properties provides the ability to use an existing SPSS-format data file
as a template for file and variable properties in the current data file. This is
particularly useful if you frequently use external-format data files that contain
similar content (such as monthly reports in Excel format).
Defining Variable Properties

Define Variable Properties is designed to assist you in the process of creating
descriptive value labels for categorical (nominal, ordinal) variables. Define Variable
Properties:
Scans the actual data values and lists all unique data values for each selected
variable.
Identifies unlabeled values and provides an “auto-label” feature.
Provides the ability to copy defined value labels from another variable to the
selected variable or from the selected variable to multiple additional variables.
Note: To use Define Variable Properties without first scanning cases, enter 0 for
the number of cases to scan.
To Define Variable Properties

Data
Define Variable Properties...
97
Data Preparation
Figure 6-1
Initial dialog box for selecting variables to define
E Select the numeric or short string variables for which you want to create value labels
or define or change other variable properties, such as missing values or descriptive
variable labels.
Note: Long string variables (string variables with a defined width of more than eight
characters) are not displayed in the variable list. Long string variables cannot have
defined value labels or missing values categories.
E Specify the number of cases to scan to generate the list of unique values. This is
particularly useful for data files with a large number of cases for which a scan of the
complete data file might take a significant amount of time.
E Specify an upper limit for the number of unique values to display. This is primarily
useful to prevent listing hundreds, thousands, or even millions of values for scale
(continuous interval, ratio) variables.
E Click Continue to open the main Define Variable Properties dialog box.
98
Chapter 6
E Select a variable for which you want to create value labels or define or change other
variable properties.
E Enter the label text for any unlabeled values that are displayed in the Value Label grid.
E If there are values for which you want to create value labels but those values are not
displayed, you can enter values in the Value column below the last scanned value.
E Repeat this process for each listed variable for which you want to create value labels.
E Click OK to apply the value labels and other variable properties.
Defining Value Labels and Other Variable Properties

Figure 6-2
Define Variable Properties, main dialog box
The Define Variable Properties main dialog box provides the following information
for the scanned variables:
Scanned Variable List. For each scanned variable, a check mark in the Unlabeled
column indicates that the variable contains values without assigned value labels.
99
Data Preparation
To sort the variable list to display all variables with unlabeled values at the top of
the list:
E Click the Unlabeled column heading under Scanned Variable List.
You can also sort by variable name or measurement level by clicking the
corresponding column heading under Scanned Variable List.
Value Label Grid

Label. Displays any value labels that have already been defined. You can add or
change labels in this column.
Value. Unique values for each selected variable. This list of unique values is
based on the number of scanned cases. For example, if you scanned only the
first 100 cases in the data file, then the list reflects only the unique values present
in those cases. If the data file has already been sorted by the variable for which
you want to assign value labels, the list may display far fewer unique values
than are actually present in the data.
Count. The number of times each value occurs in the scanned cases.
Missing. Values defined as representing missing data. You can change the missing
values designation of the category by clicking the check box. A check indicates
that the category is defined as a user-missing category. If a variable already has a
range of values defined as user-missing (for example, 90-99), you cannot add or
delete missing values categories for that variable with Define Variable Properties.
You can use the Variable view of the Data Editor to modify the missing values
categories for variables with missing values ranges. For more information, see
“Missing Values” in Chapter 5 on page 83.
Changed. Indicates that you have added or changed a value label.
Note: If you specified 0 for the number of cases to scan in the initial dialog box, the
Value Label grid will initially be blank, except for any preexisting value labels and/or
defined missing values categories for the selected variable. In addition, the Suggest
button for the measurement level will be disabled.
Measurement Level. Value labels are primarily useful for categorical (nominal
and ordinal) variables, and some procedures treat categorical and scale variables
differently; so, it is sometimes important to assign the correct measurement level.
However, by default, all new numeric variables are assigned the scale measurement
100
Chapter 6
level. So, many variables that are in fact categorical may initially be displayed as
scale.
If you are unsure of what measurement level to assign to a variable, click Suggest.
Copy Properties. You can copy value labels and other variable properties from another
variable to the currently selected variable or from the currently selected variable to
one or more other variables.
Unlabeled Values. To create labels for unlabeled values automatically, click Automatic
Labels.
Variable Label and Display Format
You can change the descriptive variable label and the display format.
You cannot change the variable's fundamental type (string or numeric).
For string variables, you can change only the variable label, not the display format.
For numeric variables, you can change the numeric type (such as numeric, date,
dollar, or custom currency), width (maximum number of digits, including any
decimal and/or grouping indicators), and number of decimal positions.
For numeric date format, you can select a specific date format (such as
dd-mm-yyyy, mm/dd/yy, yyyyddd, etc.)
For numeric custom format, you can select one of five custom currency formats
(CCA through CCE). For more information, see “Currency Options” in Chapter
43 on page 583.
An asterisk is displayed in the Value column if the specified width is less than the
width of the scanned values or the displayed values for preexisting defined value
labels or missing values categories.
A period (.) is displayed if the scanned values or the displayed values for
preexisting defined value labels or missing values categories are invalid for the
selected display format type. For example, an internal numeric value of less than
86,400 is invalid for a date format variable.
101
Data Preparation
Assigning the Measurement Level

When you click Suggest for the measurement level in the Define Variable Properties
main dialog box, the current variable is evaluated based on the scanned cases
and defined value labels, and a measurement level is suggested in the Suggest
Measurement Level dialog box that opens. The Explanation area provides a brief
description of the criteria used to provide the suggested measurement level.
Figure 6-3
Suggest Measurement Level dialog box
Note: Values defined as representing missing values are not included in the evaluation
for measurement level. For example, the explanation for the suggested measurement
level may indicate that the suggestion is in part based on the fact that the variable
contains no negative values, whereas it may in fact contain negative values—but those
values are already defined as missing values.
E Click Continue to accept the suggested level of measurement or Cancel to leave the
measurement level unchanged.
102
Chapter 6
Copying Variable Properties

The Apply Labels and Level dialog box is displayed when you click From Another
Variable or To Other Variables in the Define Variable Properties main dialog box. It
displays all of the scanned variables that match the current variable's type (numeric or
string). For string variables, the defined width must also match.
Figure 6-4
Apply Labels and Level dialog box
E Select a single variable from which to copy value labels and other variable properties
(except variable label).
or
E Select one or more variables to which to copy value labels and other variable
properties.
E Click Copy to copy the value labels and the measurement level.
Existing value labels and missing value categories for target variable(s) are not
replaced.
103
Data Preparation
Value labels and missing value categories for values not already defined for the
target variable(s) are added to the set of value labels and missing value categories
for the target variable(s).
The measurement level for the target variable(s) is always replaced.
If either the source or target variable has a defined range of missing values,
missing values definitions are not copied.
Copying Data Properties

The Copy Data Properties Wizard provides the ability to use an external SPSS data
file as a template for defining file and variable properties in the working data file.
You can also use variables in the working data file as templates for other variables in
the working data file. You can:
Copy selected file properties from an external data file to the working data file.
File properties include documents, file labels, multiple response sets, variable
sets, and weighting.
Copy selected variable properties from an external data file to matching variables
in the working data file. Variable properties include value labels, missing values,
level of measurement, variable labels, print and write formats, alignment, and
column width (in the Data Editor).
Copy selected variable properties from one variable in either an external data file
or the working data file to many variables in the working data file.
Create new variables in the working data file based on selected variables in
an external data file.
When copying data properties, the following general rules apply:

If you use an external data file as the source data file, it must be an SPSS-format
data file.
If you use the working data file as the source data file, it must contain at least
one variable. You cannot use a completely blank working data file as the source
data file.
104
Chapter 6
Undefined (empty) properties in the source data file do not overwrite defined
properties in the working data file.
Variable properties are copied from the source variable only to target variables
of a matching type—string (alphanumeric) or numeric (including numeric,
date, and currency).
Note: Copy Data Properties replaces Apply Data Dictionary, formerly available
on the File menu.
To Copy Data Properties

Data
Copy Data Properties...
105
Data Preparation
Figure 6-5
Copy Data Properties Wizard: Step 1
E Select the data file with the file and/or variable properties that you want to copy. This
can be an external SPSS-format data file or the working data file.
E Follow the step-by-step instructions in the Copy Data Properties Wizard.
Selecting Source and Target Variables

In this step, you can specify the source variables containing the variable properties that
you want to copy and the target variables that will receive those variable properties.
106
Chapter 6
Figure 6-6
Apply properties from selected source file variables to matching working file variables.
Variable properties are copied from one or more selected source variables to matching
variables in the working data file. Variables “match” if both the variable name
and type (string or numeric) are the same. For string variables, the defined length
must also be the same. By default, only matching variables are displayed in the
two variable lists.
Create matching variables in the working data file if they do not already exist. This
updates the source list to display all variables in the source data file. If you select
source variables that do not exist in the working data file (based on variable
107
Data Preparation
name), new variables will be created in the working data file with the variable
names and properties from the source data file.
If the working data file contains no variables (a blank, new data file), all variables
in the source data file are displayed and new variables based on the selected source
variables are automatically created in the working data file.
Apply properties from a single source variable to selected working file variables of the
same type. Variable properties from a single selected variable in the source list can be
applied to one or more selected variables in the working file list. Only variables of the
same type (numeric or string) as the selected variable in the source list are displayed
in the working file list. For string variables, only strings of the same defined length
as the source variable are displayed. This option is not available if the working
data file contains no variables.
Note: You cannot create new variables in the working data file with this option.
Apply dataset properties only—no variable selection. Only file properties (for example,
documents, file label, weight) will be applied to the working data file. No variable
properties will be applied. This option is not available if the working data file is
also the source data file.
Choosing Variable Properties to Copy

You can copy selected variable properties from the source variables to the target
variables. Undefined (empty) properties in the source variables do not overwrite
defined properties in the target variables.
108
Chapter 6
Figure 6-7
Value Labels. Value labels are descriptive labels associated with data values. Value
labels are often used when numeric data values are used to represent non-numeric
categories (for example, codes of 1 and 2 for Male and Female). You can replace or
merge value labels in the target variables.
109
Data Preparation
Replace deletes any defined value labels for the target variable and replaces them
with the defined value labels from the source variable.
Merge merges the defined value labels from the source variable with any existing
defined value label for the target variable. If the same value has a defined
value label in both the source and target variables, the value label in the target
variable is unchanged.
Missing Values. Missing values are values identified as representing missing data (for
example, 98 for Do not know and 99 for Not applicable). Typically, these values also
have defined value labels that describe what the missing value codes stand for. Any
existing defined missing values for the target variable are deleted and replaced with
the defined missing values from the source variable.
Variable Label. Descriptive variable labels can contain spaces and reserved characters
not allowed in variable names. If you're copying variable properties from a single
source variable to multiple target variables, you might want to think twice before
selecting this option.
Measurement Level. The measurement level can be nominal, ordinal, or scale. For
those procedures that distinguish between different measurement levels, nominal and
ordinal are both considered categorical.
Formats. For numeric variables, this controls numeric type (such as numeric, date, or
currency), width (total number of displayed characters, including leading and trailing
characters and decimal indicator), and number of decimal places displayed. This
option is ignored for string variables.
Alignment. This affects only alignment (left, right, center) in the Data view in the
Data Editor.
Data Editor Column Width. This affects only column width in the Data view in the
Data Editor.
Copying Dataset (File) Properties

You can apply selected, global dataset properties from the source data file to the
working data file. (This is not available if the working data file is the source data file.)
110
Chapter 6
Figure 6-8
Multiple Response Sets. Applies multiple response set definitions from the source
data file to the working data file. (Note: Multiple response sets are currently used
only by the Tables add-on component.)
Multiple response sets in the source data file that contain variables that do not
exist in the working data file are ignored unless those variables will be created
based on specifications in step 2 (Selecting Source and Target Variables) in the
Copy Data Properties Wizard.
111
Data Preparation
Replace deletes all multiple response sets in the working data file and replaces
them with the multiple response sets from the source data file.
Merge adds multiple response sets from the source data file to the collection of
multiple response sets in the working data file. If a set with the same name exists
in both files, the existing set in the working data file is unchanged.
Variable Sets. Variable sets are used to control the list of variables that are displayed
in dialog boxes. Variable sets are defined by selecting Define Sets from the Utilities
menu.
Sets in the source data file that contain variables that do not exist in the working
data file are ignored unless those variables will be created based on specifications
in step 2 (Selecting Source and Target Variables) in the Copy Data Properties
Wizard.
Replace deletes any existing variable sets in the working data file, replacing them
with variable sets from the source data file.
Merge adds variable sets from the source data file to the collection of variable
sets in the working data file. If a set with the same name exists in both files, the
existing set in the working data file is unchanged.
Documents. Notes appended to the data file via the DOCUMENT command.
Replace deletes any existing documents in the working data file, replacing them
with the documents from the source data file.
Merge combines documents from the source and working data file. Unique
documents in the source file that do not exist in the working data file are added to
the working data file. All documents are then sorted by date.
Weight Specification. Weights cases by the current weight variable in the source
data file if there is a matching variable in the working data file. This overrides any
weighting currently in effect in the working data file.
File Label. Descriptive label applied to a data file with the FILE LABEL command.
112
Chapter 6
Results
Figure 6-9
The last step in the Copy Data Properties Wizard provides information on the number
of variables for which variable properties will be copied from the source data file,
the number of new variables that will be created, and the number of dataset (file)
properties that will be copied.
You can also choose to paste the generated command syntax into a syntax window
and save the syntax for later use.
113
Data Preparation
Identifying Duplicate Cases

“Duplicate” cases may occur in your data for many reasons, including:
Data entry errors in which the same case is accidently entered more than once.
Multiple cases share a common primary ID value but have different secondary ID
values, such as family members who all live in the same house.
Multiple cases represent the same case but with different values for variables
other than those that identify the case, such as multiple purchases made by the
same person or company for different products or at different times.
Identify Duplicate Cases allows you to define duplicate almost any way that you
want and provides some control over the automatic determination of primary versus
duplicate cases.
To identify and flag duplicate cases:

Data
Identify Duplicate Cases...
E Select one or more variables that identify matching cases.
E Select one or more of the options in the Variables to Create group.
E Select one or more variables to sort cases within groups defined by the selected
matching cases variables. The sort order defined by these variables determines the
“first” and “last” case in each group. Otherwise, the original file order is used.
E Automatically filter duplicate cases so that they won't be included in reports, charts,
or calculation of statistics.
114
Chapter 6
Figure 6-10
Identify Duplicate Cases dialog box
Define matching cases by. Cases are considered duplicates if their values match for
all selected variables. If you want to identify only cases that are a 100% match in
all respects, select all of the variables.
Sort within matching groups by. Cases are automatically sorted by the variables that
define matching cases. You can select additional sorting variables that will determine
the sequential order of cases in each matching group.
For each sort variable, you can sort in ascending or descending order.
If you select multiple sort variables, cases are sorted by each variable within
categories of the preceding variable in the list. For example, if you select date as
the first sorting variable and amount as the second sorting variable, cases will be
sorted by amount within each date.
115
Data Preparation
Use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the list to change the sort
order of the variables.
The sort order determines the “first” and “last” case within each matching group,
which determines the value of the optional primary indicator variable. For
example, if you want to filter out all but the most recent case in each matching
group, you could sort cases within the group in ascending order of a date variable,
which would make the most recent date the last date in the group.
Indicator of primary cases. Creates a variable with a value of 1 for all unique cases
and the case identified as the primary case in each group of matching cases and a
value of 0 for the nonprimary duplicates in each group.
The primary case can be either the last or first case in each matching group, as
determined by the sort order within the matching group. If you don't specify
any sort variables, the original file order determines the order of cases within
each group.
You can use the indicator variable as a filter variable to exclude nonprimary
duplicates from reports and analyses without deleting those cases from the data
file.
Sequential count of matching cases in each group. Creates a variable with a sequential
value from 1 to n for cases in each matching group. The sequence is based on the
current order of cases in each group, which is either the original file order or the order
determined by any specified sort variables.
Move matching cases to the top. Sorts the data file so that all groups of matching
cases are at the top of the data file, making it easy to visually inspect the matching
cases in the Data Editor.
Display frequencies for created variables. Frequency tables containing counts for each
value of the created variables. For example, for the primary indicator variable, the
table would show the number of cases with a value 0 for that variable, which indicates
the number of duplicates, and the number of cases with a value of 1 for that variable,
which indicates the number of unique and primary cases.
116
Chapter 6
Missing Values. For numeric variables, the system-missing value is treated like any
other value—cases with the system-missing value for an identifier variable are treated
as having matching values for that variable. For string variables, cases with no value
for an identifier variable are treated as having matching values for that variable.
Visual Bander
The Visual Bander is designed to assist you in the process of creating new variables
based on grouping contiguous values of existing variables into a limited number of
distinct categories. You can use the Visual Bander to:
Create categorical variables from continuous scale variables. For example, you
could use a scale income variable to create a new categorical variable that
contains income ranges.
Collapse a large number of ordinal categories into a smaller set of categories.
For example, you could collapse a rating scale of nine down to three categories
representing low, medium, and high.
In the first step of the Visual Bander, you:
E Select the numeric scale and/or ordinal variables for which you want to create new
categorical (banded) variables.
117
Data Preparation
Figure 6-11
Initial dialog box for selecting variables to band
Optionally, you can limit the number of cases to scan. For data files with a large
number of cases, limiting the number of cases scanned can save time, but you
should avoid this if possible because it will affect the distribution of values used in
subsequent calculations in the Visual Bander.
Note: String variables and nominal numeric variables are not displayed in the source
variable list. The Visual Bander requires numeric variables, measured on either a
scale or ordinal level, since it assumes that the data values represent some logical
order that can be used to group values in a meaningful fashion. You can change the
defined measurement level of a variable in the Variable view of the Data Editor. For
more information, see “Variable Measurement Level” in Chapter 5 on page 77.
To Band Variables
Transform
Visual Bander...
118
Chapter 6
E Select the numeric scale and/or ordinal variables for which you want to create new
categorical (banded) variables.
E Select a variable in the Scanned Variable List.
E Enter a name for the new banded variable. Variable names must be unique and must
follow SPSS variable naming rules. For more information, see “Variable Names” in
Chapter 5 on page 76.
E Define the banding criteria for the new variable. For more information, see “Banding
Variables” on page 118.
E Click OK.
Banding Variables
Figure 6-12
Visual Bander, main dialog box
119
Data Preparation
The Visual Bander main dialog box provides the following information for the
scanned variables:
Scanned Variable List. Displays the variables you selected in the initial dialog box.
You can sort the list by measurement level (scale or ordinal) or by variable label or
name by clicking on the column headings.
Cases Scanned. Indicates the number of cases scanned. All scanned cases without
user-missing or system-missing values for the selected variable are used to generate
the distribution of values used in calculations in the Visual Bander, including the
histogram displayed in the main dialog box and cutpoints based on percentiles or
standard deviation units.
Missing Values. Indicates the number of scanned cases with user-missing or

system-missing values. Missing values are not included in any of the banded
categories. For more information, see “User-Missing Values in the Visual Bander”
on page 125.
Current Variable. The name and variable label (if any) for the currently selected
variable that will be used as the basis for the new, banded variable.
Banded Variable. Name and optional variable label for the new, banded variable.
Name. You must enter a name for the new variable. Variable names must be
unique and must follow SPSS variable naming rules. For more information, see
“Variable Names” in Chapter 5 on page 76.
Label. You can enter a descriptive variable label up to 255 characters long. The
default variable label is the variable label (if any) or variable name of the source
variable with (Banded) appended to the end of the label.
Minimum and Maximum. Minimum and maximum values for the currently selected
variable, based on the scanned cases and not including values defined as user-missing.
Nonmissing Values. The histogram displays the distribution of nonmissing values for
the currently selected variable, based on the scanned cases.
After you define bands for the new variable, vertical lines on the histogram are
displayed to indicate the cutpoints that define bands.
120
Chapter 6
You can click and drag the cutpoint lines to different locations on the histogram,
changing the band ranges.
You can remove bands by dragging cutpoint lines off the histogram.
Note: The histogram (displaying nonmissing values), the minimum, and the
maximum are based on the scanned values. If you do not include all cases in the scan,
the true distribution may not be accurately reflected, particularly if the data file has
been sorted by the selected variable. If you scan zero cases, no information about
the distribution of values is available.
Grid. Displays the values that define the upper endpoints of each band and optional
value labels for each band.
Value. The values that define the upper endpoints of each band. You can enter
values or use Make Cutpoints to automatically create bands based on selected
criteria. By default, a cutpoint with a value of HIGH is automatically included.
This band will contain any nonmissing values above the other cutpoints. The
band defined by the lowest cutpoint will include all nonmissing values lower
than or equal to that value (or simply lower than that value, depending on how
you define upper endpoints).
Labels. Optional, descriptive labels for the values of the new, banded variable.
Since the values of the new variable will simply be sequential integers from 1 to
n, labels that describe what the values represent can be very useful. You can enter
labels or use Make Labels to automatically create value labels.
To delete a band from the grid:
E Right-click on the either the Value or Label cell for the band.
E From the pop-up context menu, select Delete Row.
Note: If you delete the HIGH band, any cases with values higher than the last specified
cutpoint value will be assigned the system-missing value for the new variable.
To delete all labels or delete all defined bands:
E Right-click anywhere in the grid.
E From the pop-up context menu select either Delete All Labels or Delete All Cutpoints.
121
Data Preparation
Upper Endpoints. Controls treatment of upper endpoint values entered in the Value
column of the grid.
Included (<=). Cases with the value specified in the Value cell are included in the
banded category. For example, if you specify values of 25, 50, and 75, cases with
a value of exactly 25 will go in the first band, since this will include all cases
with values less than or equal to 25.
Excluded (<). Cases with the value specified in the Value cell are not included in
the banded category. Instead, they are included in the next band. For example, if
you specify values of 25, 50, and 75, cases with a value of exactly 25 will go
in the second band rather than the first, since the first band will contain only
cases with values less than 25.
Make Cutpoints. Generates banded categories automatically for equal width

intervals, intervals with the same number of cases, or intervals based on standard
deviations. This is not available if you scanned zero cases. For more information, see
“Automatically Generating Banded Categories” on page 121.
Make Labels. Generates descriptive labels for the sequential integer values of the
new, banded variable, based on the values in the grid and the specified treatment of
upper endpoints (included or excluded).
Reverse scale. By default, values of the new, banded variable are ascending sequential
integers from 1 to n. Reversing the scale makes the values descending sequential
integers from n to 1.
Copy Bands. You can copy the banding specifications from another variable to the
currently selected variable or from the selected variable to multiple other variables.
For more information, see “Copying Banded Categories” on page 124.
Automatically Generating Banded Categories

The Make Cutpoints dialog box allows you to auto-generate banded categories based
on selected criteria.
To use the Make Cutpoints dialog box:
E Select (click) a variable in the Scanned Variable List.

122
Chapter 6
E Click Make Cutpoints.
E Select the criteria for generating cutpoints that will define the banded categories.
E Click Apply.
Figure 6-13
Make Cutpoints dialog box
Note: The Make Cutpoints dialog box is not available if you scanned zero cases.
Equal Width Intervals. Generates banded categories of equal width (for example, 1–10,
11–20, 21–30, etc.), based on any two of the following three criteria:
First Cutpoint Location. The value that defines the upper end of the lowest banded
category (for example, a value of 10 indicates a range that includes all values up
to 10).
Number of Cutpoints. The number of banded categories is the number of cutpoints
plus one. For example, 9 cutpoints generate 10 banded categories.
Width. The width of each interval. For example, a value of 10 would band age in
years into 10-year intervals.
123
Data Preparation
Equal Percentiles Based on Scanned Cases. Generates banded categories with an

equal number of cases in each band (using the aempirical algorithm for percentiles),
based on either of the following criteria:
Number of Cutpoints. The number of banded categories is the number of cutpoints
plus one. For example, three cutpoints generate four percentile bands (quartiles),
each containing 25% of the cases.
Width (%). Width of each interval, expressed as a percentage of the total number
of cases. For example, a value of 33.3 would produce three banded categories
(two cutpoints), each containing 33.3% of the cases.
If the source variable contains a relatively small number of distinct values or a large
number of cases with the same value, you may get fewer bands than requested.
Cutpoints at Mean and Selected Standard Deviations Based on Scanned Cases.

Generates banded categories based on the values of the mean and standard deviation
of the distribution of the variable.
If you don't select any of the standard deviation intervals, two banded categories
will be created, with the mean as the cutpoint dividing the bands.
You can select any combination of standard deviation intervals based on one, two,
and/or three standard deviations. For example, selecting all three would result in
eight banded categories—six bands in one standard deviation intervals and two
bands for cases more than three standard deviations above and below the mean.
In a normal distribution, 68% of the cases fall within one standard deviation of
the mean, 95%, within two standard deviations, and 99%, within three standard
deviations. Creating banded categories based on standard deviations may result in
some defined bands outside the actual data range and even outside the range of
possible data values (for example, a negative salary range).
Note: Calculations of percentiles and standard deviations are based on the scanned
cases. If you limit the number of cases scanned, the resulting bands may not contain
the proportion of cases that you wanted in those bands, particularly if the data file is
sorted by the source variable. For example, if you limit the scan to the first 100 cases
of a data file with 1000 cases and the data file is sorted in ascending order of age of
respondent, instead of four percentile age bands each containing 25% of the cases,
you may find that the first three bands each contain only about 3.3% of the cases, and
the last band contains 90% of the cases.
124
Chapter 6
Copying Banded Categories

When creating banded categories for one or more variables, you can copy the banding
specifications from another variable to the currently selected variable or from the
selected variable to multiple other variables.
Figure 6-14
Copying bands to or from the current variable
To copy banding specifications:
E Define banded categories for at least one variable—but do not click OK or Paste.
E Select (click) a variable in the Scanned Variable List for which you have defined
banded categories.
E Click To Other Variables.
E Select the variables for which you want to create new variables with the same banded
categories.
125
Data Preparation
E Click Copy.
or
E Select (click) a variable in the Scanned Variable List to which you want to copy
defined banded categories.
E Click From Another Variable.
E Select the variable with the defined banded categories that you want to copy.
E Click Copy.
If you have specified value labels for the variable from which you are copying the
banding specifications, those are also copied.
Note: Once you click OK in the Visual Bander main dialog box to create new banded
variables (or close the dialog box in any other way), you cannot use the Visual Bander
to copy those banded categories to other variables.
User-Missing Values in the Visual Bander

Values defined as user-missing (values identified as codes for missing data) for
the source variable are not included in the banded categories for the new variable.
User-missing values for the source variables are copied as user-missing values for the
new variable, and any defined value labels for missing value codes are also copied.
If a missing value code conflicts with one of the banded category values for the new
variable, the missing value code for the new variable is recoded to a nonconflicting
value by adding 100 to the highest banded category value. For example, if a value of
1 is defined as user-missing for the source variable and the new variable will have
six banded categories, any cases with a value of 1 for the source variable will have a
value of 106 for the new variable, and 106 will be defined as user-missing. If the
user-missing value for the source variable had a defined value label, that label will be
retained as the value label for the recoded value of the new variable.
Note: If the source variable has a defined range of user-missing values of the form
LO-n, where n is a positive number, the corresponding user-missing values for the
new variable will be negative numbers.
Chapter
7
Data Transformations
In an ideal situation, your raw data are perfectly suitable for the type of analysis you
want to perform, and any relationships between variables are either conveniently
linear or neatly orthogonal. Unfortunately, this is rarely the case. Preliminary analysis
may reveal inconvenient coding schemes or coding errors, or data transformations
may be required in order to expose the true relationship between variables.
You can perform data transformations ranging from simple tasks, such as
collapsing categories for analysis, to more advanced tasks, such as creating new
variables based on complex equations and conditional statements.
Computing Variables
Compute Variable computes values for a variable based on numeric transformations
of other variables.
You can compute values for numeric or string (alphanumeric) variables.
You can create new variables or replace the values of existing variables. For new
variables, you can also specify the variable type and label.
You can compute values selectively for subsets of data based on logical conditions.
You can use more than 70 built-in functions, including arithmetic functions,
statistical functions, distribution functions, and string functions.
127
128
Chapter 7
Figure 7-1
Compute Variable dialog box
To Compute Variables
Transform
Compute...
E Type the name of a single target variable. It can be an existing variable or a new
variable to be added to the working data file.
E To build an expression, either paste components into the Expression field or type
directly in the Expression field.
Paste functions from the function list and fill in the parameters indicated by
question marks.
String constants must be enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes.
Numeric constants must be typed in American format, with the period (.) as
the decimal indicator.
For new string variables, you must also select Type & Label to specify the data type.
129
Conditional Transformations
The If Cases dialog box allows you to apply data transformations to selected subsets
of cases, using conditional expressions. A conditional expression returns a value
of true, false, or missing for each case.
If the result of a conditional expression is true, the transformation is applied
to the case.
If the result of a conditional expression is false or missing, the transformation is
not applied to the case.
Most conditional expressions use one or more of the six relational operators (<, >,
<=, >=, =, and ~=) on the calculator pad.
Conditional expressions can include variable names, constants, arithmetic
operators, numeric and other functions, logical variables, and relational operators.
Figure 7-2
If Cases dialog box
Compute Variable: Type and Label

By default, new computed variables are numeric. To compute a new string variable,
you must specify the data type and width.
130
Chapter 7
Label. Optional, descriptive variable label up to 120 characters long. You can enter a
label or use the first 110 characters of the Compute expression as the label.
Type. Computed variables can be numeric or string (alphanumeric). String variables
cannot be used in calculations.
Figure 7-3
Type and Label dialog box
Functions
Many types of functions are supported, including:
Arithmetic functions
Statistical functions
String functions
Date and time functions
Distribution functions
Random variable functions
Missing value functions
Search for functions in the online Help system index for a complete list of functions.
Right-click on a selected function in the list for a description of that function.
131
Missing Values in Functions

Functions and simple arithmetic expressions treat missing values in different ways.
In the expression:
(var1+var2+var3)/3
the result is missing if a case has a missing value for any of the three variables.
In the expression:
MEAN(var1, var2, var3)
the result is missing only if the case has missing values for all three variables.
For statistical functions, you can specify the minimum number of arguments that
must have nonmissing values. To do so, type a period and the minimum number
after the function name, as in:
MEAN.2(var1, var2, var3)
Random Number Seed

Random Number Seed sets the seed used by the pseudo-random number generator to
a specific value so that you can reproduce a sequence of pseudo-random numbers.
The random number seed changes each time a random number is generated for use
in transformations (such as the UNIFORM and NORMAL functions), random sampling,
or case weighting. To replicate a sequence of random numbers, use this dialog box to
reset the seed to a specific value prior to each analysis that uses the random numbers.
Figure 7-4
Random Number Seed dialog box
132
Chapter 7
The random number seed is automatically reset to 2,000,000 every time you start a
new session.
To Set the Random Number Seed

Transform
Random Number Seed...
E Select Set seed to.
E Enter a positive integer between 1 and 2,000,000,000.
Count Occurrences of Values within Cases

This dialog box creates a variable that counts the occurrences of the same value(s)
in a list of variables for each case. For example, a survey might contain a list of
magazines with yes/no check boxes to indicate which magazines each respondent
reads. You could count the number of yes responses for each respondent to create a
new variable that contains the total number of magazines read.
Figure 7-5
Count Occurrences of Values within Cases dialog box
133
To Count Occurrences of Values within Cases

Transform
Count...
E Enter a target variable name.
E Select two or more variables of the same type (numeric or string).
E Click Define Values and specify which value or values should be counted.
Optionally, you can define a subset of cases for which to count occurrences of values.
The If Cases dialog box for defining subsets of cases is the same as the one described
for Compute Variable.
Count Values within Cases: Values to Count

The value of the target variable (on the main dialog box) is incremented by 1 each
time one of the selected variables matches a specification in the Values to Count list
here. If a case matches several specifications for any variable, the target variable is
incremented several times for that variable.
Value specifications can include individual values, missing or system-missing
values, and ranges. Ranges include their endpoints and any user-missing values
that fall within the range.
134
Chapter 7
Figure 7-6
Values to Count dialog box
Recoding Values
You can modify data values by recoding them. This is particularly useful for
collapsing or combining categories. You can recode the values within existing
variables, or you can create new variables based on the recoded values of existing
variables.
Recode into Same Variables

Recode into Same Variables reassigns the values of existing variables or collapses
ranges of existing values into new values. For example, you could collapse salaries
into salary range categories.
You can recode numeric and string variables. If you select multiple variables, they
must all be the same type. You cannot recode numeric and string variables together.
135
Figure 7-7
Recode into Same Variables dialog box
To Recode Values of a Variable

Transform
Recode
Into Same Variables...
E Select the variables you want to recode. If you select multiple variables, they must
be the same type (numeric or string).
E Click Old and New Values and specify how to recode values.
Optionally, you can define a subset of cases to recode.
The If Cases dialog box for defining subsets of cases is the same as the one described
for Compute Variable.
Recode into Same Variables: Old and New Values

You can define values to recode in this dialog box. All value specifications must be
the same data type (numeric or string) as the variables selected in the main dialog box.
136
Chapter 7
Old Value. The value(s) to be recoded. You can recode single values, ranges of values,
and missing values. System-missing values and ranges cannot be selected for string
variables because neither concept applies to string variables. Ranges include their
endpoints and any user-missing values that fall within the range.
Value. Individual old value to be recoded into a new value. The value must be the
same data type (numeric or string) as the variable(s) being recoded.
System-missing. Values assigned by the program when values in your data are
undefined according to the format type you have specified, when a numeric field
is blank, or when a value resulting from a transformation command is undefined.
Numeric system-missing values are displayed as periods. String variables cannot
have system-missing values, since any character is legal in a string variable.
System- or user-missing. Observations with values that either have been defined as
user-missing values, or are unknown and have been assigned the system-missing
value, which is indicated with a period (.).
Range. Inclusive range of values. Not available for string variables. Any
user-missing values within the range are included.
All other values. Any remaining values not included in one of the specifications on
the Old-New list. This appears as ELSE on the Old-New list.
New Value. The single value into which each old value or range of values is recoded.
You can enter a value or assign the system-missing value.
Value. Value into which one or more old values will be recoded. The value must
be the same data type (numeric or string) as the old value.
System-missing. Recodes specified old values into the system-missing value.
The system-missing value is not used in calculations, and cases with the
system-missing value are excluded from many procedures. Not available for
string variables.
Old->New. The list of specifications that will be used to recode the variable(s). You can
add, change, and remove specifications from the list. The list is automatically sorted,
based on the old value specification, using the following order: single values, missing
values, ranges, and all other values. If you change a recode specification on the list,
the procedure automatically re-sorts the list, if necessary, to maintain this order.
137
Figure 7-8
Old and New Values dialog box
Recode into Different Variables

Recode into Different Variables reassigns the values of existing variables or collapses
ranges of existing values into new values for a new variable. For example, you could
collapse salaries into a new variable containing salary-range categories.
You can recode numeric and string variables.
You can recode numeric variables into string variables and vice versa.
If you select multiple variables, they must all be the same type. You cannot
recode numeric and string variables together.
138
Chapter 7
Figure 7-9
Recode into Different Variables dialog box
To Recode Values of a Variable into a New Variable

Transform
Recode
Into Different Variables...
E Select the variables you want to recode. If you select multiple variables, they must
be the same type (numeric or string).
E Enter an output (new) variable name for each new variable and click Change.
E Click Old and New Values and specify how to recode values.
Optionally, you can define a subset of cases to recode.
Recode into Different Variables: Old and New Values

You can define values to recode in this dialog box.
139
Old Value. The value(s) to be recoded. You can recode single values, ranges of values,
and missing values. System-missing values and ranges cannot be selected for string
variables because neither concept applies to string variables. Old values must be the
same data type (numeric or string) as the original variable. Ranges include their
endpoints and any user-missing values that fall within the range.
Value. Individual old value to be recoded into a new value. The value must be the
same data type (numeric or string) as the variable(s) being recoded.
System-missing. Values assigned by the program when values in your data are
undefined according to the format type you have specified, when a numeric field
is blank, or when a value resulting from a transformation command is undefined.
Numeric system-missing values are displayed as periods. String variables cannot
have system-missing values, since any character is legal in a string variable.
System- or user-missing. Observations with values that either have been defined as
user-missing values, or are unknown and have been assigned the system-missing
value, which is indicated with a period (.).
Range. Inclusive range of values. Not available for string variables. Any
user-missing values within the range are included.
All other values. Any remaining values not included in one of the specifications on
the Old-New list. This appears as ELSE on the Old-New list.
New Value. The single value into which each old value or range of values is recoded.
New values can be numeric or string.
Value. Value into which one or more old values will be recoded. The value must
be the same data type (numeric or string) as the old value.
System-missing. Recodes specified old values into the system-missing value.
The system-missing value is not used in calculations, and cases with the
system-missing value are excluded from many procedures. Not available for
string variables.
Copy old values. Retains the old value. If some values don't require recoding,
use this to include the old values. Any old values that are not specified are not
included in the new variable, and cases with those values will be assigned the
system-missing value for the new variable.
Output variables are strings. Defines the new, recoded variable as a string
(alphanumeric) variable. The old variable can be numeric or string.
140
Chapter 7
Convert numeric strings to numbers. Converts string values containing numbers to

numeric values. Strings containing anything other than numbers and an optional sign
(+ or -) are assigned the system-missing value.
Old->New. The list of specifications that will be used to recode the variable(s). You can
add, change, and remove specifications from the list. The list is automatically sorted,
based on the old value specification, using the following order: single values, missing
values, ranges, and all other values. If you change a recode specification on the list,
the procedure automatically re-sorts the list, if necessary, to maintain this order.
Figure 7-10
Old and New Values dialog box
Rank Cases
Rank Cases creates new variables containing ranks, normal and Savage scores, and
percentile values for numeric variables.
New variable names and descriptive variable labels are automatically generated,
based on the original variable name and the selected measure(s). A summary table
lists the original variables, the new variables, and the variable labels.
141

Rank cases in ascending or descending order.
Organize rankings into subgroups by selecting one or more grouping variables
for the By list. Ranks are computed within each group. Groups are defined
by the combination of values of the grouping variables. For example, if you
select gender and minority as grouping variables, ranks are computed for each
combination of gender and minority.
Figure 7-11
Rank Cases dialog box
To Rank Cases
Transform
Rank Cases...
E Select one or more variables to rank. You can rank only numeric variables.
Optionally, you can rank cases in ascending or descending order and organize
ranks into subgroups.
142
Chapter 7
Rank Cases: Types

You can select multiple ranking methods. A separate ranking variable is created for
each method. Ranking methods include simple ranks, Savage scores, fractional
ranks, and percentiles. You can also create rankings based on proportion estimates
and normal scores.
Rank. Simple rank. The value of the new variable equals its rank.
Savage score. The new variable contains Savage scores based on an exponential
distribution.
Fractional rank. The value of the new variable equals rank divided by the sum of the
weights of the nonmissing cases.
Fractional rank as percent. Each rank is divided by the number of cases with valid
values and multiplied by 100.
Sum of case weights. The value of the new variable equals the sum of case weights.
The new variable is a constant for all cases in the same group.
Ntiles. Ranks are based on percentile groups, with each group containing
approximately the same number of cases. For example, 4 Ntiles would assign a
rank of 1 to cases below the 25th percentile, 2 to cases between the 25th and 50th
percentile, 3 to cases between the 50th and 75th percentile, and 4 to cases above
the 75th percentile.
Proportion estimates. Estimates of the cumulative proportion of the distribution

corresponding to a particular rank.
Normal scores. The z scores corresponding to the estimated cumulative proportion.
Proportion Estimation Formula. For proportion estimates and normal scores, you can
select the proportion estimation formula: Blom, Tukey, Rankit, or Van der Waerden.
Blom. Creates new ranking variable based on proportion estimates that uses the
formula (r-3/8) / (w+1/4), where w is the sum of the case weights and r is the rank.
Tukey. Uses the formula (r-1/3) / (w+1/3), where r is the rank and w is the sum
of the case weights.
143
Rankit. Uses the formula (r-1/2) / w, where w is the number of observations

and r is the rank, ranging from 1 to w.
Van der Waerden. Van der Waerden's transformation, defined by the formula
r/(w+1), where w is the sum of the case weights and r is the rank, ranging from
1 to w.
Figure 7-12
Rank Cases Types dialog box
Rank Cases: Ties

This dialog box controls the method for assigning rankings to cases with the same
value on the original variable.
Figure 7-13
Rank Cases Ties dialog box
144
Chapter 7
The following table shows how the different methods assign ranks to tied values:
Automatic Recode
Automatic Recode converts string and numeric values into consecutive integers.
When category codes are not sequential, the resulting empty cells reduce performance
and increase memory requirements for many procedures. Additionally, some
procedures cannot use string variables, and some require consecutive integer values
for factor levels.
Figure 7-14
Automatic Recode dialog box
The new variable(s) created by Automatic Recode retain any defined variable and
value labels from the old variable. For any values without a defined value label, the
original value is used as the label for the recoded value. A table displays the old and
new values and value labels.
145
String values are recoded in alphabetical order, with uppercase letters preceding
their lowercase counterparts. Missing values are recoded into missing values higher
than any nonmissing values, with their order preserved. For example, if the original
variable has 10 nonmissing values, the lowest missing value would be recoded to 11,
and the value 11 would be a missing value for the new variable.
To Recode String or Numeric Values into Consecutive Integers

Transform
Automatic Recode...
E Select one or more variables to recode.
E For each selected variable, enter a name for the new variable and click New Name.
Time Series Data Transformations

Several data transformations that are useful in time series analysis are provided:
Generate date variables to establish periodicity and distinguish between historical,
validation, and forecasting periods.
Create new time series variables as functions of existing time series variables.
Replace system- and user-missing values with estimates based on one of several
methods.
A time series is obtained by measuring a variable (or set of variables) regularly over a
period of time. Time series data transformations assume a data file structure in
which each case (row) represents a set of observations at a different time, and the
length of time between cases is uniform.
Define Dates
Define Dates generates date variables that can be used to establish the periodicity of a
time series and to label output from time series analysis.
146
Chapter 7
Figure 7-15
Define Dates dialog box
Cases Are. Defines the time interval used to generate dates.

Not dated removes any previously defined date variables. Any variables with the
following names are deleted: year_, quarter_, month_, week_, day_, hour_,
minute_, second_, and date_.
Custom indicates the presence of custom date variables created with command
syntax (for example, a four-day work week). This item merely reflects the current
state of the working data file. Selecting it from the list has no effect. (See the
SPSS Command Syntax Reference for information on using the DATE command
to create custom date variables.) Custom date variables are not available with
the Student version.
First Case Is. Defines the starting date value, which is assigned to the first case.
Sequential values, based on the time interval, are assigned to subsequent cases.
Periodicity at higher level. Indicates the repetitive cyclical variation, such as the
number of months in a year or the number of days in a week. The value displayed
indicates the maximum value you can enter.
A new numeric variable is created for each component that is used to define the date.
The new variable names end with an underscore. A descriptive string variable, date_,
is also created from the components. For example, if you selected Weeks, days, hours,
four new variables are created: week_, day_, hour_, and date_.
147
If date variables have already been defined, they are replaced when you define new
date variables that will have the same names as the existing date variables.
To Define Dates for Time Series Data

Data
Define Dates...
E Select a time interval from the Cases Are list.
E Enter the value(s) that define the starting date for First Case Is, which determines the
date assigned to the first case.
Date Variables versus Date Format Variables
Date variables created with Define Dates should not be confused with date format
variables, defined in the Variable view of the Data Editor. Date variables are used
to establish periodicity for time series data. Date format variables represent dates
and/or times displayed in various date/time formats. Date variables are simple
integers representing the number of days, weeks, hours, etc., from a user-specified
starting point. Internally, most date format variables are stored as the number of
seconds from October 14, 1582.
Create Time Series

Create Time Series creates new variables based on functions of existing numeric time
series variables. These transformed values are useful in many time series analysis
procedures.
Default new variable names are the first six characters of the existing variable used
to create it, followed by an underscore and a sequential number. For example, for the
variable price, the new variable name would be price_1. The new variables retain
any defined value labels from the original variables.
Available functions for creating time series variables include differences, moving
averages, running medians, lag, and lead functions.
148
Chapter 7
Figure 7-16
Create Time Series dialog box
To Create New Time Series Variables

Transform
Create Time Series...
E Select the time series function you want to use to transform the original variable(s).
E Select the variable(s) from which you want to create new time series variables. Only
numeric variables can be used.
Enter variable names to override the default new variable names.
Change the function for a selected variable.
149
Time Series Transformation Functions
Difference. Nonseasonal difference between successive values in the series. The

order is the number of previous values used to calculate the difference. Because one
observation is lost for each order of difference, system-missing values appear at the
beginning of the series. For example, if the difference order is 2, the first two cases
will have the system-missing value for the new variable.
Seasonal difference. Difference between series values a constant span apart. The span
is based on the currently defined periodicity. To compute seasonal differences, you
must have defined date variables (Data menu, Define Dates) that include a periodic
component (such as months of the year). The order is the number of seasonal periods
used to compute the difference. The number of cases with the system-missing value
at the beginning of the series is equal to the periodicity multiplied by the order. For
example, if the current periodicity is 12 and the order is 2, the first 24 cases will have
the system-missing value for the new variable.
Centered moving average. Average of a span of series values surrounding and
including the current value. The span is the number of series values used to compute
the average. If the span is even, the moving average is computed by averaging each
pair of uncentered means. The number of cases with the system-missing value at the
beginning and at the end of the series for a span of n is equal to n/2 for even span
values and for odd span values. For example, if the span is 5, the number of cases
with the system-missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series is 2.
Prior moving average. Average of the span of series values preceding the current value.
The span is the number of preceding series values used to compute the average. The
number of cases with the system-missing value at the beginning of the series is
equal to the span value.
Running median. Median of a span of series values surrounding and including the
current value. The span is the number of series values used to compute the median.
If the span is even, the median is computed by averaging each pair of uncentered
medians. The number of cases with the system-missing value at the beginning and
at the end of the series for a span of n is equal to n/2 for even span values and
for odd span values. For example, if the span is 5, the number of cases with the
system-missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series is 2.
Cumulative sum. Cumulative sum of series values up to and including the current value.
150
Chapter 7
Lag. Value of a previous case, based on the specified lag order. The order is the
number of cases prior to the current case from which the value is obtained. The
number of cases with the system-missing value at the beginning of the series is
equal to the order value.
Lead. Value of a subsequent case, based on the specified lead order. The order is
the number of cases after the current case from which the value is obtained. The
number of cases with the system-missing value at the end of the series is equal to the
order value.
Smoothing. New series values based on a compound data smoother. The smoother
starts with a running median of 4, which is centered by a running median of 2. It then
resmoothes these values by applying a running median of 5, a running median of 3,
and hanning (running weighted averages). Residuals are computed by subtracting the
smoothed series from the original series. This whole process is then repeated on the
computed residuals. Finally, the smoothed residuals are computed by subtracting
the smoothed values obtained the first time through the process. This is sometimes
referred to as T4253H smoothing.
Replace Missing Values

Missing observations can be problematic in analysis, and some time series measures
cannot be computed if there are missing values in the series. Replace Missing Values
creates new time series variables from existing ones, replacing missing values with
estimates computed with one of several methods.
Default new variable names are the first six characters of the existing variable used
to create it, followed by an underscore and a sequential number. For example, for the
variable price, the new variable name would be price_1. The new variables retain
any defined value labels from the original variables.
151
Figure 7-17
Replace Missing Values dialog box
To Replace Missing Values for Time Series Variables

Transform
Replace Missing Values...
E Select the estimation method you want to use to replace missing values.
E Select the variable(s) for which you want to replace missing values.

Enter variable names to override the default new variable names.
Change the estimation method for a selected variable.
Estimation Methods for Replacing Missing Values
Series mean. Replaces missing values with the mean for the entire series.
152
Chapter 7
Mean of nearby points. Replaces missing values with the mean of valid surrounding
values. The span of nearby points is the number of valid values above and below the
missing value used to compute the mean.
Median of nearby points. Replaces missing values with the median of valid surrounding
values. The span of nearby points is the number of valid values above and below the
missing value used to compute the median.
Linear interpolation. Replaces missing values using a linear interpolation. The last
valid value before the missing value and the first valid value after the missing value
are used for the interpolation. If the first or last case in the series has a missing
value, the missing value is not replaced.
Linear trend at point. Replaces missing values with the linear trend for that point.
The existing series is regressed on an index variable scaled 1 to n. Missing values
are replaced with their predicted values.
Chapter
8
File Handling and File
Transformations
Data files are not always organized in the ideal form for your specific needs. You
may want to combine data files, sort the data in a different order, select a subset of
cases, or change the unit of analysis by grouping cases together. A wide range of file
transformation capabilities is available, including the ability to:
Sort data. You can sort cases based on the value of one or more variables.
Transpose cases and variables. The SPSS data file format reads rows as cases and
columns as variables. For data files in which this order is reversed, you can switch the
rows and columns and read the data in the correct format.
Merge files. You can merge two or more data files. You can combine files with the
same variables but different cases or the same cases but different variables.
Select subsets of cases. You can restrict your analysis to a subset of cases or perform
simultaneous analyses on different subsets.
Aggregate data. You can change the unit of analysis by aggregating cases based on the
value of one or more grouping variables.
Weight data. Weight cases for analysis based on the value of a weight variable.
Restructure data. You can restructure data to create a single case (record) from
multiple cases or create multiple cases from a single case.
Sort Cases
This dialog box sorts cases (rows) of the data file based on the values of one or more
sorting variables. You can sort cases in ascending or descending order.
153
154
Chapter 8
If you select multiple sort variables, cases are sorted by each variable within
categories of the preceding variable on the Sort list. For example, if you select
gender as the first sorting variable and minority as the second sorting variable,
cases will be sorted by minority classification within each gender category.
For string variables, uppercase letters precede their lowercase counterparts in sort
order. For example, the string value “Yes” comes before “yes” in sort order.
Figure 8-1
Sort Cases dialog box
To Sort Cases
Data
Sort Cases...
E Select one or more sorting variables.
Transpose
Transpose creates a new data file in which the rows and columns in the original data
file are transposed so that cases (rows) become variables and variables (columns)
become cases. Transpose automatically creates new variable names and displays a
list of the new variable names.
A new string variable that contains the original variable name, case_lbl, is
automatically created.
155
File Handling and File Transformations
If the working data file contains an ID or name variable with unique values, you
can use it as the name variable, and its values will be used as variable names in
the transposed data file. If it is a numeric variable, the variable names start with
the letter V, followed by the numeric value.
User-missing values are converted to the system-missing value in the transposed
data file. To retain any of these values, change the definition of missing values in
the Variable view in the Data Editor.
To Transpose Variables and Cases

Data
Transpose...
E Select one or more variables to transpose into cases.
Merging Data Files

You can merge data from two files in two different ways. You can:
Merge files containing the same variables but different cases.
Merge files containing the same cases but different variables.
Add Cases
Add Cases merges the working data file with a second data file that contains the same
variables but different cases. For example, you might record the same information
for customers in two different sales regions and maintain the data for each region
in separate files.
156
Chapter 8
Figure 8-2
Add Cases dialog box
Unpaired Variables. Variables to be excluded from the new, merged data file. Variables
from the working data file are identified with an asterisk (*). Variables from the
external data file are identified with a plus sign (+). By default, this list contains:
Variables from either data file that do not match a variable name in the other
file. You can create pairs from unpaired variables and include them in the new,
merged file.
Variables defined as numeric data in one file and string data in the other file.
Numeric variables cannot be merged with string variables.
String variables of unequal width. The defined width of a string variable must be
the same in both data files.
Variables in New Working Data File. Variables to be included in the new, merged data
file. By default, all of the variables that match both the name and the data type
(numeric or string) are included on the list.
You can remove variables from the list if you do not want them to be included in
the merged file.
Any unpaired variables included in the merged file will contain missing data for
cases from the file that does not contain that variable.
157
Indicate case source as variable. Indicates the source data file for each case. This
variable has a value of 0 for cases from the working data file and a value of 1 for
cases from the external data file.
To Merge Data Files with the Same Variables and Different Cases
E Open one of the data files. The cases from this file will appear first in the new,
merged data file.

Data
Merge Files
Add Cases...
E Select the data file to merge with the open data file.
E Remove any variables you do not want from the Variables in New Working Data
File list.
E Add any variable pairs from the Unpaired Variables list that represent the same
information recorded under different variable names in the two files. For example,
date of birth might have the variable name brthdate in one file and datebrth in the
other file.
To Select a Pair of Unpaired Variables
E Click one of the variables on the Unpaired Variables list.
E Ctrl-click the other variable on the list. (Press the Ctrl key and click the left mouse
button at the same time.)
E Click Pair to move the variable pair to the Variables in New Working Data File list.
(The variable name from the working data file is used as the variable name in the
merged file.)
158
Chapter 8
Figure 8-3
Selecting pairs of variables with Ctrl-click
Add Cases: Rename

You can rename variables from either the working data file or the external file before
moving them from the unpaired list to the list of variables to be included in the
merged data file. Renaming variables enables you to:
Use the variable name from the external file rather than the name from the
working data file for variable pairs.
Include two variables with the same name but of unmatched types or different
string widths. For example, to include both the numeric variable sex from the
working data file and the string variable sex from the external file, one of them
must be renamed first.
159
Add Cases: Dictionary Information

Any existing dictionary information (variable and value labels, user-missing values,
display formats) in the working data file is applied to the merged data file.
If any dictionary information for a variable is undefined in the working data file,
dictionary information from the external data file is used.
If the working data file contains any defined value labels or user-missing values
for a variable, any additional value labels or user-missing values for that variable
in the external file are ignored.
Add Variables
Add Variables merges the working data file with an external data file that contains the
same cases but different variables. For example, you might want to merge a data file
that contains pre-test results with one that contains post-test results.
Cases must be sorted in the same order in both data files.
If one or more key variables are used to match cases, the two data files must be
sorted by ascending order of the key variable(s).
Variable names in the second data file that duplicate variable names in the
working data file are excluded by default because Add Variables assumes that
these variables contain duplicate information.
Indicate case source as variable. Indicates the source data file for each case. This
variable has a value of 0 for cases from the working data file and a value of 1 for
cases from the external data file.
160
Chapter 8
Figure 8-4
Add Variables dialog box
Excluded Variables. Variables to be excluded from the new, merged data file. By
default, this list contains any variable names from the external data file that duplicate
variable names in the working data file. Variables from the working data file are
identified with an asterisk (*). Variables from the external data file are identified with
a plus sign (+). If you want to include an excluded variable with a duplicate name in
the merged file, you can rename it and add it to the list of variables to be included.
New Working Data File. Variables to be included in the new, merged data file. By
default, all unique variable names in both data files are included on the list.
Key Variables. If some cases in one file do not have matching cases in the other file
(that is, some cases are missing in one file), use key variables to identify and correctly
match cases from the two files. You can also use key variables with table lookup files.
The key variables must have the same names in both data files.
161
Both data files must be sorted by ascending order of the key variables, and
the order of variables on the Key Variables list must be the same as their sort
sequence.
Cases that do not match on the key variables are included in the merged file but
are not merged with cases from the other file. Unmatched cases contain values
for only the variables in the file from which they are taken; variables from the
other file contain the system-missing value.
External file or Working data file is keyed table. A keyed table, or table lookup file,
is a file in which data for each “case” can be applied to multiple cases in the other
data file. For example, if one file contains information on individual family members
(such as sex, age, education) and the other file contains overall family information
(such as total income, family size, location), you can use the file of family data as
a table lookup file and apply the common family data to each individual family
member in the merged data file.
To Merge Files with the Same Cases but Different Variables

E Open one of the data files.

Data
Merge Files
Add Variables...
E Select the data file to merge with the open data file.
To Select Key Variables
E Select the variables from the external file variables (+) on the Excluded Variables list.
E Select Match cases on key variables in sorted files.
E Add the variables to the Key Variables list.
The key variables must exist in both the working data file and the external data file.
Both data files must be sorted by ascending order of the key variables, and the order
of variables on the Key Variables list must be the same as their sort sequence.
162
Chapter 8
Add Variables: Rename

You can rename variables from either the working data file or the external file before
moving them to the list of variables to be included in the merged data file. This is
primarily useful if you want to include two variables with the same name that contain
different information in the two files.
Aggregate Data
Aggregate Data combines groups of cases into single summary cases and creates a
new aggregated data file. Cases are aggregated based on the value of one or more
grouping variables. The new data file contains one case for each group. For example,
you could aggregate county data by state and create a new data file in which state
is the unit of analysis.
Figure 8-5
Aggregate Data dialog box
Break Variable(s). Cases are grouped together based on the values of the break
variables. Each unique combination of break variable values defines a group and
generates one case in the new aggregated file. All break variables are saved in the
163
new file with their existing names and dictionary information. The break variable
can be either numeric or string format.
Aggregate Variable(s). Variables are used with aggregate functions to create the new
variables for the aggregated file. By default, Aggregate Data creates new aggregate
variable names using the first several characters of the source variable name followed
by an underscore and a sequential two-digit number. The aggregate variable name is
followed by an optional variable label in quotes, the name of the aggregate function,
and the source variable name in parentheses. Source variables for aggregate functions
must be numeric.
You can override the default aggregate variable names with new variable names,
provide descriptive variable labels, and change the functions used to compute the
aggregated data values. You can also create a variable that contains the number
of cases in each break group.
To Aggregate a Data File

Data
Aggregate...
E Select one or more break variables that define how cases are grouped to create
aggregated data.
E Select one or more aggregate variables to include in the new data file.
E Select an aggregate function for each aggregate variable.
Aggregate Data: Aggregate Function

This dialog box specifies the function to use to calculate aggregated data values for
selected variables on the Aggregate Variables list in the Aggregate Data dialog box.
Aggregate functions include:
Summary functions, including mean, median, standard deviation, and sum.
Number of cases, including unweighted, weighted, non-missing, and missing.
164
Chapter 8
Percentage or fraction of values above or below a specified value.

Percentage or fraction of values inside or outside of a specified range.
Figure 8-6
Aggregate Function dialog box
Aggregate Data: Variable Name and Label

Aggregate Data assigns default variable names for the aggregated variables in the new
data file. This dialog box enables you to change the variable name for the selected
variable on the Aggregate Variables list and provide a descriptive variable label. For
more information, see “Variable Names” in Chapter 5 on page 76.
Figure 8-7
Variable Name and Label dialog box
165
Split File
Split File splits the data file into separate groups for analysis based on the values of
one or more grouping variables. If you select multiple grouping variables, cases
are grouped by each variable within categories of the preceding variable on the
Groups Based On list. For example, if you select gender as the first grouping variable
and minority as the second grouping variable, cases will be grouped by minority
classification within each gender category.
You can specify up to eight grouping variables.
Each eight characters of a long string variable (string variables longer than eight
characters) counts as a variable toward the limit of eight grouping variables.
Cases should be sorted by values of the grouping variables and in the same order
that variables are listed in the Groups Based On list. If the data file isn't already
sorted, select Sort the file by grouping variables.
Figure 8-8
Split File dialog box
Compare groups. Split-file groups are presented together for comparison purposes. For
pivot tables, a single pivot table is created and each split-file variable can be moved
between table dimensions. For charts, a separate chart is created for each split-file
group and the charts are displayed together in the Viewer.
166
Chapter 8
Organize output by groups. All results from each procedure are displayed separately
for each split-file group.
To Split a Data File for Analysis

Data
Split File...
E Select Compare groups or Organize output by groups.
E Select one or more grouping variables.
Select Cases
Select Cases provides several methods for selecting a subgroup of cases based on
criteria that include variables and complex expressions. You can also select a random
sample of cases. The criteria used to define a subgroup can include:
Variable values and ranges
Date and time ranges
Case (row) numbers
Arithmetic expressions
Logical expressions
Functions
167
Figure 8-9
Select Cases dialog box
All cases. Turns case filtering off and uses all cases.
If condition is satisfied. Use a conditional expression to select cases. If the result of
the conditional expression is true, the case is selected. If the result is false or missing,
the case is not selected.
Random sample of cases. Selects a random sample based on an approximate
percentage or an exact number of cases.
Based on time or case range. Selects cases based on a range of case numbers or
a range of dates/times.
Use filter variable. Use the selected numeric variable from the data file as the filter
variable. Cases with any value other than 0 or missing for the filter variable are
selected.
168
Chapter 8
Unselected Cases. You can filter or delete cases that do not meet the selection criteria.
Filtered cases remain in the data file but are excluded from analysis. Select Cases
creates a filter variable, filter_$, to indicate filter status. Selected cases have a value
of 1; filtered cases have a value of 0. Filtered cases are also indicated with a slash
through the row number in the Data Editor. To turn filtering off and include all
cases in your analysis, select All cases.
Deleted cases are removed from the data file and cannot be recovered if you save the
data file after deleting the cases.
To Select a Subset of Cases

Data
Select Cases...
E Select one of the methods for selecting cases.
E Specify the criteria for selecting cases.
Select Cases: If
This dialog box allows you to select subsets of cases using conditional expressions. A
conditional expression returns a value of true, false, or missing for each case.
169
Figure 8-10
Select Cases If dialog box
If the result of a conditional expression is true, the case is selected.

If the result of a conditional expression is false or missing, the case is not selected.
Most conditional expressions use one or more of the six relational operators (<, >,
<=, >=, =, and ~=) on the calculator pad.
Conditional expressions can include variable names, constants, arithmetic
operators, numeric and other functions, logical variables, and relational operators.
Select Cases: Random Sample

This dialog box allows you to select a random sample based on an approximate
percentage or an exact number of cases. Sampling is performed without replacement;
so the same case cannot be selected more than once.
170
Chapter 8
Figure 8-11
Select Cases Random Sample dialog box
Approximately. Generates a random sample of approximately the specified percentage

of cases. Since this routine makes an independent pseudo-random decision for each
case, the percentage of cases selected can only approximate the specified percentage.
The more cases there are in the data file, the closer the percentage of cases selected
is to the specified percentage.
Exactly. A user-specified number of cases. You must also specify the number of
cases from which to generate the sample. This second number should be less than
or equal to the total number of cases in the data file. If the number exceeds the
total number of cases in the data file, the sample will contain proportionally fewer
cases than the requested number.
Select Cases: Range

This dialog box selects cases based on a range of case numbers or a range of dates
or times.
Case ranges are based on row number as displayed in the Data Editor.
Date and time ranges are available only for time series data with defined date
variables (Data menu, Define Dates).
171
Figure 8-12
Select Cases Range dialog box for range of cases (no defined date variables)
Figure 8-13
Select Cases Range dialog box for time series data with defined date variables
Weight Cases
Weight Cases gives cases different weights (by simulated replication) for statistical
analysis.
The values of the weighting variable should indicate the number of observations
represented by single cases in your data file.
172
Chapter 8
Cases with zero, negative, or missing values for the weighting variable are
excluded from analysis.
Fractional values are valid; they are used exactly where this is meaningful and
most likely where cases are tabulated.
Figure 8-14
Weight Cases dialog box
Once you apply a weight variable, it remains in effect until you select another weight
variable or turn off weighting. If you save a weighted data file, weighting information
is saved with the data file. You can turn off weighting at any time, even after the
file has been saved in weighted form.
Weights in Crosstabs. The Crosstabs procedure has several options for handling
case weights. For more information, see “Crosstabs Cell Display” in Chapter 16
on page 313.
Weights in scatterplots and histograms. Scatterplots and histograms have an option for
turning case weights on and off, but this does not affect cases with a zero, negative, or
missing value for the weight variable. These cases remain excluded from the chart
even if you turn weighting off from within the chart.
To Weight Cases
Data
Weight Cases...
E Select Weight cases by.

173
E Select a frequency variable.
The values of the frequency variable are used as case weights. For example, a case
with a value of 3 for the frequency variable will represent three cases in the weighted
data file.
Restructuring Data
Use the Restructure Data Wizard to restructure your data for the SPSS procedure
that you want to use. The wizard replaces the current file with a new, restructured
file. The wizard can:
Restructure selected variables into cases.
Restructure selected cases into variables.
Transpose all data.
To Restructure Data
Data
Restructure...
E Select the type of restructuring that you want to do.
E Select the data to restructure.

Create identification variables, which allow you to trace a value in the new file
back to a value in the original file.
Sort the data prior to restructuring.
Define options for the new file.
Paste the command syntax into a syntax window.
174
Chapter 8
Restructure Data Wizard: Select Type

Use the Restructure Data Wizard to restructure your data. In the first dialog box,
select the type of restructuring that you want to do.
Figure 8-15
Restructure Data Wizard
Restructure selected variables into cases. Choose this when you have groups of
related columns in your data and you want them to appear in groups of rows
in the new data file.
If you choose this, the wizard will display the steps for Variables to Cases.
Restructure selected cases into variables. Choose this when you have groups of
related rows in your data and you want them to appear in groups of columns
in the new data file.
175
If you choose this, the wizard will display the steps for Cases to Variables.
Transpose all data. Choose this when you want to transpose your data. All
rows will become columns and all columns will become rows in the new data.
This choice closes the Restructure Data Wizard and opens the Transpose Data
dialog box.
Deciding How to Restructure the Data
A variable contains information that you want to analyze—for example, a

measurement or a score. A case is an observation—for example, an individual. In a
simple data structure, each variable is a single column in your data and each case
is a single row. So, for example, if you were measuring test scores for all students
in a class, all score values would appear in only one column, and there would be a
row for each student.
When you analyze data, you are often analyzing how a variable varies according
to some condition. The condition can be a specific experimental treatment, a
demographic, a point in time, or something else. In data analysis, conditions of
interest are often referred to as factors. When you analyze factors, you have a
complex data structure. You may have information about a variable in more than one
column in your data (for example, a column for each level of a factor), or you may
have information about a case in more than one row (for example, a row for each
level of a factor). The Restructure Data Wizard helps you to restructure files with a
complex data structure.
The structure of the current file and the structure that you want in the new file
determine the choices that you make in the wizard.
How are the data arranged in the current file? The current data may be arranged so that
factors are recorded in a separate variable (in groups of cases) or with the variable
(in groups of variables).
Groups of cases. Does the current file have variables and conditions recorded
in separate columns? For example:
var factor
8 1
9 1
176
Chapter 8
3 2
1 2
In this example, the first two rows are a case group because they are related. They
contain data for the same factor level. In SPSS data analysis, the factor is often
referred to as a grouping variable when the data are structured this way.
Groups of columns. Does the current file have variables and conditions recorded
in the same column? For example:
var_1 var_2
8 3
9 1
In this example, the two columns are a variable group because they are related. They
contain data for the same variable—var_1 for factor level 1 and var_2 for factor
level 2. In SPSS data analysis, the factor is often referred to as a repeated measure
when the data are structured this way.
How should the data be arranged in the new file? This is usually determined by the
procedure that you want to use to analyze your data.
Procedures that require groups of cases. Your data must be structured in case
groups to do analyses that require a grouping variable. Examples are univariate,
multivariate, and variance components with General Linear Model; Mixed
Models; OLAP Cubes; and independent samples with T Test or Nonparametric
Tests. If your current data structure is variable groups and you want to do these
analyses, select Restructure selected variables into cases.
Procedures that require groups of variables. Your data must be structured in
variable groups to analyze repeated measures. Examples are repeated measures
with General Linear Model, time-dependent covariate analysis with Cox
Regression Analysis, paired samples with T Test, or related samples with
Nonparametric Tests. If your current data structure is case groups and you want
to do these analyses, select Restructure selected cases into variables.
Example of Variables to Cases
In this example, test scores are recorded in separate columns for each factor, A and B.
177
Figure 8-16
Current data for variables to cases
You want to do an independent samples t test. You have a column group consisting of
score_a and score_b, but you don't have the grouping variable that the procedure
requires. Select Restructure selected variables into cases in the Restructure Data
Wizard, restructure one variable group into a new variable named score, and create an
index named group. The new data file is shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-17
New, restructured data for variables to cases
When you run the independent samples t test, you can now use group as the grouping
variable.
Example of Cases to Variables
In this example, test scores are recorded twice for each subject, before and after
a treatment.
Figure 8-18
Current data for cases to variables
178
Chapter 8
You want to do a paired samples t test. Your data structure is case groups, but you
don't have the repeated measures for the paired variables that the procedure requires.
Select Restructure selected cases into variables in the Restructure Data Wizard, use
id to identify the row groups in the current data, and use time to create the variable
group in the new file.
Figure 8-19
New, restructured data for cases to variables
When you run the paired samples t test, you can now use bef and aft as the variable
pair.
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Number of Variable Groups

Note: The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups
into rows.
In this step, decide how many variable groups in the current file that you want
to restructure in the new file.
How many variable groups are in the current file? Think about how many variable
groups exist in the current data. A group of related columns, called a variable group,
records repeated measures of the same variable in separate columns. For example, if
you have three columns in the current data—w1, w2, and w3—that record width,
you have one variable group. If you have an additional three columns—h1, h2, and
h3—that record height, you have two variable groups.
How many variable groups should be in the new file? Consider how many variable
groups you want to have represented in the new data file. You do not have to
restructure all variable groups into the new file.
179
Figure 8-20
Restructure Data Wizard: Number of Variable Groups
One. The wizard will create a single restructured variable in the new file from
one variable group in the current file.
More than one. The wizard will create multiple restructured variables in the new
file. The number that you specify affects the next step, in which the wizard
automatically creates the specified number of new variables.
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Select Variables

into rows.
180
Chapter 8
In this step, provide information about how the variables in the current file should
be used in the new file. You can also create a variable that identifies the rows in
the new file.
Figure 8-21
Restructure Data Wizard: Select Variables
How should the new rows be identified? You can create a variable in the new data file
that identifies the row in the current data file that was used to create a group of new
rows. The identifier can be a sequential case number or it can be the values of the
variable. Use the controls in Case Group Identification to define the identification
variable in the new file. Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a
descriptive variable label for the identification variable.
What should be restructured in the new file? In the previous step, you told the
wizard how many variable groups you want to restructure. The wizard created one
new variable for each group. The values for the variable group will appear in that
181
variable in the new file. Use the controls in Variables to be Transposed to define
the restructured variable in the new file.
To Specify One Restructured Variable
E Put the variables that make up the variable group that you want to transform into the
Variables to be Transposed list. All of the variables in the group must be of the
same type (numeric or string).
You can include the same variable more than once in the variable group (variables are
copied rather than moved from the source variable list); its values are repeated in
the new file.
To Specify Multiple Restructured Variables
E Select the first target variable that you want to define from the Target Variable
drop-down list.
E Put the variables that make up the variable group that you want to transform into the
Variables to be Transposed list. All of the variables in the group must be of the same
type (numeric or string). You can include the same variable more than once in the
variable group. (A variable is copied rather than moved from the source variable list,
and its values are repeated in the new file.)
E Select the next target variable that you want to define, and repeat the variable selection
process for all available target variables.
Although you can include the same variable more than once in the same target
variable group, you cannot include the same variable in more than one target
variable group.
Each target variable group list must contain the same number of variables.
(Variables that are listed more than once are included in the count.)
The number of target variable groups is determined by the number of variable
groups that you specified in the previous step. You can change the default
variable names here, but you must return to the previous step to change the
number of variable groups to restructure.
You must define variable groups (by selecting variables in the source list) for all
available target variables before you can proceed to the next step.
182
Chapter 8
What should be copied into the new file? Variables that aren't restructured can be
copied into the new file. Their values will be propagated in the new rows. Move
variables that you want to copy into the new file into the Fixed Variable(s) list.
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Create Index Variables

into rows.
In this step, decide whether to create index variables. An index is a new variable that
sequentially identifies a row group based on the original variable from which the
new row was created.
Figure 8-22
Restructure Data Wizard: Create Index Variables
183
How many index variables should be in the new file? Index variables can be used as
grouping variables in SPSS procedures. In most cases, a single index variable is
sufficient; however, if the variable groups in your current file reflect multiple factor
levels, multiple indices may be appropriate.
One. The wizard will create a single index variable.
More than one. The wizard will create multiple indices and enter the number of
indices that you want to create. The number that you specify affects the next step,
in which the wizard automatically creates the specified number of indices.
None. Select this if you do not want to create index variables in the new file.
Example of One Index for Variables to Cases
In the current data, there is one variable group, width, and one factor, time. Width was
measured three times and recorded in w1, w2, and w3.
Figure 8-23
Current data for one index
We'll restructure the variable group into a single variable, width, and create a single
numeric index. The new data are shown in the following table.
Figure 8-24
New, restructured data with one index
Index starts with 1 and increments for each variable in the group. It restarts each
time a new row is encountered in the original file. We can now use index in SPSS
procedures that require a grouping variable.
184
Chapter 8
Example of Two Indices for Variables to Cases
When a variable group records more than one factor, you can create more than one
index; however, the current data must be arranged so that the levels of the first factor
are a primary index within which the levels of subsequent factors cycle. In the current
data, there is one variable group, width, and two factors, A and B. The data are
arranged so that levels of factor B cycle within levels of factor A.
Figure 8-25
Current data for two indices
We'll restructure the variable group into a single variable, width, and create two
indices. The new data are shown in the following table.
Figure 8-26
New, restructured data with two indices
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Create One Index Variable

into rows and create one index variable.
In this step, decide what values you want for the index variable. The values can be
sequential numbers or the names of the variables in an original variable group. You
can also specify a name and a label for the new index variable.
185
Figure 8-27
Restructure Data Wizard: Create One Index Variable
For more information, see “Example of One Index for Variables to Cases” on page
183.
Sequential numbers. The wizard will automatically assign sequential numbers
as index values.
Variable names. The wizard will use the names of the selected variable group as
index values. Choose a variable group from the list.
Names and labels. Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide
a descriptive variable label for the index variable.
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Create Multiple Index Variables

Note: The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into
rows and create multiple index variables.
186
Chapter 8
In this step, specify the number of levels for each index variable. You can also specify
a name and a label for the new index variable.
Figure 8-28
Restructure Data Wizard: Create Multiple Index Variables
For more information, see “Example of Two Indices for Variables to Cases” on
page 184.
How many levels are recorded in the current file? Consider how many factor levels
are recorded in the current data. A level defines a group of cases that experienced
identical conditions. If there are multiple factors, the current data must be arranged
so that the levels of the first factor are a primary index within which the levels of
subsequent factors cycle.
How many levels should be in the new file? Enter the number of levels for each index.
The values for multiple index variables are always sequential numbers. The values
start at 1 and increment for each level. The first index increments the slowest, and the
last index increments the fastest.
187
Total combined levels. You cannot create more levels than exist in the current
data. Because the restructured data will contain one row for each combination of
treatments, the wizard checks the number of levels that you create. It will compare
the product of the levels that you create to the number of variables in your variable
groups. They must match.
Names and labels. Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a
descriptive variable label for the index variables.
Restructure Data Wizard (Variables to Cases): Options

into rows.
In this step, specify options for the new, restructured file.

188
Chapter 8
Figure 8-29
Restructure Data Wizard: Options
Drop unselected variables? In the select variables step (step 3), you selected variable
groups to be restructured, variables to be copied, and an identification variable from
the current data. The data from the selected variables will appear in the new file. If
there are other variables in the current data, you can choose to discard or keep them.
Keep missing data? The wizard checks each potential new row for null values. A null
value is a system-missing or blank value. You can choose to keep or discard rows
that contain only null values.
Create a count variable? The wizard can create a count variable in the new file. It
contains the number of new rows generated by a row in the current data. A count
variable may be useful if you choose to discard null values from the new file because
that makes it possible to generate a different number of new rows for a given row
189
in the current data. Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a
descriptive variable label for the count variable.
Restructure Data Wizard (Cases to Variables): Select Variables

Note: The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure case groups into
columns.
In this step, provide information about how the variables in the current file should
be used in the new file.
Figure 8-30
Restructure Data Wizard: Select Variables
What identifies case groups in the current data? A case group is a group of rows
that are related because they measure the same observational unit—for example,
an individual or an institution. The wizard needs to know which variables in the
190
Chapter 8
current file identify the case groups so that it can consolidate each group into a
single row in the new file. Move variables that identify case groups in the current
file into the Identifier Variable(s) list. Variables that are used to split the current data
file are automatically used to identify case groups. Each time a new combination
of identification values is encountered, the wizard will create a new row, so cases
in the current file should be sorted by values of the identification variables, in the
same order that variables are listed in the Identifier Variable(s) list. If the current data
file isn't already sorted, you can sort it in the next step.
How should the new variable groups be created in the new file? In the original data, a
variable appears in a single column. In the new data file, that variable will appear
in multiple new columns. Index variables are variables in the current data that the
wizard should use to create the new columns. The restructured data will contain one
new variable for each unique value in these columns. Move the variables that should
be used to form the new variable groups to the Index Variable(s) list. When the wizard
presents options, you can also choose to order the new columns by index.
What happens to the other columns? The wizard automatically decides what to do
with the variables that remain in the Current File list. It checks each variable to see
if the data values vary within a case group. If they do, the wizard restructures the
values into a variable group in the new file. If they don't, the wizard copies the
values into the new file.
Restructure Data Wizard (Cases to Variables): Sort Data

columns.
In this step, decide whether to sort the current file before restructuring it. Each
time the wizard encounters a new combination of identification values, a new row
is created, so it is important that the data are sorted by the variables that identify
case groups.
191
Figure 8-31
Restructure Data Wizard: Sort Data
How are the rows ordered in the current file? Consider how the current data are sorted
and which variables you are using to identify case groups (specified in the previous
step).
Yes. The wizard will automatically sort the current data by the identification
variables, in the same order that variables are listed in the Identifier Variable(s) list
in the previous step. Choose this when the data aren't sorted by the identification
variables or when you aren't sure. This choice requires a separate pass of the
data, but it guarantees that the rows are correctly ordered for restructuring.
No. The wizard will not sort the current data. Choose this when you are sure that
the current data are sorted by the variables that identify case groups.
192
Chapter 8
Restructure Data Wizard (Cases to Variables): Options

columns.
In this step, specify options for the new, restructured file.

Figure 8-32
Restructure Data Wizard: Options
How should the new variable groups be ordered in the new file?
By variable. The wizard groups the new variables created from an original
variable together.
By index. The wizard groups the variables according to the values of the index
variables.
193
Example. The variables to be restructured are w and h, and the index is month:
w h month
Grouping by variable results in:

w.jan w.feb h.jan
Grouping by index results in:

w.jan h.jan w.feb
Create a count variable? The wizard can create a count variable in the new file. It
contains the number of rows in the current data that were used to create a row in
the new data file.
Create indicator variables? The wizard can use the index variables to create indicator
variables in the new data file. It creates one new variable for each unique value of the
index variable. The indicator variables signal the presence or absence of a value for a
case. An indicator variable has the value of 1 if the case has a value; otherwise, it is 0.
Example. The index variable is product. It records the products that a customer
purchased. The original data are:
customer product
1 chick
1 eggs
2 eggs
3 chick
Creating an indicator variable results in one new variable for each unique value
of product. The restructured data are:
customer indchick indeggs
1 1 1
2 0 1
3 1 0
194
Chapter 8
In this example, the restructured data could be used to get frequency counts of the
products that customers buy.
Restructure Data Wizard: Finish

This is the final step of the Restructure Data Wizard. Decide what to do with your
specifications.
Figure 8-33
Restructure Data Wizard: Finish
195
Restructure now. The wizard will create the new, restructured file. Choose this
if you want to replace the current file immediately. Note: If original data are
weighted, the new data will be weighted unless the variable that is used as the
weight is restructured or dropped from the new file.
Paste syntax. The wizard will paste the syntax it generates into a syntax window.
Choose this when you are not ready to replace the current file, when you want to
modify the syntax, or when you want to save it for future use.
Chapter
9
Working with Output
When you run a procedure, the results are displayed in a window called the Viewer. In
this window, you can easily navigate to whichever part of the output that you want to
see. You can also manipulate the output and create a document that contains precisely
the output that you want, arranged and formatted appropriately.
Viewer
Results are displayed in the Viewer. You can use the Viewer to:
Browse results.
Show or hide selected tables and charts.
Change the display order of results by moving selected items.
Move items between the Viewer and other applications.
197
198
Chapter 9
Figure 9-1
Viewer
Double-click
a book icon
to show or
hide an item
Click to
expand or
collapse the
outlIne view
Outline pane Contents pane

Click an item to select Double-click a table
it and go directly to it to pivot or edit it
The Viewer is divided into two panes:

The left pane of the Viewer contains an outline view of the contents.
The right pane contains statistical tables, charts, and text output.
You can use the scroll bars to browse the results, or you can click an item in the
outline to go directly to the corresponding table or chart. You can click and drag the
right border of the outline pane to change the width of the outline pane.
Using the Draft Viewer

If you prefer simple text output rather than interactive pivot tables, you can use
the Draft Viewer.
To use the Draft Viewer:
199
Working with Output

Edit
Options...
E On the General tab, click Draft Viewer for the output type.
E To change the format options for Draft Viewer output, click the Draft Viewer tab.
For more information, see “Draft Viewer” in Chapter 10 on page 229.

Help
Topics
E Click the Index tab in the Help Topics window.
E Type draft viewer, and double-click the index entry.
Showing and Hiding Results

In the Viewer, you can selectively show and hide individual tables or results from
an entire procedure. This is useful when you want to shorten the amount of visible
output in the contents pane.
Hiding Tables and Charts
E Double-click its book icon in the outline pane of the Viewer.
or
E Click the item to select it.

View
Hide
or
E Click the closed book (Hide) icon on the Outlining toolbar.

200
Chapter 9
The open book (Show) icon becomes the active icon, indicating that the item is
now hidden.
Hiding Procedure Results
E Click the box to the left of the procedure name in the outline pane.
This hides all of the results from the procedure and collapses the outline view.
Moving, Deleting, and Copying Output

You can rearrange the results by copying, moving, or deleting an item or a group
of items.
Moving Output in the Viewer
E Click an item in the outline or contents pane to select it. (Shift-click to select multiple
items, or Ctrl-click to select noncontiguous items.)
E Use the mouse to click and drag selected items (hold down the mouse button while
dragging).
E Release the mouse button on the item just above the location where you want to
drop the moved items.
You can also move items by using Cut and Paste After on the Edit menu.
Deleting Output in the Viewer
E Click an item in the outline or contents pane to select it. (Shift-click to select multiple
items, or Ctrl-click to select noncontiguous items.)
201
Working with Output
E Press Delete.
or

Edit
Delete
Copying Output in the Viewer
E Click items in the outline or contents pane to select them. (Shift-click to select
multiple items, or Ctrl-click to select noncontiguous items.)
E Hold down the Ctrl key while you use the mouse to click and drag selected items
(hold down the mouse button while dragging).
E Release the mouse button to drop the items where you want them.
You can also copy items by using Copy and Paste After on the Edit menu or the
context menu.
Changing Alignment
By default, all results are initially left-aligned. You can change the initial alignment
(choose Options on the Edit menu, then click the Viewer tab) or the alignment of
selected items at any time.
Changing Output Alignment

E Select the items that you want to align (click the items in the outline or contents pane;
Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple items).

Format
Align Left
Other alignment options include Center and Align Right.

202
Chapter 9
Note: All results are displayed left-aligned in the Viewer. Only the alignment of
printed results is affected by the alignment settings. Centered and right-aligned items
are identified by a small symbol above and to the left of the item.
Viewer Outline
The outline pane provides a table of contents of the Viewer document. You can use
the outline pane to navigate through your results and control the display. Most actions
in the outline pane have a corresponding effect on the contents pane.
Selecting an item in the outline pane selects and displays the corresponding item
in the contents pane.
Moving an item in the outline pane moves the corresponding item in the contents
pane.
Collapsing the outline view hides the results from all items in the collapsed levels.
Figure 9-2
Collapsed outline view and hidden results
Click here to expand or Output from collapsed outline view

collapse the outline view hidden from contents pane
203
Working with Output
Controlling the outline display. To control the outline display, you can:
Expand and collapse the outline view.
Change the outline level for selected items.
Change the size of items in the outline display.
Change the font used in the outline display.
Collapsing and Expanding the Outline View
E Click the box to the left of the outline item that you want to collapse or expand.
or
E Click the item in the outline.

View
Collapse
or
View
Expand
Changing the Outline Level
E Click the item in the outline pane to select it.
E Click the left arrow on the Outlining toolbar to promote the item (move the item
to the left).
E Click the right arrow on the Outlining toolbar to demote the item (move the item
to the right).
or
From the menus choose:
Edit
Outline
Promote
204
Chapter 9
or
Edit
Outline
Demote
Changing the outline level is particularly useful after you move items in the outline
level. Moving items can change the outline level of the selected items, and you can
use the left and right arrow buttons on the Outlining toolbar to restore the original
outline level.
Changing the Size of Outline Items

View
Outline Size
Small
Other options include Medium and Large.

The icons and their associated text change size.
Changing the Font in the Outline

View
Outline Font...
E Select a font.
Adding Items to the Viewer
In the Viewer, you can add items such as titles, new text, charts, or material from
other applications.
Adding a Title or Text
Text items that are not connected to a table or chart can be added to the Viewer.
205
Working with Output
E Click the table, chart, or other object that will precede the title or text.

Insert
New Title
or
Insert
New Text
E Double-click the new object.
E Enter the text that you want at this location.
Inserting a Chart
Charts from older versions of SPSS can be inserted into the Viewer. To insert a chart:
E Click the table, chart, or other object that will precede the chart.

Insert
Old Graph...
E Select a chart file.
Adding a Text File
E In either the outline or the contents pane of the Viewer, click the table, chart, or
other object that will precede the text.

Insert
Text File...
E Select a text file.
To edit the text, double-click it.

206
Chapter 9
Using Output in Other Applications

Pivot tables and charts can be copied and pasted into another Windows application,
such as a word processing program or a spreadsheet. You can paste the pivot tables
or charts in various formats, including the following:
Embedded object. For applications that support ActiveX objects, you can embed pivot
tables and interactive charts. After you paste the table, it can be activated in place
by double-clicking and then edited as if in the Viewer.
Picture (metafile). You can paste pivot tables, text output, and charts as metafile
pictures. The picture format can be resized in the other application, and sometimes
a limited amount of editing can be done with the facilities of the other application.
Pivot tables pasted as pictures retain all borders and font characteristics.
RTF (rich text format). Pivot tables can be pasted into other applications in RTF format.
In most applications, this pastes the pivot table as a table that can then be edited in
the other application.
Bitmap. Charts can be pasted into other applications as bitmaps.
BIFF. The contents of a table can be pasted into a spreadsheet and retain numeric
precision.
Text. The contents of a table can be copied and pasted as text. This can be useful for
applications such as e-mail, where the application can accept or transmit only text.
Copying a Table or Chart

E Select the table or chart to be copied.

Edit
Copy
Copying and Pasting Results into Another Application

E Copy the results in the Viewer.
207
Working with Output
E From the menus in the target application choose:

Edit
Paste
or
Edit
Paste Special...
Paste. Output is copied to the clipboard in a number of formats. Each application

determines the “best” format to use for Paste. In many applications, Paste will paste
results as a picture (metafile). For word processing applications, Paste will paste
pivot tables in RTF format, which pastes the pivot table as a table. For spreadsheet
applications, Paste will paste pivot tables in BIFF format. Charts are pasted as
metafiles.
Paste Special. Results are copied to the clipboard in multiple formats. Paste Special
allows you to select the format that you want from the list of formats available to
the target application.
Embedding a Table in Another Application

You can embed pivot tables and interactive charts in other applications in ActiveX
format. An embedded object can be activated in place by double-clicking and can
then be edited and pivoted as if in the Viewer.
If you have applications that support ActiveX objects:
E Run the file objs-on.bat, located in the directory in which the program is installed.
(Double-click the file to run it.)
This turns on ActiveX embedding for pivot tables. The file objs-off.bat turns ActiveX
embedding off.
To embed a pivot table or interactive chart in another application:
E In the Viewer, copy the table.

208
Chapter 9

Edit
Paste Special...
E From the list select SPSS Pivot Table ObjectorSPSS Graphics Control Object.
The target application must support ActiveX objects. See the application's
documentation for information on ActiveX support. Some applications that do not
support ActiveX may initially accept ActiveX pivot tables but may then exhibit
unstable behavior. Do not rely on embedded objects until you have tested the
application's stability with embedded ActiveX objects.
Pasting a Pivot Table or Chart as a Picture (Metafile)

E In the Viewer, copy the table or chart.

Edit
Paste Special...
E From the list, select Picture.
The item is pasted as a metafile. Only the layer and columns that were visible when
the item was copied are available in the metafile. Other layers or hidden columns
are not available.
Pasting a Pivot Table as a Table (RTF)

E In the Viewer, copy the pivot table.

Edit
Paste Special...
E From the list select Formatted Text (RTF) or Rich Text Format.
The pivot table is pasted as a table. Only the layer and columns that were visible
when the item was copied are pasted into the table. Other layers or hidden columns
are not available. You can copy and paste only one pivot table at a time in this format.
209
Working with Output
Pasting a Pivot Table as Text
E In the Viewer, copy the table.

Edit
Paste Special...
E From the list select Unformatted Text.
Unformatted pivot table text contains tabs between columns. You can align columns
by adjusting the tab stops in the other application.
Copying and Pasting Multiple Items into Another Application
E Select the tables and/or charts to be copied. (Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select

multiple items.)

Edit
Copy objects
E In the target application, from the menus choose:

Edit
Paste
Note: Use Copy Objects only to copy multiple items from the Viewer to another
application. For copying and pasting within Viewer documents (for example, between
two Viewer windows), use Copy on the Edit menu.
Pasting Objects into the Viewer

Objects from other applications can be pasted into the Viewer. You can use either
Paste After or Paste Special. Either type of pasting puts the new object after the
currently selected object in the Viewer. Use Paste Special when you want to choose
the format of the pasted object.
210
Chapter 9
Paste Special
Paste Special allows you to select the format of a copied object that is pasted into the
Viewer. The possible file types for the object on the clipboard are listed. The object
will be inserted in the Viewer following the currently selected object.
Figure 9-3
Paste Special dialog box
Pasting Objects from Other Applications into the Viewer

E Copy the object in the other application.
E In either the outline or the contents pane of the Viewer, click the table, chart, or
other object that will precede the object.

Edit
Paste Special...
E From the list, select the format for the object.
Export Output
Export Output saves pivot tables and text output in HTML, text, Word/RTF, and Excel
format, and it saves charts in a variety of common formats used by other applications.
211
Working with Output
Output Document. Exports any combination of pivot tables, text output, and charts.
For HTML and text formats, charts are exported in the currently selected chart
export format. For HTML document format, charts are embedded by reference,
and you should export charts in a suitable format for inclusion in HTML
documents. For text document format, a line is inserted in the text file for each
chart, indicating the filename of the exported chart.
For Word/RTF format, charts are exported in Windows metafile format and
embedded in the Word document.
Charts are not included in Excel documents.
Output Document (No Charts). Exports pivot tables and text output. Any charts in
the Viewer are ignored.
Charts Only. Available export formats include: Windows metafile (WMF), Windows
bitmap (BMP), encapsulated PostScript (EPS), JPEG, TIFF, PNG, and Macintosh
PICT.
Export What. You can export all objects in the Viewer, all visible objects, or only
selected objects.
Export Format. For output documents, the available options are HTML, text,
Word/RTF, and Excel; for HTML and text format, charts are exported in the currently
selected chart format in the Options dialog box for the selected format. For Charts
Only, select a chart export format from the drop-down list. For output documents,
pivot tables and text are exported in the following manner:
HTML file (*.htm). Pivot tables are exported as HTML tables. Text output is
exported as preformatted HTML.
Text file (*.txt). Pivot tables can be exported in tab-separated or space-separated
format. All text output is exported in space-separated format.
Excel file (*.xls). Pivot table rows, columns, and cells are exported as Excel rows,
columns, and cells, with all formatting attributes—for example, cell borders, font
styles, background colors, etc. Text output is exported with all font attributes.
Each line in the text output is a row in the Excel file, with the entire contents
of the line contained in a single cell.
Word/RTF file (*.doc). Pivot tables are exported as Word tables with all formatting
attributes—for example, cell borders, font styles, background colors, etc. Text
output is exported as formatted RTF. Text output in SPSS is always displayed in
212
Chapter 9
a fixed-pitch font and is exported with the same font attributes. A fixed-pitch
(monospaced) font is required for proper alignment of space-separated text
output.
Output Management System.You can also automatically export all output or

user-specified types of output as text, HTML, XML, and SPSS-format data files. For
more information, see “Output Management System” in Chapter 47 on page 643.
Exporting Output
E Make the Viewer the active window (click anywhere in the window).

File
Export...
E Enter a filename (or prefix for charts) and select an export format.
Figure 9-4
Export Output dialog box
213
Working with Output
Figure 9-5
Output exported in HTML format
HTML, Word/RTF, and Excel Options

This dialog box controls the inclusion of footnotes and captions for documents
exported in HTML, Word/RTF, and Excel format and the chart export options for
HTML documents.
214
Chapter 9
Image Format. Controls the chart export format and optional settings, including chart
size for HTML documents. For Word/RTF, all charts are exported in Windows
metafile (WMF) format. For Excel, charts are not included.
Setting HTML, Word/RTF, and Excel Export Options


File
Export...
E Select HTML file or Word/RTF file or Excel file as the export format.
E Click Options.
Text Options
Text Options controls pivot table, text output, and chart format options and the
inclusion of footnotes and captions for documents exported in text format.
Figure 9-6
Text Options dialog box
215
Working with Output
Pivot tables can be exported in tab-separated or space-separated format. For

tab-separated format, if a cell is not empty, its contents and a tab character are printed.
If a cell is empty, a tab character is printed.
All text output is exported in space-separated format. All space-separated output
requires a fixed-pitch (monospaced) font for proper alignment.
Cell Formatting. For space-separated pivot tables, by default all line wrapping is
removed and each column is set to the width of the longest label or value in the
column. To limit the width of columns and wrap long labels, specify a number of
characters for the column width. This setting affects only pivot tables.
Cell Separators. For space-separated pivot tables, you can specify the characters used
to create cell borders.
Image Format. Controls the chart export format and optional settings, including chart
size.
Setting Text Export Options


File
Export...
E Select Text file as the export format.
E Click Options.
Chart Size
Chart Size controls the size of exported charts. The custom percentage specification
allows you to decrease or increase the size of the exported chart up to 200%.
216
Chapter 9
Figure 9-7
Export Chart Size dialog box
Setting Size for Exported Charts


File
Export...
E For output documents, click Options, select the export format, and click Chart Size.
E For Charts Only, select the export format, and click Chart Size.
JPEG Chart Export Options

Color Depth. JPEG charts can be exported as true color (24 bit) or 256 grayscale.
Color Space. Color Space refers to the way that colors are encoded in the image. The
YUV color model is one form of color encoding, commonly used for digital video
and MPEG transmission. The acronym stands for Y-signal, U-Signal, V-signal.
The Y component specifies grayscale or luminance, and the U and V components
correspond to the chrominance (color information).
The ratios represent the sampling rates for each component. Reducing the U and V
sampling rates reduces file size (and also quality). Color Space determines the degree
of “lossiness” for colors in the exported image. YUV 4:4:4 is lossless, while YUV
4:2:2 and YUV 4:1:1 represent the decreasing trade-off between file size (disk space)
and quality of the colors represented.
217
Working with Output
Progressive encoding. Enables the image to load in stages, initially displaying at low
resolution and then increasing in quality as the image continues to load.
Compression Quality Setting. Controls the ratio of compression to image quality. The
higher the image quality, the larger the exported file size.
Color Operations.The following operations are available:
Invert. Each pixel is saved as the inverse of the original color.
Gamma correction. Adjusts the intensity of colors in the exported chart by
changing the gamma constant that is used to map the intensity values. Basically,
it can be used to lighten and darken the bitmapped image. The value can range
from 0.10 (darkest) to 6.5 (lightest).
BMP and PICT Chart Export Options

Color Depth. Determines the number of colors in the exported chart. A chart saved
under any depth will have a minimum of the number of colors actually used and a
maximum of the number of colors allowed by the depth. For example, if the chart
contains three colors—red, white, and black, and you save it as 16 colors, the chart
will remain as three colors.
If the number of colors in the chart exceeds the number of colors for that depth,
the colors will be dithered to replicate the colors in the chart.
Current screen depth is the number of colors currently displayed on your computer
monitor.

Use RLE compression. (BMP only.) A lossless compression technique supported by

common Windows file formats. Lossless compression means that image quality has
not been sacrificed at the cost of smaller files.
218
Chapter 9
PNG and TIFF Chart Export Options

Color Depth. Determines the number of colors in the exported chart. A chart saved
under any depth will have a minimum of the number of colors actually used and a
maximum of the number of colors allowed by the depth. For example, if the chart
contains three colors—red, white, and black, and you save it as 16 colors, the chart
will remain as three colors.
If the number of colors in the chart exceeds the number of colors for that depth,
the colors will be dithered to replicate the colors in the chart.
Current screen depth is the number of colors currently displayed on your computer
monitor.

Transparency. Allows you to select a color that will appear transparent in the exported
chart. Available only with 32-bit true color export. Enter integer values between 0
and 255 for each color. The default value for each color is 255, creating a default
transparent color of white.
Format. (TIFF only) allows you to set the color space and compress the exported
chart. All color depths are available with RGB color. Only 24- and 32-bit true color is
available with CMYK. With the YCbCr option, only 24-bit true color is available.
EPS Chart Export Options

Image Preview. Allows you to save a preview image within the EPS image. A preview
image is used mainly when an EPS file is placed within another document. Many
applications cannot display an EPS image on screen but can display the preview saved
with the image. The preview image can be either WMF (smaller and more scalable)
or TIFF (more portable and supported by other platforms). Check the application in
which you want to include the EPS graphic to see what preview format it supports.
219
Working with Output
TrueType Fonts. Allows the user to select how TrueType fonts are saved in the EPS
image.
Embed as native TrueType (Level 3). Embeds most of the font data into the EPS,
including font hints (for example, good for scaling at small sizes). The resulting
PostScript font is called a Type 42 font. Note: Not all PostScript printers have
Level 3 drivers that can read Type 42 fonts.
Convert to PostScript fonts. Converts TrueType fonts to PostScript (Type 1) fonts
based on font family. For example, Times New Roman is converted to Times,
and Arial is converted to Helvetica. Note: This format is not recommended for
interactive graphics that use the SPSS marker font (for example, scatterplots),
because there are no meaningful PostScript equivalents for the SPSS TrueType
marker symbols.
Replace TrueType fonts with curves. Turns TrueType fonts into PostScript curve
data. The text itself is no longer editable as text in applications that can edit EPS
graphics. There is also a loss of quality, but this option is useful if you have a
PostScript printer that doesn't support Type 42 fonts and you need to preserve
special TrueType symbols, such as the markers used in interactive scatterplots.
WMF Chart Export Options

Aldus placeable. Provides a degree of device independence (same physical size when
opened at 96 versus 120 dpi), but not all applications support this format.
Standard Windows. Supported by most applications that can display Windows
metafiles.
Setting Chart Export Options


File
Export...
E For output documents, click Options, select the export format, and click Chart Options.
E For Charts Only, select the export format, and click Options.
220
Chapter 9
Viewer Printing
You can control the Viewer items that print in several ways:
All visible output. Prints only items currently displayed in the contents pane. Hidden
items (items with a closed book icon in the outline pane or hidden in collapsed
outline layers) are not printed.
All output. Prints all output, including hidden items.
Selection. Prints only items currently selected in the outline and/or contents panes.
Figure 9-8
Viewer Print dialog box
Printing Output and Charts


File
Print...
E Select the print settings that you want.

221
Working with Output
E Click OK to print.
Print Preview
Print Preview shows you what will print on each page for Viewer documents. It
is usually a good idea to check Print Preview before actually printing a Viewer
document because Print Preview shows you items that may not be visible simply by
looking at the contents pane of the Viewer, including:
Page breaks
Hidden layers of pivot tables
Breaks in wide tables
Complete output from large tables
Headers and footers printed on each page
222
Chapter 9
Figure 9-9
Print Preview
If any output is currently selected in the Viewer, the preview displays only the selected
output. To view a preview for all output, make sure nothing is selected in the Viewer.
Viewing a Print Preview

File
Print Preview
223
Working with Output
Page Setup
With Page Setup, you can control:
Paper size and orientation
Page margins
Page headers and footers
Page numbering
Printed size for charts
Figure 9-10
Page Setup dialog box
Page Setup settings are saved with the Viewer document. Page Setup affects settings
for printing Viewer documents only. These settings have no effect on printing data
from the Data Editor or syntax from a syntax window.
224
Chapter 9
Changing Page Setup

File
Page Setup...
E Change the settings and click OK.
Page Setup Options: Headers and Footers
Headers and footers are the information that prints at the top and bottom of each page.
You can enter any text that you want to use as headers and footers. You can also use
the toolbar in the middle of the dialog box to insert:
Date and time
Page numbers
Viewer filename
Outline heading labels
Page titles and subtitles
225
Working with Output
Figure 9-11
Page Setup Options Header/Footer tab
Outline heading labels indicate the first-, second-, third-, and/or fourth-level outline
heading for the first item on each page.
Page titles and subtitles print the current page titles and subtitles. Page titles and
subtitles are created with Insert New Page Title on the Viewer Insert menu or the
TITLE and SUBTITLE commands in command syntax. If you have not specified any
page titles or subtitles, this setting is ignored.
Note: Font characteristics for new page titles and subtitles are controlled on the
Viewer tab of the Options dialog box (Edit menu). Font characteristics for existing
page titles and subtitles can be changed by editing the titles in the Viewer.
Use Print Preview on the File menu to see how your headers and footers will look on
the printed page.
226
Chapter 9
Page Setup Options: Options
This dialog box controls printed chart size, space between printed output items,
and page numbering.
Printed Chart Size. Controls the size of the printed chart relative to the defined page
size. The chart's aspect ratio (width-to-height ratio) is not affected by the printed chart
size. The overall printed size of a chart is limited by both its height and width. Once
the outer borders of a chart reach the left and right borders of the page, the chart size
cannot increase further to fill additional page height.
Space between items. Controls the space between printed items. Each pivot table,
chart, and text object is a separate item. This setting does not affect the display
of items in the Viewer.
Number pages starting with. Numbers pages sequentially starting with the specified
number.
Figure 9-12
Page Setup Options tab
227
Working with Output
Saving Output
The contents of the Viewer can be saved to a Viewer document. The saved document
includes both panes of the Viewer window (the outline and the contents).
Saving a Viewer Document

E From the Viewer window menus choose:
File
Save
E Enter the name of the document and click Save.
To save results in external formats (for example, HTML or text), use Export on the
File menu. (This is not available in the standalone SmartViewer.)
Save With Password Option

Save With Password allows you to password-protect your Viewer files.
Password. The password is case sensitive and can be up to 16 characters long. If you
assign a password, the file cannot be viewed without entering the password.
OEM Code. Leave this field blank unless you have a contractual agreement with
SPSS Inc. to redistribute the SmartViewer. The OEM license code is provided with
the contract.
Saving Viewer Files with a Password
E From the Viewer window menus choose:

File
Save with Password...
E Enter the password.
E Reenter the password to confirm it and click OK.
E Enter a filename in the Save As dialog box.

228
Chapter 9
E Click Save.
Note: Leave the OEM Code blank unless you have a contractual agreement with
SPSS Inc. to redistribute the Smart Viewer.
Chapter
10
Draft Viewer
The Draft Viewer provides results in draft form, including:

Simple text output (instead of pivot tables)
Charts as metafile pictures (instead of chart objects)
Text output in the Draft Viewer can be edited, charts can be resized, and both text
output and charts can be pasted into other applications. However, charts cannot be
edited, and the interactive features of pivot tables and charts are not available.
229
230
Chapter 10
Figure 10-1
Draft Viewer window
To Create Draft Output

File
New
Draft Output
E To make draft output the default output type, from the menus choose:
Edit
Options...
E Click the General tab.
E Select Draft under Viewer Type at Startup.

231
Draft Viewer
Note: New output is always displayed in the designated Viewer window. If you have
both a Viewer and a Draft Viewer window open, the designated window is the
one opened most recently or the one designated with the Designate Window tool
(the exclamation point) on the toolbar.
Controlling Draft Output Format

Output that would be displayed as pivot tables in the Viewer is converted to text
output for the Draft Viewer. The default settings for converted pivot table output
include the following:
Each column is set to the width of the column label, and labels are not wrapped
to multiple lines.
Alignment is controlled by spaces (instead of tabs).
Box characters from the SPSS Marker Set font are used as row and column
separators.
If box characters are turned off, vertical line characters (|) are used as column
separators and dashes (-) are used as row separators.
You can control the format of new draft output using Draft Viewer Options (Edit
menu, Options, Draft Viewer tab).
232
Chapter 10
Figure 10-2
Draft Viewer Options
Column width. To reduce the width of tables that contain long labels, select Maximum
characters under Column width. Labels longer than the specified width are wrapped
to fit the maximum width.
233
Draft Viewer
Figure 10-3
Draft output before and after setting maximum column width
Row and column separators. As an alternative to box characters for row and column
borders, you can use the Cell Separators settings to control the row and column
separators displayed in new draft output. You can specify different cell separators or
enter blank spaces if you don't want any characters used to mark rows and columns.
You must deselect Display Box Character to specify cell separators.
234
Chapter 10
Figure 10-4
Draft output before and after setting cell separators
Space-separated versus tab-separated columns. The Draft Viewer is designed to

display space-separated output in a fixed-pitch (monospaced) font. If you want to
paste draft output into another application, you must use a fixed-pitch font to align
space-separated columns properly. If you select Tabs for the column separator, you
can use any font that you want in the other application and set the tabs to align output
properly. However, tab-separated output will not align properly in the Draft Viewer.
235
Draft Viewer
Figure 10-5
Tab-separated output in the Draft Viewer and formatted in a word processor
To Set Draft Viewer Options

Edit
Options...
E Click the Draft Viewer tab.
E Select the settings that you want.
E Click OK or Apply.
236
Chapter 10
Draft Viewer output display options affect only new output produced after you
change the settings. Output already displayed in the Draft Viewer is not affected
by changes in these settings.
Fonts in Draft Output

You can modify the font attributes (font, size, style) of text output in the Draft Viewer.
However, if you use box characters for row and column borders, proper column
alignment for space-separated text requires a fixed-pitch (monospaced) font, such as
Courier. Additionally, other font changes, such as size and style (for example, bold,
italic), applied to only part of a table can affect column alignment.
Row and column borders. The default solid-line row and column borders use the
SPSS Marker Set font. The line-drawing characters used to draw the borders are
not supported by other fonts.
To Change Fonts in Draft Viewer

E Select the text to which you want to apply the font change.
E From the Draft Viewer menus choose:

Format
Font...
E Select the font attributes that you want to apply to the selected text.
To Print Draft Output

File
Print...
E To print only a selected portion of the draft output, select the output that you want
to print.

File
Print...
237
Draft Viewer
E Select Selection.
Draft Viewer Print Preview

Print Preview shows you what will print on each page for draft documents. It is
usually a good idea to check Print Preview before actually printing a Viewer document
because Print Preview shows you items that may not fit on the page, including:
Long tables
Wide tables produced by converted pivot table output without column-width
control
Text output created with the Wide page-width option (Draft Viewer Options)
with the printer set to Portrait mode
Output that is too wide for the page is truncated, not printed on another page. There
are several things that you can do to prevent wide output from being truncated:
Use a smaller font size (Format menu, Fonts).
Select Landscape for the page orientation (File menu, Page Setup).
For new output, specify a narrow maximum column width (Edit menu, Options,
Draft Viewer tab).
For long tables, use page breaks (Insert menu, Page Break) to control where the table
breaks between pages.
To View Draft Viewer Print Preview

File
Print Preview
To Save Draft Viewer Output

File
Save
238
Chapter 10
Draft Viewer output is saved in rich text format (RTF).
To Save Draft Output as Text

File
Export...
You can export all text or just the selected text. Only text output (converted pivot
table output and text output) is saved in the exported files; charts are not included.
Chapter
11
Pivot Tables
Many of the results in the Viewer are presented in tables that can be pivoted
interactively. That is, you can rearrange the rows, columns, and layers.
Manipulating a Pivot Table

Options for manipulating a pivot table include:
Transposing rows and columns
Moving rows and columns
Creating multidimensional layers
Grouping and ungrouping rows and columns
Showing and hiding cells
Rotating row and column labels
Finding definitions of terms
To Edit a Pivot Table

E Double-click the table.
This activates the Pivot Table Editor.
To Edit Two or More Pivot Tables at a Time

E Click the right mouse button on the pivot table.
239
240
Chapter 11
E From the context menu choose:

SPSS Pivot Table Object
Open
E Repeat for each pivot table you want to edit.
Each pivot table is ready to edit in its own separate window.
To Pivot a Table Using Icons

E Activate the pivot table.
E From the Pivot Table menus choose:

Pivot
Pivoting Trays
E Hover over each icon with the mouse pointer for a ToolTip pop-up that tells you
which table dimension the icon represents.
E Drag an icon from one tray to another.
Figure 11-1
Pivoting trays
This changes the arrangement of the table. For example, suppose that the icon
represents a variable with categories Yes and No and you drag the icon from the Row
tray to the Column tray. Before the move, Yes and No were row labels; after the
move, they are column labels.
241
Pivot Tables
To Identify Pivot Table Dimensions

E If pivoting trays are not on, from the Pivot Table menus choose:
Pivot
Pivoting Trays
E Click and hold down the mouse button on an icon.
This highlights the dimension labels in the pivot table.
To Transpose Rows and Columns

Pivot
Transpose Rows and Columns
This has the same effect as dragging all of the row icons into the Column tray and all
of the column icons into the Row tray.
To Change Display Order

The order of pivot icons in a dimension tray reflects the display order of elements in
the pivot table. To change the display order of elements in a dimension:
E If pivoting trays are not already on, from the Pivot Table menus choose:
Pivot
Pivoting Trays
E Drag the icons in each tray to the order you want (left to right or top to bottom).
To Move Rows and Columns in a Pivot Table

E Click the label for the row or column you want to move.
242
Chapter 11
E Click and drag the label to the new position.
E From the context menu, choose Insert Before or Swap.
Note: Make sure that Drag to Copy on the Edit menu is not enabled (checked).
If Drag to Copy is enabled, deselect it.
To Group Rows or Columns and Insert Group Labels

E Select the labels for the rows or columns you want to group together (click and drag
or Shift-click to select multiple labels).

Edit
Group
A group label is automatically inserted. Double-click the group label to edit the
label text.
Figure 11-2
Row and column groups and labels
Column Group Label
Female Male Total
Row Clerical 206 157 363
Group Custodial 27 27
Label Manager 10 74 84
Note: To add rows or columns to an existing group, you must first ungroup the items
currently in the group; then create a new group that includes the additional items.
To Ungroup Rows or Columns and Remove Group Labels

E Select the group label (click anywhere in the group label) for the rows or columns
you want to ungroup.
243
Pivot Tables

Edit
Ungroup
Ungrouping automatically deletes the group label.
To Rotate Pivot Table Labels


Format
Rotate InnerColumn Labels
or
Rotate OuterRow Labels
Figure 11-3
Rotated column labels
Valid Cumulative
Frequency Percent Percent Percent
Clerical 363 76.6 76.6 76.6
Custodial 27 5.7 5.7 82.3
Manager 84 17.7 17.7 100.0
Valid Percent
Cumulative
Frequency
Total 474 100.0 100.0

Percent
Percent
Clerical 363 76.6 76.6 76.6

Custodial 27 5.7 5.7 82.3
Manager 84 17.7 17.7 100.0
Total 474 100.0 100.0
Only the innermost column labels and the outermost row labels can be rotated.
To Reset Pivots to Defaults

After performing one or more pivoting operations, you can return to the original
arrangement of the pivot table.
244
Chapter 11
E From the Pivot menu choose Reset Pivots to Defaults.
This resets only changes that are the result of pivoting row, column, and layer
elements between dimensions. It does not affect changes such as grouping or
ungrouping or moving rows and columns.
To Find a Definition of a Pivot Table Label

You can obtain context-sensitive Help on cell labels in pivot tables. For example, if
Mean appears as a label, you can obtain a definition of the mean.
E Click the right mouse button on a label cell.
E From the context menu, choose What's This?
You must click your right mouse button on the label cell itself, rather than on the
data cells in the row or column.
Context-sensitive Help is not available for user-defined labels, such as variable
names or value labels.
Working with Layers

You can display a separate two-dimensional table for each category or combination
of categories. The table can be thought of as stacked in layers, with only the top
layer visible.
To Create and Display Layers

E Activate the pivot table, and from the Pivot menu choose Pivoting Trays if it is not
already selected.
E Drag an icon from the Row tray or the Column tray into the Layer tray.
245
Pivot Tables
Figure 11-4
Moving categories into layers
Minority pivoted from row
to layer dimension
Each layer icon has left and right arrows. The visible table is the table for the top layer.
Figure 11-5
Categories in separate layers
Minority classification: Yes
Minority classification: No
To Change Layers
E Click one of the layer icon arrows.
or
E Select a category from the drop-down list of layers.

246
Chapter 11
Figure 11-6
Selecting layers from drop-down lists
Go to Layer Category
Go to Layer Category allows you to change layers in a pivot table. This dialog
box is particularly useful when there are a large number of layers or one layer has
many categories.
To Go to a Table Layer
Pivot
Go to Layer...
247
Pivot Tables
Figure 11-7
Go to Layer Category dialog box
E Select a layer dimension in the Visible Category list. The Categories list will display
all categories for the selected dimension.
E Select the category you want in the Categories list and click OK. This changes the
layer and closes the dialog box.
To view another layer without closing the dialog box:
E Select the category and click Apply.
To Move Layers to Rows or Columns

If the table you are viewing is stacked in layers with only the top layer showing, you
can display all of the layers at once, either down the rows or across the columns.
There must be at least one icon in the Layer tray.
E From the Pivot menu choose Move Layers to Rows.
or
E From the Pivot menu choose Move Layers to Columns.

248
Chapter 11
You can also move layers to rows or columns by dragging their icons between the
Layer, Row, and Column pivoting trays.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks allow you to save different views of a pivot table. Bookmarks save:
Placement of elements in row, column, and layer dimensions
Display order of elements in each dimension
Currently displayed layer for each layer element
To Bookmark Pivot Table Views

E Pivot the table to the view you want to bookmark.

Pivot
Bookmarks
E Enter a name for the bookmark. Bookmark names are not case sensitive.
E Click Add.
Each pivot table has its own set of bookmarks. Within a pivot table, each bookmark
name must be unique, but you can use duplicate bookmark names in different pivot
tables.
To Display a Bookmarked Pivot Table View


Pivot
Bookmarks
E Click the name of the bookmark in the list.

249
Pivot Tables
E Click Go To.
To Rename a Pivot Table Bookmark


Pivot
Bookmarks
E Click the name of the bookmark in the list.
E Click Rename.
E Enter the new bookmark name.
E Click OK.
Showing and Hiding Cells

Many types of cells can be hidden:
Dimension labels
Categories, including the label cell and data cells in a row or column
Category labels (without hiding the data cells)
Footnotes, titles, and captions
To Hide Rows and Columns in a Table

E Ctrl-Alt-click the category label of the row or column to be hidden.

View
Hide
or
E Right-click the highlighted row or column to show the context menu.

250
Chapter 11
E From the context menu choose Hide Category.
To Show Hidden Rows and Columns in a Table

E Select another label in the same dimension as the hidden row or column.
For example, if the Female category of the Gender dimension is hidden, click the
Male category.

View
Show All Categories in dimension name
For example, choose Show All Categories in Gender.

or

View
Show All
This displays all hidden cells in the table. (If Hide empty rows and columns is selected
in Table Properties for this table, a completely empty row or column remains hidden.)
To Hide or Show a Dimension Label

E Select the dimension label or any category label within the dimension.

View
Hide (or Show) Dimension Label
To Hide or Show a Footnote in a Table

E Select a footnote.
251
Pivot Tables

View
Hide (or Show)
To Hide or Show a Caption or Title in a Table

E Select a caption or title.

View
Hide (or Show)
Editing Results
The appearance and contents of each table or text output item can be edited. You can:
Apply a TableLook.
Change the properties of the current table.
Change the properties of cells in the table.
Modify text.
Add footnotes and captions to tables.
Add items to the Viewer.
Copy and paste results into other applications.
Changing the Appearance of Tables

You can change the appearance of a table either by editing table properties or by
applying a TableLook. Each TableLook consists of a collection of table properties,
including general appearance, footnote properties, cell properties, and borders.
You can select one of the preset TableLooks or you can create and save a custom
TableLook.
252
Chapter 11
TableLooks
A TableLook is a set of properties that define the appearance of a table. You can
select a previously defined TableLook or create your own.
Before or after a TableLook is applied, you can change cell formats for individual
cells or groups of cells, using cell properties. The edited cell formats will remain,
even when you apply a new TableLook.
For example, you might start by applying TableLook 9POINT, then select a data
column, and from the Cell Formats dialog box, change to a bold font for that column.
Later, you change the TableLook to BOXED. The previously selected column retains
the bold font while the rest of the characteristics are applied from the BOXED
TableLook.
Optionally, you can reset all cells to the cell formats defined by the current
TableLook. This resets any cells that have been edited. If As Displayed is selected in
the TableLook files list, any edited cells are reset to the current table properties.
To Apply or Save a TableLook

E Activate a pivot table.

Format
TableLooks...
253
Pivot Tables
Figure 11-8
TableLooks dialog box
E Select a TableLook from the list of files. To select a file from another directory,
click Browse.
E Click OK to apply the TableLook to the selected pivot table.
To Edit or Create a TableLook

E Select a TableLook from the list of files.
E Click Edit Look.
E Adjust the table properties for the attributes you want and click OK.
E Click Save Look to save the edited TableLook or Save As to save it as a new TableLook.
Editing a TableLook affects only the selected pivot table. An edited TableLook is not
applied to any other tables that use that TableLook unless you select those tables and
reapply the TableLook.
254
Chapter 11
Table Properties
The Table Properties dialog box allows you to set general properties of a table, set cell
styles for various parts of a table, and save a set of those properties as a TableLook.
Using the tabs on this dialog box, you can:
Control general properties, such as hiding empty rows or columns and adjusting
printing properties.
Control the format and position of footnote markers.
Determine specific formats for cells in the data area, for row and column labels,
and for other areas of the table.
Control the width and color of the lines forming the borders of each area of
the table.
Control printing properties.
To Change Pivot Table Properties

E Activate the pivot table (double-click anywhere in the table).

Format
Table Properties...
E Select a tab (General, Footnotes, Cell Formats, Borders, or Printing.
E Select the options you want.
The new properties are applied to the selected pivot table. To apply new table
properties to a TableLook instead of just the selected table, edit the TableLook
(Format menu, TableLooks).
255
Pivot Tables
Table Properties: General

Several properties apply to the table as a whole. You can:
Show or hide empty rows and columns. (An empty row or column has nothing in
any of the data cells.)
Control the placement of row labels. They can be in the upper left corner or
nested.
Control maximum and minimum column width (expressed in points).
Figure 11-9
Table Properties General tab
To Change General Table Properties

E Select the General tab.
E Select the options you want.
256
Chapter 11
Table Properties: Footnotes

The properties of footnote markers include style and position in relation to text.
The style of footnote markers is either numbers (1, 2, 3...) or letters (a, b, c...).
The footnote markers can be attached to text as superscripts or subscripts.
Figure 11-10
Table Properties Footnotes tab
To Change Footnote Marker Properties

E Select the Footnotes tab.
E Select a footnote marker format.
E Select a marker position.
257
Pivot Tables
Table Properties: Cell Formats

For formatting, a table is divided into areas: Title, Layers, Corner Labels, Row
Labels, Column Labels, Data, Caption, and Footnotes. For each area of a table, you
can modify the associated cell formats. Cell formats include text characteristics (font,
size, color, style), horizontal and vertical alignment, cell shading, foreground and
background colors, and inner cell margins.
Figure 11-11
Areas of a table
Cell formats are applied to areas (categories of information). They are not
characteristics of individual cells. This distinction is an important consideration
when pivoting a table.
For example:
If you specify a bold font as a cell format of column labels, the column labels
will appear bold no matter what information is currently displayed in the column
dimension—and if you move an item from the column dimension to another
dimension, it does not retain the bold characteristic of the column labels.
If you make column labels bold simply by highlighting the cells in an activated
pivot table and clicking the Bold button on the toolbar, the contents of those
cells will remain bold no matter what dimension you move them to, and the
column labels will not retain the bold characteristic for other items moved into
the column dimension.
258
Chapter 11
Figure 11-12
Table Properties Cell Formats tab
To Change Cell Formats

E Select the Cell Formats tab.
E Select an area from the drop-down list or click an area of the sample.
E Select characteristics for the area. Your selections are reflected in the sample.
Table Properties: Borders

For each border location in a table, you can select a line style and a color. If you select
None as the style, there will be no line at the selected location.
259
Pivot Tables
Figure 11-13
Table Properties Borders tab
To Change Borders in a Table

E Click the Borders tab.
E Select a border location, either by clicking its name in the list or by clicking a line
in the Sample area. (Shift-click to select multiple names, or Ctrl-click to select
noncontiguous names.)
E Select a line style or None.
E Select a color.
260
Chapter 11
To Display Hidden Borders in a Pivot Table

For tables without many visible borders, you can display the hidden borders. This can
make tasks like changing column widths easier. The hidden borders (gridlines) are
displayed in the Viewer but are not printed.

View
Gridlines
Table Properties: Printing

You can control the following properties for printed pivot tables:
Print all layers or only the top layer of the table, and print each layer on a separate
page. (This affects only printing, not the display of layers in the Viewer.)
Shrink a table horizontally or vertically to fit the page for printing.
Control widow/orphan lines—the minimum number of rows and columns that
will be contained in any printed section of a table if the table is too wide and/or
too long for the defined page size. (Note: If a table is too long to fit on the
remainder of the current page because there is other output above it on the page
but fits within the defined page length, it is automatically printed on a new page,
regardless of the widow/orphan setting.)
Include continuation text for tables that don't fit on a single page. You can display
continuation text at the bottom of each page and at the top of each page. If neither
option is selected, the continuation text will not be displayed.
To Control Pivot Table Printing

E Click the Printing tab.
E Select the printing options you want.
261
Pivot Tables
Font
A TableLook allows you to specify font characteristics for different areas of the table.
You can also change the font for any individual cell. Options for the font in a cell
include the font type, style, and size. You can also hide the text or underline it.
If you specify font properties in a cell, they apply in all of the table layers that
have the same cell.
Figure 11-14
Font dialog box
To Change the Font in a Cell

E Activate the pivot table and select the text you want to change.

Format
Font...
Optionally, you can select a font, font style, and point size; whether you want the
text hidden or underlined; a color; and a script style.
262
Chapter 11
Data Cell Widths

Set Data Cell Widths is used to set all data cells to the same width.
Figure 11-15
Set Data Cell Width dialog box
To Change Data Cell Widths


Format
Set Data Cell Widths...
E Enter a value for the cell width.
To Change the Width of a Pivot Table Column

E Move the mouse pointer through the category labels until it is on the right border
of the column you want to change. The pointer changes to an arrow with points
on both ends.
E Hold down the mouse button while you drag the border to its new position.
263
Pivot Tables
Figure 11-16
Changing the width of a column
You can change vertical category and dimension borders in the row labels area,
whether or not they are showing.
E Move the mouse pointer through the row labels until you see the double-pointed arrow.
E Drag it to the new width.
Cell Properties
Cell Properties are applied to a selected cell. You can change the value format,
alignment, margins, and shading. Cell properties override table properties; therefore,
if you change table properties, you do not change any individually applied cell
properties.
To Change Cell Properties

E Activate a table and select a cell in the table.

Format
Cell Properties...
264
Chapter 11
Cell Properties: Value

This dialog box tab controls the value format for a cell. You can select formats
for number, date, time, or currency, and you can adjust the number of decimal
digits displayed.
Figure 11-17
Cell Properties Value tab
To Change Value Formats in a Cell

E Click the Value tab.
E Select a category and a format.
E Select the number of decimal places.
To Change Value Formats for a Column

E Ctrl-Alt-click the column label.
E Right-click the highlighted column.

265
Pivot Tables
E From the context menu choose Cell Properties.
E Click the Value tab.
E Select the format you want to apply to the column.
You can use this method to suppress or add percent signs and dollar signs, change the
number of decimals displayed, and switch between scientific notation and regular
numeric display.
Cell Properties: Alignment

This dialog box tab sets horizontal and vertical alignment and text direction for a
cell. If you choose Mixed, contents of the cell are aligned according to its type
(number, date, or text).
Figure 11-18
Cell Properties Alignment tab
To Change Alignment in Cells

E Select a cell in the table.
266
Chapter 11

Format
Cell Properties...
E Click the Alignment tab.
As you select the alignment properties for the cell, they are illustrated in the Sample
area.
Cell Properties: Margins

This dialog box tab specifies the inset at each edge of a cell.
Figure 11-19
Cell Properties Margins tab
To Change Margins in Cells

E Click the Margins tab.
E Select the inset for each of the four margins.

267
Pivot Tables
Cell Properties: Shading

This dialog box tab specifies the percentage of shading or a cell outline, and
foreground and background colors for a selected cell area. This does not change the
color of the text. The cell outline is a selection on the Visual Highlights list.
Figure 11-20
Cell Properties Shading tab
To Change Shading in Cells

E Click the Shading tab.
E Select the highlights and colors for the cell.
Footnote Marker
Footnote Marker changes the character(s) used to mark a footnote.
268
Chapter 11
Figure 11-21
Footnote Marker dialog box
To Change Footnote Marker Characters

E Select a footnote.

Format
Footnote Marker...
E Enter one or two characters.
To Renumber Footnotes
When you have pivoted a table by switching rows, columns, and layers, the footnotes
may be out of order. To renumber the footnotes:

Format
Renumber Footnotes
Selecting Rows and Columns in Pivot Tables

The flexibility of pivot tables places some constraints on how you select entire rows
and columns, and the visual highlight that indicates the selected row or column may
span noncontiguous areas of the table.
269
Pivot Tables
To Select a Row or Column in a Pivot Table

E Click a row or column label.

Edit
Select
Data and Label Cells
or
E Ctrl-Alt-click the row or column label.
If the table contains more than one dimension in the row or column area, the
highlighted selection may span multiple noncontiguous cells.
Modifying Pivot Table Results

Text appears in the Viewer in many items. You can edit the text or add new text.
Pivot tables can be modified by:
Editing text within pivot table cells
Adding captions and footnotes
To Modify Text in a Cell

E Double-click the cell or press F2.
E Edit the text.
E Press Enter to record your changes, or press Esc to revert to the previous contents of
the cell.
270
Chapter 11
To Add Captions to a Table

Insert
Caption
The words Table Caption are displayed at the bottom of the table.
E Select the words Table Caption and enter your caption text over it.
To Add a Footnote to a Table

A footnote can be attached to any item in a table.
E Click a title, cell, or caption within an activated pivot table.

Insert
Footnote...
E Select the word Footnote and enter the footnote text over it.
Printing Pivot Tables

Several factors can affect the way printed pivot charts look, and these factors can be
controlled by changing pivot table attributes.
For multidimensional pivot tables (tables with layers), you can either print all
layers or print only the top (visible) layer.
For long or wide pivot tables, you can automatically resize the table to fit the page
or control the location of table breaks and page breaks.
Use Print Preview on the File menu to see how printed pivot tables will look.
To Print Hidden Layers of a Pivot Table

271
Pivot Tables

Format
Table Properties...
E On the Printing tab, select Print all layers.
You can also print each layer of a pivot table on a separate page.
Controlling Table Breaks for Wide and Long Tables

Pivot tables that are either too wide or too long to print within the defined page size
are automatically split and printed in multiple sections. (For wide tables, multiple
sections will print on the same page if there is room.) You can:
Control the row and column locations where large tables are split.
Specify rows and columns that should be kept together when tables are split.
Rescale large tables to fit the defined page size.
To Specify Row and Column Breaks for Printed Pivot Tables

E Click the column label to the left of where you want to insert the break or click the
row label above where you want to insert the break.

Format
Insert Break Here
To Specify Rows or Columns to Keep Together

E Select the labels of the rows or columns you want to keep together. (Click and drag
or Shift-click to select multiple row or column labels.)
272
Chapter 11

Format
Insert Keep Together
To Rescale a Pivot Table to Fit the Page Size


Format
Table Properties
E Click the Printing tab.
E Click Rescale wide table to fit page.
and/or
E Click Rescale long table to fit page.

Chapter
12
Working with Command Syntax
SPSS provides a powerful command language that allows you to save and automate
many common tasks. It also provides some functionality not found in the menus
and dialog boxes.
Most commands are accessible from the menus and dialog boxes. However, some
commands and options are available only by using the command language. The
command language also allows you to save your jobs in a syntax file so that you can
repeat your analysis at a later date or run it in an automated job with the Production
Facility.
A syntax file is simply a text file that contains commands. While it is possible to
open a syntax window and type in commands, it is often easier if you let the software
help you build your syntax file using one of the following methods:
Pasting command syntax from dialog boxes
Copying syntax from the output log
Copying syntax from the journal file
In the online Help for a given procedure, click the command syntax link in the
Related Topics list to access the syntax diagram for the relevant command. For
complete documentation of the command language, refer to the SPSS Command
Syntax Reference.
Complete command syntax documentation is automatically installed when you
install SPSS. To access the syntax documentation:
E From the menus choose

Help
Command Syntax Reference
273
274
Chapter 12
Syntax Rules
Keep in mind the following simple rules when editing and writing command syntax:
Each command must begin on a new line and end with a period (.).
Most subcommands are separated by slashes (/). The slash before the first
subcommand on a command is usually optional.
Variable names must be spelled out fully.
Text included within apostrophes or quotation marks must be contained on a
single line.
Each line of command syntax cannot exceed 80 characters.
A period (.) must be used to indicate decimals, regardless of your Windows
regional settings.
Variable names ending in a period can cause errors in commands created by
the dialog boxes. You cannot create such variable names in the dialog boxes,
and you should generally avoid them.
Command syntax is case insensitive, and three-letter abbreviations can be used for
many command specifications. You can use as many lines as you want to specify a
single command. You can add space or break lines at almost any point where a
single blank is allowed, such as around slashes, parentheses, arithmetic operators, or
between variable names. For example,
FREQUENCIES
VARIABLES=JOBCAT GENDER
/PERCENTILES=25 50 75
/BARCHART.
and
freq var=jobcat gender /percent=25 50 75 /bar.
are both acceptable alternatives that generate the same results.
Production Facility syntax files and INCLUDE files. For command files run via the
Production Facility or the INCLUDE command, the syntax rules are slightly different:
Each command must begin in the first column of a new line.
275
Continuation lines must be indented at least one space.

The period at the end of the command is optional.
If you generate command syntax by pasting dialog box choices into a syntax window,
the format of the commands is suitable for any mode of operation.
Pasting Syntax from Dialog Boxes

The easiest way to build a command syntax file is to make selections in dialog boxes
and paste the syntax for the selections into a syntax window. By pasting the syntax at
each step of a lengthy analysis, you can build a job file that allows you to repeat the
analysis at a later date or run an automated job with the Production Facility.
In the syntax window, you can run the pasted syntax, edit it, and save it in a syntax
file.
To Paste Syntax from Dialog Boxes

E Open the dialog box and make the selections that you want.
E Click Paste.
The command syntax is pasted to the designated syntax window. If you do not have
an open syntax window, a new syntax window opens automatically, and the syntax is
pasted there.
276
Chapter 12
Figure 12-1
Command syntax pasted from a dialog box
Note: If you open a dialog box from the menus in a script window, code for running
syntax from a script is pasted into the script window.
Copying Syntax from the Output Log

You can build a syntax file by copying command syntax from the log that appears
in the Viewer. To use this method, you must select Display commands in the log in
the Viewer dialog box before running the analysis. Each command will then appear
in the Viewer along with the output from the analysis.
In the syntax window, you can run the pasted syntax, edit it, and save it in a syntax
file.
277
Figure 12-2
Command syntax in the log
To Copy Syntax from the Output Log

E Before running the analysis, from the menus choose:
Edit
Options...
278
Chapter 12
E On the Viewer tab, select Display commands in the log.
As you run analyses, the commands for your dialog box selections are recorded in
the log.
E Open a previously saved syntax file or create a new one. To create a new syntax
file, from the menus choose:
File
New
Syntax
E In the Viewer, double-click on a log item to activate it.
E Click and drag the mouse to highlight the syntax that you want to copy.
E From the Viewer menus choose:

Edit
Copy
E In a syntax window, from the menus choose:

Edit
Paste
Editing Syntax in a Journal File

By default, all commands executed during a session are recorded in a journal file
named spss.jnl (set with Options on the Edit menu). You can edit the journal file and
save it as a syntax file that you can use to repeat a previously run analysis, or you can
run it in an automated job with the Production Facility.
The journal file is a text file that can be edited like any other text file. Because
error messages and warnings are also recorded in the journal file along with command
syntax, you must edit out any error and warning messages that appear before saving
the syntax file. Note, however, that errors must be resolved or the job will not run
successfully.
Save the edited journal file with a different filename. Because the journal file is
automatically appended or overwritten for each session, attempting to use the same
filename for a syntax file and the journal file may yield unexpected results.
279
Figure 12-3
Editing the journal file
Delete warnings and

error messages
before saving and
running syntax from
the journal file
To Edit Syntax in a Journal File

E To open the journal file, from the menus choose:
File
Open
Other...
E Locate and open the journal file (by default, spss.jnl is located in the temp directory).
Select All files (*.*) for Files of Type or enter *.jnl in the File Name text box to display
journal files in the file list. If you have difficulty locating the file, use Options on the
Edit menu to see where the journal is saved in your system.
E Edit the file to remove any error messages or warnings, indicated by the > sign.
E Save the edited journal file using a different filename. (We recommend that you use a
filename with the extension .sps, the default extension for syntax files.)
To Run Command Syntax

E Highlight the commands that you want to run in the syntax window.
280
Chapter 12
E Click the Run button (the right-pointing triangle) on the Syntax Editor toolbar.
or
E Select one of the choices from the Run menu.

All. Runs all commands in the syntax window.
Selection. Runs the currently selected commands. This includes any commands
partially highlighted.
Current. Runs the command where the cursor is currently located.
To End. Runs all commands from the current cursor location to the end of the
command syntax file.
The Run button on the Syntax Editor toolbar runs the selected commands or the
command where the cursor is located if there is no selection.
Figure 12-4
Syntax Editor toolbar
Multiple Execute Commands

Syntax pasted from dialog boxes or copied from the log or the journal may contain
EXECUTE commands. When you run multiple commands from a syntax window,
multiple EXECUTE commands are unnecessary and may slow performance because
this command reads the entire data file.
If the last command in the syntax file is a command that reads the data file (such
as a statistical or graphing procedure), no EXECUTE commands are necessary and
they can be deleted.
If you are unsure if the last command reads the data file, in most cases you can
delete all but the last EXECUTE command in the syntax file.
281
Lag Functions
One notable exception is transformation commands that contain lag functions. In a

series of transformation commands without any intervening EXECUTE commands
or other commands that read the data, lag functions are calculated after all other
transformations, regardless of command order. For example:
COMPUTE lagvar=LAG(var1)
COMPUTE var1=var1*2
and
COMPUTE lagvar=LAG(var1)
EXECUTE
COMPUTE var1=var1*2
yield very different results for the value of lagvar, since the former uses the
transformed value of var1 while the latter uses the original value.
Chapter
13
Frequencies
The Frequencies procedure provides statistics and graphical displays that are useful
for describing many types of variables. For a first look at your data, the Frequencies
procedure is a good place to start.
For a frequency report and bar chart, you can arrange the distinct values in
ascending or descending order or order the categories by their frequencies. The
frequencies report can be suppressed when a variable has many distinct values. You
can label charts with frequencies (the default) or percentages.
Example. What is the distribution of a company's customers by industry type? From
the output, you might learn that 37.5% of your customers are in government agencies,
24.9%, in corporations, 28.1%, in academic institutions, and 9.4%, in the healthcare
industry. For continuous, quantitative data, such as sales revenue, you might learn
that the average product sale is $3,576 with a standard deviation of $1,078.
Statistics and plots. Frequency counts, percentages, cumulative percentages, mean,
median, mode, sum, standard deviation, variance, range, minimum and maximum
values, standard error of the mean, skewness and kurtosis (both with standard errors),
quartiles, user-specified percentiles, bar charts, pie charts, and histograms.
Frequencies Data Considerations

Data. Use numeric codes or short strings to code categorical variables (nominal or
ordinal level measurements).
Assumptions. The tabulations and percentages provide a useful description for data
from any distribution, especially for variables with ordered or unordered categories.
Most of the optional summary statistics, such as the mean and standard deviation, are
based on normal theory and are appropriate for quantitative variables with symmetric
distributions. Robust statistics, such as the median, quartiles, and percentiles, are
283
284
Chapter 13
appropriate for quantitative variables that may or may not meet the assumption of
normality.
Sample Output
Figure 13-1
Frequencies output
300
400
300
200
200
100
100
0 0
1,000 3,000 5,000
Government Academic
2,000 4,000
Corporate Healthcare
Amount of Product Sale
Industry
285
Frequencies
To Obtain Frequency Tables

Analyze
Descriptive Statistics
Frequencies...
Figure 13-2
Frequencies dialog box
E Select one or more categorical or quantitative variables.

Click Statistics for descriptive statistics for quantitative variables.
Click Charts for bar charts, pie charts, and histograms.
Click Format for the order in which results are displayed.
286
Chapter 13
Frequencies Statistics
Figure 13-3
Frequencies Statistics dialog box
Percentile Values. Values of a quantitative variable that divide the ordered data
into groups so that a certain percentage is above and another percentage is below.
Quartiles (the 25th, 50th, and 75th percentiles) divide the observations into four
groups of equal size. If you want an equal number of groups other than four, select
Cut points for n equal groups. You can also specify individual percentiles (for example,
the 95th percentile, the value below which 95% of the observations fall).
Central Tendency. Statistics that describe the location of the distribution include the
mean, median, mode, and sum of all the values.
Mean. A measure of central tendency. The arithmetic average; the sum divided by
the number of cases.
Median. The value above and below which half the cases fall, the 50th percentile.
If there is an even number of cases, the median is the average of the two middle
cases when they are sorted in ascending or descending order. The median is a
measure of central tendency not sensitive to outlying values -- unlike the mean,
which can be affected by a few extremely high or low values.
Mode. The most frequently occurring value. If several values share the greatest
frequency of occurrence, each of them is a mode. The Frequencies procedure
reports only the smallest of such multiple modes.
Sum. The sum or total of the values, across all cases with nonmissing values.
287
Frequencies
Dispersion. Statistics that measure the amount of variation or spread in the data
include the standard deviation, variance, range, minimum, maximum, and standard
error of the mean.
Std. deviation. A measure of dispersion around the mean. In a normal distribution,
68% of cases fall within one SD of the mean and 95% of cases fall within 2 SD.
For example, if the mean age is 45, with a standard deviation of 10, 95% of the
cases would be between 25 and 65 in a normal distribution.
Variance. A measure of dispersion around the mean, equal to the sum of squared
deviations from the mean divided by one less than the number of cases. The
variance is measured in units that are the square of those of the variable itself.
Range. The difference between the largest and smallest values of a numeric
variable; the maximum minus the minimum.
Minimum. The smallest value of a numeric variable.
Maximum. The largest value of a numeric variable.
S. E. mean. A measure of how much the value of the mean may vary from sample
to sample taken from the same distribution. It can be used to roughly compare
the observed mean to a hypothesized value (that is, you can conclude the two
values are different if the ratio of the difference to the standard error is less
than -2 or greater than +2).
Distribution. Skewness and kurtosis are statistics that describe the shape and symmetry
of the distribution. These statistics are displayed with their standard errors.
Skewness. A measure of the asymmetry of a distribution. The normal distribution
is symmetric, and has a skewness value of zero. A distribution with a significant
positive skewness has a long right tail. A distribution with a significant negative
skewness has a long left tail. As a rough guide, a skewness value more than twice
it's standard error is taken to indicate a departure from symmetry.
Kurtosis. A measure of the extent to which observations cluster around a central
point. For a normal distribution, the value of the kurtosis statistic is 0. Positive
kurtosis indicates that the observations cluster more and have longer tails than
those in the normal distribution and negative kurtosis indicates the observations
cluster less and have shorter tails.
Values are group midpoints. If the values in your data are midpoints of groups (for
example, ages of all people in their thirties are coded as 35), select this option to
estimate the median and percentiles for the original, ungrouped data.
288
Chapter 13
Frequencies Charts
Figure 13-4
Frequencies Charts dialog box
Chart Type. A pie chart displays the contribution of parts to a whole. Each slice of a
pie chart corresponds to a group defined by a single grouping variable. A bar chart
displays the count for each distinct value or category as a separate bar, allowing you
to compare categories visually. A histogram also has bars, but they are plotted along
an equal interval scale. The height of each bar is the count of values of a quantitative
variable falling within the interval. A histogram shows the shape, center, and spread
of the distribution. A normal curve superimposed on a histogram helps you judge
whether the data are normally distributed.
Chart Values. For bar charts, the scale axis can be labeled by frequency counts or
percentages.
Frequencies Format
Figure 13-5
Frequencies Format dialog box
289
Frequencies
Order by. The frequency table can be arranged according to the actual values in the
data or according to the count (frequency of occurrence) of those values, and in either
ascending or descending order. However, if you request a histogram or percentiles,
Frequencies assumes that the variable is quantitative and displays its values in
ascending order.
Multiple Variables. If you produce statistics tables for multiple variables, you can
either display all variables in a single table (Compare variables) or display a separate
statistics table for each variable (Organize output by variables).
Suppress tables with more than n categories. This option prevents the display of tables
with more than the specified number of values.
Chapter
14
Descriptives
The Descriptives procedure displays univariate summary statistics for several

variables in a single table and calculates standardized values (z scores). Variables
can be ordered by the size of their means (in ascending or descending order),
alphabetically, or by the order in which you select the variables (the default).
When z scores are saved, they are added to the data in the Data Editor and are
available for charts, data listings, and analyses. When variables are recorded in
different units (for example, gross domestic product per capita and percentage
literate), a z-score transformation places variables on a common scale for easier
visual comparison.
Example. If each case in your data contains the daily sales totals for each member
of the sales staff (for example, one entry for Bob, one for Kim, one for Brian, etc.)
collected each day for several months, the Descriptives procedure can compute
the average daily sales for each staff member and order the results from highest
average sales to lowest.
Statistics. Sample size, mean, minimum, maximum, standard deviation, variance,
range, sum, standard error of the mean, and kurtosis and skewness with their standard
errors.
Descriptives Data Considerations

Data. Use numeric variables after you have screened them graphically for recording
errors, outliers, and distributional anomalies. The Descriptives procedure is very
efficient for large files (thousands of cases).
Assumptions. Most of the available statistics (including z scores) are based on
normal theory and are appropriate for quantitative variables (interval- or ratio-level
measurements) with symmetric distributions (avoid variables with unordered
291
292
Chapter 14
categories or skewed distributions). The distribution of z scores has the same shape as
that of the original data; therefore, calculating z scores is not a remedy for problem
data.
Sample Output
Figure 14-1
Descriptives output
Std.
N Minimum Maximum Mean Deviation
Dave's Sales 10 42.00 86.00 59.2000 14.2657
Sharon's Sales 10 23.00 85.00 56.2000 17.6623
Brian's Sales 10 45.00 71.00 56.0000 8.8819
Mary's Sales 10 34.00 83.00 52.9000 16.6029
Bob's Sales 10 28.00 89.00 52.9000 21.8858
Kim's Sales 10 23.00 73.00 52.1000 16.4617
Juan's Sales 10 25.00 85.00 50.5000 21.1305
Valid N (listwise) 10
To Obtain Descriptive Statistics

Analyze
Descriptives...
293
Descriptives
Figure 14-2
Descriptives dialog box
E Select one or more variables.

Select Save standardized values as variables to save z scores as new variables.
Click Options for optional statistics and display order.
294
Chapter 14
Descriptives Options
Figure 14-3
Descriptives Options dialog box
Mean and Sum. The mean, or arithmetic average, is displayed by default.
Dispersion. Statistics that measure the spread or variation in the data include the
standard deviation, variance, range, minimum, maximum, and standard error of
the mean.
Standard deviation. A measure of dispersion around the mean. In a normal
distribution, 68% of cases fall within one SD of the mean and 95% of cases fall
within 2 SD. For example, if the mean age is 45, with a standard deviation of 10,
95% of the cases would be between 25 and 65 in a normal distribution.
deviations from the mean divided by one less than the number of cases. The
variance is measured in units that are the square of those of the variable itself.
Range. The difference between the largest and smallest values of a numeric
variable; the maximum minus the minimum.
295
Descriptives

Standard error of mean. A measure of how much the value of the mean may
vary from sample to sample taken from the same distribution. It can be used to
roughly compare the observed mean to a hypothesized value (that is, you can
conclude the two values are different if the ratio of the difference to the standard
error is less than -2 or greater than +2).
Distribution. Kurtosis and skewness are statistics that characterize the shape and
symmetry of the distribution. These are displayed with their standard errors.
Kurtosis. A measure of the extent to which observations cluster around a central
point. For a normal distribution, the value of the kurtosis statistic is 0. Positive
kurtosis indicates that the observations cluster more and have longer tails than
those in the normal distribution and negative kurtosis indicates the observations
cluster less and have shorter tails.
skewness has a long left tail. As a rough guide, a skewness value more than twice
it's standard error is taken to indicate a departure from symmetry.
Display Order. By default, the variables are displayed in the order in which you
selected them. Optionally, you can display variables alphabetically, by ascending
means, or by descending means.
Chapter
15
Explore
The Explore procedure produces summary statistics and graphical displays, either for
all of your cases or separately for groups of cases. There are many reasons for using
the Explore procedure—data screening, outlier identification, description, assumption
checking, and characterizing differences among subpopulations (groups of cases).
Data screening may show that you have unusual values, extreme values, gaps in the
data, or other peculiarities. Exploring the data can help to determine whether the
statistical techniques that you are considering for data analysis are appropriate. The
exploration may indicate that you need to transform the data if the technique requires
a normal distribution. Or, you may decide that you need nonparametric tests.
Example. Look at the distribution of maze-learning times for rats under four different
reinforcement schedules. For each of the four groups, you can see if the distribution
of times is approximately normal and whether the four variances are equal. You can
also identify the cases with the five largest and five smallest times. The boxplots
and stem-and-leaf plots graphically summarize the distribution of learning times
for each of the groups.
Statistics and plots. Mean, median, 5% trimmed mean, standard error, variance,
standard deviation, minimum, maximum, range, interquartile range, skewness and
kurtosis and their standard errors, confidence interval for the mean (and specified
confidence level), percentiles, Huber's M-estimator, Andrews' wave estimator,
Hampel's redescending M-estimator, Tukey's biweight estimator, the five largest and
five smallest values, the Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistic with a Lilliefors significance
level for testing normality, and the Shapiro-Wilk statistic. Boxplots, stem-and-leaf
plots, histograms, normality plots, and spread-versus-level plots with Levene tests
and transformations.
297
298
Chapter 15
Explore Data Considerations

Data. The Explore procedure can be used for quantitative variables (interval- or
ratio-level measurements). A factor variable (used to break the data into groups of
cases) should have a reasonable number of distinct values (categories). These values
may be short string or numeric. The case label variable, used to label outliers in
boxplots, can be short string, long string (first 15 characters), or numeric.
Assumptions. The distribution of your data does not have to be symmetric or normal.
Sample Output
Figure 15-1
Explore output
299
Explore
Extreme Values
Case
Number Schedule Value
Time Highest 1 31 4 10.5
2 33 4 9.9
3 39 4 9.8
4 32 4 9.5
5 36 4 9.3
Lowest 1 2 1 2.0
2 7 1 2.1
3 1 1 2.3
4 11 2 2.3
5 3 1 2.5
Time Stem-and-Leaf Plot
Frequency Stem & Leaf
7.00 2 . 0133589
6.00 3 . 014577
3.00 4 . 568
5.00 5 . 05779
4.00 6 . 1379
3.00 7 . 268
6.00 8 . 012237
5.00 9 . 13589
1.00 10 . 5
Stem width: 1.0

Each leaf: 1 case(s)
To Explore Your Data

Analyze
Explore...
300
Chapter 15
Figure 15-2
Explore dialog box
E Select one or more dependent variables.

Select one or more factor variables, whose values will define groups of cases.
Select an identification variable to label cases.
Click Statistics for robust estimators, outliers, percentiles, and frequency tables.
Click Plots for histograms, normal probability plots and tests, and
spread-versus-level plots with Levene's statistics.
Click Options for the treatment of missing values.
301
Explore
Explore Statistics
Figure 15-3
Explore Statistics dialog box
Descriptives. These measures of central tendency and dispersion are displayed by

default. Measures of central tendency indicate the location of the distribution; they
include the mean, median, and 5% trimmed mean. Measures of dispersion show the
dissimilarity of the values; these include standard error, variance, standard deviation,
minimum, maximum, range, and interquartile range. The descriptive statistics also
include measures of the shape of the distribution; skewness and kurtosis are displayed
with their standard errors. The 95% level confidence interval for the mean is also
displayed; you can specify a different confidence level.
M-estimators. Robust alternatives to the sample mean and median for estimating the
center of location. The estimators calculated differ in the weights they apply to cases.
Huber's M-estimator, Andrews' wave estimator, Hampel's redescending M-estimator,
and Tukey's biweight estimator are displayed.
Outliers. Displays the five largest and five smallest values, with case labels.
Percentiles. Displays the values for the 5th, 10th, 25th, 50th, 75th, 90th, and 95th
percentiles.
302
Chapter 15
Explore Plots
Figure 15-4
Explore Plots dialog box
Boxplots. These alternatives control the display of boxplots when you have more than
one dependent variable. Factor levels together generates a separate display for each
dependent variable. Within a display, boxplots are shown for each of the groups
defined by a factor variable. Dependents together generates a separate display for each
group defined by a factor variable. Within a display, boxplots are shown side by side
for each dependent variable. This display is particularly useful when the different
variables represent a single characteristic measured at different times.
Descriptive. The Descriptive group allows you to choose stem-and-leaf plots and
histograms.
Normality plots with tests. Displays normal probability and detrended normal
probability plots. The Kolmogorov-Smirnov statistic, with a Lilliefors significance
level for testing normality, is displayed. If non-integer weights are specified, the
Shapiro-Wilk statistic is calculated when the weighted sample size lies between 3 and
50. For no weights or integer weights, the statistic is calculated when the weighted
sample size lies between 3 and 5000.
Spread vs. Level with Levene Test. Controls data transformation for spread-versus-level
plots. For all spread-versus-level plots, the slope of the regression line and Levene's
robust tests for homogeneity of variance are displayed. If you select a transformation,
303
Explore
Levene's tests are based on the transformed data. If no factor variable is selected,
spread-versus-level plots are not produced. Power estimation produces a plot of the
natural logs of the interquartile ranges against the natural logs of the medians for all
cells, as well as an estimate of the power transformation for achieving equal variances
in the cells. A spread-versus-level plot helps determine the power for a transformation
to stabilize (make more equal) variances across groups. Transformed allows you to
select one of the power alternatives, perhaps following the recommendation from
power estimation, and produces plots of transformed data. The interquartile range and
median of the transformed data are plotted. Untransformed produces plots of the raw
data. This is equivalent to a transformation with a power of 1.
Explore Power Transformations
These are the power transformations for spread-versus-level plots. To transform

data, you must select a power for the transformation. You can choose one of the
following alternatives:
Natural log. Natural log transformation. This is the default.
1/square root. For each data value, the reciprocal of the square root is calculated.
Reciprocal. The reciprocal of each data value is calculated.
Square root. The square root of each data value is calculated.
Square. Each data value is squared.
Cube. Each data value is cubed.
Explore Options
Figure 15-5
Explore Options dialog box
Missing Values. Controls the treatment of missing values.

304
Chapter 15
Exclude cases listwise. Cases with missing values for any dependent or factor
variable are excluded from all analyses. This is the default.
Exclude cases pairwise. Cases with no missing values for variables in a group
(cell) are included in the analysis of that group. The case may have missing
values for variables used in other groups.
Report values. Missing values for factor variables are treated as a separate
category. All output is produced for this additional category. Frequency tables
include categories for missing values. Missing values for a factor variable are
included but labeled as missing.
Chapter
16
Crosstabs
The Crosstabs procedure forms two-way and multiway tables and provides a variety
of tests and measures of association for two-way tables. The structure of the table and
whether categories are ordered determine what test or measure to use.
Crosstabs' statistics and measures of association are computed for two-way
tables only. If you specify a row, a column, and a layer factor (control variable),
the Crosstabs procedure forms one panel of associated statistics and measures for
each value of the layer factor (or a combination of values for two or more control
variables). For example, if gender is a layer factor for a table of married (yes, no)
against life (is life exciting, routine, or dull), the results for a two-way table for the
females are computed separately from those for the males and printed as panels
following one another.
Example. Are customers from small companies more likely to be profitable in sales of
services (for example, training and consulting) than those from larger companies?
From a crosstabulation, you might learn that the majority of small companies (fewer
than 500 employees) yield high service profits, while the majority of large companies
(more than 2500 employees) yield low service profits.
Statistics and measures of association. Pearson chi-square, likelihood-ratio chi-square,
linear-by-linear association test, Fisher's exact test, Yates' corrected chi-square,
Pearson's r, Spearman's rho, contingency coefficient, phi, Cramér's V, symmetric and
asymmetric lambdas, Goodman and Kruskal's tau, uncertainty coefficient, gamma,
Somers' d, Kendall's tau-b, Kendall's tau-c, eta coefficient, Cohen's kappa, relative risk
estimate, odds ratio, McNemar test, and Cochran's and Mantel-Haenszel statistics.
305
306
Chapter 16
Crosstabs Data Considerations

Data. To define the categories of each table variable, use values of a numeric or short
string (eight or fewer characters) variable. For example, for gender, you could code
the data as 1 and 2 or as male and female.
Assumptions. Some statistics and measures assume ordered categories (ordinal data)
or quantitative values (interval or ratio data), as discussed in the section on statistics.
Others are valid when the table variables have unordered categories (nominal data).
For the chi-square-based statistics (phi, Cramér's V, and contingency coefficient), the
data should be a random sample from a multinomial distribution.
Note: Ordinal variables can be either numeric codes that represent categories (for
example, 1 = low, 2 = medium, 3 = high) or string values. However, the alphabetic
order of string values is assumed to reflect the true order of the categories. For
example, for a string variable with the values of low, medium, high, the order of the
categories is interpreted as high, low, medium—which is not the correct order. In
general, it is more reliable to use numeric codes to represent ordinal data.
307
Crosstabs
Sample Output
Figure 16-1
Crosstabs output
To Obtain Crosstabulations
Analyze
Crosstabs...
308
Chapter 16
Figure 16-2
Crosstabs dialog box
E Select one or more row variables and one or more column variables.

Select one or more control variables.
Click Statistics for tests and measures of association for two-way tables or
subtables.
Click Cells for observed and expected values, percentages, and residuals.
Click Format for controlling the order of categories.
Crosstabs Layers
If you select one or more layer variables, a separate crosstabulation is produced for
each category of each layer variable (control variable). For example, if you have
one row variable, one column variable, and one layer variable with two categories,
you get a two-way table for each category of the layer variable. To make another
layer of control variables, click Next. Subtables are produced for each combination
of categories for each 1st-layer variable with each 2nd-layer variable and so on. If
309
Crosstabs
statistics and measures of association are requested, they apply to two-way subtables
only.
Crosstabs Clustered Bar Charts

Display clustered bar charts. A clustered bar chart helps summarize your data for
groups of cases. There is one cluster of bars for each value of the variable you
specified under Rows. The variable that defines the bars within each cluster is the
variable you specified under Columns. There is one set of differently colored or
patterned bars for each value of this variable. If you specify more than one variable
under Columns or Rows, a clustered bar chart is produced for each combination
of two variables.
Crosstabs Statistics
Figure 16-3
Crosstabs Statistics dialog box
Chi-square. For tables with two rows and two columns, select Chi-square to calculate
the Pearson chi-square, the likelihood-ratio chi-square, Fisher's exact test, and Yates'
corrected chi-square (continuity correction). For 2 × 2 tables, Fisher's exact test
is computed when a table that does not result from missing rows or columns in
a larger table has a cell with an expected frequency of less than 5. Yates' corrected
310
Chapter 16
chi-square is computed for all other 2 × 2 tables. For tables with any number of
rows and columns, select Chi-square to calculate the Pearson chi-square and the
likelihood-ratio chi-square. When both table variables are quantitative, Chi-square
yields the linear-by-linear association test.
Correlations. For tables in which both rows and columns contain ordered values,
Correlations yields Spearman's correlation coefficient, rho (numeric data only).
Spearman's rho is a measure of association between rank orders. When both table
variables (factors) are quantitative, Correlations yields the Pearson correlation
coefficient, r, a measure of linear association between the variables.
Nominal. For nominal data (no intrinsic order, such as Catholic, Protestant, and
Jewish), you can select Phi (coefficient) and Cramér's V, Contingency coefficient,
Lambda (symmetric and asymmetric lambdas and Goodman and Kruskal's tau), and
Uncertainty coefficient.
Contingency coefficient. A measure of association based on chi-square. The
value ranges between zero and 1, with zero indicating no association between
the row and column variables and values close to 1 indicating a high degree of
association between the variables. The maximum value possible depends on the
number of rows and columns in a table.
Phi and Cramer's V. Phi is a chi-square based measure of association that involves
dividing the chi-square statistic by the sample size and taking the square root of
the result. Cramer's V is a measure of association based on chi-square.
Lambda. A measure of association which reflects the proportional reduction in
error when values of the independent variable are used to predict values of the
dependent variable. A value of 1 means that the independent variable perfectly
predicts the dependent variable. A value of 0 means that the independent variable
is no help in predicting the dependent variable.
Uncertainty coefficient. A measure of association that indicates the proportional
reduction in errror when values of one variable are used to predict values of the
other variable. For example, a value of 0.83 indicates that knowledge of one
variable reduces error in predicting values of the other variable by 83%. The
program calculates both symmetric and asymmetric versions of the uncertainty
coefficient.
311
Crosstabs
Ordinal. For tables in which both rows and columns contain ordered values, select
Gamma (zero-order for 2-way tables and conditional for 3-way to 10-way tables),
Kendall's tau-b, and Kendall's tau-c. For predicting column categories from row
categories, select Somers' d.
Gamma. A symmetric measure of association between two ordinal variables that
ranges between negative 1 and 1. Values close to an absolute value of 1 indicate
a strong relationship between the two variables. Values close to zero indicate
little or no relationship. For 2-way tables, zero-order gammas are displayed. For
3-way to n-way tables, conditional gammas are displayed.
Somers' d. A measure of association between two ordinal variables that ranges
from -1 to 1. Values close to an absolute value of 1 indicate a strong relationship
between the two variables, and values close to 0 indicate little or no relationship
between the variables. Somers' d is an asymmetric extension of gamma that
differs only in the inclusion of the number of pairs not tied on the independent
variable. A symmetric version of this statistic is also calculated.
Kendall's tau-b. A nonparametric measure of correlation for ordinal or ranked
variables that take ties into account. The sign of the coefficient indicates the
direction of the relationship, and its absolute value indicates the strength, with
larger absolute values indicating stronger relationships. Possible values range
from -1 to 1, but a value of -1 or +1 can only be obtained from square tables.
Kendall's tau-c. A nonparametric measure of association for ordinal variables that
ignores ties. The sign of the coefficient indicates the direction of the relationship,
and its absolute value indicates the strength, with larger absolute values indicating
stronger relationships. Possible values range from -1 to 1, but a value of -1 or +1
can only be obtained from square tables.
Nominal by Interval. When one variable is categorical and the other is quantitative,
select Eta. The categorical variable must be coded numerically.
Eta. A measure of association that ranges from 0 to 1, with 0 indicating no
assoication between the row and column variables and values close to 1 indicating
a high degree of association. Eta is appropriate for a dependent variable measured
on an interval scale (e.g., income) and an independent variable with a limited
number of categories (e.g., gender). Two eta values are computed: one treats
the row variable as the interval variable; the other treats the column variable as
the interval variable.
312
Chapter 16
Kappa. Cohen's kappa measures the agreement between the evaluations of two raters
when both are rating the same object. A value of 1 indicates perfect agreement. A
value of 0 indicates that agreement is no better than chance. Kappa is only available
for tables in which both variables use the same category values and both variables
have the same number of categories.
Risk. For 2 x 2 tables, a measure of the strength of the association between the
presence of a factor and the occurrence of an event. If the confidence interval for
the statistic includes a value of 1, you cannot assume that the factor is associated
with the event. The odds ratio can be used as an estimate or relative risk when the
occurence of the factor is rare.
McNemar. A nonparametric test for two related dichotomous variables. Tests for
changes in responses using the chi-square distribution. Useful for detecting changes
in responses due to experimental intervention in "before-and-after" designs. For
larger square tables, the McNemar-Bowker test of symmetry is reported.
Cochran's and Mantel-Haenszel statistics. Cochran's and Mantel-Haenszel statistics
can be used to test for independence between a dichotomous factor variable and a
dichotomous response variable, conditional upon covariate patterns defined by one or
more layer (control) variables. Note that while other statistics are computed layer by
layer, the Cochran's and Mantel-Haenszel statistics are computed once for all layers.
313
Crosstabs
Crosstabs Cell Display

Figure 16-4
Crosstabs Cell Display dialog box
To help you uncover patterns in the data that contribute to a significant chi-square test,
the Crosstabs procedure displays expected frequencies and three types of residuals
(deviates) that measure the difference between observed and expected frequencies.
Each cell of the table can contain any combination of counts, percentages, and
residuals selected.
Counts. The number of cases actually observed and the number of cases expected if
the row and column variables are independent of each other.
Percentages. The percentages can add up across the rows or down the columns.
The percentages of the total number of cases represented in the table (one layer)
are also available.
Residuals. Raw unstandardized residuals give the difference between the observed and
expected values. Standardized and adjusted standardized residuals are also available.
Unstandardized. The difference between an observed value and the expected
value. The expected value is the number of cases you would expect in the cell
if there were no relationship between the two variables. A positive residual
indicates that there are more cases in the cell than there would be if the row and
column variables were independent.
314
Chapter 16
Standardized. The residual divided by an estimate of its standard deviation.

Standardized residuals which are also known as Pearson residuals, have a mean
of 0 and a standard deviation of 1.
Adjusted standardized. The residual for a cell (observed minus expected value)
divided by an estimate of its standard error. The resulting standardized residual is
expressed in standard deviation units above or below the mean.
Noninteger Weights. Cell counts are normally integer values, since they represent the
number of cases in each cell. But if the data file is currently weighted by a weight
variable with fractional values (for example, 1.25), cell counts can also be fractional
values. You can truncate or round either before or after calculating the cell counts or
use fractional cell counts for both table display and statistical calculations.
Round cell counts. Case weights are used as is but the accumulated weights in the
cells are rounded before computing any statistics.
Truncate cell counts. Case weights are used as is but the accumulated weights in
the cells are truncated before computing any statistics.
Round case weights. Case weights are rounded before use.
Truncate case weights. Case weights are truncated before use.
No adjustments. Case weights are used as is and fractional cell counts are used.
However, when Exact Statistics (available only with the Exact Tests option) are
requested, the accumulated weights in the cells are either truncated or rounded
before computing the Exact test statistics.
Crosstabs Table Format

Figure 16-5
Crosstabs Table Format dialog box
You can arrange rows in ascending or descending order of the values of the row
variable.
Chapter
17
Summarize
The Summarize procedure calculates subgroup statistics for variables within

categories of one or more grouping variables. All levels of the grouping variable
are crosstabulated. You can choose the order in which the statistics are displayed.
Summary statistics for each variable across all categories are also displayed. Data
values in each category can be listed or suppressed. With large data sets, you can
choose to list only the first n cases.
Example. What is the average product sales amount by region and customer industry?
You might discover that the average sales amount is slightly higher in the western
region than in other regions, with corporate customers in the western region yielding
the highest average sales amount.
Statistics. Sum, number of cases, mean, median, grouped median, standard error
of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, variable value of the first category of
the grouping variable, variable value of the last category of the grouping variable,
standard deviation, variance, kurtosis, standard error of kurtosis, skewness, standard
error of skewness, percentage of total sum, percentage of total N, percentage of sum
in, percentage of N in, geometric mean, and harmonic mean.
Summarize Data Considerations

Data. Grouping variables are categorical variables whose values can be numeric
or short string. The number of categories should be reasonably small. The other
variables should be able to be ranked.
Assumptions. Some of the optional subgroup statistics, such as the mean and standard
deviation, are based on normal theory and are appropriate for quantitative variables
with symmetric distributions. Robust statistics, such as the median and the range,
315
316
Chapter 17
are appropriate for quantitative variables that may or may not meet the assumption
of normality.
Sample Output
Figure 17-1
Summarize output
To Obtain Case Summaries

Analyze
Reports
Case Summaries...
317
Summarize
Figure 17-2
Summarize Cases dialog box
E Select one or more variables.

Select one or more grouping variables to divide your data into subgroups.
Click Options to change the output title, add a caption below the output, or
exclude cases with missing values.
Click Statistics for optional statistics.
Select Display cases to list the cases in each subgroup. By default, the system lists
only the first 100 cases in your file. You can raise or lower the value for Limit
cases to first n or deselect that item to list all cases.
318
Chapter 17
Summarize Options
Figure 17-3
Summarize Cases Options dialog box
Summarize allows you to change the title of your output or add a caption that will
appear below the output table. You can control line wrapping in titles and captions by
typing \n wherever you want to insert a line break in the text.
You can also choose to display or suppress subheadings for totals and to include or
exclude cases with missing values for any of the variables used in any of the analyses.
Often it is desirable to denote missing cases in output with a period or an asterisk.
Enter a character, phrase, or code that you would like to have appear when a value is
missing; otherwise, no special treatment is applied to missing cases in the output.
319
Summarize
Summarize Statistics
Figure 17-4
Summarize Cases Statistics dialog box
You can choose one or more of the following subgroup statistics for the variables
within each category of each grouping variable: sum, number of cases, mean, median,
grouped median, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, variable
value of the first category of the grouping variable, variable value of the last category
of the grouping variable, standard deviation, variance, kurtosis, standard error of
kurtosis, skewness, standard error of skewness, percentage of total sum, percentage
of total N, percentage of sum in, percentage of N in, geometric mean, harmonic
mean. The order in which the statistics appear in the Cell Statistics list is the order in
which they will be displayed in the output. Summary statistics are also displayed
for each variable across all categories.
First. Displays the first data value encountered in the data file.
Geometric Mean. The nth root of the product of the data values, where n represents the
number of cases.
Grouped Median. Median calculated for data that is coded into groups. For example,
with age data if each value in the 30's is coded 35, each value in the 40's coded 45,
etc. the grouped median is the median calculated from the coded data.
320
Chapter 17
Harmonic Mean. Used to estimate an average group size when the sample sizes in the
groups are not equal. The harmonic mean is the total number of samples divided by
the sum of the reciprocals of the sample sizes.
Kurtosis. A measure of the extent to which observations cluster around a central point.
For a normal distribution, the value of the kurtosis statistic is 0. Positive kurtosis
indicates that the observations cluster more and have longer tails than those in the
normal distribution and negative kurtosis indicates the observations cluster less
and have shorter tails.
Last. Displays the last data value encountered in the data file.
Mean. A measure of central tendency. The arithmetic average; the sum divided
by the number of cases.
Median. The value above and below which half the cases fall, the 50th percentile. If
there is an even number of cases, the median is the average of the two middle cases
when they are sorted in ascending or descending order. The median is a measure of
central tendency not sensitive to outlying values -- unlike the mean, which can be
affected by a few extremely high or low values.
N. The number of cases (observations or records).
Percent of Total N. Percent of the total number of cases in each category.
Percent of Total Sum. Percent of the total sum in each category.
Range. The difference between the largest and smallest values of a numeric variable;
the maximum minus the minimum.
skewness has a long left tail. As a rough guide, a skewness value more than twice it's
standard error is taken to indicate a departure from symmetry.
Standard Error of Kurtosis. The ratio of kurtosis to its standard error can be used as a
test of normality (that is, you can reject normality if the ratio is less than -2 or greater
than +2). A large positive value for kurtosis indicates that the tails of the distribution
321
Summarize
are longer than those of a normal distribution; a negative value for kurtosis indicates
shorter tails (becoming like those of a box-shaped uniform distribution).
Standard Error of Skewness. The ratio of skewness to its standard error can be used
as a test of normality (that is, you can reject normality if the ratio is less than -2 or
greater than +2). A large positive value for skewness indicates a long right tail; an
extreme negative value, a long left tail.
deviations from the mean divided by one less than the number of cases. The variance
is measured in units that are the square of those of the variable itself.
Chapter
18
Means
The Means procedure calculates subgroup means and related univariate statistics
for dependent variables within categories of one or more independent variables.
Optionally, you can obtain a one-way analysis of variance, eta, and tests for linearity.
Example. Measure the average amount of fat absorbed by three different types of
cooking oil and perform a one-way analysis of variance to see if the means differ.
error of skewness, percentage of total sum, percentage of total N, percentage of sum
in, percentage of N in, geometric mean, and harmonic mean. Options include analysis
of variance, eta, eta squared, and tests for linearity R and R2.
Means Data Considerations

Data. The dependent variables are quantitative and the independent variables are
categorical. The values of categorical variables can be numeric or short string.
with symmetric distributions. Robust statistics, such as the median and the range, are
normality. Analysis of variance is robust to departures from normality, but the data in
each cell should be symmetric. Analysis of variance also assumes that the groups
come from populations with equal variances. To test this assumption, use Levene's
homogeneity-of-variance test, available in the One-Way ANOVA procedure.
323
324
Chapter 18
Sample Output
Figure 18-1
Means output
Report
Absorbed Grams of Fat

Type Peanut Oil Mean 72.00
of Oil
N 6
Std.
13.34
Deviation
Lard Mean 85.00
N 6
Std.
7.77
Deviation
Corn Oil Mean 62.00
N 6
Std.
8.22
Deviation
Total Mean 73.00
N 18
Std.
13.56
Deviation
325
Means
To Obtain Subgroup Means

Analyze
Compare Means
Means...
Figure 18-2
Means dialog box
E There are two ways to select categorical independent variables:

Select one or more independent variables. Separate results are displayed for
each independent variable.
Select one or more layers of independent variables. Each layer further subdivides
the sample. If you have one independent variable in Layer 1 and one in Layer 2,
the results are displayed in one crossed table as opposed to separate tables for
each independent variable.
E Optionally, you can:

Click Options for optional statistics, analysis of variance table, eta, eta squared,
R, and R2.
326
Chapter 18
Means Options
Figure 18-3
Means Options dialog box
You can choose one or more of the following subgroup statistics for the variables
within each category of each grouping variable: sum, number of cases, mean, median,
grouped median, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, variable
value of the first category of the grouping variable, variable value of the last category
of the grouping variable, standard deviation, variance, kurtosis, standard error of
kurtosis, skewness, standard error of skewness, percentage of total sum, percentage
of total N, percentage of sum in, percentage of N in, geometric mean, and harmonic
mean. You can change the order in which the subgroup statistics appear. The order
in which the statistics appear in the Cell Statistics list is the order in which they are
displayed in the output. Summary statistics are also displayed for each variable
across all categories.
327
Means
number of cases.
Percent of total N. Percent of the total number of cases in each category.
Percent of total sum. Percent of the total sum in each category.
328
Chapter 18
Statistics for First Layer
ANOVA table and eta. Displays a one-way analysis-of-variance table and calculates
eta and eta squared (measures of association) for each independent variable in the
first layer.
Test for linearity. Calculates the sum of squares, degrees of freedom, and mean square
associated with linear and nonlinear components, as well as the F ratio, R and R
squared. Linearity is not calculated if the independent variable is a short string.
Chapter
19
OLAP Cubes
The OLAP (Online Analytical Processing) Cubes procedure calculates totals, means,
and other univariate statistics for continuous summary variables within categories of
one or more categorical grouping variables. A separate layer in the table is created for
each category of each grouping variable.
Example. Total and average sales for different regions and product lines within regions.
error of skewness, percentage of total cases, percentage of total sum, percentage
of total cases within grouping variables, percentage of total sum within grouping
variables, geometric mean, and harmonic mean.
OLAP Cubes Data Considerations

Data. The summary variables are quantitative (continuous variables measured on an
interval or ratio scale), and the grouping variables are categorical. The values of
categorical variables can be numeric or short string.
with symmetric distributions. Robust statistics, such as the median and range, are
normality.
329
330
Chapter 19
Sample Output
Figure 19-1
OLAP Cubes output
1996 Sales
by Division and Region
Division: Total
Region: Total
Sum $145,038,250
Mean $371,893
Median $307,500
Std. Deviation $171,311
1996 Sales
by Division and Region
Division: Consumer Products

Region: East
Sum $18,548,100
Mean $289,814.06
Median $273,600.00
Std. Deviation $80,674.66
To Obtain OLAP Cubes

Analyze
Reports
OLAP Cubes...
331
OLAP Cubes
Figure 19-2
OLAP Cubes dialog box
E Select one or more continuous summary variables.
E Select one or more categorical grouping variables.

Select different summary statistics (click Statistics). You must select one or more
grouping variables before you can select summary statistics.
Calculate differences between pairs of variables and pairs of groups defined by a
grouping variable (click Differences).
Create custom table titles (click Title).
332
Chapter 19
OLAP Cubes Statistics

Figure 19-3
OLAP Cubes Statistics dialog box
You can choose one or more of the following subgroup statistics for the summary
variables within each category of each grouping variable: sum, number of cases,
mean, median, grouped median, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum,
range, variable value of the first category of the grouping variable, variable value of
the last category of the grouping variable, standard deviation, variance, kurtosis,
standard error of kurtosis, skewness, standard error of skewness, percentage of total
cases, percentage of total sum, percentage of total cases within grouping variables,
percentage of total sum within grouping variables, geometric mean, and harmonic
mean.
You can change the order in which the subgroup statistics appear. The order in
which the statistics appear in the Cell Statistics list is the order in which they are
displayed in the output. Summary statistics are also displayed for each variable
across all categories.
number of cases.
333
OLAP Cubes
Percent of N in. Percent of the number of cases for the specified grouping variable
within categories of other grouping variables. If you only have one grouping variable,
this value is identical to percent of total number of cases.
Percent of Sum in. Percent of the sum for the specified grouping variable within
categories of other grouping variables. If you only have one grouping variable, this
value is identical to percent of total sum.
Percent of Total N. Percent of the total number of cases in each category.
Percent of Total Sum. Percent of the total sum in each category.
334
Chapter 19
335
OLAP Cubes
OLAP Cubes Differences

Figure 19-4
OLAP Cubes Differences dialog box
This dialog box allows you to calculate percentage and arithmetic differences between
summary variables or between groups defined by a grouping variable. Differences are
calculated for all measures selected in the OLAP Cubes Statistics dialog box.
Differences between Variables. Calculates differences between pairs of variables.
Summary statistics values for the second variable (the Minus variable) in each pair
are subtracted from summary statistic values for the first variable in the pair. For
percentage differences, the value of the summary variable for the Minus variable is
used as the denominator. You must select at least two summary variables in the main
dialog box before you can specify differences between variables.
Differences between Groups of Cases. Calculates differences between pairs of groups
defined by a grouping variable. Summary statistics values for the second category in
each pair (the Minus category) are subtracted from summary statistic values for the
first category in the pair. Percentage differences use the value of the summary statistic
336
Chapter 19
for the Minus category as the denominator. You must select one or more grouping
variables in the main dialog box before you can specify differences between groups.
OLAP Cubes Title

Figure 19-5
OLAP Cubes Title dialog box
You can change the title of your output or add a caption that will appear below the
output table. You can also control line wrapping of titles and captions by typing \n
wherever you want to insert a line break in the text.
Chapter
20
T Tests
Three types of t tests are available:

Independent-samples t test (two-sample t test). Compares the means of one variable
for two groups of cases. Descriptive statistics for each group and Levene's test for
equality of variances are provided, as well as both equal- and unequal-variance t
values and a 95% confidence interval for the difference in means.
Paired-samples t test (dependent t test). Compares the means of two variables for a
single group. This test is also for matched pairs or case-control study designs. The
output includes descriptive statistics for the test variables, the correlation between
them, descriptive statistics for the paired differences, the t test, and a 95% confidence
interval.
One-sample t test. Compares the mean of one variable with a known or hypothesized
value. Descriptive statistics for the test variables are displayed along with the t test. A
95% confidence interval for the difference between the mean of the test variable and
the hypothesized test value is part of the default output.
Independent-Samples T Test
The Independent-Samples T Test procedure compares means for two groups of cases.
Ideally, for this test, the subjects should be randomly assigned to two groups, so that
any difference in response is due to the treatment (or lack of treatment) and not to
other factors. This is not the case if you compare average income for males and
females. A person is not randomly assigned to be a male or female. In such situations,
you should ensure that differences in other factors are not masking or enhancing a
significant difference in means. Differences in average income may be influenced by
factors such as education and not by sex alone.
337
338
Chapter 20
Example. Patients with high blood pressure are randomly assigned to a placebo group
and a treatment group. The placebo subjects receive an inactive pill and the treatment
subjects receive a new drug that is expected to lower blood pressure. After treating the
subjects for two months, the two-sample t test is used to compare the average blood
pressures for the placebo group and the treatment group. Each patient is measured
once and belongs to one group.
Statistics. For each variable: sample size, mean, standard deviation, and standard
error of the mean. For the difference in means: mean, standard error, and confidence
interval (you can specify the confidence level). Tests: Levene's test for equality of
variances, and both pooled- and separate-variances t tests for equality of means.
Independent-Samples T Test Data Considerations

Data. The values of the quantitative variable of interest are in a single column in the
data file. The procedure uses a grouping variable with two values to separate the cases
into two groups. The grouping variable can be numeric (values such as 1 and 2, or
6.25 and 12.5) or short string (such as yes and no). As an alternative, you can use a
quantitative variable, such as age, to split the cases into two groups by specifying a
cut point (cut point 21 splits age into an under-21 group and a 21-and-over group).
Assumptions. For the equal-variance t test, the observations should be independent,
random samples from normal distributions with the same population variance. For
the unequal-variance t test, the observations should be independent, random samples
from normal distributions. The two-sample t test is fairly robust to departures
from normality. When checking distributions graphically, look to see that they are
symmetric and have no outliers.
Sample Output
Figure 20-1
Independent-Samples T Test output
Group Statistics
Std. Std. Error

N Mean Deviation Mean
Blood Treatment placebo 10 142.50 17.04 5.39
pressure
new_drug 10 116.40 13.62 4.31
339
T Tests
Independent Samples Test
Levene's Test for

Equality of Variances t-test for Equality of Means
95% Confidence Interval
of the Mean
Significance Mean Std. Error
F Significance t df (2-tailed) Difference Difference Lower Upper
Blood Equal
pressure variances .134 .719 3.783 18 .001 26.10 6.90 11.61 40.59
assumed
Equal
variances
3.783 17.163 .001 26.10 6.90 11.56 40.64
not
assumed
To Obtain an Independent-Samples T Test

Analyze
Compare Means
Independent-Samples T Test...
Figure 20-2
Independent-Samples T Test dialog box
E Select one or more quantitative test variables. A separate t test is computed for
each variable.
E Select a single grouping variable, and click Define Groups to specify two codes for
the groups that you want to compare.
340
Chapter 20
Optionally, you can click Options to control the treatment of missing data and the
level of the confidence interval.
Independent-Samples T Test Define Groups

Figure 20-3
Define Groups dialog box for numeric variables
For numeric grouping variables, define the two groups for the t test by specifying two
values or a cut point:
Use specified values. Enter a value for Group 1 and another for Group 2. Cases
with any other values are excluded from the analysis. Numbers need not be
integers (for example, 6.25 and 12.5 are valid).
Cut point. Alternatively, enter a number that splits the values of the grouping
variable into two sets. All cases with values less than the cut point form one
group, and cases with values greater than or equal to the cut point form the
other group.
Figure 20-4
Define Groups dialog box for string variables
For short string grouping variables, enter a string for Group 1 and another for Group
2, such as yes and no. Cases with other strings are excluded from the analysis.
341
T Tests
Independent-Samples T Test Options

Figure 20-5
Independent-Samples T Test Options dialog box
Confidence Interval. By default, a 95% confidence interval for the difference in means
is displayed. Enter a value between 1 and 99 to request a different confidence level.
Missing Values. When you test several variables and data are missing for one or more
variables, you can tell the procedure which cases to include (or exclude):
Exclude missing data analysis by analysis. Each t test uses all cases that have valid
data for the variables tested. Sample sizes may vary from test to test.
Exclude cases listwise. Each t test uses only cases that have valid data for all
variables used in the requested t tests. The sample size is constant across tests.
Paired-Samples T Test
The Paired-Samples T Test procedure compares the means of two variables for a
single group. It computes the differences between values of the two variables for each
case and tests whether the average differs from 0.
Example. In a study on high blood pressure, all patients are measured at the beginning
of the study, given a treatment, and measured again. Thus, each subject has two
measures, often called before and after measures. An alternative design for which
this test is used is a matched-pairs or case-control study. Here, each record in the
data file contains the response for the patient and also for his or her matched control
subject. In a blood pressure study, patients and controls might be matched by age (a
75-year-old patient with a 75-year-old control group member).
342
Chapter 20
Statistics. For each variable: mean, sample size, standard deviation, and standard
error of the mean. For each pair of variables: correlation, average difference in means,
t test, and confidence interval for mean difference (you can specify the confidence
level). Standard deviation and standard error of the mean difference.
Paired-Samples T Test Data Considerations

Data. For each paired test, specify two quantitative variables (interval- or ratio-level of
measurement). For a matched-pairs or case-control study, the response for each test
subject and its matched control subject must be in the same case in the data file.
Assumptions. Observations for each pair should be made under the same conditions.
The mean differences should be normally distributed. Variances of each variable
can be equal or unequal.
Sample Output
Figure 20-6
Paired-Samples T Test output
Paired Samples Statistics
Std. Std. Error

Mean N Deviation Mean
Pair 1 After
116.40 10 13.62 4.31
treatment
Before
142.50 10 17.04 5.39
treatment
Paired Samples Test
Paired Differences
of the Difference
Std. Std. Error Significance
Mean Deviation Mean Lower Upper t df (2-tailed)
Pair 1 After
treatment -
-26.10 19.59 6.19 -40.11 -12.09 -4.214 9 .002
Before
treatment
343
T Tests
To Obtain a Paired-Samples T Test

Analyze
Compare Means
Paired-Samples T Test...
Figure 20-7
Paired-Samples T Test dialog box
E Select a pair of variables, as follows:

Click each of two variables. The first variable appears in the Current Selections
group as Variable 1, and the second appears as Variable 2.
After you have selected a pair of variables, click the arrow button to move the
pair into the Paired Variables list. You may select more pairs of variables. To
remove a pair of variables from the analysis, select a pair in the Paired Variables
list and click the arrow button.
344
Chapter 20
Paired-Samples T Test Options

Figure 20-8
Paired-Samples T Test Options dialog box
Confidence Interval. By default, a 95% confidence interval for the difference in means
is displayed. Enter a value between 1 and 99 to request a different confidence level.
variables, you can tell the procedure which cases to include (or exclude):
Exclude cases analysis by analysis. Each t test uses all cases that have valid data
for the pair of variables tested. Sample sizes may vary from test to test.
Exclude cases listwise. Each t test uses only cases that have valid data for all pairs
of variables tested. The sample size is constant across tests.
One-Sample T Test
The One-Sample T Test procedure tests whether the mean of a single variable differs
from a specified constant.
Examples. A researcher might want to test whether the average IQ score for a group of
students differs from 100. Or, a cereal manufacturer can take a sample of boxes from
the production line and check whether the mean weight of the samples differs from
1.3 pounds at the 95% confidence level.
Statistics. For each test variable: mean, standard deviation, and standard error of the
mean. The average difference between each data value and the hypothesized test
value, a t test that tests that this difference is 0, and a confidence interval for this
difference (you can specify the confidence level).
345
T Tests
One-Sample T Test Data Considerations

Data. To test the values of a quantitative variable against a hypothesized test value,
choose a quantitative variable and enter a hypothesized test value.
Assumptions. This test assumes that the data are normally distributed; however, this
test is fairly robust to departures from normality.
Sample Output
Figure 20-9
One-Sample T Test output
One-Sample Statistics
IQ
N 15
Mean 109.33
Std. Deviation 12.03
Std. Error Mean 3.11
Rows and columns have been

transposed.
One-Sample Test
Test Value = 100

of the Difference
Significance Mean
t df (2-tailed) Difference Lower Upper
IQ 3.005 14 .009 9.33 2.67 15.99
346
Chapter 20
To Obtain a One-Sample T Test

Analyze
Compare Means
One-Sample T Test...
Figure 20-10
One-Sample T Test dialog box
E Select one or more variables to be tested against the same hypothesized value.
E Enter a numeric test value against which each sample mean is compared.
One-Sample T Test Options

Figure 20-11
One-Sample T Test Options dialog box
347
T Tests
Confidence Interval. By default, a 95% confidence interval for the difference between
the mean and the hypothesized test value is displayed. Enter a value between 1 and 99
to request a different confidence level.
of these variables, you can tell the procedure which cases to include (or exclude).
Exclude cases analysis by analysis. Each t test uses all cases that have valid data
for the variable tested. Sample sizes may vary from test to test.
Exclude cases listwise. Each t test uses only cases that have valid data for all
variables used in any of the t tests requested. The sample size is constant across
tests.
Chapter
21
One-Way ANOVA
The One-Way ANOVA procedure produces a one-way analysis of variance for a

quantitative dependent variable by a single factor (independent) variable. Analysis of
variance is used to test the hypothesis that several means are equal. This technique is
an extension of the two-sample t test.
In addition to determining that differences exist among the means, you may want
to know which means differ. There are two types of tests for comparing means: a
priori contrasts and post hoc tests. Contrasts are tests set up before running the
experiment, and post hoc tests are run after the experiment has been conducted. You
can also test for trends across categories.
Example. Doughnuts absorb fat in various amounts when they are cooked. An
experiment is set up involving three types of fat: peanut oil, corn oil, and lard.
Peanut oil and corn oil are unsaturated fats, and lard is a saturated fat. Along with
determining whether the amount of fat absorbed depends on the type of fat used, you
could set up an a priori contrast to determine whether the amount of fat absorption
differs for saturated and unsaturated fats.
Statistics. For each group: number of cases, mean, standard deviation, standard
error of the mean, minimum, maximum, and 95% confidence interval for the
mean. Levene's test for homogeneity of variance, analysis-of-variance table and
robust tests of the equality of means for each dependent variable, user-specified a
priori contrasts, and post hoc range tests and multiple comparisons: Bonferroni,
Sidak, Tukey's honestly significant difference, Hochberg's GT2, Gabriel, Dunnett,
Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch F test (R-E-G-W F), Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch
range test (R-E-G-W Q), Tamhane's T2, Dunnett's T3, Games-Howell, Dunnett's
C, Duncan's multiple range test, Student-Newman-Keuls (S-N-K), Tukey's b,
Waller-Duncan, Scheffé, and least-significant difference.
349
350
Chapter 21
One-Way ANOVA Data Considerations

Data. Factor variable values should be integers, and the dependent variable should be
quantitative (interval level of measurement).
Assumptions. Each group is an independent random sample from a normal population.
Analysis of variance is robust to departures from normality, although the data should
be symmetric. The groups should come from populations with equal variances. To
test this assumption, use Levene's homogeneity-of-variance test.
Sample Output
Figure 21-1
One-Way ANOVA output
ANOVA
Sum of Mean
Squares df Square F Significance
Absorbed Between
1596.00 2 798.00 7.824 .005
Grams of Groups
Fat
Within
1530.00 15 102.00
Groups
Total 3126.00 17
Descriptives

for Mean
Std. Lower Upper
N Mean Deviation Std. Error Bound Bound Minimum Maximum
Absorbed Type Peanut Oil 6 72.00 13.34 5.45 58.00 86.00 56 95
Grams of of Oil
Lard 6 85.00 7.77 3.17 76.84 93.16 77 97
Fat
Corn Oil 6 62.00 8.22 3.36 53.37 70.63 49 70
Total 18 73.00 13.56 3.20 66.26 79.74 49 97
Contrast Coefficients
Type of Oil
Peanut Oil Lard Corn Oil
Contrast 1 -.5 1 -.5
351
One-Way ANOVA
Contrast Tests
Value of Significance
Contrast Std. Error t df (2-tailed)
Absorbed Assume equal variances Contrast 1 18.00 5.05 3.565 15 .003
Grams of Fat
Does not assume equal variances Contrast 1 18.00 4.51 3.995 12.542 .002
Test of Homogeneity of Variances
Levene
Statistic df1 df2 Significance
Absorbed
Grams of .534 2 15 .597
Fat
To Obtain a One-Way Analysis of Variance

Analyze
Compare Means
One-Way ANOVA...
Figure 21-2
One-Way ANOVA dialog box
E Select a single independent factor variable.

352
Chapter 21
One-Way ANOVA Contrasts

Figure 21-3
One-Way ANOVA Contrasts dialog box
You can partition the between-groups sums of squares into trend components or
specify a priori contrasts.
Polynomial. Partitions the between-groups sums of squares into trend components.
You can test for a trend of the dependent variable across the ordered levels of
the factor variable. For example, you could test for a linear trend (increasing or
decreasing) in salary across the ordered levels of highest degree earned.
Degree. You can choose a 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th degree polynomial.
Coefficients. User-specified a priori contrasts to be tested by the t statistic. Enter
a coefficient for each group (category) of the factor variable and click Add after
each entry. Each new value is added to the bottom of the coefficient list. To specify
additional sets of contrasts, click Next. Use Next and Previous to move between
sets of contrasts.
The order of the coefficients is important because it corresponds to the ascending
order of the category values of the factor variable. The first coefficient on the list
corresponds to the lowest group value of the factor variable, and the last coefficient
corresponds to the highest value. For example, if there are six categories of the factor
variable, the coefficients –1, 0, 0, 0, 0.5, and 0.5 contrast the first group with the fifth
and sixth groups. For most applications, the coefficients should sum to 0. Sets that do
not sum to 0 can also be used, but a warning message is displayed.
353
One-Way ANOVA
One-Way ANOVA Post Hoc Tests

Figure 21-4
One-Way ANOVA Post Hoc Multiple Comparisons dialog box
Once you have determined that differences exist among the means, post hoc range
tests and pairwise multiple comparisons can determine which means differ. Range
tests identify homogeneous subsets of means that are not different from each other.
Pairwise multiple comparisons test the difference between each pair of means, and
yield a matrix where asterisks indicate significantly different group means at an
alpha level of 0.05.
Equal Variances Assumed
Tukey's honestly significant difference test, Hochberg's GT2, Gabriel, and Scheffé are
multiple comparison tests and range tests. Other available range tests are Tukey's b,
S-N-K (Student-Newman-Keuls), Duncan, R-E-G-W F (Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch
F test), R-E-G-W Q (Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch range test), and Waller-Duncan.
Available multiple comparison tests are Bonferroni, Tukey's honestly significant
difference test, Sidak, Gabriel, Hochberg, Dunnett, Scheffé, and LSD (least
significant difference).
354
Chapter 21
LSD. Uses t tests to perform all pairwise comparisons between group means. No
adjustment is made to the error rate for multiple comparisons.
Bonferroni. Uses t tests to perform pairwise comparisons between group means,
but controls overall error rate by setting the error rate for each test to the
experimentwise error rate divided by the total number of tests. Hence, the
observed significance level is adjusted for the fact that multiple comparisons
are being made.
Sidak. Pairwise multiple comparison test based on a t statistic. Sidak adjusts
the significance level for multiple comparisons and provides tighter bounds
than Bonferroni.
Scheffe. Performs simultaneous joint pairwise comparisons for all possible
pairwise combinations of means. Uses the F sampling distribution. Can be used
to examine all possible linear combinations of group means, not just pairwise
comparisons.
R-E-G-W F. Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple stepdown procedure based on an
F test.
R-E-G-W Q. Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple stepdown procedure based on
the Studentized range.
S-N-K. Makes all pairwise comparisons between means using the Studentized
range distribution. With equal sample sizes, it also compares pairs of means
within homogeneous subsets, using a stepwise procedure. Means are ordered
from highest to lowest, and extreme differences are tested first.
Tukey. Uses the Studentized range statistic to make all of the pairwise comparisons
between groups. Sets the experimentwise error rate at the error rate for the
collection for all pairwise comparisons.
Tukey's-b. Uses the Studentized range distribution to make pairwise comparisons
between groups. The critical value is the average of the corresponding value for
the Tukey's honestly significant difference test and the Student-Newman-Keuls.
Duncan. Makes pairwise comparisons using a stepwise order of comparisons
identical to the order used by the Student-Newman-Keuls test, but sets a
protection level for the error rate for the collection of tests, rather than an error
rate for individual tests. Uses the Studentized range statistic.
Hochberg's GT2. Multiple comparison and range test that uses the Studentized
maximum modulus. Similar to Tukey's honestly significant difference test.
355
One-Way ANOVA
Gabriel. Pairwise comparison test that used the Studentized maximum modulus
and is generally more powerful than Hochberg's GT2 when the cell sizes are
unequal. Gabriel's test may become liberal when the cell sizes vary greatly.
Waller-Duncan. Multiple comparison test based on a t statistic; uses a Bayesian
approach.
Dunnett. Pairwise multiple comparison t test that compares a set of treatments
against a single control mean. The last category is the default control category.
Alternatively, you can choose the first category. 2-sided tests that the mean at
any level (except the control category) of the factor is not equal to that of the
control category. <Control tests if the mean at any level of the factor is smaller
than that of the control category. >Control tests if the mean at any level of the
factor is greater than that of the control category.
Equal Variances Not Assumed
Multiple comparison tests that do not assume equal variances are Tamhane's T2,
Dunnett's T3, Games-Howell, and Dunnett's C.
Tamhane's T2. Conservative pairwise comparisons test based on a t test. This test
is appropriate when the variances are unequal.
Dunnett's T3. Pairwise comparison test based on the Studentized maximum
modulus. This test is appropriate when the variances are unequal.
Games-Howell. Pairwise comparison test that is sometimes liberal. This test is
appropriate when the variances are unequal.
Dunnett's C. Pairwise comparison test based on the Studentized range. This test is
appropriate when the variances are unequal.
Note: You may find it easier to interpret the output from post hoc tests if you deselect
Hide empty rows and columns in the Table Properties dialog box (in an activated pivot
table, choose Table Properties from the Format menu).
356
Chapter 21
One-Way ANOVA Options

Figure 21-5
One-Way ANOVA Options dialog box
Statistics. Choose one or more of the following:

Descriptive. Calculates the number of cases, mean, standard deviation, standard
error of the mean, minimum, maximum, and 95% confidence intervals for each
dependent variable for each group.
Fixed and random effects. Displays the standard deviation, standard error, and
95% confidence interval for the fixed-effects model, and the standard error,
95% confidence interval, and estimate of between-components variance for the
random-effects model.
Homogeneity of variance test. Calculates the Levene statistic to test for the equality
of group variances. This test is not dependent on the assumption of normality.
Brown-Forsythe. Calculates the Brown-Forsythe statistic to test for the equality of
group means. This statistic is preferable to the F statistic when the assumption of
equal variances does not hold.
Welch. Calculates the Welch statistic to test for the equality of group means. This
statistic is preferable to the F statistic when the assumption of equal variances
does not hold.
Means plot. Displays a chart that plots the subgroup means (the means for each group
defined by values of the factor variable).
357
One-Way ANOVA
Exclude cases analysis by analysis. A case with a missing value for either the
dependent or the factor variable for a given analysis is not used in that analysis.
Also, a case outside the range specified for the factor variable is not used.
Exclude cases listwise. Cases with missing values for the factor variable or for
any dependent variable included on the dependent list in the main dialog box
are excluded from all analyses. If you have not specified multiple dependent
variables, this has no effect.
Chapter
22
GLM Univariate Analysis
The GLM Univariate procedure provides regression analysis and analysis of

variance for one dependent variable by one or more factors and/or variables. The
factor variables divide the population into groups. Using this General Linear Model
procedure, you can test null hypotheses about the effects of other variables on the
means of various groupings of a single dependent variable. You can investigate
interactions between factors as well as the effects of individual factors, some of which
may be random. In addition, the effects of covariates and covariate interactions
with factors can be included. For regression analysis, the independent (predictor)
variables are specified as covariates.
Both balanced and unbalanced models can be tested. A design is balanced if
each cell in the model contains the same number of cases. In addition to testing
hypotheses, GLM Univariate produces estimates of parameters.
Commonly used a priori contrasts are available to perform hypothesis testing.
Additionally, after an overall F test has shown significance, you can use post hoc
tests to evaluate differences among specific means. Estimated marginal means
give estimates of predicted mean values for the cells in the model, and profile
plots (interaction plots) of these means allow you to easily visualize some of the
relationships.
Residuals, predicted values, Cook's distance, and leverage values can be saved as
new variables in your data file for checking assumptions.
WLS Weight allows you to specify a variable used to give observations different
weights for a weighted least-squares (WLS) analysis, perhaps to compensate for
a different precision of measurement.
Example. Data are gathered for individual runners in the Chicago marathon for
several years. The time in which each runner finishes is the dependent variable.
Other factors include weather (cold, pleasant, or hot), number of months of training,
number of previous marathons, and gender. Age is considered a covariate. You
359
360
Chapter 22
might find that gender is a significant effect and that the interaction of gender with
weather is significant.
Methods. Type I, Type II, Type III, and Type IV sums of squares can be used to
evaluate different hypotheses. Type III is the default.
Statistics. Post hoc range tests and multiple comparisons: least significant
difference, Bonferroni, Sidak, Scheffé, Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple F,
Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple range, Student-Newman-Keuls, Tukey's
honestly significant difference, Tukey's b, Duncan, Hochberg's GT2, Gabriel,
Waller-Duncan t test, Dunnett (one-sided and two-sided), Tamhane's T2, Dunnett's
T3, Games-Howell, and Dunnett's C. Descriptive statistics: observed means, standard
deviations, and counts for all of the dependent variables in all cells. The Levene test
for homogeneity of variance.
Plots. Spread-versus-level, residual, and profile (interaction).
GLM Univariate Data Considerations

Data. The dependent variable is quantitative. Factors are categorical. They can have
numeric values or string values of up to eight characters. Covariates are quantitative
variables that are related to the dependent variable.
Assumptions. The data are a random sample from a normal population; in the
population, all cell variances are the same. Analysis of variance is robust to departures
from normality, although the data should be symmetric. To check assumptions, you
can use homogeneity of variances tests and spread-versus-level plots. You can also
examine residuals and residual plots.
361
Sample Output
Figure 22-1
GLM Univariate output
Tests of Between-Subjects Effects
Dependent Variable: SPVOL
Type III
Sum of
Source Squares df Mean Square F Sig.
1
Corrected Model 22.520 11 2.047 12.376 .000
Intercept 1016.981 1 1016.981 6147.938 .000
Flour 8.691 3 2.897 17.513 .000
Fat 10.118 2 5.059 30.583 .000
Surfactant .997 2 .499 3.014 .082
Fat*Surfactant 5.639 4 1.410 8.522 .001
Error 2.316 14 .165
Total 1112.960 26
Corrected Total 24.835 25
1. R Squared = .907 (Adjusted R Squared = .833)
fat * surfactant
Dependent Variable: SPVOL
fat surfactant Mean Std. Error Lower Bound Upper Bound
1 1 5.536 .240 5.021 6.052
2 5.891 .239 5.378 6.404
3 6.123 .241 5.605 6.641
2 1 7.023 .241 6.505 7.541
2 6.708 .301 6.064 7.353
3 6.000 .203 5.564 6.436
3 1 6.629 .301 5.984 7.274
2 7.200 .203 6.764 7.636
3 8.589 .300 7.945 9.233
362
Chapter 22
To Obtain GLM Univariate Tables

Analyze
General Linear Model
Univariate...
Figure 22-2
Univariate dialog box
E Select a dependent variable.
E Select variables for Fixed Factor(s), Random Factor(s), and Covariate(s), as

appropriate for your data.
E Optionally, you can use WLS Weight to specify a weight variable for weighted
least-squares analysis. If the value of the weighting variable is zero, negative, or
missing, the case is excluded from the analysis. A variable already used in the model
cannot be used as a weighting variable.
363
GLM Model
Figure 22-3
Univariate Model dialog box
Specify Model. A full factorial model contains all factor main effects, all covariate
main effects, and all factor-by-factor interactions. It does not contain covariate
interactions. Select Custom to specify only a subset of interactions or to specify
factor-by-covariate interactions. You must indicate all of the terms to be included
in the model.
Factors and Covariates. The factors and covariates are listed with (F) for fixed factor
and (C) for covariate. In a Univariate analysis, (R) indicates a random factor.
Model. The model depends on the nature of your data. After selecting Custom, you
can select the main effects and interactions that are of interest in your analysis.
Sum of squares. The method of calculating the sums of squares. For balanced or
unbalanced models with no missing cells, the Type III sum-of-squares method is
most commonly used.
Include intercept in model. The intercept is usually included in the model. If you can
assume that the data pass through the origin, you can exclude the intercept.
364
Chapter 22
Build Terms
For the selected factors and covariates:

Interaction. Creates the highest-level interaction term of all selected variables. This is
the default.
Main effects. Creates a main-effects term for each variable selected.
All 2-way. Creates all possible two-way interactions of the selected variables.
All 3-way. Creates all possible three-way interactions of the selected variables.
All 4-way. Creates all possible four-way interactions of the selected variables.
All 5-way. Creates all possible five-way interactions of the selected variables.
Sum of Squares
For the model, you can choose a type of sums of squares. Type III is the most
commonly used and is the default.
Type I. This method is also known as the hierarchical decomposition of the
sum-of-squares method. Each term is adjusted for only the term that precedes it in the
model. Type I sums of squares are commonly used for:
A balanced ANOVA model in which any main effects are specified before any
first-order interaction effects, any first-order interaction effects are specified
before any second-order interaction effects, and so on.
A polynomial regression model in which any lower-order terms are specified
before any higher-order terms.
A purely nested model in which the first-specified effect is nested within the
second-specified effect, the second-specified effect is nested within the third, and
so on. (This form of nesting can be specified only by using syntax.)
Type II. This method calculates the sums of squares of an effect in the model adjusted
for all other “appropriate” effects. An appropriate effect is one that corresponds to all
effects that do not contain the effect being examined. The Type II sum-of-squares
method is commonly used for:
A balanced ANOVA model.
Any model that has main factor effects only.
365
Any regression model.

A purely nested design. (This form of nesting can be specified by using syntax.)
Type III. The default. This method calculates the sums of squares of an effect in the
design as the sums of squares adjusted for any other effects that do not contain it and
orthogonal to any effects (if any) that contain it. The Type III sums of squares have
one major advantage in that they are invariant with respect to the cell frequencies
as long as the general form of estimability remains constant. Hence, this type of
sums of squares is often considered useful for an unbalanced model with no missing
cells. In a factorial design with no missing cells, this method is equivalent to the
Yates' weighted-squares-of-means technique. The Type III sum-of-squares method
is commonly used for:
Any models listed in Type I and Type II.
Any balanced or unbalanced model with no empty cells.
Type IV. This method is designed for a situation in which there are missing cells. For
any effect F in the design, if F is not contained in any other effect, then Type IV =
Type III = Type II. When F is contained in other effects, Type IV distributes the
contrasts being made among the parameters in F to all higher-level effects equitably.
The Type IV sum-of-squares method is commonly used for:
Any models listed in Type I and Type II.
Any balanced model or unbalanced model with empty cells.
GLM Contrasts
Figure 22-4
Univariate Contrasts dialog box
366
Chapter 22
Contrasts are used to test for differences among the levels of a factor. You can specify
a contrast for each factor in the model (in a repeated measures model, for each
between-subjects factor). Contrasts represent linear combinations of the parameters.
Hypothesis testing is based on the null hypothesis LB = 0, where L is the contrast
coefficients matrix and B is the parameter vector. When a contrast is specified, SPSS
creates an L matrix in which the columns corresponding to the factor match the
contrast. The remaining columns are adjusted so that the L matrix is estimable.
The output includes an F statistic for each set of contrasts. Also displayed for the
contrast differences are Bonferroni-type simultaneous confidence intervals based on
Student's t distribution.
Available Contrasts
Available contrasts are deviation, simple, difference, Helmert, repeated, and

polynomial. For deviation contrasts and simple contrasts, you can choose whether the
reference category is the last or first category.
Contrast Types
Deviation. Compares the mean of each level (except a reference category) to the mean
of all of the levels (grand mean). The levels of the factor can be in any order.
Simple. Compares the mean of each level to the mean of a specified level. This
type of contrast is useful when there is a control group. You can choose the first or
last category as the reference.
Difference. Compares the mean of each level (except the first) to the mean of previous
levels. (Sometimes called reverse Helmert contrasts.)
Helmert. Compares the mean of each level of the factor (except the last) to the mean
of subsequent levels.
Repeated. Compares the mean of each level (except the last) to the mean of the
subsequent level.
Polynomial. Compares the linear effect, quadratic effect, cubic effect, and so on. The
first degree of freedom contains the linear effect across all categories; the second
degree of freedom, the quadratic effect; and so on. These contrasts are often used
to estimate polynomial trends.
367
GLM Profile Plots

Figure 22-5
Univariate Profile Plots dialog box
Profile plots (interaction plots) are useful for comparing marginal means in your
model. A profile plot is a line plot in which each point indicates the estimated
marginal mean of a dependent variable (adjusted for any covariates) at one level of a
factor. The levels of a second factor can be used to make separate lines. Each level in
a third factor can be used to create a separate plot. All fixed and random factors, if
any, are available for plots. For multivariate analyses, profile plots are created for
each dependent variable. In a repeated measures analysis, both between-subjects
factors and within-subjects factors can be used in profile plots. GLM Multivariate
and GLM Repeated Measures are available only if you have the Advanced Models
option installed.
A profile plot of one factor shows whether the estimated marginal means are
increasing or decreasing across levels. For two or more factors, parallel lines indicate
that there is no interaction between factors, which means that you can investigate the
levels of only one factor. Nonparallel lines indicate an interaction.
368
Chapter 22
Figure 22-6
Nonparallel plot (left) and parallel plot (right)
After a plot is specified by selecting factors for the horizontal axis and, optionally,
factors for separate lines and separate plots, the plot must be added to the Plots list.
GLM Post Hoc Comparisons

Figure 22-7
Univariate Post Hoc Multiple Comparisons for Observed Means dialog box
Post hoc multiple comparison tests. Once you have determined that differences exist
among the means, post hoc range tests and pairwise multiple comparisons can
determine which means differ. Comparisons are made on unadjusted values. These
tests are used for fixed between-subjects factors only. In GLM Repeated Measures,
these tests are not available if there are no between-subjects factors, and the post hoc
369
multiple comparison tests are performed for the average across the levels of the
within-subjects factors. For GLM Multivariate, the post hoc tests are performed for
each dependent variable separately. GLM Multivariate and GLM Repeated Measures
are available only if you have the Advanced Models option installed.
The Bonferroni and Tukey's honestly significant difference tests are commonly
used multiple comparison tests. The Bonferroni test, based on Student's t statistic,
adjusts the observed significance level for the fact that multiple comparisons are
made. Sidak's t test also adjusts the significance level and provides tighter bounds
than the Bonferroni test. Tukey's honestly significant difference test uses the
Studentized range statistic to make all pairwise comparisons between groups and sets
the experimentwise error rate to the error rate for the collection for all pairwise
comparisons. When testing a large number of pairs of means, Tukey's honestly
significant difference test is more powerful than the Bonferroni test. For a small
number of pairs, Bonferroni is more powerful.
Hochberg's GT2 is similar to Tukey's honestly significant difference test, but the
Studentized maximum modulus is used. Usually, Tukey's test is more powerful.
Gabriel's pairwise comparisons test also uses the Studentized maximum modulus
and is generally more powerful than Hochberg's GT2 when the cell sizes are unequal.
Gabriel's test may become liberal when the cell sizes vary greatly.
Dunnett's pairwise multiple comparison t test compares a set of treatments
against a single control mean. The last category is the default control category.
Alternatively, you can choose the first category. You can also choose a two-sided or
one-sided test. To test that the mean at any level (except the control category) of the
factor is not equal to that of the control category, use a two-sided test. To test whether
the mean at any level of the factor is smaller than that of the control category, select <
Control. Likewise, to test whether the mean at any level of the factor is larger than that
of the control category, select > Control.
Ryan, Einot, Gabriel, and Welsch (R-E-G-W) developed two multiple step-down
range tests. Multiple step-down procedures first test whether all means are equal.
If all means are not equal, subsets of means are tested for equality. R-E-G-W F is
based on an F test and R-E-G-W Q is based on the Studentized range. These tests
are more powerful than Duncan's multiple range test and Student-Newman-Keuls
(which are also multiple step-down procedures), but they are not recommended
for unequal cell sizes.
When the variances are unequal, use Tamhane's T2 (conservative pairwise
comparisons test based on a t test), Dunnett's T3 (pairwise comparison test based
on the Studentized maximum modulus), Games-Howellpairwise comparison
370
Chapter 22
test (sometimes liberal), or Dunnett's C (pairwise comparison test based on the

Studentized range).
Duncan's multiple range test, Student-Newman-Keuls (S-N-K), and Tukey's b
are range tests that rank group means and compute a range value. These tests are
not used as frequently as the tests previously discussed.
The Waller-Duncan t test uses a Bayesian approach. This range test uses the
harmonic mean of the sample size when the sample sizes are unequal.
The significance level of the Scheffé test is designed to allow all possible linear
combinations of group means to be tested, not just pairwise comparisons available in
this feature. The result is that the Scheffé test is often more conservative than other
tests, which means that a larger difference between means is required for significance.
The least significant difference (LSD) pairwise multiple comparison test is
equivalent to multiple individual t tests between all pairs of groups. The disadvantage
of this test is that no attempt is made to adjust the observed significance level for
multiple comparisons.
Tests displayed. Pairwise comparisons are provided for LSD, Sidak, Bonferroni,
Games and Howell, Tamhane's T2 and T3, Dunnett's C, and Dunnett's T3.
Homogeneous subsets for range tests are provided for S-N-K, Tukey's b, Duncan,
R-E-G-W F, R-E-G-W Q, and Waller. Tukey's honestly significant difference test,
Hochberg's GT2, Gabriel's test, and Scheffé's test are both multiple comparison
tests and range tests.
371
GLM Save
Figure 22-8
Univariate Save dialog box
You can save values predicted by the model, residuals, and related measures as new
variables in the Data Editor. Many of these variables can be used for examining
assumptions about the data. To save the values for use in another SPSS session, you
must save the current data file.
Predicted Values. The values that the model predicts for each case.
Unstandardized. The value the model predicts for the dependent variable.
Weighted. Weighted unstandardized predicted values. Available only if a WLS
variable was previously selected.
Standard error. An estimate of the standard deviation of the average value of
the dependent variable for cases that have the same values of the independent
variables.
Diagnostics. Measures to identify cases with unusual combinations of values for the
independent variables and cases that may have a large impact on the model.
372
Chapter 22
Cook's distance. A measure of how much the residuals of all cases would
change if a particular case were excluded from the calculation of the regression
coefficients. A large Cook's D indicates that excluding a case from computation
of the regression statistics, changes the coefficients substantially.
Leverage values. Uncentered leverage values. The relative influence of each
observation on the model's fit.
Residuals. An unstandardized residual is the actual value of the dependent variable
minus the value predicted by the model. Standardized, Studentized, and deleted
residuals are also available. If a WLS variable was chosen, weighted unstandardized
residuals are available.
Unstandardized. The difference between an observed value and the value
predicted by the model.
Weighted. Weighted unstandardized residuals. Available only if a WLS variable
was previously selected.
Studentized. The residual divided by an estimate of its standard deviation that
varies from case to case, depending on the distance of each case's values on the
independent variables from the means of the independent variables.
Deleted. The residual for a case when that case is excluded from the calculation of
the regression coefficients. It is the difference between the value of the dependent
variable and the adjusted predicted value.
Save to New File. Writes an SPSS data file containing a variance-covariance matrix of
the parameter estimates in the model. Also, for each dependent variable, there will
be a row of parameter estimates, a row of significance values for the t statistics
corresponding to the parameter estimates, and a row of residual degrees of freedom.
For a multivariate model, there are similar rows for each dependent variable. You can
use this matrix file in other procedures that read an SPSS matrix file.
373
GLM Options
Figure 22-9
Univariate Options dialog box
Optional statistics are available from this dialog box. Statistics are calculated using
a fixed-effects model.
Estimated Marginal Means. Select the factors and interactions for which you want
estimates of the population marginal means in the cells. These means are adjusted for
the covariates, if any.
Compare main effects. Provides uncorrected pairwise comparisons among
estimated marginal means for any main effect in the model, for both between- and
within-subjects factors. This item is available only if main effects are selected
under the Display Means For list.
Confidence interval adjustment. Select least significant difference (LSD),
Bonferroni, or Sidak adjustment to the confidence intervals and significance.
This item is available only if Compare main effects is selected.
374
Chapter 22
Display. Select Descriptive statistics to produce observed means, standard deviations,

and counts for all of the dependent variables in all cells. Estimates of effect size gives a
partial eta-squared value for each effect and each parameter estimate. The eta-squared
statistic describes the proportion of total variability attributable to a factor. Select
Observed power to obtain the power of the test when the alternative hypothesis is set
based on the observed value. Select Parameter estimates to produce the parameter
estimates, standard errors, t tests, confidence intervals, and the observed power for
each test. Select Contrast coefficient matrix to obtain the L matrix.
Homogeneity tests produces the Levene test of the homogeneity of variance for
each dependent variable across all level combinations of the between-subjects factors,
for between-subjects factors only. The spread-versus-level and residual plots options
are useful for checking assumptions about the data. This item is disabled if there are
no factors. Select Residual plot to produce an observed-by-predicted-by-standardized
residual plot for each dependent variable. These plots are useful for investigating the
assumption of equal variance. Select Lack of fit to check if the relationship between
the dependent variable and the independent variables can be adequately described by
the model. General estimable function allows you to construct custom hypothesis tests
based on the general estimable function. Rows in any contrast coefficient matrix are
linear combinations of the general estimable function.
Significance level. You might want to adjust the significance level used in post
hoc tests and the confidence level used for constructing confidence intervals. The
specified value is also used to calculate the observed power for the test. When
you specify a significance level, the associated level of the confidence intervals
is displayed in the dialog box.
UNIANOVA Command Additional Features

The SPSS command language also allows you to:
Specify nested effects in the design (using the DESIGN subcommand).
Specify tests of effects versus a linear combination of effects or a value (using the
TEST subcommand).
Specify multiple contrasts (using the CONTRAST subcommand).
Include user-missing values (using the MISSING subcommand).
Specify EPS criteria (using the CRITERIA subcommand).
375
Construct a custom L matrix, M matrix, or K matrix (using the LMATRIX,

MMATRIX, and KMATRIX subcommands).
For deviation or simple contrasts, specify an intermediate reference category
(using the CONTRAST subcommand).
Specify metrics for polynomial contrasts (using the CONTRAST subcommand).
Specify error terms for post hoc comparisons (using the POSTHOC subcommand).
Compute estimated marginal means for any factor or factor interaction among the
factors in the factor list (using the EMMEANS subcommand).
Specify names for temporary variables (using the SAVE subcommand).
Construct a correlation matrix data file (using the OUTFILE subcommand).
Construct a matrix data file that contains statistics from the between-subjects
ANOVA table (using the OUTFILE subcommand).
Save the design matrix to a new data file (using the OUTFILE subcommand).
Chapter
23
Bivariate Correlations
The Bivariate Correlations procedure computes Pearson's correlation coefficient,

Spearman's rho, and Kendall's tau-b with their significance levels. Correlations
measure how variables or rank orders are related. Before calculating a correlation
coefficient, screen your data for outliers (which can cause misleading results) and
evidence of a linear relationship. Pearson's correlation coefficient is a measure of
linear association. Two variables can be perfectly related, but if the relationship is not
linear, Pearson's correlation coefficient is not an appropriate statistic for measuring
their association.
Example. Is the number of games won by a basketball team correlated with the
average number of points scored per game? A scatterplot indicates that there is
a linear relationship. Analyzing data from the 1994–1995 NBA season yields that
Pearson's correlation coefficient (0.581) is significant at the 0.01 level. You might
suspect that the more games won per season, the fewer points the opponents scored.
These variables are negatively correlated (–0.401), and the correlation is significant
at the 0.05 level.
Statistics. For each variable: number of cases with nonmissing values, mean, and
standard deviation. For each pair of variables: Pearson's correlation coefficient,
Spearman's rho, Kendall's tau-b, cross-product of deviations, and covariance.
Bivariate Correlations Data Considerations

Data. Use symmetric quantitative variables for Pearson's correlation coefficient and
quantitative variables or variables with ordered categories for Spearman's rho and
Kendall's tau-b.
Assumptions. Pearson's correlation coefficient assumes that each pair of variables is
bivariate normal.
377
378
Chapter 23
Sample Output
Figure 23-1
Bivariate Correlations output
Correlations
Number of Scoring Defense

Games Points Per Points Per
Won Game Game
Pearson Number of
Correlation Games 1.000 .581** -.401*
Won
Scoring
Points Per .581** 1.000 .457*
Game
Defense
Points Per -.401* .457* 1.000
Game
Significance Number of
(2-tailed) Games . .001 .038
Won
Scoring
Points Per .001 . .017
Game
Defense
Points Per .038 .017 .
Game
N Number of
Games 27 27 27
Won
Scoring
Points Per 27 27 27
Game
Defense
Points Per 27 27 27
Game
**. Correlation at 0.01(2-tailed):...

*. Correlation at 0.05(2-tailed):...
379
To Obtain Bivariate Correlations

Analyze
Correlate
Bivariate...
Figure 23-2
Bivariate Correlations dialog box
E Select two or more numeric variables.
The following options are also available:

Correlation Coefficients. For quantitative, normally distributed variables, choose
the Pearson correlation coefficient. If your data are not normally distributed or
have ordered categories, choose Kendall's tau-b or Spearman, which measure the
association between rank orders. Correlation coefficients range in value from –1
(a perfect negative relationship) and +1 (a perfect positive relationship). A value
of 0 indicates no linear relationship. When interpreting your results, be careful
not to draw any cause-and-effect conclusions due to a significant correlation.
380
Chapter 23
Test of Significance. You can select two-tailed or one-tailed probabilities. If

the direction of association is known in advance, select One-tailed. Otherwise,
select Two-tailed.
Flag significant correlations. Correlation coefficients significant at the 0.05 level
are identified with a single asterisk, and those significant at the 0.01 level are
identified with two asterisks.
Bivariate Correlations Options

Figure 23-3
Bivariate Correlations Options dialog box
Statistics. For Pearson correlations, you can choose one or both of the following:
Means and standard deviations. Displayed for each variable. The number of
cases with nonmissing values is also shown. Missing values are handled on a
variable-by-variable basis regardless of your missing values setting.
Cross-product deviations and covariances. Displayed for each pair of variables.
The cross-product of deviations is equal to the sum of the products of
mean-corrected variables. This is the numerator of the Pearson correlation
coefficient. The covariance is an unstandardized measure of the relationship
between two variables, equal to the cross-product deviation divided by N–1.
Missing Values. You can choose one of the following:
Exclude cases pairwise. Cases with missing values for one or both of a pair of
variables for a correlation coefficient are excluded from the analysis. Since each
coefficient is based on all cases that have valid codes on that particular pair of
381
variables, the maximum information available is used in every calculation. This

can result in a set of coefficients based on a varying number of cases.
Exclude cases listwise. Cases with missing values for any variable are excluded
from all correlations.
CORRELATIONS and NONPAR CORR Command Additional Features

Write a correlation matrix for Pearson correlations that can be used in place
of raw data to obtain other analyses such as factor analysis (with the MATRIX
subcommand).
Obtain correlations of each variable on a list with each variable on a second list
(using the keyword WITH on the VARIABLES subcommand).
See the SPSS Command Syntax Reference for complete syntax information.
Chapter
24
Partial Correlations
The Partial Correlations procedure computes partial correlation coefficients that

describe the linear relationship between two variables while controlling for the
effects of one or more additional variables. Correlations are measures of linear
association. Two variables can be perfectly related, but if the relationship is not linear,
a correlation coefficient is not an appropriate statistic for measuring their association.
Example. Is there a relationship between healthcare funding and disease rates?
Although you might expect any such relationship to be a negative one, a study reports
a significant positive correlation: as healthcare funding increases, disease rates appear
to increase. Controlling for the rate of visits to healthcare providers, however, virtually
eliminates the observed positive correlation. healthcare funding and disease rates only
appear to be positively related because more people have access to healthcare when
funding increases, which leads to more reported diseases by doctors and hospitals.
Statistics. For each variable: number of cases with nonmissing values, mean, and
standard deviation. Partial and zero-order correlation matrices, with degrees of
freedom and significance levels.
Partial Correlations Data Considerations

Data. Use symmetric, quantitative variables.
Assumptions. The Partial Correlations procedure assumes that each pair of variables is
bivariate normal.
383
384
Chapter 24
Sample Output
Figure 24-1
Partial Correlations output
Correlations
Health care Visits to health

funding Reported care providers
(amount diseases (rate (rate per
Control Variables per 100) per 10,000) 10,000)
-none- 1 Health care funding Correlation 1.000 .737 .964
(amount per 100)
Significance (2-tailed) . .000 .000
df 0 48 48
Reported diseases Correlation .737 1.000 .762
(rate per 10,000)
Significance (2-tailed) .000 . .000
df 48 0 48
Visits to health care Correlation .964 .762 1.000
providers (rate per
Significance (2-tailed) .000 .000 .
10,000)
df 48 48 0
Visits to health Health care funding Correlation 1.000 .013
care providers (amount per 100)
Significance (2-tailed) . .928
(rate per 10,000)
df 0 47
Reported diseases Correlation .013 1.000
(rate per 10,000)
Significance (2-tailed) .928 .
df 47 0
1. Cells contain zero-order (Pearson) correlations.
To Obtain Partial Correlations

Analyze
Correlate
Partial...
385
Partial Correlations
Figure 24-2
Partial Correlations dialog box
E Select two or more numeric variables for which partial correlations are to be
computed.
E Select one or more numeric control variables.

Test of Significance. You can select two-tailed or one-tailed probabilities. If
the direction of association is known in advance, select One-tailed. Otherwise,
select Two-tailed.
Display actual significance level. By default, the probability and degrees of
freedom are shown for each correlation coefficient. If you deselect this item,
coefficients significant at the 0.05 level are identified with a single asterisk,
coefficients significant at the 0.01 level are identified with a double asterisk,
and degrees of freedom are suppressed. This setting affects both partial and
zero-order correlation matrices.
386
Chapter 24
Partial Correlations Options

Figure 24-3
Partial Correlations Options dialog box
Statistics. You can choose one or both of the following:

Means and standard deviations. Displayed for each variable. The number of cases
with nonmissing values is also shown.
Zero-order correlations. A matrix of simple correlations between all variables,
including control variables, is displayed.
Missing Values. You can choose one of the following alternatives:
Exclude cases listwise. Cases having missing values for any variable, including a
control variable, are excluded from all computations.
Exclude cases pairwise. For computation of the zero-order correlations on which
the partial correlations are based, a case having missing values for both or one
of a pair of variables is not used. Pairwise deletion uses as much of the data as
possible. However, the number of cases may differ across coefficients. When
pairwise deletion is in effect, the degrees of freedom for a particular partial
coefficient are based on the smallest number of cases used in the calculation
of any of the zero-order correlations.
Chapter
25
Distances
This procedure calculates any of a wide variety of statistics measuring either

similarities or dissimilarities (distances), either between pairs of variables or between
pairs of cases. These similarity or distance measures can then be used with other
procedures, such as factor analysis, cluster analysis, or multidimensional scaling, to
help analyze complex data sets.
Example. Is it possible to measure similarities between pairs of automobiles based on
certain characteristics, such as engine size, MPG, and horsepower? By computing
similarities between autos, you can gain a sense of which autos are similar to each
other and which are different from each other. For a more formal analysis, you might
consider applying a hierarchical cluster analysis or multidimensional scaling to the
similarities to explore the underlying structure.
Statistics. Dissimilarity (distance) measures for interval data are Euclidean distance,
squared Euclidean distance, Chebychev, block, Minkowski, or customized; for count
data, chi-square or phi-square; for binary data, Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean
distance, size difference, pattern difference, variance, shape, or Lance and Williams.
Similarity measures for interval data are Pearson correlation or cosine; for binary
data, Russel and Rao, simple matching, Jaccard, dice, Rogers and Tanimoto, Sokal
and Sneath 1, Sokal and Sneath 2, Sokal and Sneath 3, Kulczynski 1, Kulczynski 2,
Sokal and Sneath 4, Hamann, Lambda, Anderberg's D, Yule's Y, Yule's Q, Ochiai,
Sokal and Sneath 5, phi 4-point correlation, or dispersion.
To Obtain Distance Matrices

Analyze
Correlate
Distances...
387
388
Chapter 25
Figure 25-1
Distances dialog box
E Select at least one numeric variable to compute distances between cases, or select at
least two numeric variables to compute distances between variables.
E Select an alternative in the Compute Distances group to calculate proximities either

between cases or between variables.
389
Distances
Distances Dissimilarity Measures

Figure 25-2
Distances Dissimilarity Measures dialog box
From the Measure group, select the alternative that corresponds to your type of data
(interval, count, or binary); then, from the drop-down list, select one of the measures
that corresponds to that type of data. Available measures, by data type, are:
Interval data. Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean distance, Chebychev, block,
Minkowski, or customized.
Count data. Chi-square measure or phi-square measure.
Binary data. Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean distance, size difference,
pattern difference, variance, shape, or Lance and Williams. (Enter values for
Present and Absent to specify which two values are meaningful; Distances will
ignore all other values.)
The Transform Values group allows you to standardize data values for either cases or
variables before computing proximities. These transformations are not applicable to
binary data. Available standardization methods are z scores, range –1 to 1, range 0 to
1, maximum magnitude of 1, mean of 1, or standard deviation of 1.
The Transform Measures group allows you to transform the values generated by
the distance measure. They are applied after the distance measure has been computed.
Available options are absolute values, change sign, and rescale to 0–1 range.
390
Chapter 25
Distances Similarity Measures

Figure 25-3
Distances Similarity Measures dialog box
From the Measure group, select the alternative that corresponds to your type of data
(interval or binary); then, from the drop-down list, select one of the measures that
corresponds to that type of data. Available measures, by data type, are:
Interval data. Pearson correlation or cosine.
Binary data. Russell and Rao, simple matching, Jaccard, Dice, Rogers and
Tanimoto, Sokal and Sneath 1, Sokal and Sneath 2, Sokal and Sneath 3,
Kulczynski 1, Kulczynski 2, Sokal and Sneath 4, Hamann, Lambda, Anderberg's
D, Yule's Y, Yule's Q, Ochiai, Sokal and Sneath 5, phi 4-point correlation, or
dispersion. (Enter values for Present and Absent to specify which two values are
meaningful; Distances will ignore all other values.)
The Transform Values group allows you to standardize data values for either cases or
variables before computing proximities. These transformations are not applicable to
binary data. Available standardization methods are z scores, range –1 to 1, range 0 to
1, maximum magnitude of 1, mean of 1, and standard deviation of 1.
The Transform Measures group allows you to transform the values generated by
the distance measure. They are applied after the distance measure has been computed.
Available options are absolute values, change sign, and rescale to 0–1 range.
Chapter
26
Linear Regression
Linear Regression estimates the coefficients of the linear equation, involving one or
more independent variables, that best predict the value of the dependent variable.
For example, you can try to predict a salesperson's total yearly sales (the dependent
variable) from independent variables such as age, education, and years of experience.
Example. Is the number of games won by a basketball team in a season related to the
average number of points the team scores per game? A scatterplot indicates that these
variables are linearly related. The number of games won and the average number
of points scored by the opponent are also linearly related. These variables have a
negative relationship. As the number of games won increases, the average number
of points scored by the opponent decreases. With linear regression, you can model
the relationship of these variables. A good model can be used to predict how many
games teams will win.
Statistics. For each variable: number of valid cases, mean, and standard deviation.
For each model: regression coefficients, correlation matrix, part and partial
correlations, multiple R, R2, adjusted R2, change in R2, standard error of the estimate,
analysis-of-variance table, predicted values, and residuals. Also, 95% confidence
intervals for each regression coefficient, variance-covariance matrix, variance
inflation factor, tolerance, Durbin-Watson test, distance measures (Mahalanobis,
Cook, and leverage values), DfBeta, DfFit, prediction intervals, and casewise
diagnostics. Plots: scatterplots, partial plots, histograms, and normal probability plots.
Linear Regression Data Considerations

Data. The dependent and independent variables should be quantitative. Categorical
variables, such as religion, major field of study, or region of residence, need to be
recoded to binary (dummy) variables or other types of contrast variables.
391
392
Chapter 26
Assumptions. For each value of the independent variable, the distribution of the
dependent variable must be normal. The variance of the distribution of the dependent
variable should be constant for all values of the independent variable. The relationship
between the dependent variable and each independent variable should be linear, and
all observations should be independent.
Sample Output
Figure 26-1
Linear Regression output
70
60
Number of Games Won
50
40
30
20
10
90 100 110 120
Scoring Points Per Game
70
60
Number of Games Won
50
40
30
20
10
80 90 100 110 120
Defense Points Per Game

393
Linear Regression
Model Summary 3,4
Std. Error
Variables
Adjusted R of the
Entered Removed R R Square Square Estimate
Model 1 Defense
Points
Per
Game,
. .947 .898 .889 4.40
Scoring
Points
Per
1,2
Game
1. Indep. vars: (constant) Defense Points Per Game, Scoring Points Per Game...
2. All requested variables entered.
3. Dependent Variable: Number of Games Won
4. Method: Enter
ANOVA 2
Sum of Mean
Squares df Square F Significance
Model 1 Regression 4080.533 2 2040.266 105.198 .0001
Residual 465.467 24 19.394
Total 4546.000 26
1. Indep. vars: (constant) Defense Points Per Game, Scoring Points Per Game...
2. Dependent Variable: Number of Games Won
394
Chapter 26
2.0
1.5
1.0
Standardized Residual
.5
0.0
-.5
-1.0
-1.5
-2.0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Number of Games Won
To Obtain a Linear Regression Analysis

Analyze
Regression
Linear...
395
Linear Regression
Figure 26-2
Linear Regression dialog box
E In the Linear Regression dialog box, select a numeric dependent variable.
E Select one or more numeric independent variables.

Group independent variables into blocks and specify different entry methods for
different subsets of variables.
Choose a selection variable to limit the analysis to a subset of cases having a
particular value(s) for this variable.
Select a case identification variable for identifying points on plots.
Select a numeric WLS Weight variable for a weighted least squares analysis.
WLS. Allows you to obtain a weighted least-squares model. Data points are weighted
by the reciprocal of their variances. This means that observations with large variances
have less impact on the analysis than observations associated with small variances. If
396
Chapter 26
the value of the weighting variable is zero, negative, or missing, the case is excluded
from the analysis.
Linear Regression Variable Selection Methods

Method selection allows you to specify how independent variables are entered into
the analysis. Using different methods, you can construct a variety of regression
models from the same set of variables.
Enter (Regression). A procedure for variable selection in which all variables in
a block are entered in a single step.
Stepwise. At each step, the independent variable not in the equation which has
the smallest probability of F is entered, if that probability is sufficiently small.
Variables already in the regression equation are removed if their probability of
F becomes sufficiently large. The method terminates when no more variables
are eligible for inclusion or removal.
Remove. A procedure for variable selection in which all variables in a block
are removed in a single step.
Backward Elimination. A variable selection procedure in which all variables are
entered into the equation and then sequentially removed. The variable with the
smallest partial correlation with the dependent variable is considered first for
removal. If it meets the criterion for elimination, it is removed. After the first
variable is removed, the variable remaining in the equation with the smallest
partial correlation is considered next. The procedure stops when there are no
variables in the equation that satisfy the removal criteria.
Forward Selection. A stepwise variable selection procedure in which variables are
sequentially entered into the model. The first variable considered for entry into
the equation is the one with the largest positive or negative correlation with the
dependent variable. This variable is entered into the equation only if it satisfies
the criterion for entry. If the first variable is entered, the independent variable not
in the equation that has the largest partial correlation is considered next. The
procedure stops when there are no variables that meet the entry criterion.
The significance values in your output are based on fitting a single model. Therefore,
the significance values are generally invalid when a stepwise method (Stepwise,
Forward, or Backward) is used.
397
Linear Regression
All variables must pass the tolerance criterion to be entered in the equation,
regardless of the entry method specified. The default tolerance level is 0.0001. Also,
a variable is not entered if it would cause the tolerance of another variable already in
the model to drop below the tolerance criterion.
All independent variables selected are added to a single regression model.
However, you can specify different entry methods for different subsets of variables.
For example, you can enter one block of variables into the regression model using
stepwise selection and a second block using forward selection. To add a second block
of variables to the regression model, click Next.
Linear Regression Set Rule

Figure 26-3
Linear Regression Set Rule dialog box
Cases defined by the selection rule are included in the analysis. For example, if
you select a variable, equals, and 5 for the value, then only cases for which the
selected variable has a value equal to 5 are included in the analysis. A string value
is also permitted.
398
Chapter 26
Linear Regression Plots

Figure 26-4
Linear Regression Plots dialog box
Plots can aid in the validation of the assumptions of normality, linearity, and equality
of variances. Plots are also useful for detecting outliers, unusual observations, and
influential cases. After saving them as new variables, predicted values, residuals,
and other diagnostics are available in the Data Editor for constructing plots with the
independent variables. The following plots are available:
Scatterplots. You can plot any two of the following: the dependent variable,
standardized predicted values, standardized residuals, deleted residuals, adjusted
predicted values, Studentized residuals, or Studentized deleted residuals. Plot the
standardized residuals against the standardized predicted values to check for linearity
and equality of variances.
Source variable list. Lists the dependent variable (DEPENDNT) and the following
predicted and residual variables: Standardized predicted values (*ZPRED),
Standardized residuals (*ZRESID), Deleted residuals (*DRESID), Adjusted
predicted values (*ADJPRED), Studentized residuals (*SRESID), Studentized
deleted residuals (*SDRESID).
Produce all partial plots. Displays scatterplots of residuals of each independent
variable and the residuals of the dependent variable when both variables are regressed
separately on the rest of the independent variables. At least two independent variables
must be in the equation for a partial plot to be produced.
399
Linear Regression
Standardized Residual Plots. You can obtain histograms of standardized residuals and
normal probability plots comparing the distribution of standardized residuals to
a normal distribution.
If any plots are requested, summary statistics are displayed for standardized predicted
values and standardized residuals (*ZPRED and *ZRESID).
Linear Regression: Saving New Variables

Figure 26-5
Linear Regression Save dialog box
You can save predicted values, residuals, and other statistics useful for diagnostics.
Each selection adds one or more new variables to your active data file.
Predicted Values. Values that the regression model predicts for each case.
Unstandardized. The value the model predicts for the dependent variable.
400
Chapter 26
Standardized. A transformation of each predicted value into its standardized

form. That is, the mean predicted value is subtracted from the predicted value,
and the difference is divided by the standard deviation of the predicted values.
Standardized predicted values have a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1.
Adjusted. The predicted value for a case when that case is excluded from the
calculation of the regression coefficients.
S.E. of mean predictions. Standard errors of the predicted values. An estimate of
the standard deviation of the average value of the dependent variable for cases
that have the same values of the independent variables.
Distances. Measures to identify cases with unusual combinations of values for the
independent variables and cases that may have a large impact on the regression model.
Mahalanobis. A measure of how much a case's values on the independent variables
differ from the average of all cases. A large Mahalanobis distance identifies a
case as having extreme values on one or more of the independent variables.
Cook's. A measure of how much the residuals of all cases would change if a
particular case were excluded from the calculation of the regression coefficients.
A large Cook's D indicates that excluding a case from computation of the
regression statistics, changes the coefficients substantially.
Leverage values. Measures the influence of a point on the fit of the regression.
The centered leverage ranges from 0 (no influence on the fit) to (N-1)/N.
Prediction Intervals. The upper and lower bounds for both mean and individual
prediction intervals.
Mean. Lower and upper bounds (two variables) for the prediction interval of
the mean predicted response.
Individual. Lower and upper bounds (two variables) for the prediction interval of
the dependent variable for a single case.
Confidence Interval. Enter a value between 1 and 99.99 to specify the confidence
level for the two Prediction Intervals. Mean or Individual must be selected before
entering this value. Typical confidence interval values are 90, 95, and 99.
Residuals. The actual value of the dependent variable minus the value predicted by
the regression equation.
Unstandardized. The difference between an observed value and the value
predicted by the model.
401
Linear Regression

Studentized. The residual divided by an estimate of its standard deviation that
varies from case to case, depending on the distance of each case's values on the
independent variables from the means of the independent variables.
Deleted. The residual for a case when that case is excluded from the calculation of
the regression coefficients. It is the difference between the value of the dependent
variable and the adjusted predicted value.
Studentized deleted. The deleted residual for a case divided by its standard
error. The difference between a Studentized deleted residual and its associated
Studentized residual indicates how much difference eliminating a case makes
on its own prediction.
Influence Statistics. The change in the regression coefficients (DfBeta(s)) and
predicted values (DfFit) that results from the exclusion of a particular case.
Standardized DfBetas and DfFit values are also available along with the covariance
ratio.
DfBeta(s). The difference in beta value is the change in the regression coefficient
that results from the exclusion of a particular case. A value is computed for each
term in the model, including the constant.
Standardized DfBeta. Standardized difference in beta value. The change in the
regression coefficient that results from the exclusion of a particular case. You
may want to examine cases with absolute values greater than 2 divided by the
square root of N, where N is the number of cases. A value is computed for each
term in the model, including the constant.
DfFit. The difference in fit value is the change in the predicted value that results
from the exclusion of a particular case.
Standardized DfFit. Standardized difference in fit value. The change in the
predicted value that results from the exclusion of a particular case. You may want
to examine standardized values which in absolute value exceed 2 times the
402
Chapter 26
square root of p/N, where p is the number of parameters in the model and N is
the number of cases.
Covariance ratio. The ratio of the determinant of the covariance matrix with a
particular case excluded from the calculation of the regression coefficients to the
determinant of the covariance matrix with all cases included. If the ratio is close
to 1, the case does not significantly alter the covariance matrix.
Save to New File. Saves regression coefficients to a file that you specify.
Export model information to XML file. Exports model information to the specified file.
SmartScore and future releases of WhatIf? will be able to use this file.
Linear Regression Statistics

Figure 26-6
Linear Regression Statistics dialog box
The following statistics are available:

Regression Coefficients. Estimates displays Regression coefficient B, standard error
of B, standardized coefficient beta, t value for B, and two-tailed significance level
of t. Confidence intervals displays 95% confidence intervals for each regression
coefficient, or a covariance matrix. Covariance matrix displays a variance-covariance
matrix of regression coefficients with covariances off the diagonal and variances on
the diagonal. A correlation matrix is also displayed.
403
Linear Regression
Model fit. The variables entered and removed from the model are listed, and the
following goodness-of-fit statistics are displayed: multiple R, R2 and adjusted R2,
standard error of the estimate, and an analysis-of-variance table.
R squared change. The change in the R2 statistic that is produced by adding or deleting
an independent variable. If the R2 change associated with a variable is large, that
means that the variable is a good predictor of the dependent variable.
Descriptives. Provides the number of valid cases, the mean, and the standard deviation
for each variable in the analysis. A correlation matrix with a one-tailed significance
level and the number of cases for each correlation are also displayed.
Part and partial correlations. Displays the zero-order, part, and partial correlations.
Values of a correlation coefficient range from –1 to 1. The sign of the coefficient
indicates the direction of the relationship, and its absolute value indicates the strength,
with larger absolute values indicating stronger relationships.
Collinearity diagnostics. Collinearity (or multicollinearity) is the undesirable situation
when one independent variable is a linear function of other independent variables.
Eigenvalues of the scaled and uncentered cross-products matrix, condition indices,
and variance-decomposition proportions are displayed along with variance inflation
factors (VIF) and tolerances for individual variables.
Residuals. Displays the Durbin-Watson test for serial correlation of the residuals and
casewise diagnostics for the cases meeting the selection criterion (outliers above
n standard deviations).
404
Chapter 26
Linear Regression Options

Figure 26-7
Linear Regression Options dialog box
The following options are available:

Stepping Method Criteria. These options apply when either the forward, backward, or
stepwise variable selection method has been specified. Variables can be entered or
removed from the model depending on either the significance (probability) of the
F value or the F value itself.
Use Probability of F. A variable is entered into the model if the significance level of
its F value is less than the Entry value, and is removed if the significance level is
greater than the Removal value. Entry must be less than Removal and both values
must be positive. To enter more variables into the model, increase the Entry
value. To remove more variables from the model, lower the Removal value.
Use F Value. A variable is entered into the model if its F value is greater than the
Entry value, and is removed if the F value is less than the Removal value. Entry
must be greater than Removal and both values must be positive. To enter more
variables into the model, lower the Entry value. To remove more variables from
the model, increase the Removal value.
Include constant in equation. By default, the regression model includes a constant
term. Deselecting this option forces regression through the origin, which is rarely
done. Some results of regression through the origin are not comparable to results
405
Linear Regression
of regression that do include a constant. For example, R2 cannot be interpreted

in the usual way.
Missing Values. You can choose one of the following:
Exclude cases listwise. Only cases with valid values for all variables are included
in the analyses.
Exclude cases pairwise. Cases with complete data for the pair of variables being
correlated are used to compute the correlation coefficient on which the regression
analysis is based. Degrees of freedom are based on the minimum pairwise N.
Replace with mean. All cases are used for computations, with the mean of the
variable substituted for missing observations.
Chapter
27
Curve Estimation
The Curve Estimation procedure produces curve estimation regression statistics and
related plots for 11 different curve estimation regression models. A separate model is
produced for each dependent variable. You can also save predicted values, residuals,
and prediction intervals as new variables.
Example. A fire insurance company conducts a study to relate the amount of damage
in serious residential fires to the distance between the closest fire station and the
residence. A scatterplot reveals that the relationship between fire damage and distance
to the fire station is linear. You might fit a linear model to the data and check the
validity of assumptions and the goodness of fit of the model.
Statistics. For each model: regression coefficients, multiple R, R2, adjusted R2,
standard error of the estimate, analysis-of-variance table, predicted values, residuals,
and prediction intervals. Models: linear, logarithmic, inverse, quadratic, cubic, power,
compound, S-curve, logistic, growth, and exponential.
Curve Estimation Data Considerations

Data. The dependent and independent variables should be quantitative. If you select
Time instead of a variable from the working data file as the independent variable,
the Curve Estimation procedure generates a time variable where the length of time
between cases is uniform. If Time is selected, the dependent variable should be
a time-series measure. Time-series analysis requires a data file structure in which
each case (row) represents a set of observations at a different time and the length of
time between cases is uniform.
Assumptions. Screen your data graphically to determine how the independent and
dependent variables are related (linearly, exponentially, etc.). The residuals of
a good model should be randomly distributed and normal. If a linear model is
407
408
Chapter 27
used, the following assumptions should be met. For each value of the independent
variable, the distribution of the dependent variable must be normal. The variance
of the distribution of the dependent variable should be constant for all values of
the independent variable. The relationship between the dependent variable and the
independent variable should be linear, and all observations should be independent.
Sample Output
Figure 27-1
Curve Estimation output
MODEL: MOD_1.
Dependent variable.. DAMAGE Method.. LINEAR
Listwise Deletion of Missing Data
Multiple R .96098
R Square .92348
Adjusted R Square .91759
Standard Error 2.31635
Analysis of Variance:
DF Sum of Squares Mean Square
Regression 1 841.76636 841.76636

Residuals 13 69.75098 5.36546
F = 156.88616 Signif F = .0000
-------------------- Variables in the Equation --------------------
Variable B SE B Beta T Sig T
DISTANCE 4.919331 .392748 .960978 12.525 .0000

(Constant) 10.277929 1.420278 7.237 .0000
The following new variables are being created:
Name Label
ERR_1 Error for DAMAGE with DISTANCE from CURVEFIT, MOD_1 LINEAR
409
Curve Estimation
Cost of fire damage

50
40
30
20
Observed
10 Linear
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Distance to fire station
To Obtain a Curve Estimation

Analyze
Regression
Curve Estimation...
410
Chapter 27
Figure 27-2
Curve Estimation dialog box
E Select one or more dependent variables. A separate model is produced for each
dependent variable.
E Select an independent variable (either a variable in the working data file or Time).

Select a variable for labeling cases in scatterplots. For each point in the
scatterplot, you can use the Point Selection tool to display the value of the Case
Label variable.
Click Save to save predicted values, residuals, and prediction intervals as new
variables.

Include constant in equation. Estimates a constant term in the regression equation.
The constant is included by default.
411
Curve Estimation
Plot models. Plots the values of the dependent variable and each selected model
against the independent variable. A separate chart is produced for each dependent
variable.
Display ANOVA table. Displays a summary analysis-of-variance table for each
selected model.
Curve Estimation Models

You can choose one or more curve estimation regression models. To determine
which model to use, plot your data. If your variables appear to be related linearly,
use a simple linear regression model. When your variables are not linearly related,
try transforming your data. When a transformation does not help, you may need a
more complicated model. View a scatterplot of your data; if the plot resembles
a mathematical function you recognize, fit your data to that type of model. For
example, if your data resemble an exponential function, use an exponential model.
Linear. Model whose equation is Y = b0 + (b1 * t). The series values are modeled as a
linear function of time.
Logarithmic. Model whose equation is Y = b0 + (b1 * ln(t)).
Inverse. Model whose equation is Y = b0 + (b1 / t).
Quadratic. Model whose equation is Y = b0 + (b1 * t) + (b2 * t**2). The quadratic
model can be used to model a series which "takes off" or a series which dampens.
Cubic. Model defined by the equation Y = b0 + (b1 * t) + (b2 * t**2) + (b3 * t**3).
Power. Model whose equation is Y = b0 * (t**b1) or ln(Y) = ln(b0) + (b1 * ln(t)).
Compound. Model whose equation is Y = b0 * (b1**t) or ln(Y) = ln(b0) + (ln(b1) * t).
S-curve. Model whose equation is Y = e**(b0 + (b1/t)) or ln(Y) = b0 + (b1/t).
Logistic. Model whose equation is Y = 1 / (1/u + (b0 * (b1**t))) or ln(1/y-1/u)= ln
(b0) + (ln(b1)*t) where u is the upper boundary value. After selecting Logistic,
specify the upper boundary value to use in the regression equation. The value must be
a positive number, greater than the largest dependent variable value.
Growth. Model whose equation is Y = e**(b0 + (b1 * t)) or ln(Y) = b0 + (b1 * t).
Exponential. Model whose equation is Y = b0 * (e**(b1 * t)) or ln(Y) = ln(b0) +
(b1 * t).
412
Chapter 27
Curve Estimation Save

Figure 27-3
Curve Estimation Save dialog box
Save Variables. For each selected model, you can save predicted values, residuals
(observed value of the dependent variable minus the model predicted value),
and prediction intervals (upper and lower bounds). The new variable names and
descriptive labels are displayed in a table in the output window.
Predict Cases. If you select Time instead of a variable in the working data file as the
independent variable, you can specify a forecast period beyond the end of the time
series. You can choose one of the following alternatives:
Predict from estimation period through last case. Predicts values for all cases in the
file, based on the cases in the estimation period. The estimation period, displayed
at the bottom of the dialog box, is defined with the Range subdialog box of the
Select Cases option on the Data menu. If no estimation period has been defined,
all cases are used to predict values.
Predict through. Predicts values through the specified date, time, or observation
number, based on the cases in the estimation period. This can be used to forecast
values beyond the last case in the time series. The available text boxes for
specifying the end of the prediction period are dependent on the currently defined
date variables. If there are no defined date variables, you can specify the ending
observation (case) number.
Use the Define Dates option on the Data menu to create date variables.
Chapter
28
Discriminant Analysis
Discriminant analysis is useful for situations where you want to build a predictive
model of group membership based on observed characteristics of each case. The
procedure generates a discriminant function (or, for more than two groups, a set of
discriminant functions) based on linear combinations of the predictor variables that
provide the best discrimination between the groups. The functions are generated from
a sample of cases for which group membership is known; the functions can then be
applied to new cases with measurements for the predictor variables but unknown
group membership.
Note: The grouping variable can have more than two values. The codes for the
grouping variable must be integers, however, and you need to specify their minimum
and maximum values. Cases with values outside of these bounds are excluded from
the analysis.
Example. On average, people in temperate zone countries consume more calories per
day than those in the tropics, and a greater proportion of the people in the temperate
zones are city dwellers. A researcher wants to combine this information in a function
to determine how well an individual can discriminate between the two groups of
countries. The researcher thinks that population size and economic information may
also be important. Discriminant analysis allows you to estimate coefficients of the
linear discriminant function, which looks like the right side of a multiple linear
regression equation. That is, using coefficients a, b, c, and d, the function is:
D = a * climate + b * urban + c * population + d * gross domestic product per capita
413
414
Chapter 28
If these variables are useful for discriminating between the two climate zones, the
values of D will differ for the temperate and tropic countries. If you use a stepwise
variable selection method, you may find that you do not need to include all four
variables in the function.
Statistics. For each variable: means, standard deviations, univariate ANOVA. For
each analysis: Box's M, within-groups correlation matrix, within-groups covariance
matrix, separate-groups covariance matrix, total covariance matrix. For each
canonical discriminant function: eigenvalue, percentage of variance, canonical
correlation, Wilks' lambda, chi-square. For each step: prior probabilities, Fisher's
function coefficients, unstandardized function coefficients, Wilks' lambda for each
canonical function.
Data. The grouping variable must have a limited number of distinct categories, coded
as integers. Independent variables that are nominal must be recoded to dummy or
contrast variables.
Assumptions. Cases should be independent. Predictor variables should have a
multivariate normal distribution, and within-group variance-covariance matrices
should be equal across groups. Group membership is assumed to be mutually
exclusive (that is, no case belongs to more than one group) and collectively exhaustive
(that is, all cases are members of a group). The procedure is most effective when
group membership is a truly categorical variable; if group membership is based on
values of a continuous variable (for example, high IQ versus low IQ), you should
consider using linear regression to take advantage of the richer information offered by
the continuous variable itself.
Sample Output
Figure 28-1
Discriminant analysis output
Eigenvalues
% of Cumulative Canonical
Function Eigenvalue Variance % Correlation
1 1.002 100.0 100.0 .707
415
Wilks' Lambda
Test of Wilks'
Function(s) Lambda Chi-square df Sig.
1 .499 31.934 4 .000
Structure Matrix
Function
1
CALORIES .986
LOG_GDP .790
URBAN .488
LOG_POP .082
Functions at Group
Centroids
Function
CLIMATE 1
tropical -.869
temperate 1.107
To Obtain a Discriminant Analysis

Analyze
Classify
Discriminant...
416
Chapter 28
Figure 28-2
Discriminant Analysis dialog box
E Select an integer-valued grouping variable and click Define Range to specify the
categories of interest.
E Select the independent, or predictor, variables. (If your grouping variable does not
have integer values, Automatic Recode on the Transform menu will create one that
does.)
E Select the method for entering the independent variables.

Enter independents together. Forced-entry method. All independent variables that
satisfy tolerance criteria are entered simultaneously.
Use stepwise method. Uses stepwise analysis to control variable entry and
removal.
Optionally, you can select cases with a selection variable.
417
Discriminant Analysis Define Range

Figure 28-3
Discriminant Analysis Define Range dialog box
Specify the minimum and maximum value of the grouping value for the analysis.
Cases with values outside of this range are not used in the discriminant analysis but
are classified into one of the existing groups based on the results of the analysis. The
minimum and maximum must be integers.
Discriminant Analysis Select Cases

Figure 28-4
Discriminant Analysis Set Value dialog box
To select cases for your analysis, in the main dialog box click Select, choose a
selection variable, and click Value to enter an integer as the selection value. Only cases
with that value for the selection variable are used to derive the discriminant functions.
Statistics and classification results are generated for both selected and unselected
cases. This provides a mechanism for classifying new cases based on previously
existing data or for partitioning your data into training and testing subsets to perform
validation on the model generated.
418
Chapter 28
Discriminant Analysis Statistics

Figure 28-5
Discriminant Analysis Statistics dialog box
Descriptives. Available options are means (including standard deviations), univariate

ANOVAs, and Box's M test.
Means. Displays total and group means, and standard deviations for the
independent variables.
Univariate ANOVAs. Performs a one-way analysis of variance test for equality of
group means for each independent variable.
Box's M. A test for the equality of the group covariance matrices. For sufficiently
large samples, a nonsignificant p value means there is insufficient evidence that
the matrices differ. The test is sensitive to departures from multivariate normality.
Function Coefficients. Available options are Fisher's classification coefficients and
unstandardized coefficients.
Fisher's. Displays Fisher's classification function coefficients that can be used
directly for classification. A set of coefficients is obtained for each group, and a
case is assigned to the group for which it has the largest discriminant score.
Unstandardized. Displays the unstandardized discriminant function coefficients.
Matrices. Available matrices of coefficients for independent variables are
within-groups correlation matrix, within-groups covariance matrix, separate-groups
covariance matrix, and total covariance matrix.
Within-groups correlation. Displays a pooled within-groups correlation matrix that
is obtained by averaging the separate covariance matrices for all groups before
computing the correlations.
419
Within-groups covariance. Displays a pooled within-groups covariance matrix,

which may differ from the total covariance matrix. The matrix is obtained by
averaging the separate covariance matrices for all groups.
Separate-groups covariance. Displays separate covariance matrices for each
group.
Total covariance. Displays a covariance matrix from all cases as if they were
from a single sample.
Discriminant Analysis Stepwise Method

Figure 28-6
Discriminant Analysis Stepwise Method dialog box
Method. Select the statistic to be used for entering or removing new variables.
Available alternatives are Wilks' lambda, unexplained variance, Mahalanobis'
distance, smallest F ratio, and Rao's V. With Rao's V, you can specify the minimum
increase in V for a variable to enter.
Wilks' lambda. A variable selection method for stepwise discriminant analysis
that chooses variables for entry into the equation on the basis of how much
they lower Wilks' lambda. At each step, the variable that minimizes the overall
Wilks' lambda is entered.
Unexplained variance. At each step, the variable that minimizes the sum of the
unexplained variation between groups is entered.
420
Chapter 28
Mahalanobis distance. A measure of how much a case's values on the independent

variables differ from the average of all cases. A large Mahalanobis distance
identifies a case as having extreme values on one or more of the independent
variables.
Smallest F ratio. A method of variable selection in stepwise analysis based on
maximizing an F ratio computed from the Mahalanobis distance between groups.
Rao's V. A measure of the differences between group means. Also called the
Lawley-Hotelling trace. At each step, the variable that maximizes the increase
in Rao's V is entered. After selecting this option, enter the minimum value a
variable must have to enter the analysis.
Criteria. Available alternatives are Use F value and Use probability of F. Enter values
for entering and removing variables.
Use F value. A variable is entered into the model if its F value is greater than the
Entry value, and is removed if the F value is less than the Removal value. Entry
must be greater than Removal and both values must be positive. To enter more
variables into the model, lower the Entry value. To remove more variables from
the model, increase the Removal value.
Use probability of F. A variable is entered into the model if the significance level of
its F value is less than the Entry value, and is removed if the significance level is
greater than the Removal value. Entry must be less than Removal and both values
must be positive. To enter more variables into the model, increase the Entry
value. To remove more variables from the model, lower the Removal value.
Display. Summary of steps displays statistics for all variables after each step; F for
pairwise distances displays a matrix of pairwise F ratios for each pair of groups.
421
Discriminant Analysis Classification

Figure 28-7
Discriminant Analysis Classification dialog box
Prior Probabilities. These values are used in classification. You can specify equal prior
probabilities for all groups, or you can let the observed group sizes in your sample
determine the probabilities of group membership.
Display. Available display options are casewise results, summary table, and
leave-one-out classification.
Casewise results. Codes for actual group, predicted group, posterior probabilities,
and discriminant scores are displayed for each case.
Summary table. The number of cases correctly and incorrectly assigned to each of
the groups based on the discriminant analysis. Sometimes called the "Confusion
Matrix."
Leave-one-out classification. Each case in the analysis is classified by the functions
derived from all cases other than that case. It is also known as the "U-method."
Replace missing values with mean. Select this option to substitute the mean of an
independent variable for a missing value during the classification phase only.
Use Covariance Matrix. You can choose to classify cases using a within-groups
covariance matrix or a separate-groups covariance matrix.
422
Chapter 28
Within-groups. The pooled within-groups covariance matrix is used to classify

cases.
Separate-groups. Separate-groups covariance matrices are used for classification.
Since classification is based on the discriminant functions and not on the original
variables, this option is not always equivalent to quadratic discrimination.
Plots. Available plot options are combined-groups, separate-groups, and territorial
map.
Combined-groups. Creates an all-groups scatterplot of the first two discriminant
function values. If there is only one function, a histogram is displayed instead.
Separate-groups. Creates separate-group scatterplots of the first two discriminant
function values. If there is only one function, histograms are displayed instead.
Territorial map. A plot of the boundaries used to classify cases into groups
based on function values. The numbers correspond to groups into which cases
are classified. The mean for each group is indicated by an asterisk within its
boundaries. The map is not displayed if there is only one discriminant function.
Discriminant Analysis Save

Figure 28-8
Discriminant Analysis Save dialog box
You can add new variables to your active data file. Available options are predicted
group membership (a single variable), discriminant scores (one variable for each
discriminant function in the solution), and probabilities of group membership given
the discriminant scores (one variable for each group).
You can also export model information to the specified file. SmartScore and future
releases of WhatIf? will be able to use this file.
Chapter
29
Factor Analysis
Factor analysis attempts to identify underlying variables, or factors, that explain

the pattern of correlations within a set of observed variables. Factor analysis is
often used in data reduction to identify a small number of factors that explain most
of the variance observed in a much larger number of manifest variables. Factor
analysis can also be used to generate hypotheses regarding causal mechanisms or to
screen variables for subsequent analysis (for example, to identify collinearity prior to
performing a linear regression analysis).
The factor analysis procedure offers a high degree of flexibility:
Seven methods of factor extraction are available.
Five methods of rotation are available, including direct oblimin and promax
for nonorthogonal rotations.
Three methods of computing factor scores are available, and scores can be saved
as variables for further analysis.
Example. What underlying attitudes lead people to respond to the questions on a
political survey as they do? Examining the correlations among the survey items
reveals that there is significant overlap among various subgroups of items—questions
about taxes tend to correlate with each other, questions about military issues correlate
with each other, and so on. With factor analysis, you can investigate the number of
underlying factors and, in many cases, you can identify what the factors represent
conceptually. Additionally, you can compute factor scores for each respondent, which
can then be used in subsequent analyses. For example, you might build a logistic
regression model to predict voting behavior based on factor scores.
Statistics. For each variable: number of valid cases, mean, and standard deviation.
For each factor analysis: correlation matrix of variables, including significance
levels, determinant, and inverse; reproduced correlation matrix, including anti-image;
initial solution (communalities, eigenvalues, and percentage of variance explained);
423
424
Chapter 29
Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin measure of sampling adequacy and Bartlett's test of sphericity;

unrotated solution, including factor loadings, communalities, and eigenvalues; rotated
solution, including rotated pattern matrix and transformation matrix; for oblique
rotations: rotated pattern and structure matrices; factor score coefficient matrix
and factor covariance matrix. Plots: scree plot of eigenvalues and loading plot of
first two or three factors.
Factor Analysis Data Considerations

Data. The variables should be quantitative at the interval or ratio level. Categorical
data (such as religion or country of origin) are not suitable for factor analysis.
Data for which Pearson correlation coefficients can sensibly be calculated should
be suitable for factor analysis.
Assumptions. The data should have a bivariate normal distribution for each pair
of variables, and observations should be independent. The factor analysis model
specifies that variables are determined by common factors (the factors estimated by
the model) and unique factors (which do not overlap between observed variables);
the computed estimates are based on the assumption that all unique factors are
uncorrelated with each other and with the common factors.
425
Factor Analysis
Sample Output
Figure 29-1
Factor analysis output
Std. Analysis
Mean Deviation N
Average female life expectancy 72.833 8.272 72
Infant mortality (deaths per 1000 live
35.132 32.222 72
births)
People who read (%) 82.472 18.625 72
Birth rate per 1000 people 24.375 10.552 72
Fertility: average number of kids 3.205 1.593 72
People living in cities (%) 62.583 22.835 72
Log (base 10) of GDP_CAP 3.504 .608 72
Population increase (% per year)) 1.697 1.156 72
Birth to death ratio 3.577 2.313 72
Death rate per 1000 people 8.038 3.174 72
Log (base 10) of Population 4.153 .686 72
Communalities
Initial Extraction
LIFEEXPF 1.000 .953
BABYMORT 1.000 .949
LITERACY 1.000 .825
BIRTH_RT 1.000 .943
FERTILTY 1.000 .875
URBAN 1.000 .604
LOG_GDP 1.000 .738
POP_INCR 1.000 .945
B_TO_D 1.000 .925
DEATH_RT 1.000 .689
LOG_POP 1.000 .292
Extraction Method: Principal

Component Analysis.
426
Chapter 29
Total Variance Explained
Extraction Sums of Squared Rotation Sums of Squared

Initial Eigenvalues Loadings Loadings
% of Cumulative % of Cumulative % of Cumulative
Total Variance % Total Variance % Total Variance %
Component 1 6.242 56.750 56.750 6.242 56.750 56.750 6.108 55.525 55.525
2 2.495 22.685 79.435 2.495 22.685 79.435 2.630 23.910 79.435
3 .988 8.986 88.421
4 .591 5.372 93.793
5 .236 2.142 95.935
6 .172 1.561 97.496
7 .124 1.126 98.622
8 7.0E-02 .633 99.254
9 4.5E-02 .405 99.660
10 2.4E-02 .222 99.882
11 1.3E-02 .118 100.000
Extraction Method: Principal Component Analysis.
Scree Plot
7
2
Eigenvalue
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Component Number
427
Factor Analysis
Rotated Component Matrix
Component
1 2
BIRTH_RT .969
FERTILTY .931
LITERACY -.880 .226
LIFEEXPF -.856 .469
BABYMORT .853 -.469
POP_INCR .847 .476
LOG_GDP -.794 .327
URBAN -.561 .539
DEATH_RT -.827
B_TO_D .614 .741
LOG_POP -.520
Extraction Method: Principal

Component Analysis.
Rotation Method: Varimax
with Kaiser Normalization.
Component Transformation Matrix
1 2
Component 1 .982 -.190
2 .190 .982
Extraction Method: Principal Component

Analysis.
Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser
Normalization.
428
Chapter 29
Component Plot in Rotated Space

1.0
birth to death rati o
people living in ci t
aver age female li fe population increase
.5
log ( base 10) of gdp
people who read (%)
fertility:
birth rateaverage n
per 100
0.0
infant mortality (de

log ( base 10) of pop
Component 2
-.5
death rate per 1000
-1.0
-1.0 -.5 0.0 .5 1.0
Component 1
To Obtain a Factor Analysis

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
E Select the variables for the factor analysis.

429
Factor Analysis
Figure 29-2
Factor Analysis dialog box
Factor Analysis Select Cases

Figure 29-3
Factor Analysis Set Value dialog box
To select cases for your analysis, choose a selection variable, and click Value to
enter an integer as the selection value. Only cases with that value for the selection
variable are used in the factor analysis.
430
Chapter 29
Factor Analysis Descriptives

Figure 29-4
Factor Analysis Descriptives dialog box
Statistics. Univariate statistics include the mean, standard deviation, and number
of valid cases for each variable. Initial solution displays initial communalities,
eigenvalues, and the percentage of variance explained.
Correlation Matrix. The available options are coefficients, significance levels,
determinant, KMO and Bartlett's test of sphericity, inverse, reproduced, and
anti-image.
KMO and Bartlett's Test of Sphericity. The Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin measure of
sampling adequacy tests whether the partial correlations among variables are
small. Bartlett's test of sphericity tests whether the correlation matrix is an
identity matrix, which would indicate that the factor model is inappropriate.
Reproduced. The estimated correlation matrix from the factor solution. Residuals
(difference between estimated and observed correlations) are also displayed.
Anti-image. The anti-image correlation matrix contains the negatives of the
partial correlation coefficients, and the anti-image covariance matrix contains
the negatives of the partial covariances. In a good factor model, most of the
off-diagonal elements will be small. The measure of sampling adequacy for a
variable is displayed on the diagonal of the anti-image correlation matrix.
431
Factor Analysis
To Specify Descriptive Statistics and Correlation Coefficients

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
E In the Factor Analysis dialog box, click Descriptives.
Factor Analysis Extraction

Figure 29-5
Factor Analysis Extraction dialog box
Method. Allows you to specify the method of factor extraction. Available methods are
principal components, unweighted least squares, generalized least squares, maximum
likelihood, principal axis factoring, alpha factoring, and image factoring.
Principal Components Analysis. A factor extraction method used to form
uncorrelated linear combinations of the observed variables. The first component
has maximum variance. Successive components explain progressively smaller
portions of the variance and are all uncorrelated with each other. Principal
components analysis is used to obtain the initial factor solution. It can be used
when a correlation matrix is singular.
Unweighted Least-Squares Method. A factor extraction method that minimizes the
sum of the squared differences between the observed and reproduced correlation
matrices ignoring the diagonals.
432
Chapter 29
Generalized Least-Squares Method. A factor extraction method that minimizes the

sum of the squared differences between the observed and reproduced correlation
matrices. Correlations are weighted by the inverse of their uniqueness, so
that variables with high uniqueness are given less weight than those with low
uniqueness.
Maximum-Likelihood Method. A factor extraction method that produces parameter
estimates that are most likely to have produced the observed correlation matrix
if the sample is from a multivariate normal distribution. The correlations are
weighted by the inverse of the uniqueness of the variables, and an iterative
algorithm is employed.
Principal Axis Factoring. A method of extracting factors from the original
correlation matrix with squared multiple correlation coefficients placed in the
diagonal as initial estimates of the communalities. These factor loadings are used
to estimate new communalities that replace the old communality estimates in the
diagonal. Iterations continue until the changes in the communalities from one
iteration to the next satisfy the convergence criterion for extraction.
Alpha. A factor extraction method that considers the variables in the analysis to
be a sample from the universe of potential variables. It maximizes the alpha
reliability of the factors.
Image Factoring. A factor extraction method developed by Guttman and based
on image theory. The common part of the variable, called the partial image, is
defined as its linear regression on remaining variables, rather than a function of
hypothetical factors.
Analyze. Allows you to specify either a correlation matrix or a covariance matrix.
Correlation matrix. Useful if variables in your analysis are measured on different
scales.
Covariance matrix. Useful when you want to apply your factor analysis to multiple
groups with different variances for each variable.
Extract. You can either retain all factors whose eigenvalues exceed a specified value
or retain a specific number of factors.
Display. Allows you to request the unrotated factor solution and a scree plot of the
eigenvalues.
433
Factor Analysis
Unrotated Factor Solution. Displays unrotated factor loadings (factor pattern

matrix), communalities, and eigenvalues for the factor solution.
Scree plot. A plot of the variance associated with each factor. It is used to
determine how many factors should be kept. Typically the plot shows a distinct
break between the steep slope of the large factors and the gradual trailing of the
rest (the scree).
Maximum Iterations for Convergence. Allows you to specify the maximum number of
steps the algorithm can take to estimate the solution.
To Specify Extraction Options

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
E In the Factor Analysis dialog box, click Extraction.
Factor Analysis Rotation

Figure 29-6
Factor Analysis Rotation dialog box
Method. Allows you to select the method of factor rotation. Available methods are
varimax, direct oblimin, quartimax, equamax, or promax.
434
Chapter 29
Varimax Method. An orthogonal rotation method that minimizes the number of

variables that have high loadings on each factor. It simplifies the interpretation of
the factors.
Direct Oblimin Method. A method for oblique (nonorthogonal) rotation. When
delta equals 0 (the default), solutions are most oblique. As delta becomes more
negative, the factors become less oblique. To override the default delta of 0, enter
a number less than or equal to 0.8.
Quartimax Method. A rotation method that minimizes the number of factors needed
to explain each variable. It simplifies the interpretation of the observed variables.
Equamax Method. A rotation method that is a combination of the varimax method,
which simplifies the factors, and the quartimax method, which simplifies the
variables. The number of variables that load highly on a factor and the number of
factors needed to explain a variable are minimized.
Promax Rotation. An oblique rotation, which allows factors to be correlated. It
can be calculated more quickly than a direct oblimin rotation, so it is useful
for large datasets.
Display. Allows you to include output on the rotated solution, as well as loading
plots for the first two or three factors.
Rotated Solution. A rotation method must be selected to obtain a rotated solution.
For orthogonal rotations, the rotated pattern matrix and factor transformation
matrix are displayed. For oblique rotations, the pattern, structure, and factor
correlation matrices are displayed.
Factor Loading Plot. Three-dimensional factor loading plot of the first three
factors. For a two-factor solution, a two-dimensional plot is shown. The plot is
not displayed if only one factor is extracted. Plots display rotated solutions if
rotation is requested.
Maximum Iterations for Convergence. Allows you to specify the maximum number of
steps the algorithm can take to perform the rotation.
To Specify Rotation Options

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
435
Factor Analysis
E In the Factor Analysis dialog box, click Rotation.
Factor Analysis Scores

Figure 29-7
Factor Analysis Factor Scores dialog box
Save as variables. Creates one new variable for each factor in the final solution. Select
one of the following alternative methods for calculating the factor scores: regression,
Bartlett, or Anderson-Rubin.
Regression Method. A method for estimating factor score coefficients. The scores
produced have mean of 0 and a variance equal to the squared multiple correlation
between the estimated factor scores and the true factor values. The scores may be
correlated even when factors are orthogonal.
Bartlett Scores. A method of estimating factor score coefficients. The scores
produced have a mean of 0. The sum of squares of the unique factors over the
range of variables is minimized.
Anderson-Rubin Method. A method of estimating factor score coefficients; a
modification of the Bartlett method which ensures orthogonality of the estimated
factors. The scores produced have a mean of 0, a standard deviation of 1, and
are uncorrelated.
Display factor score coefficient matrix. Shows the coefficients by which variables are
multiplied to obtain factor scores. Also shows the correlations between factor scores.
436
Chapter 29
To Specify Factor Score Options

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
E In the Factor Analysis dialog box, click Scores.
Factor Analysis Options

Figure 29-8
Factor Analysis Options dialog box
Missing Values. Allows you to specify how missing values are handled. The available
alternatives are to exclude cases listwise, exclude cases pairwise, or replace with
mean.
Coefficient Display Format. Allows you to control aspects of the output matrices.
You sort coefficients by size and suppress coefficients with absolute values less
than the specified value.
To Specify Factor Analysis Options

Analyze
Data Reduction
Factor...
E In the Factor Analysis dialog box, click Options.

Chapter
30
Choosing a Procedure for Clustering
Cluster analyses can be performed using the TwoStep, Hierarchical, or K-Means

Cluster Analysis procedures. Each procedure employs a different algorithm for
creating clusters, and each has options not available in the others.
TwoStep Cluster Analysis. For many applications, the TwoStep Cluster Analysis
procedure will be the method of choice. It provides the following unique features:
Automatic selection of the best number of clusters, in addition to measures
for choosing between cluster models.
Ability to create cluster models simultaneously based on categorical and
continuous variables.
Ability to save the cluster model to an external XML file, then read that file and
update the cluster model using newer data.
Additionally, the TwoStep Cluster Analysis procedure can analyze large data files.
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis. The Hierarchical Cluster Analysis procedure is limited

to smaller data files (hundreds of objects to be clustered), but has the following
unique features:
Ability to cluster cases or variables.
Ability to compute a range of possible solutions and save cluster memberships
for each of those solutions.
Several methods for cluster formation, variable transformation, and measuring
the dissimilarity between clusters.
As long as all the variables are of the same type, the Hierarchical Cluster Analysis
procedure can analyze interval (continuous), count, or binary variables.
437
438
Chapter 30
K-Means Cluster Analysis. The K-Means Cluster Analysis procedure is limited to

continuous data and requires you to specify the number of clusters in advance, but it
has the following unique features:
Ability to save distances from cluster centers for each object.
Ability to read initial cluster centers from and save final cluster centers to an
external SPSS file.
Additionally, the K-Means Cluster Analysis procedure can analyze large data files.
Chapter
31
TwoStep Cluster Analysis
The TwoStep Cluster Analysis procedure is an exploratory tool designed to reveal

natural groupings (or clusters) within a data set that would otherwise not be apparent.
The algorithm employed by this procedure has several desirable features that
differentiate it from traditional clustering techniques:
Handling of categorical and continuous variables. By assuming variables to be
independent, a joint multinomial-normal distribution can be placed on categorical
and continuous variables.
Automatic selection of number of clusters. By comparing the values of a
model-choice criterion across different clustering solutions, the procedure can
automatically determine the optimal number of clusters.
Scalability. By constructing a cluster features (CF) tree that summarizes the
records, the TwoStep algorithm allows you to analyze large data files.
Example. Retail and consumer product companies regularly apply clustering
techniques to data that describe their customers' buying habits, gender, age, income
level, etc. These companies tailor their marketing and product development strategies
to each consumer group to increase sales and build brand loyalty.
Statistics. The procedure produces information criteria (AIC or BIC) by numbers of
clusters in the solution, cluster frequencies for the final clustering, and descriptive
statistics by cluster for the final clustering.
Plots. The procedure produces bar charts of cluster frequencies, pie charts of cluster
frequencies, and variable importance charts.
439
440
Chapter 31
Figure 31-1
TwoStep Cluster Analysis dialog box
Distance Measure. This selection determines how the similarity between two clusters
is computed.
Log-likelihood. The likelihood measure places a probability distribution on the
variables. Continuous variables are assumed to be normally distributed, while
categorical variables are assumed to be multinomial. All variables are assumed to
be independent.
Euclidean. The Euclidean measure is the “straight line” distance between two
clusters. It can be used only when all of the variables are continuous.
Number of Clusters. This selection allows you to specify how the number of clusters is
to be determined.
441
Determine automatically. The procedure will automatically determine the “best”

number of clusters, using the criterion specified in the Clustering Criterion group.
Optionally, enter a positive integer specifying the maximum numbers of clusters
that the procedure should consider.
Specify fixed. Allows you to fix the number of clusters in the solution. Enter a
positive integer.
Count of Continuous Variables. This group provides a summary of the continuous
variable standardization specifications made in the Options dialog box. For more
information, see “TwoStep Cluster Analysis Options” on page 443.
Clustering Criterion. This selection determines how the automatic clustering algorithm
determines the number of clusters. Either the Bayesian Information Criterion (BIC)
or the Akaike Information Criterion (AIC) can be specified.
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Data Considerations

Data. This procedure works with both continuous and categorical variables. Cases
represent objects to be clustered, and the variables represent attributes upon which
the clustering is based.
Assumptions. The likelihood distance measure assumes that variables in the cluster
model are independent. Further, each continuous variable is assumed to have a
normal (Gaussian) distribution, and each categorical variable is assumed to have a
multinomial distribution. Empirical internal testing indicates that the procedure
is fairly robust to violations of both the assumption of independence and the
distributional assumptions, but you should try to be aware of how well these
assumptions are met.
Use the Bivariate Correlations procedure to test the independence of two
continuous variables. Use the Crosstabs procedure to test the independence of two
categorical variables. Use the Means procedure to test the independence between a
continuous variable and categorical variable. Use the Explore procedure to test the
normality of a continuous variable. Use the Chi-Square Test procedure to test whether
a categorical variable has a specified multinomial distribution.
442
Chapter 31
To Obtain a TwoStep Cluster Analysis

Analyze
Classify
TwoStep Cluster...
E Select one or more categorical or continuous variables.

Adjust the criteria by which clusters are constructed.
Select settings for noise handling, memory allocation, variable standardization,
and cluster model input.
Request optional tables and plots.
Save model results to the working file or to an external XML file.
443
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Options

Figure 31-2
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Options dialog box
Outlier Treatment. This group allows you to treat outliers specially during clustering if
the cluster features (CF) tree fills. The CF tree is full if it cannot accept any more
cases in a leaf node and no leaf node can be split.
If you select noise handling and the CF tree fills, it will be regrown after placing
cases in sparse leaves into a “noise” leaf. A leaf is considered sparse if it contains
fewer than the specified percentage of cases of the maximum leaf size. After
the tree is regrown, the outliers will be placed in the CF tree if possible. If
not, the outliers are discarded.
If you do not select noise handling and the CF tree fills, it will be regrown
using a larger distance change threshold. After final clustering, values that
cannot be assigned to a cluster are labeled outliers. The outlier cluster is given
an identification number of -1 and is not included in the count of the number
of clusters.
444
Chapter 31
Memory Allocation. This group allows you to specify the maximum amount of
memory in megabytes (MB) that the cluster algorithm should use. If the procedure
exceeds this maximum, it will use the disk to store information that will not fit in
memory. Specify a number greater than or equal to 4.
Consult your system administrator for the largest value that you can specify
on your system.
The algorithm may fail to find the correct or desired number of clusters if this
value is too low.
Variable standardization. The clustering algorithm works with standardized continuous

variables. Any continuous variables that are not standardized should be left as
variables “To be Standardized.” To save some time and computational effort, you
can select any continuous variables that you have already standardized as variables
“Assumed Standardized.”
Advanced Options
CF Tree Tuning Criteria. The following clustering algorithm settings apply specifically
to the cluster features (CF) tree and should be changed with care:
Initial Distance Change Threshold. This is the initial threshold used to grow the CF
tree. If inserting a given case into a leaf of the CF tree would yield tightness less
than the threshold, the leaf is not split. If the tightness exceeds the threshold,
the leaf is split.
Maximum Branches (per leaf node). The maximum number of child nodes that
a leaf node can have.
Maximum Tree Depth. The maximum number of levels that the CF tree can have.
Maximum Number of Nodes Possible. This indicates the maximum number of
CF tree nodes that could potentially be generated by the procedure, based on
the function (bd+1-1) / (b-1), where b is the maximum branches and d is the
maximum tree depth. Be aware that an overly large CF tree can be a drain on
system resources and can adversely affect the performance of the procedure. At a
minimum, each node requires 16 bytes.
Cluster Model Update. This group allows you to import and update a cluster model
generated in a prior analysis. The input file contains the CF tree in XML format. The
model will then be updated with the data in the active file. You must select the
445
variable names in the main dialog box in the same order in which they were specified
in the prior analysis. The XML file remains unaltered, unless you specifically
write the new model information to the same filename. For more information, see
“TwoStep Cluster Analysis Output” on page 447.
If a cluster model update is specified, the options pertaining to generation of the
CF tree that were specified for the original model are used. More specifically, the
distance measure, noise handling, memory allocation, or CF tree tuning criteria
settings for the saved model are used, and any settings for these options in the dialog
boxes are ignored.
Note: When performing a cluster model update, the procedure assumes that none
of the selected cases in the working data file were used to create the original cluster
model. The procedure also assumes that the cases used in the model update come
from the same population as the cases used to create the original model; that is, the
means and variances of continuous variables and levels of categorical variables are
assumed to be the same across both sets of cases. If your “new” and “old” sets of
cases come from heterogeneous populations, you should run the TwoStep Cluster
Analysis procedure on the combined sets of cases for the best results.
446
Chapter 31
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Plots

Figure 31-3
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Plots dialog box
Within cluster percentage chart. Displays charts showing the within-cluster variation
of each variable. For each categorical variable, a clustered bar chart is produced,
showing the category frequency by cluster ID. For each continuous variable, an error
bar chart is produced, showing error bars by cluster ID.
Cluster pie chart. Displays a pie chart showing the percentage and counts of
observations within each cluster.
Variable Importance Plot. Displays several different charts showing the importance
of each variable within each cluster. The output is sorted by the importance rank
of each variable.
Rank Variables. This option determines whether plots will be created for each
cluster (By cluster) or for each variable (By variable).
Importance Measure. This option allows you to select which measure of variable
importance to plot. Chi-square or t-test of significance reports a Pearson chi-square
statistic as the importance of a categorical variable and a t statistic as the
importance of a continuous variable. Significance reports one minus the p value
447
for the test of equality of means for a continuous variable and the expected
frequency with the overall data set for a categorical variable.
Confidence level. This option allows you to set the confidence level for the test of
equality of a variable's distribution within a cluster versus the variable's overall
distribution. Specify a number less than 100 and greater than or equal to 50. The
value of the confidence level is shown as a vertical line in the variable importance
plots, if the plots are created by variable or if the significance measure is plotted.
Omit insignificant variables. Variables that are not significant at the specified
confidence level are not displayed in the variable importance plots.
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Output

Figure 31-4
TwoStep Cluster Analysis Output dialog box
Statistics. This group provides options for displaying tables of the clustering results.
The descriptive statistics and cluster frequencies are produced for the final cluster
model, while the information criterion table displays results for a range of cluster
solutions.
448
Chapter 31
Descriptives by cluster. Displays two tables that describe the variables in each
cluster. In one table, means and standard deviations are reported for continuous
variables by cluster. The other table reports frequencies of categorical variables
by cluster.
Cluster frequencies. Displays a table that reports the number of observations
in each cluster.
Information criterion (AIC or BIC). Displays a table containing the values of the AIC
or BIC, depending on the criterion chosen in the main dialog box, for different
numbers of clusters. This table is provided only when the number of clusters is
being determined automatically. If the number of clusters is fixed, this setting is
ignored and the table is not provided.
Working Data File. This group allows you to save variables to the working data file.
Create cluster membership variable. This variable contains a cluster identification
number for each case. The name of this variable is tsc_n, where n is a positive
integer indicating the ordinal of the working data file save operation completed
by this procedure in a given session.
XML Files. The final cluster model and CF tree are two types of output files that can
be exported in XML format.
Export final model. The final cluster model is exported to the specified file.
SmartScore and future releases of WhatIf? will be able to use this file.
Export CF tree. This option allows you to save the current state of the cluster tree
and update it later using newer data.
Chapter
32
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis
This procedure attempts to identify relatively homogeneous groups of cases (or

variables) based on selected characteristics, using an algorithm that starts with each
case (or variable) in a separate cluster and combines clusters until only one is left.
You can analyze raw variables or you can choose from a variety of standardizing
transformations. Distance or similarity measures are generated by the Proximities
procedure. Statistics are displayed at each stage to help you select the best solution.
Example. Are there identifiable groups of television shows that attract similar
audiences within each group? With hierarchical cluster analysis, you could cluster
television shows (cases) into homogeneous groups based on viewer characteristics.
This can be used to identify segments for marketing. Or you can cluster cities
(cases) into homogeneous groups so that comparable cities can be selected to test
various marketing strategies.
Statistics. Agglomeration schedule, distance (or similarity) matrix, and cluster
membership for a single solution or a range of solutions. Plots: dendrograms and
icicle plots.
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Data Considerations

Data. The variables can be quantitative, binary, or count data. Scaling of variables is
an important issue—differences in scaling may affect your cluster solution(s). If your
variables have large differences in scaling (for example, one variable is measured in
dollars and the other is measured in years), you should consider standardizing them
(this can be done automatically by the Hierarchical Cluster Analysis procedure).
Assumptions. The distance or similarity measures used should be appropriate for the
data analyzed (see the Proximities procedure for more information on choices of
distance and similarity measures). Also, you should include all relevant variables in
449
450
Chapter 32
your analysis. Omission of influential variables can result in a misleading solution.

Because hierarchical cluster analysis is an exploratory method, results should be
treated as tentative until they are confirmed with an independent sample.
Sample Output
Figure 32-1
Hierarchical cluster analysis output
Agglomeration Schedule
Stage Cluster
Cluster Combined First Appears
Cluster Cluster Cluster Cluster Next
1 2 Coefficients 1 2 Stage
Stage 1 11 12 .112 0 0 2
2 6 11 .132 0 1 4
3 7 9 .185 0 0 5
4 6 8 .227 2 0 7
5 7 10 .274 3 0 7
6 1 3 .423 0 0 10
7 6 7 .438 4 5 14
8 13 14 .484 0 0 15
9 2 5 .547 0 0 11
10 1 4 .691 6 0 11
11 1 2 1.023 10 9 13
12 15 16 1.370 0 0 13
13 1 15 1.716 11 12 14
14 1 6 2.642 13 7 15
15 1 13 4.772 14 8 0
Cluster Membership
4 3 2
Label Clusters Clusters Clusters
Case 1 Argentina 1 1 1
2 Brazil 1 1 1
3 Chile 1 1 1
4 Domincan
1 1 1
R.
5 Indonesia 1 1 1
6 Austria 2 2 1
7 Canada 2 2 1
8 Denmark 2 2 1
9 Italy 2 2 1
10 Japan 2 2 1
11 Norway 2 2 1
12 Switzerland 2 2 1
13 Bangladesh 3 3 2
14 India 3 3 2
15 Bolivia 4 1 1
16 Paraguay 4 1 1
451
Vertical Icicle
Case
4:Domincan R
13:Banglades
12:Switzerlan
16:Paraguay
5:Indonesia
1:Argentina
8:Denmark
11:Norway
7:Canada
15:Bolivia
10:Japan
6:Austria
14:India
2:Brazil
3:Chile
9:Italy
14
13
10
12
11
16
15
9
3
Number
of
clusters
1 XX XX XX XX XX XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXX X
2 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXX X
3 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X XX XX XX XX XXX X
4 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X XX X XX XX XXX X
5 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X X X XX XX XXX X
6 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X X X XX X XXX X
7 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X X X XX X XX X
8 XX X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X X X X X XX X
9 X X XX XX XX XX XXX XX X X X X X XX X
10 X X XX XX X XX XXX XX X X X X X XX X
11 X X XX XX X XX XXX XX X X X X X X X
12 X X X XX X XX XXX XX X X X X X X X
13 X X X XX X X XXX XX X X X X X X X
14 X X X X X X XXX XX X X X X X X X
15 X X X X X X XXX X X X X X X X X
* * * * * * H I E R A R C H I C A L C L U S T E R A N A L Y S I S * * * * * *
Dendrogram using Average Linkage (Between Groups)
Rescaled Distance Cluster Combine
C A S E 0 5 10 15 20 25
Label Num +---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
LIFEEXPF 2 òûòòòòòø
BABYMORT 5 ò÷ ùòòòø
LITERACY 3 òòòòòòò÷ ùòòòòòòòòòòòø
BIRTH_RT 6 òûòòòòòòòòò÷ ùòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòø
FERTILTY 10 ò÷ ó ó
URBAN 1 òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòûòòòòòòò÷ ùòòòòòòòòòø
LOG_GDP 8 òòòòòòòòòòòòòòò÷ ó ó
POP_INCR 4 òòòòòòòûòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòø ó ó
B_TO_D 9 òòòòòòò÷ ùòòòòò÷ ó
DEATH_RT 7 òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò÷ ó
LOG_POP 11 òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò÷
To Obtain a Hierarchical Cluster Analysis

Analyze
Classify
Hierarchical Cluster...
452
Chapter 32
Figure 32-2
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis dialog box
E If you are clustering cases, select at least one numeric variable. If you are clustering
variables, select at least three numeric variables.
Optionally, you can select an identification variable to label cases.
453
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Method

Figure 32-3
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Method dialog box
Cluster Method. Available alternatives are between-groups linkage, within-groups

linkage, nearest neighbor, furthest neighbor, centroid clustering, median clustering,
and Ward's method.
Measure. Allows you to specify the distance or similarity measure to be used in
clustering. Select the type of data and the appropriate distance or similarity measure:
Interval data. Available alternatives are Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean
distance, cosine, Pearson correlation, Chebychev, block, Minkowski, and
customized.
Count data. Available alternatives are chi-square measure and phi-square measure.
Binary data. Available alternatives are Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean
distance, size difference, pattern difference, variance, dispersion, shape, simple
matching, phi 4-point correlation, lambda, Anderberg's D, dice, Hamann, Jaccard,
Kulczynski 1, Kulczynski 2, Lance and Williams, Ochiai, Rogers and Tanimoto,
Russel and Rao, Sokal and Sneath 1, Sokal and Sneath 2, Sokal and Sneath 3,
Sokal and Sneath 4, Sokal and Sneath 5, Yule's Y, and Yule's Q.
454
Chapter 32
Transform Values. Allows you to standardize data values for either cases or
values before computing proximities (not available for binary data). Available
standardization methods are z scores, range –1 to 1, range 0 to 1, maximum magnitude
of 1, mean of 1, and standard deviation of 1.
Transform Measures. Allows you to transform the values generated by the distance
measure. They are applied after the distance measure has been computed. Available
alternatives are absolute values, change sign, and rescale to 0–1 range.
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Statistics

Figure 32-4
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Statistics dialog box
Agglomeration schedule. Displays the cases or clusters combined at each stage, the
distances between the cases or clusters being combined, and the last cluster level at
which a case (or variable) joined the cluster.
Proximity matrix. Gives the distances or similarities between items.
Cluster Membership. Displays the cluster to which each case is assigned at one or
more stages in the combination of clusters. Available options are single solution
and range of solutions.
455
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Plots

Figure 32-5
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Plots dialog box
Dendrogram. Displays a dendrogram. Dendrograms can be used to assess the

cohesiveness of the clusters formed and can provide information about the appropriate
number of clusters to keep.
Icicle. Displays an icicle plot, including all clusters or a specified range of clusters.
Icicle plots display information about how cases are combined into clusters at each
iteration of the analysis. Orientation allows you to select a vertical or horizontal plot.
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Save New Variables

Figure 32-6
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis Save dialog box
Cluster Membership. Allows you to save cluster memberships for a single solution
or a range of solutions. Saved variables can then be used in subsequent analyses to
explore other differences between groups.
Chapter
33
K-Means Cluster Analysis
This procedure attempts to identify relatively homogeneous groups of cases based

on selected characteristics, using an algorithm that can handle large numbers of
cases. However, the algorithm requires you to specify the number of clusters. You
can specify initial cluster centers if you know this information. You can select one
of two methods for classifying cases, either updating cluster centers iteratively or
classifying only. You can save cluster membership, distance information, and final
cluster centers. Optionally, you can specify a variable whose values are used to label
casewise output. You can also request analysis of variance F statistics. While these
statistics are opportunistic (the procedure tries to form groups that do differ), the
relative size of the statistics provides information about each variable's contribution to
the separation of the groups.
Example. What are some identifiable groups of television shows that attract similar
audiences within each group? With k-means cluster analysis, you could cluster
television shows (cases) into k homogeneous groups based on viewer characteristics.
This can be used to identify segments for marketing. Or you can cluster cities
(cases) into homogeneous groups so that comparable cities can be selected to test
various marketing strategies.
Statistics. Complete solution: initial cluster centers, ANOVA table. Each case: cluster
information, distance from cluster center.
K-Means Cluster Analysis Data Considerations

Data. Variables should be quantitative at the interval or ratio level. If your variables
are binary or counts, use the Hierarchical Cluster Analysis procedure.
457
458
Chapter 33
Assumptions. Distances are computed using simple Euclidean distance. If you want
to use another distance or similarity measure, use the Hierarchical Cluster Analysis
procedure. Scaling of variables is an important consideration—if your variables are
measured on different scales (for example, one variable is expressed in dollars and
another is expressed in years), your results may be misleading. In such cases, you
should consider standardizing your variables before you perform the k-means cluster
analysis (this can be done in the Descriptives procedure). The procedure assumes that
you have selected the appropriate number of clusters and that you have included all
relevant variables. If you have chosen an inappropriate number of clusters or omitted
important variables, your results may be misleading.
Sample Output
Figure 33-1
K-means cluster analysis output
Initial Cluster Centers
Cluster
1 2 3 4
ZURBAN -1.88606 -1.54314 1.45741 .55724
ZLIFEEXP -3.52581 -1.69358 .62725 .99370
ZLITERAC -2.89320 -1.65146 -.51770 .88601
ZPOP_INC .93737 .16291 3.03701 -1.12785
ZBABYMOR 4.16813 1.38422 -.69589 -.88983
ZBIRTH_R 2.68796 .42699 .33278 -1.08033
ZDEATH_R 4.41517 .63185 -1.89037 .63185
ZLOG_GDP -1.99641 -1.78455 .53091 1.22118
ZB_TO_D -.52182 -.31333 4.40082 -.99285
ZFERTILT 2.24070 .75481 .46008 -.76793
ZLOG_POP .24626 2.65246 -1.29624 -.74406
459
Iteration History
Change in Cluster Centers

1 2 3 4
Iteration 1 1.932 2.724 3.343 1.596
2 .000 .471 .466 .314
3 .861 .414 .172 .195
4 .604 .337 .000 .150
5 .000 .253 .237 .167
6 .000 .199 .287 .071
7 .623 .160 .000 .000
8 .000 .084 .000 .074
9 .000 .080 .000 .077
10 .000 .097 .185 .000
Final Cluster Centers
Cluster
1 2 3 4
ZURBAN -1.70745 -.30863 .16816 .62767
ZLIFEEXP -2.52826 -.15939 -.28417 .80611
ZLITERAC -2.30833 .13880 -.81671 .73368
ZPOP_INC .59747 .13400 1.45301 -.95175
ZBABYMOR 2.43210 .22286 .25622 -.80817
ZBIRTH_R 1.52607 .12929 1.13716 -.99285
ZDEATH_R 2.10314 -.44640 -.71414 .31319
ZLOG_GDP -1.77704 -.58745 -.16871 .94249
ZB_TO_D -.29856 .19154 1.45251 -.84758
ZFERTILT 1.51003 -.12150 1.27010 -.87669
ZLOG_POP .83475 .34577 -.49499 -.22199
Distances between Final Cluster Centers
1 2 3 4
Cluster 1 5.627 5.640 7.924
2 5.627 2.897 3.249
3 5.640 2.897 5.246
4 7.924 3.249 5.246
460
Chapter 33
ANOVA
Cluster Error
Mean Mean
Square df Square df F Sig.
ZURBAN 10.409 3 .541 68 19.234 .000
ZLIFEEXP 19.410 3 .210 68 92.614 .000
ZLITERAC 18.731 3 .229 68 81.655 .000
ZPOP_INC 18.464 3 .219 68 84.428 .000
ZBABYMOR 18.621 3 .239 68 77.859 .000
ZBIRTH_R 19.599 3 .167 68 117.339 .000
ZDEATH_R 13.628 3 .444 68 30.676 .000
ZLOG_GDP 17.599 3 .287 68 61.313 .000
ZB_TO_D 16.316 3 .288 68 56.682 .000
ZFERTILT 18.829 3 .168 68 112.273 .000
ZLOG_POP 3.907 3 .877 68 4.457 .006
The F tests should be used only for descriptive purposes

because the clusters have been chosen to maximize the
differences among cases in different clusters. The observed
significance levels are not corrected for this and thus cannot
be interpreted as tests of the hypothesis that the cluster
means are equal.
To Obtain a K-Means Cluster Analysis

Analyze
Classify
K-Means Cluster...
461
Figure 33-2
K-Means Cluster Analysis dialog box
E Select the variables to be used in the cluster analysis.
E Specify the number of clusters. The number of clusters must be at least two and must
not be greater than the number of cases in the data file.
E Select either Iterate and classify or Classify only.
Optionally, you can select an identification variable to label cases.
K-Means Cluster Analysis Efficiency

The k-means cluster analysis command is efficient primarily because it does not
compute the distances between all pairs of cases, as do many clustering algorithms,
including that used by the hierarchical clustering command.
For maximum efficiency, take a sample of cases and use the Iterate and Classify
method to determine cluster centers. Select Write final as File. Then restore the entire
data file and select Classify only as the method. Click Centers and click Read initial
from File to classify the entire file using the centers estimated from the sample.
462
Chapter 33
K-Means Cluster Analysis Iterate

Figure 33-3
K-Means Cluster Analysis Iterate dialog box
These options are available only if you select the Iterate and Classify method from the
main dialog box.
Maximum Iterations. Limits the number of iterations in the k-means algorithm.
Iteration stops after this many iterations even if the convergence criterion is not
satisfied. This number must be between 1 and 999.
To reproduce the algorithm used by the Quick Cluster command prior to version 5.0,
set Maximum Iterations to 1.
Convergence Criterion. Determines when iteration ceases. It represents a proportion of
the minimum distance between initial cluster centers, so it must be greater than 0 but
not greater than 1. If the criterion equals 0.02, for example, iteration ceases when a
complete iteration does not move any of the cluster centers by a distance of more than
2% of the smallest distance between any of the initial cluster centers.
Use running means. Allows you to request that cluster centers be updated after each
case is assigned. If you do not select this option, new cluster centers are calculated
after all cases have been assigned.
K-Means Cluster Analysis Save

Figure 33-4
K-Means Cluster Analysis Save New Variables dialog box
463
You can save information about the solution as new variables to be used in subsequent
analyses:
Cluster membership. Creates a new variable indicating the final cluster membership of
each case. Values of the new variable range from 1 to the number of clusters.
Distance from cluster center. Creates a new variable indicating the Euclidean distance
between each case and its classification center.
K-Means Cluster Analysis Options

Figure 33-5
K-Means Cluster Analysis Options dialog box
Statistics. You can select the following statistics: initial cluster centers, ANOVA table,
and cluster information for each case.
Initial cluster centers. First estimate of the variable means for each of the clusters.
By default, a number of well-spaced cases equal to the number of clusters
is selected from the data. Initial cluster centers are used for a first round of
classification and are then updated.
ANOVA table. Displays an analysis-of-variance table which includes univariate
F tests for each clustering variable. The F tests are only descriptive and the
resulting probabilities should not be interpreted. The ANOVA table is not
displayed if all cases are assigned to a single cluster.
Cluster information for each case. Displays for each case the final cluster
assignment and the Euclidean distance between the case and the cluster center
used to classify the case. Also displays Euclidean distance between final cluster
centers.
464
Chapter 33
Missing Values. Available options are Exclude cases listwise or Exclude cases
pairwise.
Exclude cases listwise. Excludes cases with missing values for any clustering
variable from the analysis.
Exclude cases pairwise. Assigns cases to clusters based on distances computed
from all variables with nonmissing values.
Chapter
34
Nonparametric Tests
The Nonparametric Tests procedure provides several tests that do not require
assumptions about the shape of the underlying distribution:
Chi-Square Test. Tabulates a variable into categories and computes a chi-square
statistic based on the differences between observed and expected frequencies.
Binomial Test. Compares the observed frequency in each category of a dichotomous
variable with expected frequencies from the binomial distribution.
Runs Test. Tests whether the order of occurrence of two values of a variable is random.
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test. Compares the observed cumulative distribution
function for a variable with a specified theoretical distribution, which may be normal,
uniform, or Poisson.
Two-Independent-Samples Tests. Compares two groups of cases on one variable. The
Mann-Whitney U test, the two-sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, Moses test of
extreme reactions, and the Wald-Wolfowitz runs test are available.
Tests for Several Independent Samples. Compares two or more groups of cases on one
variable. The Kruskal-Wallis test, the Median test, and the Jonckheere-Terpstra
test are available.
Two-Related-Samples Tests. Compares the distributions of two variables. The
Wilcoxon signed-rank test, the sign test, and the McNemar test are available.
Tests for Several Related Samples. Compares the distributions of two or more
variables. Friedman's test, Kendall's W, and Cochran's Q are available.
Quartiles and the mean, standard deviation, minimum, maximum, and number of
nonmissing cases are available for all of the above tests.
465
466
Chapter 34
Chi-Square Test
The Chi-Square Test procedure tabulates a variable into categories and computes a
chi-square statistic. This goodness-of-fit test compares the observed and expected
frequencies in each category to test either that all categories contain the same
proportion of values or that each category contains a user-specified proportion of
values.
Examples. The chi-square test could be used to determine if a bag of jelly beans
contains equal proportions of blue, brown, green, orange, red, and yellow candies.
You could also test to see if a bag of jelly beans contains 5% blue, 30% brown, 10%
green, 20% orange, 15% red, and 15% yellow candies.
Statistics. Mean, standard deviation, minimum, maximum, and quartiles. The number
and the percentage of nonmissing and missing cases, the number of cases observed
and expected for each category, residuals, and the chi-square statistic.
Chi-Square Test Data Considerations

Data. Use ordered or unordered numeric categorical variables (ordinal or nominal
levels of measurement). To convert string variables to numeric variables, use the
Automatic Recode procedure, available on the Transform menu.
Assumptions. Nonparametric tests do not require assumptions about the shape of
the underlying distribution. The data are assumed to be a random sample. The
expected frequencies for each category should be at least 1. No more than 20% of the
categories should have expected frequencies of less than 5.
467
Nonparametric Tests
Sample Output
Figure 34-1
Chi-Square Test output
Color of Jelly Bean
Observed Expected
N N Residual
Blue 6 18.8 -12.8
Brown 33 18.8 14.2
Green 9 18.8 -9.8
Yellow 17 18.8 -1.8
Orange 22 18.8 3.2
Red 26 18.8 7.2
Total 113
Test Statistics
Color of
Jelly Bean
1
Chi-Square 27.973
df 5
Asymptotic
.000
Significance
1. 0 Cells .0% low freqs 18.8

expected low...
468
Chapter 34
Color of Jelly Bean
Observed Expected
N N Residual
Blue 6 5.7 .3
Brown 33 33.9 -.9
Green 9 11.3 -2.3
Yellow 17 17.0 .0
Orange 22 22.6 -.6
Red 26 22.6 3.4
Total 113
Test Statistics
Color of
Jelly Bean
1
Chi-Square 1.041
df 5
Asymptotic
.959
Significance
1. 0 Cells .0% low freqs 5.7

expected low...
To Obtain a Chi-Square Test

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
Chi-Square...
469
Nonparametric Tests
Figure 34-2
Chi-Square Test dialog box
E Select one or more test variables. Each variable produces a separate test.
Optionally, you can click Options for descriptive statistics, quartiles, and control of
the treatment of missing data.
Chi-Square Test Expected Range and Expected Values

Expected range. By default, each distinct value of the variable is defined as a category.
To establish categories within a specific range, select Use specified range and enter
integer values for lower and upper bounds. Categories are established for each integer
value within the inclusive range, and cases with values outside of the bounds are
excluded. For example, if you specify a lowerbound value of 1 and an upperbound
value of 4, only the integer values of 1 through 4 are used for the chi-square test.
Expected values. By default, all categories have equal expected values. Categories
can have user-specified expected proportions. Select Values, enter a value greater
than 0 for each category of the test variable, and click Add. Each time you add a
value, it appears at the bottom of the value list. The order of the values is important;
it corresponds to the ascending order of the category values of the test variable.
470
Chapter 34
The first value of the list corresponds to the lowest group value of the test variable,
and the last value corresponds to the highest value. Elements of the value list are
summed, and then each value is divided by this sum to calculate the proportion of
cases expected in the corresponding category. For example, a value list of 3, 4, 5, 4
specifies expected proportions of 3/16, 4/16, 5/16, and 4/16.
Chi-Square Test Options

Figure 34-3
Chi-Square Test Options dialog box
Statistics. You can choose one or both of the following summary statistics:
Descriptive. Displays the mean, standard deviation, minimum, maximum, and
number of nonmissing cases.
Quartiles. Displays values corresponding to the 25th, 50th, and 75th percentiles.

Exclude cases test-by-test. When several tests are specified, each test is evaluated
separately for missing values.
from all analyses.
471
Nonparametric Tests
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (Chi-Square Test)

The command language also allows you to:
Specify different minimum and maximum values or expected frequencies for
different variables (with the CHISQUARE subcommand).
Test the same variable against different expected frequencies or use different
ranges (with the EXPECTED subcommand).
Binomial Test
The Binomial Test procedure compares the observed frequencies of the two categories
of a dichotomous variable to the frequencies expected under a binomial distribution
with a specified probability parameter. By default, the probability parameter for
both groups is 0.5. To change the probabilities, you can enter a test proportion for
the first group. The probability for the second group will be 1 minus the specified
probability for the first group.
Example. When you toss a dime, the probability of a head equals 1/2. Based on this
hypothesis, a dime is tossed 40 times, and the outcomes are recorded (heads or tails).
From the binomial test, you might find that 3/4 of the tosses were heads and that the
observed significance level is small (0.0027). These results indicate that it is not
likely that the probability of a head equals 1/2; the coin is probably biased.
Statistics. Mean, standard deviation, minimum, maximum, number of nonmissing
cases, and quartiles.
Binomial Test Data Considerations

Data. The variables tested should be numeric and dichotomous. To convert string
variables to numeric variables, use the Automatic Recode procedure, available on
the Transform menu. A dichotomous variable is a variable that can take on only
two possible values: yes or no, true or false, 0 or 1, etc. If the variables are not
dichotomous, you must specify a cut point. The cut point assigns cases with values
greater than the cut point to one group and the rest of the cases to another group.
472
Chapter 34
Assumptions. Nonparametric tests do not require assumptions about the shape of the
underlying distribution. The data are assumed to be a random sample.
Sample Output
Figure 34-4
Binomial Test output
Binomial Test
Asymptotic
Observed Test Significance
Category N Proportion Proportion (2-tailed)
Coin Group 1 Head 30 .75 .50 .0031
Group 2 Tail 10 .25
Total 40 1.00
1. Based on Z Approximation
To Obtain a Binomial Test

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
Binomial...
473
Nonparametric Tests
Figure 34-5
Binomial Test dialog box
E Select one or more numeric test variables.
Binomial Test Options

Figure 34-6
Binomial Test Options dialog box
474
Chapter 34
Exclude cases listwise. Cases with missing values for any variable tested are
excluded from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (Binomial Test)

Select specific groups (and exclude others) when a variable has more than two
categories (with the BINOMIAL subcommand).
Specify different cut points or probabilities for different variables (with the
BINOMIAL subcommand).
Test the same variable against different cut points or probabilities (with the
EXPECTED subcommand).
Runs Test
The Runs Test procedure tests whether the order of occurrence of two values of a
variable is random. A run is a sequence of like observations. A sample with too many
or too few runs suggests that the sample is not random.
Examples. Suppose that 20 people are polled to find out if they would purchase a
product. The assumed randomness of the sample would be seriously questioned if
all 20 people were of the same gender. The runs test can be used to determine if the
sample was drawn at random.
475
Nonparametric Tests
Runs Test Data Considerations

Data. The variables must be numeric. To convert string variables to numeric variables,
use the Automatic Recode procedure, available on the Transform menu.
underlying distribution. Use samples from continuous probability distributions.
Sample Output
Figure 34-7
Runs Test output
Runs Test
Gender
1
Test Value 1.00
Cases < Test Value 7
Cases >= Test Value 13
Total Cases 20
Number of Runs 15
Z 2.234
Asymptotic
.025
Significance (2-tailed)
1. Median
To Obtain a Runs Test

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
Runs...
476
Chapter 34
Figure 34-8
Runs Test dialog box
E Select one or more numeric test variables.
Runs Test Cut Point

Cut Point. Specifies a cut point to dichotomize the variables that you have chosen.
You can use either the observed mean, median, or mode, or a specified value as a cut
point. Cases with values less than the cut point are assigned to one group, and cases
with values greater than or equal to the cut point are assigned to another group. One
test is performed for each cut point chosen.
477
Nonparametric Tests
Runs Test Options

Figure 34-9
Runs Test Options dialog box
from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (Runs Test)

Specify different cut points for different variables (with the RUNS subcommand).
Test the same variable against different custom cut points (with the RUNS
subcommand).
478
Chapter 34
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test

The One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test procedure compares the observed
cumulative distribution function for a variable with a specified theoretical distribution,
which may be normal, uniform, Poisson, or exponential. The Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z
is computed from the largest difference (in absolute value) between the observed and
theoretical cumulative distribution functions. This goodness-of-fit test tests whether
the observations could reasonably have come from the specified distribution.
Example. Many parametric tests require normally distributed variables. The
one-sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov test can be used to test that a variable, say income,
is normally distributed.
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test Data Considerations

Data. Use quantitative variables (interval or ratio level of measurement).
Assumptions. The Kolmogorov-Smirnov test assumes that the parameters of the test
distribution are specified in advance. This procedure estimates the parameters from
the sample. The sample mean and sample standard deviation are the parameters
for a normal distribution, the sample minimum and maximum values define the
range of the uniform distribution, the sample mean is the parameter for the Poisson
distribution, and the sample mean is the parameter for the exponential distribution.
479
Nonparametric Tests
Sample Output
Figure 34-10
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test output
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test
Income
N 20
1,2
Normal Parameters Mean 56250.00
Std. Deviation 45146.40
Most Extreme Differences Absolute .170
Positive .170
Negative -.164
Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z
.760
Asymptotic Significance (2-tailed)

.611
1. Test Distribution is Normal

2. Calculated from data
To Obtain a One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
1-Sample K-S...
480
Chapter 34
Figure 34-11
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test dialog box
E Select one or more numeric test variables. Each variable produces a separate test.
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test Options

Figure 34-12
One-Sample K-S Options dialog box
481
Nonparametric Tests
from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov

Test)
Specify the parameters of the test distribution (with the K-S subcommand).
Two-Independent-Samples Tests
The Two-Independent-Samples Tests procedure compares two groups of cases on
one variable.
Example. New dental braces have been developed that are intended to be more
comfortable, to look better, and to provide more rapid progress in realigning teeth. To
find out if the new braces have to be worn as long as the old braces, 10 children are
randomly chosen to wear the old braces, and another 10 are chosen to wear the new
braces. From the Mann-Whitney U test, you might find that, on average, those with
the new braces did not have to wear the braces as long as those with the old braces.
cases, and quartiles. Tests: Mann-Whitney U, Moses extreme reactions,
Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z, Wald-Wolfowitz runs.
482
Chapter 34
Two-Independent-Samples Tests Data Considerations

Data. Use numeric variables that can be ordered.
Assumptions. Use independent, random samples. The Mann-Whitney U test requires
that the two samples tested be similar in shape.
Sample Output
Figure 34-13
Two-Independent-Samples output
Ranks
Mean Sum of
N Rank Ranks
Time Type of Old
10 14.10 141.00
Worn in Braces Braces
Days
New
10 6.90 69.00
Braces
Total 20
483
Nonparametric Tests
Test Statistics 2
Time Worn
in Days
Mann-Whitney U 14.000
Wilcoxon W 69.000
Z -2.721
Asymptotic
Significance .007
(2-tailed)
Exact Significance 1
.005
[2*(1-tailed Sig.)]
1. Not corrected for ties.

2. Grouping Variable: Type of
Braces
To Obtain Two-Independent-Samples Tests

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
2 Independent Samples...
484
Chapter 34
Figure 34-14
Two-Independent-Samples Tests dialog box
E Select one or more numeric variables.
E Select a grouping variable and click Define Groups to split the file into two groups
or samples.
Two-Independent-Samples Test Types

Test Type. Four tests are available to test whether two independent samples (groups)
come from the same population.
The Mann-Whitney U test is the most popular of the two-independent-samples
tests. It is equivalent to the Wilcoxon rank sum test and the Kruskal-Wallis test
for two groups. Mann-Whitney tests that two sampled populations are equivalent
in location. The observations from both groups are combined and ranked, with the
average rank assigned in the case of ties. The number of ties should be small relative
to the total number of observations. If the populations are identical in location, the
ranks should be randomly mixed between the two samples. The number of times a
score from group 1 precedes a score from group 2 and the number of times a score
from group 2 precedes a score from group 1 are calculated. The Mann-Whitney U
485
Nonparametric Tests
statistic is the smaller of these two numbers. The Wilcoxon rank sum W statistic,
also displayed, is the rank sum of the smaller sample. If both samples have the
same number of observations, W is the rank sum of the group named first in the
Two-Independent-Samples Define Groups dialog box.
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov Z test and the Wald-Wolfowitz runs test are more
general tests that detect differences in both the locations and the shapes of the
distributions. The Kolmogorov-Smirnov test is based on the maximum absolute
difference between the observed cumulative distribution functions for both samples.
When this difference is significantly large, the two distributions are considered
different. The Wald-Wolfowitz runs test combines and ranks the observations from
both groups. If the two samples are from the same population, the two groups should
be randomly scattered throughout the ranking.
The Moses extreme reactions test assumes that the experimental variable will
affect some subjects in one direction and other subjects in the opposite direction. It
tests for extreme responses compared to a control group. This test focuses on the span
of the control group and is a measure of how much extreme values in the experimental
group influence the span when combined with the control group. The control group is
defined by the group 1 value in the Two-Independent-Samples Define Groups dialog
box. Observations from both groups are combined and ranked. The span of the control
group is computed as the difference between the ranks of the largest and smallest
values in the control group plus 1. Because chance outliers can easily distort the range
of the span, 5% of the control cases are trimmed automatically from each end.
Two-Independent-Samples Tests Define Groups

Figure 34-15
Two-Independent-Samples Define Groups dialog box
To split the file into two groups or samples, enter an integer value for Group 1 and
another for Group 2. Cases with other values are excluded from the analysis.
486
Chapter 34
Two-Independent-Samples Tests Options

Figure 34-16
Two-Independent-Samples Options dialog box
Descriptive. Displays the mean, standard deviation, minimum, maximum, and the
from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (Two-Independent-Samples Tests)

Specify the number of cases to be trimmed for the Moses test (with the MOSES
subcommand).
487
Nonparametric Tests
Two-Related-Samples Tests
The Two-Related-Samples Tests procedure compares the distributions of two
variables.
Example. In general, do families receive the asking price when they sell their homes?
By applying the Wilcoxon signed-rank test to data for 10 homes, you might learn that
seven families receive less than the asking price, one family receives more than the
asking price, and two families receive the asking price.
cases, and quartiles. Tests: Wilcoxon signed rank, sign, McNemar.
Two-Related-Samples Tests Data Considerations

Assumptions. Although no particular distributions are assumed for the two variables,
the population distribution of the paired differences is assumed to be symmetric.
Sample Output
Figure 34-17
Two-Related-Samples output
Ranks
Mean Sum of
N Rank Ranks
Asking Price Negative 1
7 4.93 34.50
- Sale Price Ranks
Positive 2
1 1.50 1.50
Ranks
Ties 23
Total 10
1. Asking Price < Sale Price

2. Asking Price > Sale Price
3. Asking Price = Sale Price
488
Chapter 34
Test Statistics 2
Asking Price
- Sale Price
Z -2.3131
Asymptotic
Significance .021
(2-tailed)
1. Based on positive ranks

2. Wilcoxon Signed Ranks
Test
To Obtain Two-Related-Samples Tests

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
2 Related Samples...
Figure 34-18
Two-Related-Samples Tests dialog box
489
Nonparametric Tests
E Select one or more pairs of variables, as follows:

Click each of two variables. The first variable appears in the Current Selections
group as Variable 1, and the second appears as Variable 2.
After you have selected a pair of variables, click the arrow button to move the
pair into the Test Pair(s) list. You may select more pairs of variables. To remove
a pair of variables from the analysis, select a pair in the Test Pair(s) list and
click the arrow button.
Two-Related-Samples Test Types

Test Type. The tests in this section compare the distributions of two related variables.
The appropriate test to use depends on the type of data.
If your data are continuous, use the sign test or the Wilcoxon signed-rank test.
The sign test computes the differences between the two variables for all cases and
classifies the differences as either positive, negative, or tied. If the two variables are
similarly distributed, the number of positive and negative differences will not differ
significantly. The Wilcoxon signed-rank test considers information about both the
sign of the differences and the magnitude of the differences between pairs. Because
the Wilcoxon signed-rank test incorporates more information about the data, it is
more powerful than the sign test.
If your data are binary, use the McNemar test. This test is typically used in a
repeated measures situation, in which each subject's response is elicited twice, once
before and once after a specified event occurs. The McNemar test determines whether
the initial response rate (before the event) equals the final response rate (after the
event). This test is useful for detecting changes in responses due to experimental
intervention in before-and-after designs.
If your data are categorical, use the marginal homogeneity test. This is an
extension of the McNemar test from binary response to multinomial response. It tests
for changes in response using the chi-square distribution and is useful for detecting
response changes due to experimental intervention in before-and-after designs. The
marginal homogeneity test is available only if you have installed Exact Tests.
490
Chapter 34
Two-Related-Samples Tests Options

Figure 34-19
Two-Related-Samples Options dialog box
from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (Two Related Samples)

Test a variable with each variable on a list.
Tests for Several Independent Samples

The Tests for Several Independent Samples procedure compares two or more groups
of cases on one variable.
491
Nonparametric Tests
Example. Do three brands of 100-watt lightbulbs differ in the average time the bulbs
will burn? From the Kruskal-Wallis one-way analysis of variance, you might learn
that the three brands do differ in average lifetime.
cases, and quartiles. Tests: Kruskal-Wallis H, median.
Tests for Several Independent Samples Data Considerations

Assumptions. Use independent, random samples. The Kruskal-Wallis H test requires
that the samples tested be similar in shape.
Sample Output
Figure 34-20
Tests for Several Independent Samples output
Ranks
Mean
N Rank
Hours Brand Brand A 10 15.20
Brand B 10 25.50
Brand C 10 5.80
Total 30
Test Statistics 1,2
Hours
Chi-Square 25.061
df 2
Asymptotic
.000
Significance
1. Kruskal Wallis Test

2. Grouping Variable: Brand
492
Chapter 34
To Obtain Tests for Several Independent Samples

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
K Independent Samples...
Figure 34-21
Tests for Several Independent Samples dialog box
E Select one or more numeric variables.
E Select a grouping variable and click Define Range to specify minimum and maximum
integer values for the grouping variable.
Tests for Several Independent Samples Test Types

Test Type. Three tests are available to determine if several independent samples come
from the same population.
The Kruskal-Wallis H test, the median test, and the Jonckheere-Terpstra test
all test whether several independent samples are from the same population.
The Kruskal-Wallis H test, an extension of the Mann-Whitney U test, is the
nonparametric analog of one-way analysis of variance and detects differences in
distribution location. The median test, which is a more general test but not as
493
Nonparametric Tests
powerful, detects distributional differences in location and shape. The Kruskal-Wallis

H test and the median test assume there is no a priori ordering of the k populations
from which the samples are drawn. When there is a natural a priori ordering
(ascending or descending) of the k populations, the Jonckheere-Terpstra test is more
powerful. For example, the k populations might represent k increasing temperatures.
The hypothesis that different temperatures produce the same response distribution
is tested against the alternative that as the temperature increases, the magnitude
of the response increases. Here the alternative hypothesis is ordered; therefore,
Jonckheere-Terpstra is the most appropriate test to use. The Jonckheere-Terpstra test
is available only if you have installed SPSS Exact Tests.
Tests for Several Independent Samples Define Range

Figure 34-22
Several Independent Samples Define dialog box
To define the range, enter integer values for minimum and maximum that correspond
to the lowest and highest categories of the grouping variable. Cases with values
outside of the bounds are excluded. For example, if you specify a minimum value
of 1 and a maximum value of 3, only the integer values of 1 through 3 are used.
The minimum value must be less than the maximum value, and both values must
be specified.
494
Chapter 34
Tests for Several Independent Samples Options

Figure 34-23
Several Independent Samples Options dialog box
Statistics. You can choose one or both of the following summary statistics.
from all analyses.
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (K Independent Samples)

Specify a value other than the observed median for the median test (with the
MEDIAN subcommand).
495
Nonparametric Tests
Tests for Several Related Samples

The Tests for Several Related Samples procedure compares the distributions of two
or more variables.
Example. Does the public associate different amounts of prestige with a doctor, a
lawyer, a police officer, and a teacher? Ten people are asked to rank these four
occupations in order of prestige. Friedman's test indicates that the public does in fact
associate different amounts of prestige with these four professions.
cases, and quartiles. Tests: Friedman, Kendall's W, and Cochran's Q.
Tests for Several Related Samples Data Considerations

underlying distribution. Use dependent, random samples.
Sample Output
Figure 34-24
Tests for Several Related Samples output
Ranks
Mean
Rank
Doctor 1.50
Lawyer 2.50
Police 3.40
Teacher 2.60
496
Chapter 34
Test Statistics 1
N 10
Chi-Square 10.920
df 3
Asymptotic Significance .012
1. Friedman Test
To Obtain Tests for Several Related Samples

Analyze
Nonparametric Tests
K Related Samples...
Figure 34-25
Tests for Several Related Samples dialog box
E Select two or more numeric test variables.

497
Nonparametric Tests
Tests for Several Related Samples Test Types

Test Type. Three tests are available to compare the distributions of several related
variables.
The Friedman test is the nonparametric equivalent of a one-sample repeated
measures design or a two-way analysis of variance with one observation per cell.
Friedman tests the null hypothesis that k related variables come from the same
population. For each case, the k variables are ranked from 1 to k. The test statistic
is based on these ranks. Kendall's W is a normalization of the Friedman statistic.
Kendall's W is interpretable as the coefficient of concordance, which is a measure of
agreement among raters. Each case is a judge or rater and each variable is an item
or person being judged. For each variable, the sum of ranks is computed. Kendall's
W ranges between 0 (no agreement) and 1 (complete agreement). Cochran's Q is
identical to the Friedman test but is applicable when all responses are binary. It is
an extension of the McNemar test to the k-sample situation. Cochran's Q tests the
hypothesis that several related dichotomous variables have the same mean. The
variables are measured on the same individual or on matched individuals.
Tests for Several Related Samples Statistics

Figure 34-26
Several Related Samples Statistics dialog box
NPAR TESTS Command Additional Features (K Related Samples)

Chapter
35
Multiple Response Analysis
Two procedures are available for analyzing multiple dichotomy and multiple category
sets. The Multiple Response Frequencies procedure displays frequency tables.
The Multiple Response Crosstabs procedure displays two- and three-dimensional
crosstabulations. Before using either procedure, you must define multiple response
sets.
Example. This example illustrates the use of multiple response items in a market
research survey. The data are fictitious and should not be interpreted as real. An
airline might survey passengers flying a particular route to evaluate competing
carriers. In this example, American Airlines wants to know about its passengers' use
of other airlines on the Chicago-New York route and the relative importance of
schedule and service in selecting an airline. The flight attendant hands each passenger
a brief questionnaire upon boarding. The first question reads: Circle all airlines you
have flown at least once in the last six months on this route—American, United,
TWA, USAir, Other. This is a multiple response question, since the passenger can
circle more than one response. However, this question cannot be coded directly
because a variable can have only one value for each case. You must use several
variables to map responses to each question. There are two ways to do this. One is
to define a variable corresponding to each of the choices (for example, American,
United, TWA, USAir, and Other). If the passenger circles United, the variable
united is assigned a code of 1, otherwise 0. This is a multiple dichotomy method
of mapping variables. The other way to map responses is the multiple category
method, in which you estimate the maximum number of possible responses to the
question and set up the same number of variables, with codes used to specify the
airline flown. By perusing a sample of questionnaires, you might discover that no
user has flown more than three different airlines on this route in the last six months.
Further, you find that due to the deregulation of airlines, 10 other airlines are named
in the Other category. Using the multiple response method, you would define three
variables, each coded as 1 = american, 2 = united, 3 = twa, 4 = usair, 5 = delta, and
499
500
Chapter 35
so on. If a given passenger circles American and TWA, the first variable has a code
of 1, the second has a code of 3, and the third has a missing-value code. Another
passenger might have circled American and entered Delta. Thus, the first variable has
a code of 1, the second has a code of 5, and the third a missing-value code. If you
use the multiple dichotomy method, on the other hand, you end up with 14 separate
variables. Although either method of mapping is feasible for this survey, the method
you choose depends on the distribution of responses.
Multiple Response Define Sets

The Define Multiple Response Sets procedure groups elementary variables into
multiple dichotomy and multiple category sets, for which you can obtain frequency
tables and crosstabulations. You can define up to 20 multiple response sets. Each
set must have a unique name. To remove a set, highlight it on the list of multiple
response sets and click Remove. To change a set, highlight it on the list, modify any
set definition characteristics, and click Change.
You can code your elementary variables as dichotomies or categories. To use
dichotomous variables, select Dichotomies to create a multiple dichotomy set. Enter
an integer value for Counted value. Each variable having at least one occurrence
of the counted value becomes a category of the multiple dichotomy set. Select
Categories to create a multiple category set having the same range of values as the
component variables. Enter integer values for the minimum and maximum values
of the range for categories of the multiple category set. The procedure totals each
distinct integer value in the inclusive range across all component variables. Empty
categories are not tabulated.
Each multiple response set must be assigned a unique name of up to seven
characters. The procedure prefixes a dollar sign ($) to the name you assign. You
cannot use the following reserved names: casenum, sysmis, jdate, date, time, length,
and width. The name of the multiple response set exists only for use in multiple
response procedures. You cannot refer to multiple response set names in other
procedures. Optionally, you can enter a descriptive variable label for the multiple
response set. The label can be up to 40 characters long.
501
To Define Multiple Response Sets

Analyze
Multiple Response
Define Sets...
Figure 35-1
Define Multiple Response Sets dialog box
E Select two or more variables.
E If your variables are coded as dichotomies, indicate which value you want to have
counted. If your variables are coded as categories, define the range of the categories.
E Enter a unique name for each multiple response set.
E Click Add to add the multiple response set to the list of defined sets.
502
Chapter 35
Multiple Response Frequencies

The Multiple Response Frequencies procedure produces frequency tables for multiple
response sets. You must first define one or more multiple response sets (see “Multiple
Response Define Sets”).
For multiple dichotomy sets, category names shown in the output come from
variable labels defined for elementary variables in the group. If the variable labels are
not defined, variable names are used as labels. For multiple category sets, category
labels come from the value labels of the first variable in the group. If categories
missing for the first variable are present for other variables in the group, define a
value label for the missing categories.
Missing Values. Cases with missing values are excluded on a table-by-table basis.
Alternatively, you can choose one or both of the following:
Exclude cases listwise within dichotomies. Excludes cases with missing values
for any variable from the tabulation of the multiple dichotomy set. This applies
only to multiple response sets defined as dichotomy sets. By default, a case
is considered missing for a multiple dichotomy set if none of its component
variables contains the counted value. Cases with missing values for some (but
not all variables) are included in the tabulations of the group if at least one
variable contains the counted value.
Exclude cases listwise within categories. Excludes cases with missing values for
any variable from tabulation of the multiple category set. This applies only to
multiple response sets defined as category sets. By default, a case is considered
missing for a multiple category set only if none of its components has valid
values within the defined range.
Example. Each variable created from a survey question is an elementary variable. To
analyze a multiple response item, you must combine the variables into one of two
types of multiple response sets: a multiple dichotomy set or a multiple category set.
For example, if an airline survey asked which of three airlines (American, United,
TWA) you have flown in the last six months and you used dichotomous variables and
defined a multiple dichotomy set, each of the three variables in the set would become
a category of the group variable. The counts and percentages for the three airlines
are displayed in one frequency table. If you discover that no respondent mentioned
more than two airlines, you could create two variables, each having three codes, one
for each airline. If you define a multiple category set, the values are tabulated by
503
adding the same codes in the elementary variables together. The resulting set of
values is the same as those for each of the elementary variables. For example, 30
responses for United are the sum of the 5 United responses for airline 1 and the 25
United responses for airline 2. The counts and percentages for the three airlines
are displayed in one frequency table.
Statistics. Frequency tables displaying counts, percentages of responses, percentages
of cases, number of valid cases, and number of missing cases.
Multiple Response Frequencies Data Considerations

Data. Use multiple response sets.
Assumptions. The counts and percentages provide a useful description for data from
any distribution.
Related procedures. The Multiple Response Define Sets procedure allows you to
define multiple response sets.
Sample Output
Figure 35-2
Multiple Response Frequencies output
504
Chapter 35
To Obtain Multiple Response Frequencies

Analyze
Multiple Response
Frequencies...
Figure 35-3
Multiple Response Frequencies dialog box
E Select one or more multiple response sets.
Multiple Response Crosstabs

The Multiple Response Crosstabs procedure crosstabulates defined multiple response
sets, elementary variables, or a combination. You can also obtain cell percentages
based on cases or responses, modify the handling of missing values, or get paired
crosstabulations. You must first define one or more multiple response sets (see “To
Define Multiple Response Sets”).
For multiple dichotomy sets, category names shown in the output come from
variable labels defined for elementary variables in the group. If the variable labels are
not defined, variable names are used as labels. For multiple category sets, category
labels come from the value labels of the first variable in the group. If categories
missing for the first variable are present for other variables in the group, define a
value label for the missing categories. The procedure displays category labels for
505
columns on three lines, with up to eight characters per line. To avoid splitting words,
you can reverse row and column items or redefine labels.
Example. Both multiple dichotomy and multiple category sets can be crosstabulated
with other variables in this procedure. An airline passenger survey asks passengers
for the following information: Circle all of the following airlines you have flown at
least once in the last six months (American, United, TWA). Which is more important
in selecting a flight—schedule or service? Select only one. After entering the
data as dichotomies or multiple categories and combining them into a set, you can
crosstabulate the airline choices with the question involving service or schedule.
Statistics. Crosstabulation with cell, row, column, and total counts, and cell, row,
column, and total percentages. The cell percentages can be based on cases or
responses.
Multiple Response Crosstabs Data Considerations

Data. Use multiple response sets or numeric categorical variables.
Assumptions. The counts and percentages provide a useful description of data from
any distribution.
Related procedures. The Multiple Response Define Sets procedure allows you to
define multiple response sets.
506
Chapter 35
Sample Output
Figure 35-4
Multiple Response Crosstabs output
To Obtain Multiple Response Crosstabs

Analyze
Multiple Response
Crosstabs...
507
Figure 35-5
Multiple Response Crosstabs dialog box
E Select one or more numeric variables or multiple response sets for each dimension
of the crosstabulation.
E Define the range of each elementary variable.
Optionally, you can obtain a two-way crosstabulation for each category of a control
variable or multiple response set. Select one or more items for the Layer(s) list.
Multiple Response Crosstabs Define Ranges

Figure 35-6
Multiple Response Crosstabs Define Variable Range dialog box
508
Chapter 35
Value ranges must be defined for any elementary variable in the crosstabulation.
Enter the integer minimum and maximum category values that you want to tabulate.
Categories outside the range are excluded from analysis. Values within the inclusive
range are assumed to be integers (non-integers are truncated).
Multiple Response Crosstabs Options

Figure 35-7
Multiple Response Crosstabs Options dialog box
Cell Percentages. Cell counts are always displayed. You can choose to display row
percentages, column percentages, and two-way table (total) percentages.
Percentages Based on. You can base cell percentages on cases (or respondents). This
is not available if you select matching of variables across multiple category sets. You
can also base cell percentages on responses. For multiple dichotomy sets, the number
of responses is equal to the number of counted values across cases. For multiple
category sets, the number of responses is the number of values in the defined range.
Missing Values. You can choose one or both of the following:
Exclude cases listwise within dichotomies. Excludes cases with missing values
for any variable from the tabulation of the multiple dichotomy set. This applies
only to multiple response sets defined as dichotomy sets. By default, a case
is considered missing for a multiple dichotomy set if none of its component
variables contains the counted value. Cases with missing values for some, but not
509
all, variables are included in the tabulations of the group if at least one variable
contains the counted value.
Exclude cases listwise within categories. Excludes cases with missing values for
any variable from tabulation of the multiple category set. This applies only to
multiple response sets defined as category sets. By default, a case is considered
missing for a multiple category set only if none of its components has valid
values within the defined range.
By default, when crosstabulating two multiple category sets, the procedure tabulates
each variable in the first group with each variable in the second group and sums the
counts for each cell; therefore, some responses can appear more than once in a table.
You can choose the following option:
Match variables across response sets. Pairs the first variable in the first group with the
first variable in the second group, and so on. If you select this option, the procedure
bases cell percentages on responses rather than respondents. Pairing is not available
for multiple dichotomy sets or elementary variables.
MULT RESPONSE Command Additional Features

Obtain crosstabulation tables with up to five dimensions (with the BY
subcommand).
Change output formatting options, including suppression of value labels (with
the FORMAT subcommand).
Chapter
36
Reporting Results
Case listings and descriptive statistics are basic tools for studying and presenting
data. You can obtain case listings with the Data Editor or the Summarize procedure,
frequency counts and descriptive statistics with the Frequencies procedure, and
subpopulation statistics with the Means procedure. Each of these uses a format
designed to make information clear. If you want to display the information in a
different format, Report Summaries in Rows and Report Summaries in Columns give
you the control you need over data presentation.
Report Summaries in Rows

Report Summaries in Rows produces reports in which different summary statistics are
laid out in rows. Case listings are also available, with or without summary statistics.
Example. A company with a chain of retail stores keeps records of employee
information, including salary, job tenure, and the store and division in which each
employee works. You could generate a report that provides individual employee
information (listing) broken down by store and division (break variables), with
summary statistics (for example, mean salary) for each store, division, and division
within each store.
Data Columns. Lists the report variables for which you want case listings or summary
statistics and controls the display format of data columns.
Break Columns. Lists optional break variables that divide the report into groups and
controls the summary statistics and display formats of break columns. For multiple
break variables, there will be a separate group for each category of each break
variable within categories of the preceding break variable in the list. Break variables
should be discrete categorical variables that divide cases into a limited number of
511
512
Chapter 36
meaningful categories. Individual values of each break variable appear, sorted, in a

separate column to the left of all data columns.
Report. Controls overall report characteristics, including overall summary statistics,
display of missing values, page numbering, and titles.
Display cases. Displays the actual values (or value labels) of the data-column
variables for every case. This produces a listing report, which can be much longer
than a summary report.
Preview. Displays only the first page of the report. This option is useful for
previewing the format of your report without processing the whole report.
Data are already sorted. For reports with break variables, the data file must be sorted
by break variable values before generating the report. If your data file is already
sorted by values of the break variables, you can save processing time by selecting this
option. This option is particularly useful after running a preview report.
Sample Output
Figure 36-1
Combined report with case listings and summary statistics
513
Reporting Results
To Obtain a Summary Report: Summaries in Rows

Analyze
Reports
Report Summaries in Rows...
E Select one or more variables for Data Columns. One column in the report is generated
for each variable selected.
E For reports sorted and displayed by subgroups, select one or more variables for
Break Columns.
E For reports with summary statistics for subgroups defined by break variables, select
the break variable in the Break Columns list and click Summary in the Break Columns
group to specify the summary measure(s).
E For reports with overall summary statistics, click Summary in the Report group to
specify the summary measure(s).
Figure 36-2
Report Summaries in Rows dialog box
514
Chapter 36
Report Data Column/Break Format

The Format dialog boxes control column titles, column width, text alignment, and
the display of data values or value labels. Data Column Format controls the format
of data columns on the right side of the report page. Break Format controls the
format of break columns on the left side.
Figure 36-3
Report Data Column Format dialog box
Column Title. For the selected variable, controls the column title. Long titles are
automatically wrapped within the column. Use the Enter key to manually insert line
breaks where you want titles to wrap.
Value Position within Column. For the selected variable, controls the alignment of data
values or value labels within the column. Alignment of values or labels does not
affect alignment of column headings. You can either indent the column contents by a
specified number of characters or center the contents.
Column Content. For the selected variable, controls the display of either data values or
defined value labels. Data values are always displayed for any values that do not have
defined value labels. (Not available for data columns in column summary reports.)
515
Reporting Results
Report Summary Lines for/Final Summary Lines

The two Summary Lines dialog boxes control the display of summary statistics for
break groups and for the entire report. Summary Lines controls subgroup statistics for
each category defined by the break variable(s). Final Summary Lines controls overall
statistics, displayed at the end of the report.
Figure 36-4
Report Summary Lines dialog box
Available summary statistics are sum, mean, minimum, maximum, number of cases,
percentage of case above or below a specified value, percentage of cases within a
specified range of values, standard deviation, kurtosis, variance, and skewness.
Report Break Options

Break Options controls spacing and pagination of break category information.
Figure 36-5
Report Break Options dialog box
516
Chapter 36
Page Control. Controls spacing and pagination for categories of the selected break
variable. You can specify a number of blank lines between break categories or start
each break category on a new page.
Blank Lines before Summaries. Controls the number of blank lines between break
category labels or data and summary statistics. This is particularly useful for
combined reports that include both individual case listings and summary statistics for
break categories; in these reports, you can insert space between the case listings and
the summary statistics.
Report Options
Report Options controls the treatment and display of missing values and report page
numbering.
Figure 36-6
Report Options dialog box
Exclude cases with missing values listwise. Eliminates (from the report) any case with
missing values for any of the report variables.
Missing Values Appear as. Allows you to specify the symbol that represents missing
values in the data file. The symbol can be only one character and is used to represent
both system-missing and user-missing values.
Number Pages from. Allows you to specify a page number for the first page of the
report.
Report Layout
Report Layout controls the width and length of each report page, placement of the
report on the page, and the insertion of blank lines and labels.
517
Reporting Results
Figure 36-7
Report Layout dialog box
Page Layout. Controls the page margins expressed in lines (top and bottom) and
characters (left and right) and report alignment within the margins.
Page Titles and Footers. Controls the number of lines that separate page titles and
footers from the body of the report.
Break Columns. Controls the display of break columns. If multiple break variables are
specified, they can be in separate columns or in the first column. Placing all break
variables in the first column produces a narrower report.
Column Titles. Controls the display of column titles, including title underlining, space
between titles and the body of the report, and vertical alignment of column titles.
Data Column Rows & Break Labels. Controls the placement of data column information
(data values and/or summary statistics) in relation to the break labels at the start of
each break category. The first row of data column information can start either on the
same line as break category label or on a specified number of lines after the break
category label. (Not available for columns summary reports.)
518
Chapter 36
Report Titles
Report Titles controls the content and placement of report titles and footers. You
can specify up to 10 lines of page titles and up to 10 lines of page footers, with
left-justified, centered, and right-justified components on each line.
Figure 36-8
Report Titles dialog box
If you insert variables into titles or footers, the current value label or value of the
variable is displayed in the title or footer. In titles, the value label corresponding to the
value of the variable at the beginning of the page is displayed. In footers, the value
label corresponding to the value of the variable at the end of the page is displayed. If
there is no value label, the actual value is displayed.
Special Variables. The special variables DATE and PAGE allow you to insert the
current date or the page number into any line of a report header or footer. If your
data file contains variables named DATE or PAGE, you cannot use these variables in
report titles or footers.
519
Reporting Results
Report Summaries in Columns

Report Summaries in Columns produces summary reports in which different
summary statistics appear in separate columns.
Example. A company with a chain of retail stores keeps records of employee
information, including salary, job tenure, and the division in which each employee
works. You could generate a report that provides summary salary statistics (for
example, mean, minimum, maximum) for each division.
Data Columns. Lists the report variables for which you want summary statistics and
controls the display format and summary statistics displayed for each variable.
Break Columns. Lists optional break variables that divide the report into groups and
controls the display formats of break columns. For multiple break variables, there
will be a separate group for each category of each break variable within categories of
the preceding break variable in the list. Break variables should be discrete categorical
variables that divide cases into a limited number of meaningful categories.
Report. Controls overall report characteristics, including display of missing values,
page numbering, and titles.
Preview. Displays only the first page of the report. This option is useful for
previewing the format of your report without processing the whole report.
Data are already sorted. For reports with break variables, the data file must be sorted
by break variable values before generating the report. If your data file is already
sorted by values of the break variables, you can save processing time by selecting this
option. This option is particularly useful after running a preview report.
520
Chapter 36
Sample Output
Figure 36-9
Summary report with summary statistics in columns
To Obtain a Summary Report: Summaries in Columns

Analyze
Reports
Report Summaries in Columns...
E Select one or more variables for Data Columns. One column in the report is generated
for each variable selected.
E To change the summary measure for a variable, select the variable in the Data
Columns list and click Summary.
E To obtain more than one summary measure for a variable, select the variable in
the source list and move it into the Data Columns list multiple times, one for each
summary measure you want.
E To display a column containing the sum, mean, ratio, or other function of existing
columns, click Insert Total. This places a variable called total into the Data Columns
list.
E For reports sorted and displayed by subgroups, select one or more variables for
Break Columns.
521
Reporting Results
Figure 36-10
Report Summaries in Columns dialog box
Data Columns Summary Function

Summary Lines controls the summary statistic displayed for the selected data column
variable.
Figure 36-11
Report Summary Lines dialog box
522
Chapter 36
Available summary statistics are sum, mean, minimum, maximum, number of cases,
percentage of case above or below a specified value, percentage of cases within a
specified range of values, standard deviation, variance, kurtosis, and skewness.
Data Columns Summary for Total Column

Summary Column controls the total summary statistics that summarize two or more
data columns.
Available total summary statistics are sum of columns, mean of columns,
minimum, maximum, difference between values in two columns, quotient of values
in one column divided by values in another column, and product of columns values
multiplied together.
Figure 36-12
Report Summary Column dialog box
Sum of columns. The total column is the sum of the columns in the Summary Column
list.
Mean of columns. The total column is the average of the columns in the Summary
Column list.
Minimum of columns. The total column is the minimum of the columns in the
Summary Column list.
Maximum of columns. The total column is the maximum of the columns in the
Summary Column list.
1st column – 2nd column. The total column is the difference of the columns in the
Summary Column list. The Summary Column list must contain exactly two columns.
523
Reporting Results
1st column / 2nd column. The total column is the quotient of the columns in the
Summary Column list. The Summary Column list must contain exactly two columns.
% 1st column / 2nd column. The total column is the first column's percentage of the
second column in the Summary Column list. The Summary Column list must contain
exactly two columns.
Product of columns. The total column is the product of the columns in the Summary
Column list.
Report Column Format

Data and break column formatting options for Report Summaries in Columns are the
same as those described for Report Summaries in Rows.
Report Summaries in Columns Break Options

Break Options controls subtotal display, spacing, and pagination for break categories.
Figure 36-13
Report Break Options dialog box
Subtotal. Controls the display subtotals for break categories.

Page Control. Controls spacing and pagination for categories of the selected break
variable. You can specify a number of blank lines between break categories or start
each break category on a new page.
524
Chapter 36
Blank Lines before Subtotal. Controls the number of blank lines between break
category data and subtotals.
Report Summaries in Columns Options

Options controls the display of grand totals, the display of missing values, and
pagination in column summary reports.
Figure 36-14
Report Options dialog box
Grand Total. Displays and labels a grand total for each column; displayed at the
bottom of the column.
Missing values. You can exclude missing values from the report or select a single
character to indicate missing values in the report.
Report Layout for Summaries in Columns

Report layout options for Report Summaries in Columns are the same as those
described for Report Summaries in Rows.
Report Command Additional Features

Display different summary functions in the columns of a single summary line.
525
Reporting Results
Insert summary lines into data columns for variables other than the data column
variable, or for various combinations (composite functions) of summary
functions.
Use Median, Mode, Frequency, and Percent as summary functions.
Control more precisely the display format of summary statistics.
Insert blank lines at various points in reports.
Insert blank lines after every nth case in listing reports.
Because of the complexity of the REPORT syntax, you may find it useful, when
building a new report with syntax, to approximate the report generated from the
dialog boxes, copy and paste the corresponding syntax, and refine that syntax to yield
the exact report that you want.
Chapter
37
Reliability Analysis
Reliability analysis allows you to study the properties of measurement scales and the
items that make them up. The Reliability Analysis procedure calculates a number of
commonly used measures of scale reliability and also provides information about the
relationships between individual items in the scale. Intraclass correlation coefficients
can be used to compute interrater reliability estimates.
Example. Does my questionnaire measure customer satisfaction in a useful way?
Using reliability analysis, you can determine the extent to which the items in
your questionnaire are related to each other, you can get an overall index of the
repeatability or internal consistency of the scale as a whole, and you can identify
problem items that should be excluded from the scale.
Statistics. Descriptives for each variable and for the scale, summary statistics across
items, inter-item correlations and covariances, reliability estimates, ANOVA table,
intraclass correlation coefficients, Hotelling's T2, and Tukey's test of additivity.
Models. The following models of reliability are available:
Alpha (Cronbach). This is a model of internal consistency, based on the average
inter-item correlation.
Split-half. This model splits the scale into two parts and examines the correlation
between the parts.
Guttman. This model computes Guttman's lower bounds for true reliability.
Parallel. This model assumes that all items have equal variances and equal error
variances across replications.
Strict parallel. This model makes the assumptions of the parallel model and also
assumes equal means across items.
527
528
Chapter 37
Reliability Analysis Data Considerations

Data. Data can be dichotomous, ordinal, or interval, but they should be coded
numerically.
Assumptions. Observations should be independent, and errors should be uncorrelated
between items. Each pair of items should have a bivariate normal distribution. Scales
should be additive, so that each item is linearly related to the total score.
Related procedures. If you want to explore the dimensionality of your scale items (to
see if more than one construct is needed to account for the pattern of item scores), use
Factor Analysis or Multidimensional Scaling. To identify homogeneous groups of
variables, you can use Hierarchical Cluster Analysis to cluster variables.
Sample Output
Figure 37-1
Reliability output
Mean Std Dev Cases
1. ANY .4868 .5001 906.0

2. BORED .5022 .5003 906.0
3. CRITICS .5033 .5003 906.0
4. PEERS .5287 .4995 906.0
Correlation Matrix
ANY BORED CRITICS PEERS
ANY 1.0000
BORED .8150 1.0000
CRITICS .8128 .8256 1.0000
PEERS .7823 .8068 .8045 1.0000
Reliability Coefficients 4 items
Alpha = .9439 Standardized item alpha = .9439

529
To Obtain a Reliability Analysis

Analyze
Scale
Reliability Analysis...
Figure 37-2
Reliability Analysis dialog box
E Select two or more variables as potential components of an additive scale.
E Choose a model from the Model drop-down list.

530
Chapter 37
Reliability Analysis Statistics

Figure 37-3
Reliability Analysis Statistics dialog box
You can select various statistics describing your scale and items. Statistics reported
by default include the number of cases, the number of items, and reliability estimates
as follows:
Alpha models: Coefficient alpha. For dichotomous data, this is equivalent to the
Kuder-Richardson 20 (KR20) coefficient.
Split-half models: Correlation between forms, Guttman split-half reliability,
Spearman-Brown reliability (equal and unequal length), and coefficient alpha
for each half.
Guttman models: Reliability coefficients lambda 1 through lambda 6.
Parallel and Strictly parallel models: Test for goodness-of-fit of model, estimates
of error variance, common variance, and true variance, estimated common
inter-item correlation, estimated reliability, and unbiased estimate of reliability.
531
Descriptives for. Produces descriptive statistics for scales or items across cases.
Available options are Item, Scale, and Scale if item deleted.
Scale if item deleted. Displays summary statistics comparing each item to the scale
composed of the other items. Statistics include scale mean and variance if the item
were deleted from the scale, correlation between the item and the scale composed
of other items, and Cronbach's alpha if the item were deleted from the scale.
Summaries. Provides descriptive statistics of item distributions across all items in the
scale. Available options are Means, Variances, Covariances, and Correlations.
Means. Summary statistics for item means. The smallest, largest, and average
item means, the range and variance of item means, and the ratio of the largest to
the smallest item means are displayed.
Variances. Summary statistics for item variances. The smallest, largest, and
average item variances, the range and variance of item variances, and the ratio of
the largest to the smallest item variances are displayed.
Covariances. Summary statistics for inter-item covariances. The smallest,
largest, and average inter-item covariances, the range and variance of inter-item
covariances, and the ratio of the largest to the smallest inter-item covariances
are displayed.
Correlations. Summary statistics for inter-item correlations. The smallest,
largest, and average inter-item correlations, the range and variance of inter-item
correlations, and the ratio of the largest to the smallest inter-item correlations
are displayed.
Inter-Item. Produces matrices of correlations or covariances between items.
ANOVA Table. Produces tests of equal means. Available alternatives are None, F test,
Friedman chi-square, or Cochran chi-square.
F Test. Displays a repeated measures analysis-of-variance table.
Friedman chi-square. Displays Friedman's chi-square and Kendall's coefficient of
concordance. This option is appropriate for data that are in the form of ranks.
The chi-square test replaces the usual F test in the ANOVA table.
Cochran chi-square. Displays Cochran's Q. This option is appropriate for data that
are dichotomous. The Q statistic replaces the usual F statistic in the ANOVA
table.
532
Chapter 37
Hotelling's T-square. Produces a multivariate test of the null hypothesis that all items
on the scale have the same mean.
Tukey's test of additivity. Produces a test of the assumption that there is no
multiplicative interaction among the items.
Intraclass correlation coefficient. Produces measures of consistency or agreement
of values within cases.
Model. Select the model for calculating the intraclass correlation coefficient.
Available models are Two-way mixed, Two-way random, and One-way random.
Select two-way mixed when people effects are random and the item effects are
fixed, two-way random when people effects and the item effects are random, and
one-way random when people effects are random.
Type. Select the type of index. Available types are Consistency and Absolute
Agreement.
Confidence interval. Specify the level for the confidence interval. Default is 95%.
Test value. Specify the hypothesized value of the coefficient for the hypothesis
test. This is the value to which the observed value is compared. Default value is 0.
RELIABILITY Command Additional Features

Read and analyze a correlation matrix.
Write a correlation matrix for later analysis.
Specify splits other than equal halves for the split-half method.
Chapter
38
Multidimensional Scaling
Multidimensional scaling attempts to find the structure in a set of distance measures

between objects or cases. This is accomplished by assigning observations to
specific locations in a conceptual space (usually two- or three-dimensional) such
that the distances between points in the space match the given dissimilarities as
closely as possible. In many cases, the dimensions of this conceptual space can
be interpreted and used to further understand your data. If you have objectively
measured variables, you can use multidimensional scaling as a data reduction
technique (the Multidimensional Scaling procedure will compute distances from
multivariate data for you, if necessary). Multidimensional scaling can also be applied
to subjective ratings of dissimilarity between objects or concepts. Additionally, the
Multidimensional Scaling procedure can handle dissimilarity data from multiple
sources, as you might have with multiple raters or questionnaire respondents.
Example. How do people perceive relationships between different cars? If you have
data from respondents indicating similarity ratings between different makes and
models of cars, multidimensional scaling can be used to identify dimensions that
describe consumers' perceptions. You might find, for example, that the price and size
of a vehicle define a two-dimensional space, which accounts for the similarities
reported by your respondents.
Statistics. For each model: data matrix, optimally scaled data matrix, S-stress
(Young's), stress (Kruskal's), RSQ, stimulus coordinates, average stress and RSQ
for each stimulus (RMDS models). For individual difference (INDSCAL) models:
subject weights and weirdness index for each subject. For each matrix in replicated
multidimensional scaling models: stress and RSQ for each stimulus. Plots: stimulus
coordinates (two- or three-dimensional), scatterplot of disparities versus distances.
533
534
Chapter 38
Multidimensional Scaling Data Considerations

Data. If your data are dissimilarity data, all dissimilarities should be quantitative and
should be measured in the same metric. If your data are multivariate data, variables
can be quantitative, binary, or count data. Scaling of variables is an important
issue—differences in scaling may affect your solution. If your variables have large
differences in scaling (for example, one variable is measured in dollars and the other
is measured in years), you should consider standardizing them (this can be done
automatically by the Multidimensional Scaling procedure).
Assumptions. The Multidimensional Scaling procedure is relatively free of
distributional assumptions. Be sure to select the appropriate measurement level
(ordinal, interval, or ratio) under Options to be sure that the results are computed
correctly.
Related procedures. If your goal is data reduction, an alternative method to consider is
factor analysis, particularly if your variables are quantitative. If you want to identify
groups of similar cases, consider supplementing your multidimensional scaling
analysis with a hierarchical or k-means cluster analysis.
To Obtain a Multidimensional Scaling Analysis

Analyze
Scale
Multidimensional Scaling...
535
Figure 38-1
Multidimensional Scaling dialog box
E In Distances, select either Data are distances or Create distances from data.
E If your data are distances, you must select at least four numeric variables for analysis,
and you can click Shape to indicate the shape of the distance matrix.
E If you want SPSS to create the distances before analyzing them, you must select at
least one numeric variable, and you can click Measure to specify the type of distance
measure you want. You can create separate matrices for each category of a grouping
variable (which can be either numeric or string) by moving that variable into the
Individual Matrices For list.
Multidimensional Scaling Shape of Data

Figure 38-2
Multidimensional Scaling Shape of Data dialog box
536
Chapter 38
If your working data file represents distances among a set of objects, or distances
between two sets of objects, you must specify the shape of your data matrix in
order to get the correct results. Choose an alternative: Square symmetric, Square
asymmetric, or Rectangular. Note: You cannot select Square symmetric if the Model
dialog box specifies row conditionality.
Multidimensional Scaling Create Measure

Figure 38-3
Multidimensional Scaling Create Measure from Data dialog box
Multidimensional scaling uses dissimilarity data to create a scaling solution. If

your data are multivariate data (values of measured variables), you must create
dissimilarity data in order to compute a multidimensional scaling solution. You can
specify the details of creating dissimilarity measures from your data.
Measure. Allows you to specify the dissimilarity measure for your analysis. Select
one alternative from the Measure group corresponding to your type of data, and
then select one of the measures from the drop-down list corresponding to that type
of measure. Available alternatives are:
Interval. Euclidean distance, squared Euclidean distance, Chebychev, Block,
Minkowski, or Customized.
537
Count. Chi-square measure or Phi-square measure.

Binary. Euclidean distance, Squared Euclidean distance, Size difference, Pattern
difference, Variance, or Lance and Williams.
Create Distance Matrix. Allows you to choose the unit of analysis. Alternatives are
Between variables or Between cases.
Transform Values. In certain cases, such as when variables are measured on very
different scales, you may want to standardize values before computing proximities
(not applicable to binary data). Select a standardization method from the Standardize
drop-down list (if no standardization is required, select None).
Multidimensional Scaling Model

Figure 38-4
Multidimensional Scaling Model dialog box
Correct estimation of a multidimensional scaling model depends on aspects of the

data and the model itself.
Level of measurement. Allows you to specify the level of your data. Alternatives
are Ordinal, Interval, or Ratio. If your variables are ordinal, selecting Untie tied
observations requests that they be treated as continuous variables, so that ties (equal
values for different cases) are resolved optimally.
Conditionality. Allows you to specify which comparisons are meaningful. Alternatives
are Matrix, Row, or Unconditional.
538
Chapter 38
Dimensions. Allows you to specify the dimensionality of the scaling solution(s). One
solution is calculated for each number in the range. Specify integers between 1 and 6;
a minimum of 1 is allowed only if you select Euclidean distance as the scaling model.
For a single solution, specify the same number as minimum and maximum.
Scaling Model. Allows you to specify the assumptions by which the scaling is
performed. Available alternatives are Euclidean distance or Individual differences
Euclidean distance (also known as INDSCAL). For the Individual differences
Euclidean distance model, you can select Allow negative subject weights, if appropriate
for your data.
Multidimensional Scaling Options

Figure 38-5
Multidimensional Scaling Options dialog box
You can specify options for your multidimensional scaling analysis:

Display. Allows you to select various types of output. Available options are Group
plots, Individual subject plots, Data matrix, and Model and options summary.
Criteria. Allows you to determine when iteration should stop. To change the defaults,
enter values for S-stress convergence, Minimum S-stress value, and Maximum
iterations.
Treat distances less than n as missing. Distances less than this value are excluded
from the analysis.
539
Scaling Command Additional Features

Use three additional model types, known as ASCAL, AINDS, and GEMSCAL in
the literature on multidimensional scaling.
Carry out polynomial transformations on interval and ratio data.
Analyze similarities (rather than distances) with ordinal data.
Analyze nominal data.
Save various coordinate and weight matrices into files and read them back
in for analysis.
Constrain multidimensional unfolding.
Chapter
39
Ratio Statistics
The Ratio Statistics procedure provides a comprehensive list of summary statistics

for describing the ratio between two scale variables.
You can sort the output by values of a grouping variable in ascending or descending
order. The ratio statistics report can be suppressed in the output and the results
saved to an external file.
Example. Is there good uniformity in the ratio between the appraisal price and sale
price of homes in each of five counties? From the output, you might learn that the
distribution of ratios varies considerably from county to county.
Statistics. Median, mean, weighted mean, confidence intervals, coefficient of
dispersion (COD), median-centered coefficient of variation, mean-centered coefficient
of variation, price-related differential (PRD), standard deviation, average absolute
deviation (AAD), range, minimum and maximum values, and the concentration index
computed for a user-specified range or percentage within the median ratio.
Ratio Statistics Data Considerations

Data. Use numeric codes or short strings to code grouping variables (nominal or
ordinal level measurements).
Assumptions. The variables that define the numerator and denominator of the ratio
should be scale variables that take positive values.
541
542
Chapter 39
To Obtain Ratio Statistics

Analyze
Ratio...
Figure 39-1
Ratio Statistics dialog box
E Select a numerator variable.
E Select a denominator variable.

Select a grouping variable and specify the ordering of the groups in the results.
Choose whether or not to display the results in the Output Viewer.
Choose whether or not to save the results to an external file for later use, and
specify the name of the file to which the results are saved.
543
Ratio Statistics
Ratio Statistics
Figure 39-2
Statistics dialog box
Central Tendency. Measures of central tendency are statistics that describe the
distribution of ratios.
Median. The value such that the number of ratios less than this value and the
number of ratios greater than this value are the same.
Mean. The result of summing the ratios and dividing the result by the total
number of ratios.
Weighted mean. The result of dividing the mean of the numerator by the mean of
the denominator. It is also the mean of the ratios weighted by the denominator.
Confidence intervals. This displays confidence intervals for the mean, the median,
and the weighted mean (if requested). Specify a value greater than or equal to 0
and less than 100 as the confidence level.
Dispersion. These are statistics that measure the amount of variation, or spread,
in the observed values.
544
Chapter 39
AAD. The average absolute deviation is the result of summing the absolute
deviations of the ratios about the median and dividing the result by the total
number of ratios.
COD. The coefficient of dispersion is the result of expressing the average absolute
deviation as a percentage of the median.
PRD. The price-related differential, also known as the index of regressivity, is the
result of dividing the mean by the weighted mean.
Median centered COV. The median-centered coefficient of variation is the result of
expressing the root mean squares of deviation from the median as a percentage of
the median.
Mean centered COV. The mean-centered coefficient of variation is the result of
expressing the standard deviation as a percentage of the mean.
Standard deviation. The result of summing the squared deviations of the ratios
about the mean, dividing the result by the total number of ratios minus one,
and taking the positive square root.
Range. The result of subtracting the minimum ratio from the maximum ratio.
Minimum. The smallest ratio.
Maximum. The largest ratio.
Concentration Index. The coefficient of concentration measures the percentage of

ratios that fall within an interval. It can be computed in two different ways:
Ratios Between. Here the interval is defined explicitly by specifying the low
and high values of the interval. Enter values for the low and high proportions
and click Add to obtain an interval.
Ratios Within. Here the interval is defined implicitly by specifying the percentage
of the median. Enter a value between 0 and 100 and click Add. The lower end
of the interval is equal to (1 – 0.01 × value) × median, and the upper end is
equal to (1 + 0.01 × value) × median.
Chapter
40
Overview of the Chart Facility
High-resolution charts and plots are created by the procedures on the Graphs menu
and by many of the procedures on the Analyze menu. This chapter provides an
overview of the chart facility. Interactive charts, available on the Interactive submenu
of the Graphs menu, are covered in a separate book, SPSS Interactive Graphics.
Creating and Modifying a Chart

Before you can create a chart, you need to have your data in the Data Editor. You can
enter the data directly into the Data Editor, open a previously saved data file, or read a
spreadsheet, tab-delimited data file, or database file. The Tutorial menu selection on
the Help menu has online examples of creating and modifying a chart, and the online
Help system provides information on how to create and modify all chart types.
Creating the Chart

After you get your data into the Data Editor, you can create a chart by selecting a
chart type from the Graphs menu. This opens a chart dialog box.
545
546
Chapter 40
Figure 40-1
Chart dialog box
The dialog box contains icons for various types of charts and a list of data structures.
Click Define to open a chart definition dialog box such as the following one.
Figure 40-2
Chart definition dialog box
In this dialog box, you can select the variables appropriate for the chart and choose
the options you want. For information about the various choices, click Help.
547
The Chart is displayed in the Viewer.

Figure 40-3
Chart in Viewer
Modifying the Chart

To modify a chart, double-click anywhere on the chart that is displayed in the Viewer.
This displays the chart in the Chart Editor.
548
Chapter 40
Figure 40-4
Original chart in the Chart Editor
You can modify any part of the chart or change to another type of chart illustrating the
same data. You add items or show or hide them using the menus in the Chart Editor.
To modify a chart item:
E Select the item that you want to modify.

Edit
Properties...
This opens the Properties window. The tabs that appear in the Properties window
are specific to your selection. The online Help describes how to display the tabs
that you need.
549
Figure 40-5
Properties window
Some typical modifications include the following:

Edit text in the chart.
Change the color and fill pattern of the bars.
Add text to the chart, such as a title or an annotation.
Change the location of the bar origin line.
Change the outer frame's border from transparent to black.
Following is a modified chart.

550
Chapter 40
Figure 40-6
Modified chart
Chart modifications are saved when you close the chart window, and the modified
chart is displayed in the Viewer.
Chart Definition Global Options

When you are defining a chart, the specific chart definition dialog box usually
contains the Titles and Options buttons and a Template group. These global options
are available for most charts, regardless of type. However, they are not available for
P-P plots, Q-Q plots, sequence charts, or time series charts.
551
Figure 40-7
A chart definition dialog box
Click Titles to specify titles, subtitles, and footnotes. You can click Options to control
the treatment of missing values for most charts and case labels for scatterplots.
Additionally, you can apply a template of previously selected attributes either when
you are defining the chart or after the chart has been created. The next few sections
describe how to define these characteristics at the time you define the chart.
Titles, Subtitles, and Footnotes

In any chart, you can define two title lines, one subtitle line, and two footnote lines as
part of your original chart definition. To specify titles or footnotes while defining a
chart, click Titles in the chart definition dialog box. This opens the Titles dialog box.
552
Chapter 40
Figure 40-8
Titles dialog box
Each line can be up to 72 characters long. The number of characters that will actually
fit in the chart depends upon the font and size. Most titles are left-justified by
default and, if too long, are cropped on the right. Pie chart titles, by default, are
center-justified and, if too long, are cropped at both ends.
Titles, subtitles, and footnotes are rendered as text boxes in the Chart Editor.
You can add, delete, or revise text boxes within the Chart Editor, as well as change
their font, size, and justification.
Options
The Options dialog box provides options for treatment of missing values and display
of case labels. This dialog box is available by clicking Options on the chart definition
dialog box.
Figure 40-9
Options dialog box
553
The availability of each option depends on your previous choices. Missing-value

options are not available for charts using values of individual cases or for histograms.
The case-labels display option is available only for a scatterplot that has a variable
selected for case labels.
Missing Values. If you selected summaries of separate variables for a categorical chart
or if you are creating a scatterplot, you can choose one of the following alternatives
for exclusion of cases having missing values:
Exclude cases listwise. If any of the variables in the chart has a missing value for
a given case, the whole case is excluded from the chart.
Exclude cases variable by variable. If a selected variable has any missing values,
the cases having those missing values are excluded when the variable is analyzed.
To see the difference between listwise and variable-by-variable exclusion of missing

values, consider the following figures, which show a bar chart for each of the two
options.
Figure 40-10
Listwise exclusion of missing values
554
Chapter 40
Figure 40-11
Variable-by-variable exclusion of missing values
The charts were created from a version of the Employee data.sav file that was edited
to have some system-missing (blank) values in the variables for current salary and job
category. In some other cases, the value 0 was entered and defined as missing. For
both charts, the option Display groups defined by missing values is selected, which adds
the category Missing to the other job categories displayed. In each chart, the values of
the summary function, Number of cases, are displayed in the bar labels.
In both charts, 26 cases have a system-missing value for the job category and 13
cases have the user-missing value (0). In the listwise chart, the number of cases
is the same for both variables in each bar cluster because whenever a value was
missing, the case was excluded for all variables. In the variable-by-variable chart,
the number of nonmissing cases for each variable in a category is plotted without
regard to missing values in other variables.
The following option is also available for missing values:

Display groups defined by missing values. If there are missing values in the
data for variables used to define categories or subgroups, user-missing values
(values identified as missing by the user) and system-missing values are included
together in a category labeled Missing. The “missing” category is displayed on
the category axis or in the legend, adding, for example, an extra bar, a slice to
a pie chart, or an extra box to a boxplot. In a scatterplot, missing values add a
555
“missing” category to the set of markers. If there are no missing values, the
“missing” category is not displayed.
If you select this option and want to suppress display after the chart is drawn, select
the chart and then choose Properties from the Edit menu. Use the Categories tab to
move the categories you want suppressed to the Excluded list.
This option is not available for an overlay scatterplot or for single-series charts in
which the data are summarized by separate variables.
The final selection in the Options dialog box controls the status of case labels when a
scatterplot is first displayed.
Display chart with case labels. When this option is selected, all case labels are
displayed when a scatterplot is created. By default, it is deselected—that is,
the default scatterplot is displayed without labels. If you select this option,
case labels may overlap.
Chart Templates
You can apply many of the attributes and text elements from one chart to another.
This allows you to modify one chart, save that chart as a template, and then use the
template to create a number of other similar charts.
To use a template when creating a chart, select Use chart specifications from (in
the Template group in the chart definition dialog box) and click File. This opens a
standard file selection dialog box.
To apply a template to a chart already in a chart window, from the menus choose:
File
Apply Chart Template...
This opens a standard file selection dialog box. Select a file to use as a template. If
you are creating a new chart, the filename you select is displayed in the Template
group when you return to the chart definition dialog box.
A template is used to borrow the format from one chart and apply it to the new
chart you are generating. In general, any formatting information from the old chart
that can apply to the new chart will automatically apply. For example, if the old chart
is a clustered bar chart with bar colors modified to yellow and green and the new
chart is a multiple line chart, the lines will be yellow and green. If the old chart is
a simple bar chart with drop shadows and the new chart is a simple line chart, the
556
Chapter 40
lines will not have drop shadows because drop shadows don't apply to line charts.
If there are titles in the template chart but not in the new chart, you will get the
titles from the template chart. If there are titles defined in the new chart, they will
override the titles in the template chart.
To Create a Chart Template
E Create a chart.
E Edit the chart to contain the attributes that you want to have in a template.
E From the Chart Editor menus choose:

File
Save Chart Template...
E In the Save Chart Template dialog box, specify which characteristics of the chart you
want to save in the template. The online Help describes the settings in detail.
E Click Continue.
E Enter a filename and location for the new template. The template's extension is .sgt.
Chapter
41
ROC Curves
This procedure is a useful way to evaluate the performance of classification schemes

in which there is one variable with two categories by which subjects are classified.
Example. It is in a bank's interest to correctly classify customers into those who will
and will not default on their loans, so special methods are developed for making these
decisions. ROC curves can be used to evaluate how well these methods perform.
Statistics. Area under the ROC curve with confidence interval and coordinate points
of the ROC curve. Plots: ROC curve.
Methods. The estimate of the area under the ROC curve can be computed either
nonparametrically or parametrically using a binegative exponential model.
ROC Curve Data Considerations

Data. Test variables are quantitative. They are often composed of probabilities from
discriminant analysis or logistic regression or scores on an arbitrary scale indicating
a rater's “strength of conviction” that a subject falls into one category or another.
The state variable can be of any type and indicates the true category to which a
subject belongs. The value of the state variable indicates which category should
be considered positive.
Assumptions. It is assumed that increasing numbers on the rater scale represent the
increasing belief that the subject belongs to one category, while decreasing numbers
on the scale represent the increasing belief that the subject belongs to the other
category. The user must choose which direction is positive. It is also assumed that the
true category to which each subject belongs is known.
557
558
Chapter 41
Sample Output
Figure 41-1
ROC Curve output
Case Processing
Summary
Valid N
ACTUAL (listwise)
Positive1 74
Negative 76
Larger values of the test result variable(s) indicate

stronger evidence for a positive actual state.
1. The positive actual state is 1.00.
Area Under the Curve
Test Result Variable(s): PROBS
Asymptotic 95% Confidence

Interval
1 2
Area Std. Error Asymptotic Sig. Lower Bound Upper Bound
.877 .028 .000 .823 .931
1. Under the nonparametric assumption
2. Null hypothesis: true area = 0.5

559
ROC Curves
To Obtain an ROC Curve

Graphs
ROC Curve...
Figure 41-2
ROC Curve dialog box
E Select one or more test probability variables.
E Select one state variable.
E Identify the positive value for the state variable.

560
Chapter 41
ROC Curve Options

Figure 41-3
ROC Curve Options dialog box
You can specify the following options for your ROC analysis:
Classification. Allows you to specify whether the cutoff value should be included or
excluded when making a positive classification. This currently has no effect on the
output.
Test Direction. Allows you to specify the direction of the scale in relation to the
positive category.
Parameters for Standard Error of Area. Allows you to specify the method of estimating
the standard error of the area under the curve. Available methods are nonparametric
and binegative exponential. Also allows you to set the level for the confidence
interval. The available range is 50.1% to 99.9%.
Missing Values. Allows you to specify how missing values are handled.
Chapter
42
Utilities
This chapter describes the functions found on the Utilities menu and the ability to
reorder target variable lists using the Windows system menus.
Variable Information
The Variables dialog box displays variable definition information for the currently
selected variable, including:
Data format
Variable label
User-missing values
Value labels
Figure 42-1
Variables dialog box
Go To. Goes to the selected variable in the Data Editor window.
561
562
Chapter 42
Paste. Pastes the selected variables into the designated syntax window at the cursor
location. (Not available in the Student version.)
To modify variable definitions, use the Variable view in the Data Editor.
To Obtain Variable Information

Utilities
Variables...
E Select the variable for which you want to display variable definition information.
Data File Comments

You can include descriptive comments with a data file. For SPSS-format data files,
these comments are saved with the data file.
To add, modify, delete, or display data file comments:

Utilities
Data File Comments...
E To display the comments in the Viewer, select Display comments in output.
Comments can be any length but are limited to 80 bytes (typically 80 characters
in single-byte languages) per line; lines will automatically wrap at 80 characters.
Comments are displayed in the same font as text output to accurately reflect how they
will appear when displayed in the Viewer.
A date stamp (the current date in parentheses) is automatically appended to the end
of the list of comments whenever you add or modify comments. This may lead to
some ambiguity concerning the dates associated with comments if you modify an
existing comment or insert a new comment between existing comments.
563
Utilities
Variable Sets
You can restrict the variables that appear on dialog box source variable lists by
defining and using variable sets. This is particularly useful for data files with a
large number of variables. Small variable sets make it easier to find and select the
variables for your analysis and can also enhance performance. If your data file has a
large number of variables and dialog boxes that open slowly, restricting dialog box
source lists to smaller subsets of variables should reduce the amount of time it takes
to open dialog boxes.
Define Variable Sets

Define Variable Sets creates subsets of variables to display in dialog box source lists.
Figure 42-2
Define Variable Sets dialog box
Set Name. Set names can be up to 12 characters long. Any characters, including
blanks, can be used. Set names are not case sensitive.
564
Chapter 42
Variables in Set. Any combination of numeric, short string, and long string variables
can be included in a set. The order of variables in the set has no effect on the display
order of the variables on dialog box source lists. A variable can belong to multiple
sets.
To Define Variable Sets

Utilities
Define Sets...
E Select the variables that you want to include in the set.
E Enter a name for the set (up to 12 characters).
E Click Add Set.
Use Sets
Use Sets restricts the variables displayed in dialog box source lists to the selected sets
that you have defined.
Figure 42-3
Use Sets dialog box
565
Utilities
Sets in Use. Displays the sets used to produce the source variable lists in dialog boxes.
Variables appear on the source lists in alphabetical or file order. The order of sets and
the order of variables within a set have no effect on source list variable order. By
default, two system-defined sets are in use:
ALLVARIABLES. This set contains all variables in the data file, including new variables
created during a session.
NEWVARIABLES. This set contains only new variables created during the session.
You can remove these sets from the list and select others, but there must be at least
one set on the list. If you don't remove the ALLVARIABLES set from the Sets in Use
list, any other sets you include are irrelevant.
To Restrict Dialog Box Source Lists to Defined Variable Sets

Utilities
Use Sets...
E Select the defined variable sets that contain the variables that you want to appear in
dialog box source lists.
Reordering Target Variable Lists

Variables appear on dialog box target lists in the order in which they are selected from
the source list. If you want to change the order of variables on a target list—but you
don't want to deselect all the variables and reselect them in the new order—you can
move variables up and down on the target list using the system menu in the upper left
corner of the dialog box (accessed by clicking the left side of the dialog box title bar).
566
Chapter 42
Figure 42-4
Windows system menu with target list reordering
Move Selection Up. Moves the selected variable(s) up one position on the target list.
Move Selection Down. Moves the selected variable(s) down one position on the target
list.
You can move multiple variables simultaneously if they are contiguous (grouped
together). You cannot move noncontiguous groups of variables.
Chapter
43
Options
Options control a wide variety of settings, including:

Session journal, which keeps a record of all commands run in every session.
Display order for variables in dialog box source lists.
Items displayed and hidden in new output results.
TableLook for new pivot tables and ChartLook for new interactive charts.
Custom currency formats.
Autoscript files and autoscript functions to customize output.
To Change Options Settings

Edit
Options...
E Click the tabs for the settings that you want to change.
E Change the settings.
567
568
Chapter 43
General Options
Figure 43-1
Options General tab
Variable Lists. Controls display of variables in dialog box list boxes. You can display
variable names or variable labels. Names or labels can be displayed in alphabetical
order or in file order, which is the order in which they actually occur in the data file
(and are displayed in the Data Editor window). Display order affects only source
variable lists. Target variable lists always reflect the order in which variables were
selected.
Session Journal. Journal file of all commands run in a session. This includes
commands entered and run in syntax windows and commands generated by dialog
box choices. You can edit the journal file and use the commands again in other
sessions. You can turn journaling off and on, append or overwrite the journal file, and
select the journal filename and location. You can copy command syntax from the
569
Options
journal file and save it in a syntax file for use with the automated Production Facility.
(Command syntax and automatic production are not available in the Student version.)
Temporary directory. Controls the location of temporary files created during a session.
In distributed mode (available with the server version), this does not affect the
location of temporary data files. In distributed mode, the location of temporary data
files is controlled by the environment variable SPSSTMPDIR, which can be set only
on the computer running the server version of the software. If you need to change the
location of the temporary directory, contact your system administrator.
Recently used file list. Controls the number of recently used files that appear on
the File menu.
Open syntax window at start-up. Syntax windows are text file windows used to enter,
edit, and run commands. If you frequently work with command syntax, select this
option to automatically open a syntax window at the beginning of each session. This
is useful primarily for experienced users who prefer to work with command syntax
instead of dialog boxes. (Not available with the Student version.)
No scientific notation for small numbers in tables. Suppresses the display of scientific
notation for small decimal values in output. Very small decimal values will be
displayed as 0 (or 0.000).
Viewer Type at Start-up. Controls the type of Viewer used and output format. The
Viewer produces interactive pivot tables and interactive charts. The Draft Viewer
converts pivot tables to text output and charts to metafiles.
Measurement System. Measurement system used (points, inches, or centimeters) for
specifying attributes such as pivot table cell margins, cell widths, and space between
tables for printing.
Language. Controls the language used in output. Does not apply to simple text output,
interactive graphics, or maps (available with the Maps option). The list of available
languages depends on the currently installed language files. A number of languages
are automatically installed when you install SPSS. For additional language files, go to
http://www.spss.com/tech/downloads/base.htm.
Note: Custom scripts that rely on language-specific text strings in the output may
not run correctly when you change the output language. For more information, see
“Script Options” on page 585.
570
Chapter 43
Notification. Controls the manner in which the program notifies you that it has
finished running a procedure and that the results are available in the Viewer.
Viewer Options
Viewer output display options affect only new output produced after you change
the settings. Output already displayed in the Viewer is not affected by changes in
these settings.
Figure 43-2
Options Viewer tab
Initial Output State. Controls which items are automatically displayed or hidden each
time you run a procedure and how items are initially aligned. You can control the
display of the following items: log, warnings, notes, titles, pivot tables, charts, and
text output (output not displayed in pivot tables). You can also turn the display of
commands in the log on or off. You can copy command syntax from the log and save
571
Options
it in a syntax file for use with the automated Production Facility. (Command syntax
and automatic production are not available in the Student version.)
Note: All output items are displayed left-aligned in the Viewer. Only the alignment
of printed output is affected by the justification settings. Centered and right-aligned
items are identified by a small symbol above and to the left of the item.
Title Font. Controls the font style, size, and color for new output titles.
Page Title Font. Controls the font style, size, and color for new page titles and page
titles generated by TITLE and SUBTITLE command syntax or created by New Page
Title on the Insert menu.
Text Output Page Size. For text output, controls the page width (expressed in number
of characters) and page length (expressed in number of lines). For some procedures,
some statistics are displayed only in wide format.
Text Output Font. Font used for text output. Text output is designed for use with a
monospaced (fixed-pitch) font. If you select a non-monospaced font, tabular output
will not align properly.
Draft Viewer Options

Draft Viewer output display options affect only new output produced after you
change the settings. Output already displayed in the Draft Viewer is not affected
by changes in these settings.
572
Chapter 43
Figure 43-3
Options Draft Viewer tab
Display Output Items. Controls which items are automatically displayed each time
that you run a procedure. You can control the display of the following items: log,
warnings, notes, titles, tabular output (pivot tables converted to text output), charts,
and text output (space-separated output). You can also turn on or off the display of
commands in the log. You can copy command syntax from the log and save it in a
syntax file for use with the automated Production Facility. (Command syntax and
automatic production are not available in the Student version.)
Page Breaks Between. Inserts page breaks between output from different procedures
and/or between individual output items.
Font. Font used for new output. Only fixed-pitch (monospaced) fonts are available
because space-separated text output will not align properly with a proportional font.
Tabular Output. Controls settings for pivot table output converted to tabular text output.
Column width and column separator specifications are available only if you select
Spaces for the column separator. For space-separated tabular output, by default all
573
Options
line wrapping is removed and each column is set to the width of the longest label or
value in the column. To limit the width of columns and wrap long labels, specify a
number of characters for the column width.
Note: Tab-separated tabular output will not align properly in the Draft Viewer. This
format is useful for copying and pasting results to word processing applications
where you can use any font that you want (not only fixed-pitch fonts) and set the
tabs to align output properly.
Text Output. For text output other than converted pivot table output, controls the page
width (expressed in number of characters) and page length (expressed in number of
lines). For some procedures, some statistics are displayed only in wide format.
Output Label Options

Output Label options control the display of variable and data value information in the
outline and pivot tables. You can display variable names, defined variable labels and
actual data values, defined value labels, or a combination.
Descriptive variable and value labels (Variable view in the Data Editor, Label
and Values columns) often make it easier to interpret your results. However, long
labels can be awkward in some tables.
574
Chapter 43
Figure 43-4
Options Output Labels tab
Output label options affect only new output produced after you change the settings.
Output already displayed in the Viewer is not affected by changes in these settings.
These settings affect only pivot table output. Text output is not affected by these
settings.
575
Options
Chart Options
Figure 43-5
Options Charts tab
Chart Template. New charts can use either the settings selected here or the settings
from a chart template file. Click Browse to select a chart template file. To create a
chart template file, create a chart with the attributes that you want and save it as a
template (choose Save Chart Template from the File menu).
Chart Aspect Ratio. The width-to-height ratio of the outer frame of new charts. You
can specify a width-to-height ratio from 0.1 to 10.0. Values less than 1 make charts
that are taller than they are wide. Values greater than 1 make charts that are wider
than they are tall. A value of 1 produces a square chart. Once a chart is created, its
aspect ratio cannot be changed.
Font. Font used for all text in new charts.
576
Chapter 43
Style Cycle Preference. The initial assignment of colors and patterns for new charts.
Cycle through colors, then patterns uses the default palette of 14 colors and then
changes the line style or the marker symbol or adds a fill pattern as necessary. Cycle
through colors only uses only colors to differentiate chart elements and does not use
patterns. Cycle through patterns only uses only line styles, marker symbols, or fill
patterns to differentiate chart elements and does not use color.
Frame. Controls the display of inner and outer frames on new charts.
Grid Lines. Controls the display of scale and category axis grid lines on new charts.
Style Cycles. Customizes the colors, line styles, marker symbols, and fill patterns for
new charts. You can change the order of the colors and patterns that are used when
a new chart is created.
Note: These settings have no effect on interactive charts (the Graphs menu's
Interactive submenu).
Data Element Colors

Specify the order in which colors should be used for the data elements (such as
bars and markers) in your new chart. Colors are used whenever you select a choice
that includes color in the Style Cycle Preference group in the main Chart Options
dialog box.
For example, if you create a clustered bar chart with two groups and you select
Cycle through colors, then patterns in the main Chart Options dialog box, the first two
colors in the Grouped Charts list are used as the bar colors on the new chart.
To change the order in which colors are used:
E Select Simple Charts and then select a color that is used for charts without categories.
E Select Grouped Charts to change the color cycle for charts with categories. To
change a category's color, select a category and then select a color for that category
from the palette.

Insert a new category above the selected category.
Move a selected category.
577
Options
Remove a selected category.

Reset the sequence to the default sequence.
Edit a color by selecting its well and then clicking Edit.
Data Element Lines

Specify the order in which styles should be used for the line data elements in your
new chart. Line styles are used whenever your chart includes line data elements
and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference group
in the main Chart Options dialog box.
For example, if you create a line chart with two groups and you select Cycle through
patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box, the first two styles in the Grouped
Charts list are used as the line patterns on the new chart.
To change the order in which line styles are used:
E Select Simple Charts and then select a line style that is used for line charts without
categories.
E Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for line charts with categories. To
change a category's line style, select a category and then select a line style for that
category from the palette.

Data Element Markers

Specify the order in which symbols should be used for the marker data elements in
your new chart. Marker styles are used whenever your chart includes marker data
elements and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference
group in the main Chart Options dialog box.
578
Chapter 43
For example, if you create a scatterplot chart with two groups and you select Cycle
through patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box, the first two symbols in
the Grouped Charts list are used as the markers on the new chart.
To change the order in which marker styles are used:
E Select Simple Charts and then select a marker symbol that is used for charts without
categories.
E Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for charts with categories. To
change a category's marker symbol, select a category and then select a symbol for
that category from the palette.

Data Element Fills

Specify the order in which fill styles should be used for the bar and area data elements
in your new chart. Fill styles are used whenever your chart includes bar or area data
elements and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference
group in the main Chart Options dialog box.
For example, if you create a clustered bar chart with two groups and you select
Cycle through patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box, the first two styles in
the Grouped Charts list are used as the bar fill patterns on the new chart.
To change the order in which fill styles are used:
E Select Simple Charts and then select a fill pattern that is used for charts without
categories.
579
Options
E Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for charts with categories. To
change a category's fill pattern, select a category and then select a fill pattern for
that category from the palette.

Interactive Chart Options

Figure 43-6
Options Interactive tab
580
Chapter 43
For interactive charts (Graphs menu, Interactive submenu), the following options
are available:
ChartLook. Select a ChartLook from the list of files and click OK or Apply. By default,
the list displays the ChartLooks saved in the Looks directory of the directory in
which the program is installed. You can use one of the ChartLooks provided with
the program, or you can create your own in the Interactive Graphics Editor (in an
activated chart, choose ChartLooks from the Format menu).
Directory. Allows you to select a ChartLook directory. Use Browse to add
directories to the list.
Browse. Allows you to select a ChartLook from another directory.
Data Saved with Chart. Controls information saved with interactive charts once the
charts are no longer attached to the data file that created them (for example, if you
open a Viewer file saved in a previous session). Saving data with the chart enables
you to perform most of the interactive functions available for charts attached to
the data file that created them (except adding variables that weren't included in the
original chart). However, this can substantially increase the size of Viewer files,
particularly for large data files.
Print Resolution. Controls the print resolution of interactive charts. In most cases,
Vector metafile will print faster and provide the best results. For bitmaps, lower
resolution charts print faster; higher resolution charts look better.
Measurement Units. Measurement system used (points, inches, or centimeters) for
specifying attributes, such as the size of the data region in a chart.
Reading Pre-8.0 Data Files. For data files created in previous versions of SPSS, you can
specify the minimum number of data values for a numeric variable used to classify
the variable as scale or categorical. Variables with fewer than the specified number of
unique values are classified as categorical. Any variable with defined value labels is
classified as categorical, regardless of the number of unique values.
Note: These settings affect only interactive charts (the Graphs menu's Interactive
submenu).
581
Options
Pivot Table Options

Pivot Table options sets the default TableLook used for new pivot table output.
TableLooks can control a variety of pivot table attributes, including the display and
width of grid lines; font style, size, and color; and background colors.
Figure 43-7
Options Pivot Tables tab
TableLook. Select a TableLook from the list of files and click OK or Apply. By default,
the list displays the TableLooks saved in the Looks directory of the directory in
which the program is installed. You can use one of the TableLooks provided with the
program, or you can create your own in the Pivot Table Editor (choose TableLooks
from the Format menu).
Browse. Allows you to select a TableLook from another directory.
Set TableLook Directory. Allows you to change the default TableLook directory.
Adjust Column Widths for. Controls the automatic adjustment of column widths in
pivot tables.
582
Chapter 43
Labels only. Adjusts column width to the width of the column label. This produces
more compact tables, but data values wider than the label will not be displayed
(asterisks indicate values too wide to be displayed).
Labels and data. Adjusts column width to whichever is larger, the column label or
the largest data value. This produces wider tables, but it ensures that all values
will be displayed.
Default Editing Mode. Controls activation of pivot tables in the Viewer window or in
a separate window. By default, double-clicking a pivot table activates the table in
the Viewer window. You can choose to activate pivot tables in a separate window
or select a size setting that will open smaller pivot tables in the Viewer window and
larger pivot tables in a separate window.
Data Options
Figure 43-8
Options Data tab
583
Options
Transformation and Merge Options. Each time the program executes a command, it
reads the data file. Some data transformations (such as Compute and Recode) and file
transformations (such as Add Variables and Add Cases) do not require a separate pass
of the data, and execution of these commands can be delayed until the program reads
the data to execute another command, such as a statistical procedure. For large data
files, select Calculate values before used to delay execution and save processing time.
Display Format for New Numeric Variables. Controls the default display width and
number of decimal places for new numeric variables. There is no default display
format for new string variables. If a value is too large for the specified display format,
first decimal places are rounded and then values are converted to scientific notation.
Display formats do not affect internal data values. For example, the value 123456.78
may be rounded to 123457 for display, but the original unrounded value is used in
any calculations.
Set Century Range for 2-Digit Years. Defines the range of years for date-format
variables entered and/or displayed with a two-digit year (for example, 10/28/86,
29-OCT-87). The automatic range setting is based on the current year, beginning
69 years prior to and ending 30 years after the current year (adding the current
year makes a total range of 100 years). For a custom range, the ending year is
automatically determined based on the value that you enter for the beginning year.
Currency Options
You can create up to five custom currency display formats that can include special
prefix and suffix characters and special treatment for negative values.
The five custom currency format names are CCA, CCB, CCC, CCD, and CCE.
You cannot change the format names or add new ones. To modify a custom currency
format, select the format name from the source list and make the changes that you
want.
584
Chapter 43
Figure 43-9
Options Currency tab
Prefixes, suffixes, and decimal indicators defined for custom currency formats are
for display purposes only. You cannot enter values in the Data Editor using custom
currency characters.
To Create Custom Currency Formats

E Click the Currency tab.
E Select one of the currency formats from the list (CCA, CCB, CCC, CCD, CCE).
E Enter the prefix, suffix, and decimal indicator values.
585
Options
Script Options
Use the Scripts tab to specify your global procedures file and autoscript file, and
select the autoscript subroutines that you want to use. You can use scripts to automate
many functions, including customizing pivot tables.
Global Procedures. A global procedures file is a library of script subroutines and

functions that can be called by script files, including autoscript files.
Note: The global procedures file that comes with the program is selected by default.
Many of the available scripts use functions and subroutines in this global procedures
file and will not work if you specify a different global procedures file.
Autoscripts. An autoscript file is a collection of script subroutines that run
automatically each time you run procedures that create certain types of output objects.
Figure 43-10
Options Scripts tab
All of the subroutines in the current autoscript file are displayed, allowing you to
enable and disable individual subroutines.
586
Chapter 43
To Specify Global Procedure File and Autoscript File

E Click the Scripts tab.
E Select Enable Autoscripting.
E Select the autoscript subroutines that you want to enable.
You can also specify a different autoscript file or global procedure file.
Chapter
44
Customizing Menus and Toolbars
Menu Editor
You can use the Menu Editor to customize your menus. With the Menu Editor you
can:
Add menu items that run customized scripts.
Add menu items that run command syntax files.
Add menu items that launch other applications and automatically send data
to other applications.
You can send data to other applications in the following formats: SPSS, Excel 4.0,
Lotus 1-2-3 release 3, SYLK, tab-delimited, and dBASE IV.
To Add Items to Menus

Utilities
Menu Editor...
E In the Menu Editor dialog box, double-click the menu to which you want to add
a new item.
E Select the menu item above which you want the new item to appear.
E Click Insert Item to insert a new menu item.
E Select the file type for the new item (script file, command syntax file, or external
application).
587
588
Chapter 44
E Click Browse to select a file to attach to the menu item.
Figure 44-1
Menu Editor dialog box
You can also add entirely new menus and separators between menu items.
Optionally, you can automatically send the contents of the Data Editor to another
application when you select that application on the menus.
Customizing Toolbars
You can customize toolbars and create new toolbars. Toolbars can contain any of the
available tools, including tools for all menu actions. They can also contain custom
tools that launch other applications, run command syntax files, or run script files.
Show Toolbars
Use Show Toolbars to show or hide toolbars, customize toolbars, and create new
toolbars. Toolbars can contain any of the available tools, including tools for all
menu actions. They can also contain custom tools that launch other applications, run
command syntax files, or run script files.
589
Figure 44-2
Show Toolbars dialog box
To Customize Toolbars
View
Toolbars...
E Select the toolbar you want to customize and click Customize, or click New Toolbar
to create a new toolbar.
E For new toolbars, enter a name for the toolbar, select the windows in which you want
the toolbar to appear, and click Customize.
E Select an item in the Categories list to display available tools in that category.
E Drag and drop the tools you want onto the toolbar displayed in the dialog box.
E To remove a tool from the toolbar, drag it anywhere off the toolbar displayed in the
dialog box.
To create a custom tool to open a file, to run a command syntax file, or to run a script:
E Click New Tool in the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

590
Chapter 44
E Enter a descriptive label for the tool.
E Select the action you want for the tool (open a file, run a command syntax file, or
run a script).
E Click Browse to select a file or application to associate with the tool.
New tools are displayed in the User-Defined category, which also contains
user-defined menu items.
Toolbar Properties
Use Toolbar Properties to select the window types in which you want the selected
toolbar to appear. This dialog box is also used for creating names for new toolbars.
Figure 44-3
Toolbar Properties dialog box
To Set Toolbar Properties

View
Toolbars...
E For existing toolbars, click Customize, and then click Properties in the Customize
Toolbar dialog box.
591
E For new toolbars, click New Tool.
E Select the window types in which you want the toolbar to appear. For new toolbars,
also enter a toolbar name.
Customize Toolbar
Use the Customize Toolbar dialog box to customize existing toolbars and create new
toolbars. Toolbars can contain any of the available tools, including tools for all
menu actions. They can also contain custom tools that launch other applications, run
command syntax files, or run script files.
Figure 44-4
Customize Toolbar dialog box
Create New Tool

Use the Create New Tool dialog box to create custom tools to launch other
applications, run command syntax files, and run script files.
592
Chapter 44
Figure 44-5
Create New Tool dialog box
Toolbar Bitmap Editor

Use the Bitmap Editor to create custom icons for toolbar buttons. This is particularly
useful for custom tools you create to run scripts, syntax, and other applications.
593
Figure 44-6
Bitmap Editor
To Edit Toolbar Bitmaps

View
Toolbars...
E Select the toolbar you want to customize and click Customize.
E Click the tool with the bitmap icon you want to edit on the example toolbar.
E Click Edit Tool.
E Use the toolbox and the color palette to modify the bitmap or create a new bitmap icon.
Chapter
45
Production Facility
The Production Facility provides the ability to run the program in an automated
fashion. The program runs unattended and terminates after executing the last
command, so you can perform other tasks while it runs. Production mode is useful if
you often run the same set of time-consuming analyses, such as weekly reports.
The Production Facility uses command syntax files to tell the program what to do.
A command syntax file is a simple text file containing command syntax. You can use
any text editor to create the file. You can also generate command syntax by pasting
dialog box selections into a syntax window or by editing the journal file.
After you create syntax files and include them in a production job, you can view
and edit them from the Production Facility.
Figure 45-1
Production Facility
595
596
Chapter 45
Production job results. Each production run creates an output file with the same
name as the production job and the extension .spo. For example, a production job
file named prodjob.spp creates an output file named prodjob.spo. The output file
is a Viewer document.
Output Type. Viewer output produces pivot tables and high-resolution, interactive
charts. Draft Viewer output produces text output and metafile pictures of charts.
Text output can be edited in the Draft Viewer, but charts cannot be edited in the
Draft Viewer.
Using the Production Facility

E Create a command syntax file.
E Start the Production Facility, available on the Start menu.
E Specify the syntax files that you want to use in the production job. Click Add to
select the syntax files.
E Save the production job file.
E Run the production job file. Click the Run button on the toolbar, or from the menus
choose:
Run
Production Job
Syntax Rules for the Production Facility

Syntax rules for command syntax files used in the Production Facility are the same
as the rules for Include files:
Each command must begin in the first column of a new line.
Continuation lines must be indented at least one space.
The period at the end of the command is optional.
If you generate command syntax by pasting dialog box choices into a syntax window,
the format of the commands is suitable for the Production Facility.
597
Production Facility
UNC path names. Relative path specifications for data files are relative to the current
server in distributed analysis mode, not relative to your local computer. If you have
network access to the remote server version of SPSS, we recommend that you use
UNC (universal naming convention) path names to specify the location of data files in
your command syntax files, as in:
GET FILE = '\\hqdev01\public\july\sales.sav'.
Figure 45-2
Command syntax pasted from dialog box selections
Export Options
Export Options saves pivot tables and text output in HTML, text, Word/RTF, and
Excel format, and it saves charts in a variety of common formats used by other
applications.
598
Chapter 45
Figure 45-3
Export Options dialog box
Export
This drop-down list specifies what you want to export.

Output Document. Exports any combination of pivot tables, text output, and charts.
For HTML and text formats, charts are exported in the currently selected chart
export format. For HTML document format, charts are embedded by reference,
and you should export charts in a suitable format for inclusion in HTML
documents. For text document format, a line is inserted in the text file for each
chart, indicating the filename of the exported chart.
For Word/RTF format, charts are exported in Windows metafile format and
embedded in the Word document.
Charts are not included in Excel documents.
Output Document (No Charts). Exports pivot tables and text output. Any charts in
the Viewer are ignored.
Charts Only. Exports charts only. For HTML and text documents, export formats
include: Windows metafile (WMF), Windows bitmap (BMP), encapsulated PostScript
(EPS), JPEG, TIFF, PNG, and Macintosh PICT. For Word/RTF documents, charts are
always exported in Windows metafile format.
599
Production Facility
Export Format
For output documents, the available options are HTML, text, Word/RTF, and Excel;
for HTML and text formats, charts are exported in the currently selected chart format.
For Charts Only, select a chart export format from the drop-down list. For output
documents, pivot tables and text are exported in the following manner:
HTML file (*.htm). Pivot tables are exported as HTML tables. Text output is
exported as preformatted HTML.
Text file (*.txt). Pivot tables can be exported in tab-separated or space-separated
format. All text output is exported in space-separated format.
Excel file (*.xls). Pivot table rows, columns, and cells are exported as Excel rows,
columns, and cells, with all formatting attributes—for example, cell borders, font
styles, background colors, etc. Text output is exported with all font attributes.
Each line in the text output is a row in the Excel file, with the entire contents
of the line contained in a single cell.
Word/RTF file (*.doc). Pivot tables are exported as Word tables with all formatting
attributes—for example, cell borders, font styles, background colors, etc. Text
output is exported as formatted RTF. Text output in SPSS is always displayed in
a fixed-pitch font and is exported with the same font attributes. A fixed-pitch
(monospaced) font is required for proper alignment of space-separated text
output.
Image Format
Image Format controls the export format for charts. Charts can be exported in the
following formats: Windows metafile (WMF), Windows bitmap (BMP), encapsulated
PostScript (EPS), JPEG, TIFF, CGM, PNG, or Macintosh PICT.
Exported chart names are based on the production job filename, a sequential
number, and the extension of the selected format. For example, if the production job
prodjob.spp exports charts in Windows metafile format, the chart names would be
prodjob1.wmf, prodjob2.wmf, prodjob3.wmf, and so on.
600
Chapter 45
Text and Image Options
Text export options (for example, tab-separated or space-separated) and chart export
options (for example, color settings, size, and resolution) are set in SPSS and cannot
be changed in the Production Facility. Use Export on the File menu in SPSS to
change text and chart export options.
Draft Viewer Export
The only Export option available for Draft Viewer output is to export the output in
simple text format. Charts for Draft Viewer output cannot be exported.
User Prompts
Macro symbols defined in a production job file and used in a command syntax file
simplify tasks such as running the same analysis for different data files or running the
same set of commands for different sets of variables. For example, you could define
the macro symbol @datfile to prompt you for a data filename each time you run a
production job that uses the string @datfile in place of a filename.
Figure 45-4
User Prompts dialog box
601
Production Facility
Macro Symbol. The macro name used in the command syntax file to invoke the
macro that prompts the user to enter information. The macro symbol name must
begin with an @.
Prompt. The descriptive label that is displayed when the production job prompts you
to enter information. For example, you could use the phrase “What data file do you
want to use?” to identify a field that requires a data filename.
Default. The value that the production job supplies by default if you don't enter a
different value. This value is displayed when the production job prompts you for
information. You can replace or modify the value at runtime.
Enclose Value in Quotes? Enter Y or Yes if you want the value enclosed in quotes.
Otherwise, leave the field blank or enter N or No. For example, you should enter Yes
for a filename specification because filename specifications should be enclosed in
quotes.
Figure 45-5
Macro prompts in a command syntax file
602
Chapter 45
Production Macro Prompting

The Production Facility prompts you for values whenever you run a production job
that contains defined macro symbols. You can replace or modify the default values
that are displayed. Those values are then substituted for the macro symbols in all
command syntax files associated with the production job.
Figure 45-6
Production macro prompting dialog box
Production Options
Production Options enable you to:
Specify a default text editor for syntax files accessed with the Edit button in
the main dialog box.
Run the production job as an invisible background process or display the results
it generates as the job runs.
Specify a remote server, domain name, user ID, and password for distributed
analysis (applicable only if you have network access to the server version of
SPSS). If you don't specify these settings, the default settings in the SPSS
Server Login dialog box are used. You can select only remote servers that you
have previously defined in the Add Server dialog box in SPSS (File menu,
Switch Server, Add).
603
Production Facility
Figure 45-7
Options dialog box
Changing Production Options

From the Production Facility menus choose:
Edit
Options...
Format Control for Production Jobs

There are a number of settings in SPSS that can help ensure the best format for
pivot tables created in production jobs:
TableLooks. By editing and saving TableLooks (Format menu in an activated pivot
table), you can control many pivot table attributes. You can specify font sizes and
styles, colors, and borders. To ensure that wide tables do not split across pages, select
Rescale wide table to fit page on the Table Properties General tab.
604
Chapter 45
Output labels. Output label options (Edit menu, Options, Output Labels tab) control
the display of variable and data value information in pivot tables. You can display
variable names and/or defined variable labels, actual data values and/or defined value
labels. Descriptive variable and value labels often make it easier to interpret your
results; however, long labels can be awkward in some tables.
Column width. Pivot table options (Edit menu, Options, Pivot Table tab) control the
default TableLook and the automatic adjustment of column widths in pivot tables.
Labels only adjusts the column width to the width of the column label. This
produces more compact tables, but data values wider than the label will not be
displayed (asterisks indicate values too wide to be displayed).
Labels and data adjusts the column width to whichever is larger, the column
label or the largest data value. This produces wider tables, but it ensures that
all values will be displayed.
Production jobs use the current TableLook and Options settings in effect. You can
set the TableLook and Options settings before running your production job, or you
can use SET commands in your syntax files to control them. Using SET commands
in syntax files enables you to use multiple TableLooks and Options settings in the
same job.
Creating a Custom Default TableLook

E Activate a pivot table (double-click anywhere in the table).

Format
TableLook...
E Select a TableLook from the list and click Edit Look.
E Adjust the table properties for the attributes that you want.
E Click Save Look or Save As to save the TableLook and click OK.

Edit
Options...
605
Production Facility
E Click the Pivot Tables tab.
E Select the TableLook from the list and click OK.
Setting Options for Production Jobs

Edit
Options...
E Select the options that you want.
E Click OK.
You can set the default TableLook, output label settings, and automatic column width
adjustment with Options. Options settings are saved with the program. When you
run a production job, the Options settings in effect the last time that you ran the
program are applied to the production job.
Controlling Pivot Table Format with Command Syntax

SET TLOOK. Controls the default TableLook for new pivot tables, as in:
SET TLOOK = 'c:\prodjobs\mytable.tlo'.
SET TVARS. Controls the display of variable names and labels in new pivot tables.
SET TVARS = LABELS displays variable labels.
SET TVARS = NAMES displays variable names.
SET TVARS = BOTH displays both variable names and labels.
SET ONUMBER. Controls the display of data values or value labels in new pivot tables.
SET ONUMBER = LABELS displays value labels.
SET ONUMBER = VALUES displays data values.
SET ONUMBER = BOTH displays data values and value labels.
SET TFIT. Controls automatic column width adjustment for new pivot tables.
606
Chapter 45
SET TFIT = LABELS adjusts column width to the width of the column label.
SET TFIT = BOTH adjusts column width to the width of the column label or the
largest data value, whichever is wider.
Running Production Jobs from a Command Line

Command line switches enable you to schedule production jobs to run at certain
times with scheduling utilities like the one available in Microsoft Plus!. You can run
production jobs from a command line with the following switches:
-r. Runs the production job. If the production job contains any user prompts, you must
supply the requested information before the production job will run.
-s. Runs the production job and suppresses any user prompts or alerts. The default
user prompt values are used automatically.
Distributed analysis. If you have network access to the server version of SPSS, you
can also use the following switches to run the Production Facility in distributed
analysis mode:
-x. Name or IP address of the remote server.
-n. Port number.
-d. Domain name.
-u. User ID for remote server access.
-p. Password for remote server access.
If you specify any of the command lines switches for distributed analysis, you must
specify all of the distributed analysis command line switches (-x, -n, -d, -u, and -p).
You should provide the full path for both the Production Facility (spssprod.exe) and
the production job, and both should be enclosed in quotes, as in:
"c:\program files\spss\spssprod.exe" "c:\spss\datajobs\prodjob.spp" -s -r

607
Production Facility
For command line switches that require additional specifications, the switch must
be followed by an equals sign followed immediately by the specification. If the
specification contains spaces (such as a two-word server name), enclose the value in
quotes or apostrophes, as in:
-x="HAL 9000" -u="secret word"
Default server. If you have network access to the server version of SPSS, the default
server and related information (if not specified in command line switches) is the
default server specified the SPSS Server Login dialog box. If no default is specified
there, the job runs in local mode.
If you want to run a production job in local mode but your local computer is not
your default server, specify null quoted strings for all of the distributed analysis
command line switches, as in:
"c:\program files\spss\spssprod.exe" "c:\spss\datajobs\prodjob.spp" -x="" -n="" -d="" -u="" -p=""
Publish to Web
Publish to Web exports output for publishing to SmartViewer Web Server. Tables
and reports published in SmartViewer can be viewed and manipulated over the Web,
in real time, using a standard browser.
Pivot tables are published as dynamic tables that can be manipulated over the
Web to obtain different views of the data.
Charts are published as JPEG or PNG graphic files.
Text output is published as preformatted HTML. (By default, most Web browsers
use a fixed-pitch font for preformatted text.)
Publish. Allows you to specify the output that you want to publish:
Output Document. Publishes the entire output document, including hidden or
collapsed items.
608
Chapter 45
Output Document (No Notes). Publishes everything but the Notes tables that are
automatically produced for each procedure.
Tables Only. Excludes charts. All pivot tables and all text tables are published.
Tables Only (No Notes). Excludes charts and Notes tables.
Charts Only. Publishes only the charts in the document.
Nothing. Turns off publishing to the Web. Since all settings are saved with the
production job (.spp file), results will be published every time that you run the
production job unless you select Nothing. This turns off publishing while still
generating other types of output (Viewer files, HTML files) specified in the
production job.
Publish Tables as. Controls how pivot tables are published:

Interactive. Tables are dynamic objects that can be manipulated over the Web
to obtain different views of the data.
Static. Tables are static and cannot be manipulated after publishing.
Configure. Opens the SmartViewer Web Server “Configure Automated Publishing”

page in a browser window. This is required when you create a new production job
to publish to the Web.
A user ID and password are also required to access the SmartViewer Web Server.
When you create a new production job to publish to the Web, you will be prompted
for your user ID and password. This information is stored in the production job in
encrypted format.
Note: Publish to Web is available only for sites with SmartViewer Web Server
installed and requires a plug-in to activate the publishing feature. Contact your
system administrator or Webmaster for instructions on downloading the plug-in. If
SmartViewer is unavailable at your site, use Export Output to save output in HTML
format.
SmartViewer Web Server Login

Publishing to SmartViewer Web Server requires a valid SmartViewer Web Server user
name (user ID) and password.
Contact your system administrator or Webmaster for more information.
Chapter
46
SPSS Scripting Facility
The scripting facility allows you to automate tasks, including:

Automatically customize output in the Viewer.
Open and save data files.
Display and manipulate dialog boxes.
Run data transformations and statistical procedures using command syntax.
Export charts as graphic files in a number of formats.
A number of scripts are included with the software, including autoscripts that run
automatically every time a specific type of output is produced. You can use these
scripts as they are or you can customize them to your needs. If you want to create
your own scripts, you can begin by choosing from a number of starter scripts.
To Run a Script
Utilities
Run Script...
609
610
Chapter 46
Figure 46-1
Run Script dialog box
E Select the Scripts folder.
E Select the script you want.
For more information, see “Customizing Menus and Toolbars” in Chapter 44 on

page 587.
Scripts Included with SPSS

The following scripts are included with the program:
Analyze held out cases. Repeats a Factor or Discriminant analysis using cases not
selected in a previous analysis. A Notes table produced by a previous run of Factor or
Discriminant must be selected before running the script.
Change significance to p. Change Sig. to p= in the column labels of any pivot table.
The table must be selected before running the script.
Clean navigator. Delete all Notes tables from an output document. The document must
be open in the designated Viewer window before running the script.
611
Frequencies footnote. Insert statistics displayed in a Frequencies Statistics table as

footnotes in the corresponding frequency table for each variable. The Frequencies
Statistics table must be selected before running the script.
Make totals bold. Apply the bold format and blue color to any row, column, or layer of
data labeled Total in a pivot table. The table must be selected before running the script.
Means report. Extract information from a Means table and write results to several
output ASCII files. The Means table must be selected before running the script.
Remove labels. Delete all row and column labels from the selected pivot table. The
table must be selected before running the script.
Rerun syntax from note. Resubmit the command found in the selected Notes table
using the active data file. If no data file is open, the script attempts to read the data
file used originally. The Notes table must be selected before running the script.
Rsquare max. In a Regression Model Summary table, apply the bold format and blue
color to the row corresponding to the model that maximizes adjusted R squared. The
Model Summary table must be selected before running the script.
For more information, see “Options” in Chapter 43 on page 567.

Note: This list may not be complete.
Autoscripts
Autoscripts run automatically when triggered by the creation of a specific piece of
output by a given procedure. For example, there is an autoscript that automatically
removes the upper diagonal and highlights correlation coefficients below a certain
significance whenever a Correlations table is produced by the Bivariate Correlations
procedure.
The Scripts tab of the Options dialog box (Edit menu) displays the autoscripts that
are available on your system and allows you to enable or disable individual scripts.
612
Chapter 46
Figure 46-2
Scripts tab of Options dialog box
Autoscripts are specific to a given procedure and output type. An autoscript that
formats the ANOVA tables produced by One-Way ANOVA is not triggered by
ANOVA tables produced by other statistical procedures (although you could use
global procedures to create separate autoscripts for these other ANOVA tables that
shared much of the same code). However, you can have a separate autoscript for
each type of output produced by the same procedure. For example, Frequencies
produces both a frequency table and a table of statistics, and you can have a different
autoscript for each.
For more information, see “Options” in Chapter 43 on page 567.
Creating and Editing Scripts

You can customize many of the scripts included with the software for your specific
needs. For example, there is a script that removes all Notes tables from the designated
output document. You can easily modify this script to remove output items of any
type and label you want.
613
Figure 46-3
Modifying a script in the script window
If you prefer to create your own scripts, you can begin by choosing from a number
of starter scripts.
To Edit a Script
File
Open
Script...
614
Chapter 46
Figure 46-4
Opening a script file
E Select the Scripts folder.
E Under Files of Type, select SPSS Script (*.sbs).
E Select the script you want.
If you open more than one script, each opens in its own window.
Script Window
The script window is a fully featured programming environment that uses the Sax
BASIC language and includes a dialog box editor, object browser, debugging features,
and context-sensitive Help.
615
Figure 46-5
Script window
As you move the cursor, the name of the current procedure is displayed at the top
of the window.
Terms colored blue are reserved words in BASIC (for example Sub, End Sub,
and Dim). You can access context-sensitive Help on these terms by clicking
them and pressing F1.
Terms colored magenta are objects, properties, or methods. You can also click
these terms and press F1 for Help, but only where they appear in valid statements
and are colored magenta. (Clicking the name of an object in a comment will not
work because it brings up Help on the Sax BASIC language rather than on
SPSS objects.)
616
Chapter 46
Comments are displayed in green.

Press F2 at any time to display the object browser, which displays objects,
properties, and methods.
Script Editor Properties (Script Window)

Code elements in the script window are color-coded to make them easier to
distinguish. By default, comments are green, Sax BASIC terms are blue, and names
of valid objects, properties, and methods are magenta. You can specify different
colors for these elements and change the size and font for all text.
To Set Script Editor Properties

Script
Editor Properties
Figure 46-6
Editor Properties dialog box
E To change the color of a code element type, select the element and choose a color
from the drop-down palette.
617
Starter Scripts
When you create a new script, you can begin by choosing from a number of starter
scripts.
Figure 46-7
Use Starter Script dialog box
Each starter script supplies code for one or more common procedures and is
commented with hints on how to customize the script to your particular needs.
Delete by label. Delete rows or columns in a pivot table based on the contents of the
RowLabels or ColumnLabels. In order for this script to work, the Hide empty rows and
columns option must be selected in the Table Properties dialog box.
Delete navigator items. Delete items from the Viewer based on a number of different
criteria.
Footnote. Reformat a pivot table footnote, change the text in a footnote, or add a
footnote.
Reformat by labels. Reformat a pivot table based upon the row, column, or layer labels.
Reformat by value. Reformat a pivot table based upon the value of data cells or a
combination of data cells and labels.
Reformat misc pivot. Reformat or change the text in a pivot table title, corner text, or
caption.
618
Chapter 46
In addition, you can use any of the other available scripts as starter scripts, although
they may not be as easy to customize. Just open the script and save it with a different
filename.
Creating a Script
New
Script
E Select a starter script if you want to begin with one.
E If you do not want to use a starter script, click Cancel.
Creating Autoscripts
You can create an autoscript by starting with the output object that you want to serve
as the trigger. For example, to create an autoscript that runs whenever a frequency
table is produced, create a frequency table in the usual manner and single-click the
table in the Viewer to select it. You can then right-click or use the Utilities menu to
create a new autoscript triggered whenever that type of table is produced.
Figure 46-8
Creating a new autoscript
619
By default, each autoscript you create is added to the current autoscript file
(autscript.sbs) as a new procedure. The name of the procedure references the event
that serves as the trigger. For example, if you create an autoscript triggered whenever
Explore creates a Descriptives table, the name of the autoscript subroutine would
be Explore_Table_Descriptives_Create.
Figure 46-9
New autoscript procedure displayed in script window
This makes autoscripts easier to develop because you do not need to write code to
get the object you want to operate on, but it requires that autoscripts are specific to a
given piece of output and statistical procedure.
To Create an Autoscript
E Select the object you want to serve as a trigger in the Viewer.

Utilities
Create/Edit Autoscript
If no autoscript exists for the selected object, a new autoscript is created. If an

autoscript already exists, the existing script is displayed.
E Type the code.
E From the Edit menu, choose Options to enable or disable the autoscript.
620
Chapter 46
Events that Trigger Autoscripts

The name of the autoscript procedure references the event that serves as the trigger.
The following events can trigger autoscripts:
Creation of pivot table. The name of the procedure references both the table type and
the procedure that created it—for example, Correlations_Table_Correlations_Create.
Figure 46-10
Autoscript procedure for Correlations table
Creation of title. Referenced to the statistical procedure that created it:

Correlations_Title_Create.
Creation of notes. Referenced to the procedure that created it:

Correlations_Notes_Create.
Creation of warnings. Referenced by the procedure that created it.
You can also use a script to trigger an autoscript indirectly. For example, you could
write a script that invokes the Correlations procedure, which in turn triggers the
autoscript registered to the resulting Correlations table.
621
Autoscript File
All autoscripts are saved in a single file (unlike other scripts, each of which is saved
in a separate file). Any new autoscripts you create are also added to this file. The
name of the current autoscript file is displayed in the Scripts tab of the Options
dialog box (Edit menu).
Figure 46-11
Autoscript subroutines displayed in Options dialog box
The Options dialog box also displays all of the autoscripts in the currently selected
autoscript file, allowing you to enable and disable individual scripts.
The default autoscript file is autscript.sbs. You can specify a different autoscript
file, but only one can be active at any one time.
622
Chapter 46
How Scripts Work

Scripts work by manipulating objects using properties and methods. For example,
pivot tables are a class of objects. With objects of this class, you can use the
SelectTable method to select all of the elements in the table, and you can use the
TextColor property to change the color of selected text. Each object class has specific
properties and methods associated with it. The collection of all SPSS object classes
(or types) is called the SPSS type library.
Figure 46-12
Tree view of object hierarchy
Using objects is a two-step process. First, you create a reference to the object (called
getting the object). Then, you use properties and methods to do something. You
get objects by navigating the hierarchy of objects, at each step using properties or
methods of objects higher in the hierarchy to get at the objects beneath. For example,
623
to get a pivot table object, you have to first get the output document that contains the
pivot table and then get the items in that output document.
Each object that you get is stored in a variable. (Remember that all you are really
storing in the variable is a reference to the object.) One of the first steps in creating a
script is often to declare variables for the objects that you need.
Tip: It is difficult to understand how scripts work if you do not understand how
the program works. Before writing a script, use the mouse to perform the task
several times as you normally would. At each step, consider what objects you are
manipulating and what properties of each object you are changing.
Variable Declarations (Scripting)

Although not always required, it is a good idea to declare all variables before using
them. This is most often done using Dim declaration statements:
Dim objOutputDoc As ISpssOutputDoc

Dim objPivotTable As PivotTable
Dim intType As Integer
Dim strLabel As String
Each declaration specifies the variable name and type. For example, the first
declaration above creates an object variable named objOutputDoc and assigns this
variable to the ISpssOutputDoc object class. The variable does not yet have a value
because it has not been set to a particular output document. All the statement does
is declare that the variable exists. (This process has been referred to as “renaming
the objects you want to use.”)
Variable naming conventions. By convention, the name of each variable indicates its
type. Object variable names begin with obj, integer variables begin with int, and string
variables begin with str. These are only conventions—you can name your variables
anything you want—but following them makes it much easier to understand your
code.
SPSS object classes. ISpssOutputDoc and PivotTable are names of SPSS object
classes. Each class represents a type of object that the program can create, such as
an output document or pivot table. Each object class has specific properties and
624
Chapter 46
methods associated with it. The collection of all SPSS object classes (or types)
is referred to as the SPSS type library.
Table of Object Classes and Naming Conventions

The following variable names are used in the sample scripts included with the
program and are recommended for all scripts. Notice that with the exception of pivot
tables, object classes have names beginning with ISpss.
Object Type or Class Variable Name
SPSS application IspssApp objSpssApp—variable is global
and does not require declaration
SPSS options ISpssOptions objSpssOptions
SPSS file information ISpssInfo objSpssInfo
Documents ISpssDocuments objDocuments
Data document ISpssDataDoc objDataDoc
Syntax document ISpssSyntaxDoc objSyntaxDoc
Viewer document ISpssOutputDoc objOutputDoc
Print options ISpssPrintOptions objPrintOptions
Output items collection ISpssItems objOutputItems
Output item ISpssItem objOutputItem
Chart ISpssChart objSPSSChart
Text ISpssRtf objSPSSText
Pivot table PivotTable objPivotTable
Footnotes ISpssFootnotes objFootnotes
Data cells ISpssDataCells objDataCells
Layer labels ISpssLayerLabels objLayerLabels
Column labels ISpssLabels objColumnLabels
Row labels ISpssLabels objRowLabels
Pivot manager ISpssPivotMgr objPivotMgr
Dimension ISpssDimension objDimension
625
Getting SPSS Automation Objects (Scripting)

To get an object means to create a reference to the object so that you can use
properties and methods to do something. Each object reference that you get is stored
in a variable. To get an object, first declare an object variable of the appropriate
class, then set the variable to the specific object. For example, to get the designated
output document:
Dim objOutputDoc As ISpssOutputDoc

Set objOutputDoc = objSpssApp.GetDesignatedOutputDoc
you use properties and methods of objects higher in the object hierarchy to get at the
objects beneath. The second statement above gets the designated output document
using GetDesignatedOutputDoc, a method associated with the application object,
which is the highest-level object. Similarly, to get a pivot table object, you first get
the output document that contains the pivot table, and then get the collection of
items in that output document, and so on.
Example: Getting an Output Object
This script gets the third output item in the designated output document and activates
it. If that item is not an OLE object, the script produces an error.
See below for a another example that activates the first pivot table in the designated
output document.
Sub Main
Dim objOutputDoc As ISpssOutputDoc'declare object variables

Dim objOutputItems As ISpssItems
Dim objOutputItem As ISpssItem
Set objOutputDoc = objSpssApp.GetDesignatedOutputDoc'get reference to designated output doc

Set objOutputItems = objOutputDoc.Items() 'get collection of items in doc
Set objOutputItem = objOutputItems.GetItem(2) 'get third output item
'(item numbers start at 0 so "2" gets third)
objOutputItem.Activate 'activate output item

626
Chapter 46
End sub
Example: Getting the First Pivot Table
This script gets the first pivot table in the designated output document and activates it.
Sub Main
Dim objOutputDoc As ISpssOutputDoc 'declare object variables

Dim objOutputItems As ISpssItems
Dim objOutputItem As ISpssItem
Dim objPivotTable As PivotTable
Set objOutputDoc = objSpssApp.GetDesignatedOutputDoc'get reference to designated output doc

Set objOutputItems = objOutputDoc.Items()'get collection of items in doc
Dim intItemCount As Integer'number of output items

Dim intItemType As Integer'type of item (defined by SpssType property)
intItemCount = objOutputItems.Count()'get number of output items

For index = 0 To intItemCount'loop through output items
Set objOutputItem = objOutputItems.GetItem(index)'get current item
intItemType = objOutputItem.SPSSType()'get type of current item
If intItemType = SPSSPivot Then
Set objPivotTable = objOutputItem.Activate()'if item is a pivot table, activate it
Exit For
End If
Next index
End sub
Examples are also available in the online Help. You can try them yourself by pasting
the code from Help into the script window.
627
Properties and Methods (Scripting)

Like real world objects, OLE automation objects have features and uses. In
programming terminology, the features are referred to as properties, and the uses are
referred to as methods. Each object class has specific methods and properties that
determine what you can do with that object.
Object Property Method
Pencil (real world) Hardness Write
Color Erase
Pivot table (SPSS) TextFont SelectTable
DataCellWidths ClearSelection
CaptionText HideFootnotes
Example: Using Properties (Scripting)
Properties set or return attributes of objects, such as color or cell width. When a
property appears to the left side of an equals sign, you are writing to it. For example,
to set the caption for an activated pivot table (objPivotTable) to "Anita's results":
objPivotTable.CaptionText = "Anita's results"
When a property appears on the right side, you are reading from it. For example, to
get the caption of the activated pivot table and save it in a variable:
strFontName = objPivotTable.CaptionText
Example: Using Methods (Scripting)
Methods perform actions on objects, such as selecting all the elements in a table:
objPivotTable.SelectTable
or removing a selection:
objPivotTable.ClearSelection
628
Chapter 46
Some methods return another object. Such methods are extremely important for
navigating the object hierarchy. For example, the GetDesignatedOutputDoc method
returns the designated output document, allowing you to access the items in that
output document:
Set objOutputDoc = objSpssApp.GetDesignatedOutputDoc

Set objItems = objOutputDoc.Items
Object Browser
The object browser displays all object classes and the methods and properties
associated with each. You can also access Help on individual properties and methods
and paste selected properties and methods into your script.
Figure 46-13
Object browser
Using the Object Browser

E From the script window menus choose:
Debug
Object Browser...
629
E Select an object class from the Data Type list to display the methods and properties
for that class.
E Select properties and methods for context-sensitive Help or to paste them into your
script.
New Procedure (Scripting)

A procedure is a named sequence of statements that are executed as a unit. Organizing
code in procedures makes it easier to manage and reuse pieces of code. Scripts must
have at least one procedure (the Main subroutine) and often they have several. The
Main procedure may contain few statements, aside from calls to subroutines that
do most of the work.
Figure 46-14
New Procedure dialog box
Procedures can be subroutines or functions. A procedure begins with a statement

that specifies the type of procedure and the name (for example, Sub Main or Function
DialogMonitor( )) and concludes with the appropriate End statement (End Sub or
End Function).
As you scroll through the script window, the name of the current procedure is
displayed at the top of the script window. Within a script, you can call any procedure
as many times as you want. You can also call any procedure in the global script file,
which makes it possible to share procedures between scripts.
630
Chapter 46
To Add a New Procedure in a Script

Script
New Procedure...
E Type a name for the procedure.
E Select Subroutine or Function.
Alternatively, you can create a new procedure by typing the statements that define the
procedure directly in the script.
Global Procedures (Scripting)

If you have a procedure or function that you want to use in a number of different
scripts, you can add it to the global script file. Procedures in the global script file can
be called by all other scripts.
631
Figure 46-15
Global script file
The default global script file is global.sbs. You can freely add procedures to this file.
You can also specify a different global file on the Scripts tab in the Options dialog
box (Edit menu), but only one file can be active as the global file at any given time.
That means that if you create a new global file and specify it as the global file, the
procedures and functions in global.sbs are no longer available.
You can view the global script file in any script window (click the #2 tab on
the left side of the window just below the toolbar), but you can edit it in only one
window at a time.
Global procedures must be called by other script procedures. You cannot run a
global script directly from the Utilities menu or a script window.
632
Chapter 46
Adding a Description to a Script

You can add a description to be displayed in the Run Script and Use Starter Script
dialog boxes. Just add a comment on the first line of the script that starts with Begin
Description, followed by the desired comment (one or more lines), followed by End
Description. For example:
'Begin Description
'This script changes "Sig." to "p=" in the column labels of any pivot table.
'Requirement: The Pivot Table that you want to change must be selected.
'End Description
The description must be formatted as a comment (each line beginning with an

apostrophe).
Scripting Custom Dialog Boxes

There are two steps to implementing a custom dialog box: first create the dialog box
using the UserDialog Editor, and then create a dialog monitor function (DialogFunc)
that monitors the dialog box and defines its behavior.
The dialog box itself is defined by a Begin Dialog...End Dialog block. You do not
need to type this code directly-the UserDialog Editor provides an easy, graphical
way to define the dialog box.
Figure 46-16
Creating a dialog box in the UserDialog Editor
633
The Editor initially displays a blank dialog box form. You can add controls, such as
radio buttons and check boxes, by selecting the appropriate tool and dragging with
the mouse. (Hold the mouse over each tool for a description.) You can also drag the
sides and corners to resize the dialog box. After adding a control, right-click the
control to set properties for that control.
Dialog monitor function. To create the dialog monitor function, right-click the dialog
box form (make sure no control is selected on the form) and enter a name for the
function in the DialogFunc field. The statements that define the function are added
to your script, although you will have to edit the function manually to define the
behavior for each action.
When finished, click the Save and Exit icon (far right on the toolbar) to add the
code for the dialog box to your script.
To Create a Custom Dialog Box

E In the script window, click the cursor in the script where you want to insert the code
for the dialog box.

Script
Dialog Editor...
E Select tools from the palette and drag in the new dialog box form to add controls,
such as buttons and check boxes.
E Resize the dialog box by dragging the handles on the sides and corners.
E Right-click the form (with no control selected) and enter a name for the dialog
monitor function in the DialogFunc field.
E Click the Save and Exit icon (far right on the toolbar) when you are finished.
You have to edit your dialog monitor function manually to define the behavior of the
dialog box.
634
Chapter 46
Dialog Monitor Functions (Scripting)

A dialog monitor function defines the behavior of a dialog box for each of a number
of specified cases. The function takes the following (generic) form:
Function DialogFunc(strDlgItem as String, intAction as Integer, intSuppValue as Integer)

Select Case intAction
Case 1 ' dialog box initialization
... 'statements to execute when dialog box is initialized
Case 2 ' value changing or button pressed
... 'statements...
Case 3 ' TextBox or ComboBox text changed ...
Case 4 ' focus changed ...
Case 5 ' idle ...
End Select
End Function
Parameters. The function must be able to pass three parameters: one string
(strDlgItem) and two integers (intAction and intSuppValue). The parameters are values
passed between the function and the dialog box, depending on what action is taken.
For example, when a user clicks a control in the dialog box, the name of the
control is passed to the function as strDlgItem (the field name is specified in the dialog
box definition). The second parameter (intAction) is a numeric value that indicates
what action took place in the dialog box. The third parameter is used for additional
information in some cases. You must include all three parameters in the function
definition even if you do not use all of them.
Select Case intAction. The value of intAction indicates what action took place in the
dialog box. For example, when the dialog box initializes, intAction = 1. If the user
presses a button, intAction changes to 2, and so on. There are five possible actions, and
you can specify statements that execute for each action as indicated below. You do
not need to specify all five possible cases-only the ones that apply. For example, if
you do not want any statements to execute on initialization, omit Case 1.
Case intAction = 1. Specify statements to execute when the dialog box is
initialized. For example, you could disable one or more controls or add a beep.
The string strDlgItem is a null string; intSuppValue is 0.
635
Case 2. Executes when a button is pushed or when a value changes in a CheckBox,

DropListBox, ListBox or OptionGroup control. If a button is pushed, strDlgItem is
the button, intSuppValue is meaningless, and you must set DialogFunc = True to
prevent the dialog from closing. If a value changes, strDlgItem is the item whose
value has changed, and intSuppValue is the new value.
Case 3. Executes when a value changes in a TextBox or ComboBox control.
The string strDlgItem is the control whose text changed and is losing focus;
intSuppValue is the number of characters.
Case 4. Executes when the focus changes in the dialog box. The string strDlgItem
is gaining focus, and intSuppValue is the item that is losing focus (the first item
is 0, second is 1, and so on).
Case 5. Idle processing. The string strDlgItem is a null string; intSuppValue is 0.
Set DialogFunc = True to continue receiving idle actions.
For more information, see the examples and the DialogFunc prototype in the Sax
BASIC Language Reference Help file.
Example: Scripting a Simple Dialog Box
This script creates a simple dialog box that opens a data file. See related sections for
explanations of the BuildDialog subroutine and dialog monitor function.
Figure 46-17
Open Data File dialog box created by script
Sub Main
Call BuildDialog
End Sub
'define dialog box

Sub BuildDialog
Begin Dialog UserDialog 580,70,"Open Data File",.DialogFunc
Text 40,7,280,21,"Data file to open:",.txtDialogTitle
TextBox 40,28,340,21,.txtFilename
636
Chapter 46
OKButton 470,7,100,21,.cmdOK
CancelButton 470,35,100,21,.cmdCancel
End Dialog
Dim dlg As UserDialog
Dialog dlg
End Sub
'define function that determines behavior of dialog box

Function DialogFunc(strDlgItem As String, intAction As Integer, intSuppValue As Integer) As Boolean
Select Case intAction
Case 1' beep when dialog is initialized
Beep
Case 2' value changing or button pressed
Select Case strDlgItem
Case "cmdOK"'if user clicks OK, open data file with specified filename
strFilename = DlgText("txtFilename")
Call OpenDataFile(strFilename)
DialogFunc = False
Case "cmdCancel"'If user clicks Cancel, close dialog
DialogFunc = False
End Select
End Select
End Function
Sub OpenDataFile(strFilename As Variant)'Open data file with specified filename

Dim objDataDoc As ISpssDataDoc
Set objDataDoc = objSpssApp.OpenDataDoc(strFilename)
End Sub
Examples are also available in the online Help. You can try them yourself by pasting
the code from Help into the script window.
Debugging Scripts
The Debug menu allows you to step through your code, executing one line or
subroutine at a time and viewing the result. You can also insert a break point in the
script to pause the execution at the line that contains the break point.
637
To debug an autoscript, open the autoscript file in a script window, insert break
points in the procedure that you want to debug, and then run the statistical procedure
that triggers the autoscript.
Step Into. Execute the current line. If the current line is a subroutine or function call,
stop on the first line of that subroutine or function.
Step Over. Execute to the next line. If the current line is a subroutine or function call,
execute the subroutine or function completely.
Step Out. Step out of the current subroutine or function call.
Step to Cursor. Execute to the current line.
Toggle Break. Insert or remove a break point. The script pauses at the break point,
and the debugging pane is displayed.
Quick Watch. Display the value of the current expression.
Add Watch. Add the current expression to the watch window.
Object Browser. Display the object browser.
Set Next Statement. Set the next statement to be executed. Only statements in the
current subroutine/function can be selected.
Show Next Statement. Display the next statement to be executed.
To Step through a Script

E From the Debug menu, choose any of the Step options to execute code, one line
or subroutine at a time.
The Immediate, Watch, Stack, and Loaded tabs are displayed in the script window,
along with the debugging toolbar.
E Use the toolbar (or hot keys) to continue stepping through the script.
E Alternatively, select Toggle Break to insert a break point at the current line.
The script pauses at the break point.

638
Chapter 46
Debugging Pane (Scripting)

When you step through code, the Immediate, Watch, Stack, and Loaded tabs are
displayed.
Figure 46-18
Debugging pane displayed in script window
Immediate tab. Click the name of any variable and click the eyeglass icon to display
the current value of the variable. You can also evaluate an expression, assign a
variable, or call a subroutine.
Type ?expr and press Enter to show the value of expr.
Type var = expr and press Enter to change the value of var.
Type subname args and press Enter to call a subroutine or built-in instruction.
Type Trace and press Enter to toggle trace mode. Trace mode prints each
statement in the immediate window when a script is running.
639
Watch tab. To display a variable, function, or expression, click it and choose Add
Watch from the Debug menu. Displayed values are updated each time execution
pauses. You can edit the expression to the left of ->. Press Enter to update all the
values immediately. Press Ctrl-Y to delete the line.
Stack tab. Displays the lines that called the current statement. The first line is the
current statement, the second line is the one that called the first, and so on. Click any
line to highlight that line in the edit window.
Loaded tab. List the currently active scripts. Click a line to view that script.
Script Files and Syntax Files

Syntax files (*.sps) are not the same as script files (*.sbs). Syntax files have
commands written in the command language that allows you to run statistical
procedures and data transformations. While scripts allow you to manipulate output
and automate other tasks that you normally perform using the graphical interface of
menus and dialog boxes, the command language provides an alternative method for
communicating directly with the program's back end, the part of the system that
handles statistical computations and data transformations.
You can combine scripts and syntax files for even greater flexibility, by running
a script from within command syntax, or by embedding command syntax within
a script.
Running Command Syntax from a Script

You can run command syntax from within an automation script using the
ExecuteCommands method. Command syntax allows you to run data transformations
and statistical procedures and to produce charts. Much of this functionality cannot be
automated directly from command scripts.
The easiest way to build a command syntax file is to make selections in dialog
boxes and paste the syntax for the selections into the script window.
640
Chapter 46
Figure 46-19
Pasting command syntax into a script
When you open dialog boxes using the script window menus, the Paste button pastes
all of the code needed to run commands from within a script.
Note: You must use the script window menus to open the dialog box; otherwise,
commands will be pasted to a syntax window rather than the scripting window.
Pasting SPSS Command Syntax into a Script
E From the script window menus, choose commands from the Statistics, Graphs, and
Utilities menus to open dialog boxes.
E Make selections in the dialog box.

641
E Click Paste.
Note: You must use the script window menus to open the dialog box; otherwise,
commands will be pasted to a syntax window rather than the scripting window.
Running a Script from Command Syntax

You can use the SCRIPT command to run a script from within command syntax.
Specify the name of the script you want to run, with the filename enclosed in quotes,
as follows:
SCRIPT 'C:\PROGRAM FILES\SPSS\CLEAN NAVIGATOR.SBS'.

Chapter
47
Output Management System
The Output Management System provides the ability to automatically write selected
categories of output to different output files in different formats. Formats include:
SPSS data file format (SAV). Output that would be displayed in pivot tables in the
Viewer can be written out in the form of an SPSS data file, making it possible to
use output as input for subsequent commands.
XML. Tables, text output, and even many charts can be written out in XML format.
HTML. Tables and text output can be written out in HTML format.
Text. Tables and text output can be written out as tab-delimited or space-separated
text.
Output management is currently only available with command syntax using the OMS
command. For a detailed discussion of the OMS command, see the Command Syntax
Reference (Help menu, Command Syntax Reference).
OMS Identifiers
The OMS Identifiers dialog box is designed to assist you in writing OMS command
syntax. You can use it to paste selected command and subtype identifiers into a
command syntax window.
643
644
Chapter 47
Figure 47-1
OMS Identifiers dialog box
With the OMS command, you can use the IF subcommand to specify output from
specific commands and/or table types that you want to route to various output
destinations (including the Viewer)—and you can use EXCEPTIF to exclude specific
output. For example:
OMS
/SELECT TABLES
/IF COMMANDS=['Crosstabs' 'Descriptives']
SUBTYPES=['Crosstabulation' 'Descriptive Statistics']
/DESTINATION FORMAT=OXML OUTFILE='C:\temp\temp.xml'.
This command will select crosstabulation and descriptive statistics tables from
subsequent CROSSTABS and DESCRIPTIVES commands and generate an XML file
that contains the contents of those tables.
Command Identifiers. Most—but not all—command identifiers are the same as

the command names. Like command names, they are not case-sensitive. You
specify command names with the COMMANDS keyword on the IF or EXCEPTIF
subcommands.
645
Subtype Identifiers. Subtypes are the different types of pivot tables that can be
produced. Some subtypes are only produced by one command; other subtypes can be
produced by multiple commands (although tables with the same subtype names in
different procedures may have different structures and contents). Both of the subtypes
specified in the above example can be produced by multiple commands, but since
we also specify the commands, output from any other commands that produce those
subtypes will not be selected.
Using the OMS Identifiers Dialog Box

Utilities
OMS Identifiers
E Select one or more command or subtype identifiers. Use ctrl-click to select multiple
identifiers in each list.
E Click Paste Commands and/or Paste Subtypes.

The list of available subtypes is based on the currently selected command(s). If
multiple commands are selected, the list of available subtypes is the union of
all subtypes available for any of the selected commands. If no commands are
selected, all subtypes are listed.
The identifiers are pasted into the designated command syntax window at the
current cursor location. If there are no open command syntax windows, a new
syntax window is automatically opened.
Each command and/or subtype identifier is enclosed in quotes when pasted since
OMS command syntax requires these quotes.
Identifier lists for the COMMANDS and SUBTYPES keywords must be enclosed in
brackets, as in:
/IF COMMANDS=['Crosstabs' 'Descriptives']

SUBTYPES=['Crosstabulation' 'Descriptive Statistics']
646
Chapter 47
Copying OMS Identifiers from the Viewer Outline

You can copy and paste OMS command and subtype identifiers from the Viewer
outline pane.
E Right-click the outline entry for the item in the outline pane.
E From the pop-up context menu, select Copy OMS Command Identifier or Copy OMS
Table Subtype.
This method differs from the OMS Identifiers dialog in one respect: The copied
identifier is not automatically pasted to a command syntax window. It is simply
copied to the clipboard, and you can then paste it anywhere you want. Since
command and subtype identifier values are identical to the corresponding command
and subtype attribute values in XML-format output (OXML), you might find this
copy/paste method useful if you write XSLT transformations.
Copying OMS Labels
Instead of identifiers, you can copy labels for use with the LABELS keyword. Labels
can be used to differentiate between multiple graphs or multiple tables of the same
type in which the outline text reflects some attribute of the particular output object
such as the variable names or labels. There are, however, a number of factors that
can affect the label text:
If split file processing is on, split file group identification may be appended
to the label.
Labels that include information about variables or values are affected by the
settings for display of variable names/labels and values/value labels in the outline
pane (Edit menu, Options, Output Labels tab).
Labels are affected by the current output language setting (Edit menu, Options,
General tab).
To copy OMS labels:
E Right-click the outline entry for the item in the outline pane.
E From the pop-up context menu, select Copy OMS Label.

647
As with command and subtype identifiers, the labels must be in quotes and the entire
list enclosed in square brackets, as in:
/IF LABELS=['Employment Category' 'Education Level']

Appendix
A
Database Access Administrator
The Database Access Administrator is a utility designed to simplify large or confusing

data sources for use with the Database Wizard. It allows users and administrators
to customize their data source in the following ways:
Create aliases for database tables and fields.
Create variable names for fields.
Hide extraneous tables and fields.
The Database Access Administrator does not actually change your database. Instead,
it generates files that hold all of your information, which act as database “views.”
You can use the Database Access Administrator to specify up to three different
views per database: Enterprise level, Department level, and Personal level. Both the
Database Access Administrator and the Database Wizard recognize these files by
the following names:
Enterprise level: dba01.inf
Department level: dba02.inf
Personal level: dba03.inf
Each file contains level-specific information about any number of data sources. For
example, your dba03.inf file could contain personal view information for a corporate
accounts database, your company's hourlog database, and a database that you use to
keep track of your CD collection.
When you open the Database Access Administrator, it will search your system's
path for these files and automatically display information for all three views of any
data source you have configured.
Inheritance and Priorities. Whenever you use the Database Wizard, it presents the
lowest-level view of your data source that it can find on your system's path, where the
levels are, from highest to lowest, Enterprise, Department, and Personal. Each level's
649
650
Appendix A
file holds information about all of your data sources for that level. For example,
your marketing department will have one file, dba02.inf, that contains the aliasing
information for all of the database views established for the marketing department.
Each person in the marketing department will have a file, dba03.inf, that contains
customized views of all of the databases that he or she uses.
In the Database Access Administrator, Aliases, Variable Names, and Hide Orders
are inherited from the top down.
Example. If the Regions table is hidden at the Enterprise level, it is invisible at
both the Department and Personal levels. This table would not be displayed in the
Database Wizard.
Example. The field JOBCAT in the Employee Sales table is not aliased at the
Enterprise level, but it is aliased as Job Categories at the Department level. It
appears as Job Categories at the Personal level. Additionally, if the Employee Sales
table is aliased as Employee Information at the Personal level, the original field
(EmployeeSales.JOBCAT) would appear in the Database Wizard as 'Employee
Information'.'Job Categories'.
To start the Database Access Administrator, run the file spssdbca.exe, which is
installed in your SPSS directory. For more information about the Database Access
Administrator, refer to its online Help.
Appendix
B
Customizing HTML Documents
You can automatically add customized HTML code to documents exported in HTML
format, including:
HTML document titles
Document type specification
Meta tags and script code (for example, JavaScript)
Text displayed before and after exported output
To Add Customized HTML Code to Exported Output Documents

E Open the file htmlfram.txt (located in the directory in which SPSS is installed) in
a text editor.
E Replace the comments in the “fields” on the lines between the double open brackets
(<<) with the text or HTML code you want to insert in your exported HTML
documents.
E Save the file as a text file.
Note: If you change the name or location of the text file, you have to modify the
system registry to use the file to customize your exported HTML output.
651
652
Appendix B
Content and Format of the Text File for Customized HTML

The HTML code that you want to add automatically to your HTML documents must
be specified in a simple text file that contains six fields, each delimited by two open
angle brackets on the preceding line (<<):
<<
Text or code that you want to insert at the top of the document before the <HTML>
specification (for example, comments that include document type specifications)
<<
Text used as the document title (displayed in the title bar)
<<
Meta tags or script code (for example, JavaScript code)
<<
HTML code that modifies the <BODY> tag (for example, code that specifies
background color)
<<
Text and/or HTML code that is inserted after the exported output (for example,
copyright notice)
<<
Text and/or HTML code that is inserted before the exported output (for example,
company name, logo, etc.)
To Use a Different File or Location for Custom HTML Code

If you change the name or location of htmlfram.txt, you must modify the system
registry to use the file in customized HTML output.
E From the Windows Start menu choose Run, type regedit, and click OK.
653
Customizing HTML Documents
E In the left pane of the Registry Editor, choose:

HHKEY_CURRENT_USER
Software
SPSS
SPSS for Windows
12.0
SPSSWIN
E In the right pane, double-click the string HTMLFormatFile.
E For Value data, enter the full path and name of the text file containing the custom
HTML specifications (for example, c:\myfiles\htmlstuf.txt).
Sample Text File for Customized HTML
<<
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN">
<<
NVI, Inc.
<<
<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="gizmos, gadgets, gimcracks">
<<
bgcolor="#FFFFFF"
<<
<H4 align=center>This page made possible by...
<br><br>
<IMG SRC="spss2.gif" align=center></H4>
<<
<h2 align=center>NVI Sales</h2>
<h3 align=center>Regional Data</h3>
Sample HTML Source for Customized HTML
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN">

<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>
654
Appendix B
NVI Sales, Inc.

</TITLE>
<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="gizmos, gadgets, gimcracks">
</HEAD>
<BODY bgcolor="#FFFFFF">
<h2 align=center>NVI Sales</h2>
<h3 align=center>Regional Data</h3>
[Exported output]
<H4 align=center>This page made possible by...

<br><br>
<IMG SRC="spss2.gif" align=center></H4>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Index
active window, 5 backward elimination, 396
ActiveX objects, 207 in Linear Regression, 396
adding group labels, 242 bar charts, 288
adjusted R-square, 402 in Frequencies, 288
in Linear Regression, 402 Bartlett's test of sphericity, 430
aggregating data, 162, 162, 163, 164 in Factor Analysis, 430
aggregate functions, 163 Bartlett factor scores, 435
variable names and labels, 164 beta coefficients, 402
alignment, 84, 201, 265, 570 in Linear Regression, 402
in cells, 265 Bivariate Correlations, 377, 379, 380, 381
in Data Editor, 84 assumptions, 377
output, 201, 570 correlation coefficients, 377
alpha coefficient, 527 missing values, 380
in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530 options, 380
alpha factoring, 431 significance levels, 377
analysis of variance, 326, 402, 407 statistics, 380
in Curve Estimation, 407 block distance, 389
in Linear Regression, 402 in Distances, 389
in Means, 326 Blom estimates, 142
in One-Way ANOVA, 349 BMP files, 210, 215, 217, 597
Anderson-Rubin factor scores, 435 exporting charts, 210, 215, 217, 597
Andrews' wave estimator, 301 Bonferroni, 353, 368
in Explore, 301 in GLM, 368
ANOVA, 326, 359, 360, 363 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
assumptions, 360 bookmarking pivot table views, 248
in GLM Univariate, 359 bookmarks, 248
in Means, 326 borders, 231, 258, 260
in One-Way ANOVA, 349 displaying hidden borders, 260
model, 363 Draft Viewer, 231
aspect ratio, 575 Box's M test, 418
automated production, 595 in Discriminant Analysis, 418
automation objects, 622, 624, 625, 627, 628 box-and-whiskers plots, 302
methods, 627 boxplots, 302
object browser, 628 comparing factor levels, 302
properties, 627 comparing variables, 302
types, 624 in Explore, 302
using in scripts, 622, 625, 628 break points, 636
variable-naming conventions, 624 in scripts, 636
autoscripts, 585, 618, 620 break variables, 162
autoscript file, 621 in Aggregate Data, 162
creating, 618 Brown-Forsythe statistic, 356
trigger events, 620 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
average absolute deviation (AAD), 543 buttons, 592
in Ratio Statistics, 543 editing toolbar bitmap icons, 592
655
656
Index
Cancel button, 8 templates, 555, 575

captions, 270 titles, 551
adding to a table, 270 Chebychev distance, 389
cases, 90, 92, 92, 153, 166, 168, 170, 171 in Distances, 389
finding in Data Editor, 92, 92 chi-square distance measure, 389
inserting new cases, 90 in Distances, 389
selecting subsets, 166, 168, 170 Chi-Square Test, 466, 466, 468, 469, 469, 470, 471
sorting, 153 assumptions, 466
weighing, 171 expected range, 469
casewise diagnostics, 402 expected values, 469
in Linear Regression, 402 missing values, 470
cell borders, 231 options, 470
Draft Viewer, 231 statistics, 470
cells in pivot tables, 250, 257, 261, 262, 264, 265, chi-square tests, 309, 309
266, 267, 269 Fisher's exact test, 309
alignment, 265 for independence, 309
fonts, 261 in Crosstabs, 309
formats, 257 likelihood-ratio, 309
hiding, 249 linear-by-linear association, 309
margins, 266 one-sample test, 466
modifying text, 269 Pearson, 309
outlines, 267 Yates' correction for continuity, 309
shading, 267 classification, 557
showing, 249 ROC Curve, 557
value formats, 264 cluster analysis, 449, 457, 461
widths, 262 efficiency, 461
centered moving average function, 149 Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 449
centering output, 201, 570 K-Means Cluster Analysis, 457
chart options, 575 cluster frequencies
charts, 199, 205, 206, 206, 208, 210, 407, 557, 575, in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 447
597 clustering
aspect ratio, 575 choosing a procedure, 437
case labels, 407 Cochran's statistic, 309
copying, 206 in Crosstabs, 309
copying into other applications, 206 coefficient of dispersion (COD), 543
creating, 545 in Ratio Statistics, 543
exporting, 210, 597 coefficient of variation (COV), 543
footnotes, 551 in Ratio Statistics, 543
hiding, 199 Cohen's kappa, 309
inserting in Viewer, 205 in Crosstabs, 309
missing values, 552 collinearity diagnostics, 402
modifying, 547 in Linear Regression, 402
overview, 545 colors in pivot tables, 258, 261, 267
pasting into other applications, 208 borders, 258
ROC Curve, 557 cell background, 267
subtitles, 551
657
Index
cell foreground, 267 confidence intervals, 301, 341, 356, 365, 373, 373,
font, 261 399, 402, 560
column format, 264 in Explore, 301
changing in pivot tables, 264 in GLM, 365, 373
column percentages, 313 in Independent-Samples T Test, 341
in Crosstabs, 313 in Linear Regression, 402
columns, 262, 269 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
changing width in pivot tables, 262 in ROC Curve, 560
selecting in pivot tables, 269 saving in Linear Regression, 399
column summary reports, 519 context-sensitive help, 244
column width, 84, 255, 262, 581 finding label definitions in pivot tables, 244
controlling default width, 581 contingency coefficient, 309
controlling maximum width, 255 in Crosstabs, 309
controlling width for wrapped text, 255 contingency tables, 305
in Data Editor, 84 continuation text, 260
pivot tables, 262 for pivot tables, 260
comma format, 78, 80 contrasts, 352, 365, 366
command language, 273 in GLM, 365, 366
command line switches, 606 in One-Way ANOVA, 352
Production Facility, 606 control variables, 308, 384
command syntax, 13, 273, 274, 275, 276, 278, 279, in Crosstabs, 308
280, 568, 570, 571, 587, 591, 596 in Partial Correlations, 384
adding to menus, 587 convergence, 431, 433, 462
installing command syntax reference, 13 in Factor Analysis, 431, 433
journal file, 278, 280, 568 in K-Means Cluster Analysis, 462
log, 570, 571 Cook's distance, 371, 399
output log, 276 in GLM, 371
pasting, 275 in Linear Regression, 399
Production Facility formatting, 605 copying, 201, 206
Production Facility rules, 596 charts, 206
running, 279 output, 201
running with toolbar buttons, 591 pivot tables, 206
syntax rules, 274 correlation matrix, 418, 423
comparing groups, 335 in Discriminant Analysis, 418
in OLAP Cubes, 335 in Factor Analysis, 423, 430
comparing variables, 335 correlations, 309, 377, 377, 383, 383, 386
in OLAP Cubes, 335 bivariate, 377
compound model, 411 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
in Curve Estimation, 411 in Crosstabs, 309
computing variables, 127, 129 in Partial Correlations, 383
computing new string variables, 129 partial, 383
concentration index, 543 zero-order, 386
in Ratio Statistics, 543 counting occurrences, 132
conditional transformations, 129
658
Index
covariance matrix, 371, 402, 418, 421 Data Editor, 73, 75, 84, 84, 86, 87, 87, 88, 88, 89,
in Discriminant Analysis, 418, 421 89, 90, 91, 91, 92, 92, 92, 93, 93, 93, 587
in GLM, 371 alignment, 84
in Linear Regression, 402 changing data type, 92
covariance ratio, 399 column width, 84
in Linear Regression, 399 data value restrictions, 88
Cramér's V, 309 Data view, 73
in Crosstabs, 309 defining variables, 75
Cronbach's alpha, 527 display options, 93
in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530 editing data, 88, 89, 89
Crosstabs, 171, 305, 306, 307, 308, 308, 309, 309, entering data, 86
309, 309, 309, 313, 314, 314 entering non-numeric data, 87
assumptions, 306 entering numeric data, 87
cell display, 313 filtered cases, 93
clustered bar charts, 309 finding cases, 92, 92
control variables, 308 inserting new cases, 90
formats, 314 inserting new variables, 91
fractional weights, 171 moving variables, 91
layers, 308 printing, 93
statistics, 309 sending data to other applications, 587
suppressing tables, 305 data entry, 86
crosstabulation, 305 data files, 19, 20, 48, 48, 48, 52, 52, 54, 66, 67, 68,
in Crosstabs, 305 154
cubic model, 411 adding comments, 562
in Curve Estimation, 411 dictionary information, 48, 48
cumulative sum function, 149 file information, 48, 48
currency formats, 583 flipping, 154
Curve Estimation, 407, 407, 407, 409, 411, 412 opening, 19, 20
analysis of variance, 407 protecting, 55
assumptions, 407 remote servers, 66, 67, 68
forecast, 412 saving, 48, 52, 52
including constant, 407 saving output as SPSS-format data files, 643
models, 411 saving subsets of variables, 54
saving predicted values, 412 transposing, 154
saving prediction intervals, 412 data transformations, 127, 129, 129, 130, 134, 135,
saving residuals, 412 137, 138, 140, 144, 145, 147, 582
time series analysis, 407 computing variables, 127
custom currency formats, 78, 583 conditional transformations, 129
custom models, 363 delaying execution, 582
in GLM, 363 functions, 130
ranking cases, 140
d, 309 recoding values, 134, 135, 137, 138, 144
in Crosstabs, 309 string variables, 129
data analysis, 11 time series, 145, 147
basic steps, 11
659
Index
data types, 78, 78, 80, 92, 583 in GLM Univariate, 373
changing, 92 in Ratio Statistics, 543
custom currency, 78, 583 in Summarize, 319
defining, 78 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 447
display formats, 80 designated window, 5
input formats, 80 detrended normal plots, 302
Data view, 73 in Explore, 302
date formats, 78, 80, 582 deviation contrasts, 365, 366
two-digit years, 582 in GLM, 365, 366
date variables, 145 DfBeta, 399
defining for time series data, 145 in Linear Regression, 399
dBASE files, 19, 22, 52, 52 DfFit, 399
opening, 19, 22 in Linear Regression, 399
saving, 52, 52 dialog boxes, 7, 7, 8, 9, 9, 9, 10, 563, 564, 568, 568,
debugging scripts, 636, 638 632, 634
break points, 636 controls, 8
debugging pane, 638 defining variable sets, 563
stepping through scripts, 636 displaying variable labels, 7, 568
Define Multiple Response Sets, 500, 501 displaying variable names, 7, 568
categories, 500 getting Help, 10
dichotomies, 500 optional specifications, 9
set labels, 500 reordering target lists, 565
set names, 500 scripting, 632, 634
defining variables, 75, 78, 81, 81, 83, 84, 84, 86, 86 selecting variables, 9
copying and pasting attributes, 84, 86 subdialog boxes, 9
data types, 78 using variable sets, 564
missing values, 83 variable display order, 568
templates, 84, 86 variable information, 9
value labels, 81 variables, 7
variable labels, 81 dictionary, 48, 48
deleted residuals, 371, 399 difference contrasts, 365, 366
in GLM, 371 in GLM, 365, 366
in Linear Regression, 399 difference function, 149
deleting multiple EXECUTES in syntax files, 280 differences between groups, 335
deleting output, 200 in OLAP Cubes, 335
dendrograms, 455 differences between variables, 335
in Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 455 in OLAP Cubes, 335
Descriptives, 291, 291, 292 direct oblimin rotation, 433
assumptions, 291 in Factor Analysis, 433
display order, 294 Discriminant Analysis, 413, 557
saving z scores, 291 analyzing held-out cases, 610
statistics, 294 assumptions, 414
descriptive statistics, 286, 291, 301, 319, 373, 543 covariance matrix, 421
in Descriptives, 291 criteria, 419
in Explore, 301 data considerations, 414
in Frequencies, 286 defining ranges, 417
660
Index
descriptive statistics, 418 dollar sign, 264

discriminant methods, 419 in pivot tables, 264
display options, 419, 421 dot format, 78, 80
example, 413 Draft Viewer, 229, 230, 231, 231, 236, 236, 237,
exporting model information, 422 237, 568, 571
function coefficients, 418 box characters, 231
grouping variables, 413 cell borders, 231
independent variables, 413 changing fonts, 236
Mahalanobis distance, 419 column borders, 231
matrices, 418 controlling default output display, 568
missing values, 421 display options, 571
plots, 421 output format, 231
prior probabilities, 421 printing, 236, 237
Rao's V, 419 row borders, 231
related procedures, 414 saving output, 237
ROC Curve for probabilities, 557 setting default viewer type, 230
saving classification variables, 422 Duncan's multiple range test, 353, 368
selecting cases, 417 in GLM, 368
statistics, 413, 418 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
stepwise methods, 413 Dunnett's C, 353, 368
Wilks' lambda, 419 in GLM, 368
display formats, 80 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
display order, 241, 241 Dunnett's T3, 353, 368
distance measures, 389, 449, 453, 457 in GLM, 368
in Distances, 389 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
in Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 449, 453 Dunnett's t test, 353, 368
in K-Means Cluster Analysis, 457 in GLM, 368
Distances, 387 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
computing distances between cases, 387 Durbin-Watson statistic, 402
computing distances between variables, 387 in Linear Regression, 402
dissimilarity measures, 389
example, 387 editing data, 88, 89, 89
similarity measures, 390 effect-size estimates, 373
statistics, 387 in GLM Univariate, 373
transforming measures, 389, 390 eigenvalues, 402, 430
transforming values, 389, 390 in Factor Analysis, 430, 431
distributed mode, 61, 61, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 70, 71, in Linear Regression, 402
602 embedding interactive charts, 207
available procedures, 70 embedding pivot tables, 207
data file access, 66, 68 entering data, 86, 87, 87, 88
Production Facility, 602 non-numeric, 87
saving data files, 67 numeric, 87
UNC paths, 71 using value labels, 88
division, 522 environment variables, 568
dividing across report columns, 522 SPSSTMPDIR, 568
dollar format, 78, 80
661
Index
EPS files, 210, 215, 218, 597 extremes, 301

exporting charts, 210, 215, 218, 597 in Explore, 301
equamax rotation, 433
in Factor Analysis, 433 Factor Analysis, 423, 424, 428, 430, 431, 433, 435,
estimated marginal means, 373 436
in GLM Univariate, 373 analyzing held-out cases, 610
eta coefficient, 309, 326 assumptions, 424
in Crosstabs, 309 coefficient display format, 436
in Means, 326 convergence, 431, 433
eta-squared, 326, 373 data considerations, 424
in GLM Univariate, 373 descriptives, 430
in Means, 326 example, 423
Euclidean distance, 389 extraction methods, 431
in Distances, 389 factor scores, 435
Excel files, 19, 52, 52, 587 loading plots, 433
adding menu item to send data to Excel, 587 missing values, 436
opening, 19 overview, 423
saving, 52, 52 related procedures, 424
Excel format rotation methods, 433
exporting output, 210, 213 selecting cases, 429
EXECUTE command, 280 statistics, 423, 430
pasted from dialog boxes, 280 factor scores, 435
expected count, 313 file information, 48, 48
in Crosstabs, 313 files, 205
Explore, 297, 298, 299, 301, 302, 303, 303 adding a text file to the Viewer, 205
assumptions, 298 opening, 19
missing values, 303 file transformations, 153, 154, 155, 159, 162, 165,
options, 303 171
plots, 302 aggregating data, 162
power transformations, 303 merging data files, 155, 159
statistics, 301 sorting cases, 153
exponential model, 411 split-file analysis, 165
in Curve Estimation, 411 transposing variables and cases, 154
exporting charts, 210, 215, 216, 217, 217, 218, 218, weighting cases, 171
218, 218, 219, 595, 597 filtered cases, 93
automated production, 595 in Data Editor, 93
chart size, 215 first, 319, 326, 332
exporting data, 587 in Means, 326
adding menu items to export data, 587 in OLAP Cubes, 332
exporting output, 210, 214, 597, 608 in Summarize, 319
Excel format, 213 Fisher's exact test, 309
Excel format, 210 in Crosstabs, 309
HTML format, 213 Fisher's LSD, 368
publishing to Web, 608 in GLM, 368
Word format, 210, 213
662
Index
fonts, 93, 204, 236, 261, 261 geometric mean, 319, 326, 332
colors, 261 in Means, 326
in cells, 261 in OLAP Cubes, 332
in Data Editor, 93 in Summarize, 319
in Draft Viewer, 236 GLM Univariate, 359, 360, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366,
in the outline pane, 204 367, 368, 371, 373, 373, 374
footers, 223, 224 assumptions, 360
footnotes, 256, 267, 268, 270 build terms, 364
adding to a table, 270 contrasts, 365, 366
in charts, 551 diagnostics, 373
markers, 256, 267 display, 373
renumbering, 268 estimated marginal means, 373
forecast, 412 interaction terms, 364
in Curve Estimation, 412 model, 363, 363
formatting, 231, 514 options, 373
columns in reports, 514 post hoc tests, 368
draft output, 231 profile plots, 367
forward selection, 396 saving matrices, 371
in Linear Regression, 396 saving variables, 371
Frequencies, 283, 283, 285, 286, 288, 288 sum of squares, 363
assumptions, 283 global procedures, 585, 630
charts, 288 global scripts, 630
display order, 288 Goodman and Kruskal's gamma, 309
formats, 288 in Crosstabs, 309
statistics, 286 Goodman and Kruskal's lambda, 309
suppressing tables, 288 in Crosstabs, 309
frequency tables, 283, 301 Goodman and Kruskal's tau, 309
in Explore, 301 in Crosstabs, 309
in Frequencies, 283 grand totals, 524
full factorial models, 363 in column summary reports, 524
in GLM, 363 grid lines, 260
function procedures, 629 pivot tables, 260
functions, 130, 130, 131 grouped median, 319, 326, 332
missing value treatment, 131 in Means, 326
in OLAP Cubes, 332
Gabriel test, 353, 368 in Summarize, 319
in GLM, 368 grouping rows or columns, 242
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 group labels, 242
Games-Howell test, 353, 368 group means, 323, 329
in GLM, 368 growth model, 411
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 in Curve Estimation, 411
gamma, 309 Guttman model, 527
in Crosstabs, 309 in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530
generalized least squares, 431
in Factor Analysis, 431 Hampel's redescending M-estimator, 301
in Explore, 301
663
Index
harmonic mean, 319, 326, 332 Hochberg's GT2, 353, 368

in Means, 326 in GLM, 368
in OLAP Cubes, 332 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
in Summarize, 319 homogeneity-of-variance tests, 356, 373
headers, 223, 224 in GLM Univariate, 373
held-out cases, 610 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
analyzing, 610 Hotelling's T-square, 527
Helmert contrasts, 365, 366 in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530
in GLM, 365, 366 HTML format, 210, 213, 597, 651
Help button, 8 adding customized code, 651
Help windows, 13 exporting output, 210, 213, 597
hiding, 199, 199, 200, 249, 250, 250, 251, 588 Huber's M-estimator, 301
captions, 251 in Explore, 301
dimension labels, 250
footnotes, 250 ICC, 530
procedure results, 200 See intraclass correlation coefficient, 530
results, 199, 199 icicle plots, 455
rows and columns, 249 in Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 455
titles, 251 icons, 592
toolbars, 588 editing toolbar bitmap icons, 592
Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 449 image factoring, 431
agglomeration schedules, 454 immediate tab, 638
assumptions, 449 script window, 638
clustering cases, 449 importance plots
clustering methods, 453 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 446
clustering variables, 449 Independent-Samples T Test, 337, 338, 339, 340,
cluster membership, 454, 455 341
data considerations, 449 assumptions, 338
dendrograms, 455 confidence intervals, 341
distance matrices, 454 defining groups, 340
distance measures, 449, 453 grouping variables, 340
example, 449 missing values, 341
icicle plots, 455 options, 341
plot orientation, 455 string variables, 340
related procedures, 449 initial threshold
saving new variables, 455 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443
similarity measures, 449, 453 input formats, 80
statistics, 449, 454 inserting group labels, 242
transforming measures, 453 interaction terms, 364
transforming values, 453 in GLM, 364
hierarchical decomposition, 364 interactive charts, 206, 207, 579, 579
in GLM, 364 copying into other applications, 206
histograms, 288, 302, 398 embedding as ActiveX objects, 207
in Explore, 302 options, 579
in Frequencies, 288 saving data with chart, 579
in Linear Regression, 398
664
Index
intraclass correlation coefficient (ICC), 530 in Frequencies, 286

in Reliability Analysis, 530 in Means, 326
inverse model, 411 in OLAP Cubes, 332
in Curve Estimation, 411 in Report Summaries in Columns, 521
iterations, 431, 462 in Report Summaries in Rows, 515
in Factor Analysis, 431, 433 in Summarize, 319
in K-Means Cluster Analysis, 462
labels, 242, 242
journal file, 568 deleting, 242
JPEG files, 210, 215, 216, 597 inserting group labels, 242
exporting charts, 210, 215, 216, 597 lag function, 149
justification, 201, 570 lambda, 309
output, 201, 570 in Crosstabs, 309
Lance and Williams dissimilarity measure, 389
kappa, 309 in Distances, 389
in Crosstabs, 309 language
Kendall's tau-b, 309, 377 changing output language, 568
in Bivariate Correlations, 377 last, 319, 326, 332
in Crosstabs, 309 in Means, 326
Kendall's tau-c, 309 in OLAP Cubes, 332
in Crosstabs, 309 in Summarize, 319
K-Means Cluster Analysis, 457 layers, 220, 244, 244, 245, 246, 255, 260, 308
assumptions, 457 changing, 245
cluster distances, 462 creating, 244
cluster membership, 462 displaying, 244, 246
convergence criteria, 462 in Crosstabs, 308
data considerations, 457 in pivot tables, 244
efficiency, 461 printing, 220, 255, 260
examples, 457 lead function, 149
iterations, 462 least significant difference, 353, 368
methods, 457 in GLM, 368
missing values, 463 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
number of clusters, 457 level of measurement, 77
overview, 457 defining, 77
related procedures, 457 Levene test, 302, 356, 373
saving cluster information, 462 in Explore, 302
scaling of variables, 457 in GLM Univariate, 373
statistics, 457, 463 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
KR20, 530 leverage values, 371, 399
in Reliability Analysis, 530 in GLM, 371
Kruskal's tau, 309 in Linear Regression, 399
in Crosstabs, 309 likelihood-ratio chi-square
Kuder-Richardson 20, 530 in Crosstabs, 309
in Reliability Analysis, 530 Lilliefors test, 302
kurtosis, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, 515, 521 in Explore, 302
in Descriptives, 294
in Explore, 301
665
Index
linear-by-linear association, 309 in Explore, 301

in Crosstabs, 309 in Frequencies, 286
linear model, 411 in Means, 326
in Curve Estimation, 411 in OLAP Cubes, 332
Linear Regression, 391, 391, 394, 396, 399, 402, in Ratio Statistics, 543
404 in Summarize, 319
assumptions, 391 maximum branches
blocks, 391 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443
exporting model information, 399 maximum likelihood, 431
missing values, 404 in Factor Analysis, 431
plots, 398 McNemar test, 309
residuals, 399 in Crosstabs, 309
saving new variables, 399 mean, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 329, 332, 356, 515,
selection variable, 397 521, 522, 543
statistics, 402 in Descriptives, 294
variable selection methods, 396, 404 in Explore, 301
weights, 391 in Frequencies, 286
line breaks in Means, 326
variable and value labels, 82 in OLAP Cubes, 332
listing cases, 315 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
loaded tab, 638 in Ratio Statistics, 543
script window, 638 in Report Summaries in Columns, 521
loading plots, 433 in Report Summaries in Rows, 515
in Factor Analysis, 433 in Summarize, 319
logarithmic model, 411 of multiple report columns, 522
in Curve Estimation, 411 subgroup, 329
logging in to a server, 62 means
logistic model, 411 subgroup, 323
in Curve Estimation, 411 Means, 323, 323, 325, 326, 610
Logistic Regression, 557 ASCII output from, 610
ROC Curve for probabilities, 557 assumptions, 323
Lotus 1-2-3 files, 19, 52, 52, 587 options, 326
adding menu item to send data to Lotus, 587 statistics, 326
opening, 19 measurement level, 77
saving, 52, 52 defining, 77
measurement system, 568
Mahalanobis distance, 399, 419 measures of central tendency, 286, 301, 543
in Discriminant Analysis, 419 in Explore, 301
in Linear Regression, 399 in Frequencies, 286
Mantel-Haenszel statistic, 309 in Ratio Statistics, 543
in Crosstabs, 309 measures of dispersion, 286, 294, 301, 543
margins, 223, 266 in Descriptives, 294
in cells, 266 in Explore, 301
maximum, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, 522, 543 in Frequencies, 286
comparing report columns, 522 in Ratio Statistics, 543
in Descriptives, 294
666
Index
measures of distribution, 286, 294 in functions, 131

in Descriptives, 294 in Independent-Samples T Test, 341
in Frequencies, 286 in Linear Regression, 404
median statistic, 286, 301, 319, 326, 332, 543 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
in Explore, 301 in Partial Correlations, 386
in Frequencies, 286 in Report Summaries in Rows, 516
in Means, 326 in ROC Curve, 560
in OLAP Cubes, 332 replacing in time series data, 150
in Ratio Statistics, 543 string variables, 83
in Summarize, 319 mode, 286
memory, 568 in Frequencies, 286
memory allocation moving rows and columns, 241
in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443 Multidimensional Scaling, 533
menus, 6, 587 assumptions, 534
customizing, 587 command additional features, 539
merging data files, 155, 158, 159, 159 conditionality, 537
dictionary information, 159 creating distance matrices, 536
files with different cases, 155 criteria, 538
files with different variables, 159 data considerations, 534
renaming variables, 158 defining data shape, 535
M-estimators, 301 dimensions, 537
in Explore, 301 display options, 538
metafiles, 210, 215, 597 distance measures, 536
exporting charts, 210, 215, 597 example, 533
methods, 627 levels of measurement, 537
OLE automation objects, 627 related procedures, 534
minimum, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, 522, 543 scaling models, 537
comparing report columns, 522 statistics, 533
in Descriptives, 294 transforming values, 536
in Explore, 301 multiple comparisons, 353
in Frequencies, 286 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
in Means, 326 multiple R, 402
in OLAP Cubes, 332 in Linear Regression, 402
in Ratio Statistics, 543 multiple regression, 391
in Summarize, 319 in Linear Regression, 391
Minkowski distance, 389 multiple response analysis, 501
in Distances, 389 Define Multiple Response Sets, 501
missing values, 83, 83, 131, 131, 150, 303, 341, 356, defining sets, 501
380, 386, 404, 404, 436, 470, 516, 524, 560 multiplication, 522
defining, 83 multiplying across report columns, 522
in Bivariate Correlations, 380
in charts, 552 names, 63
in Chi-Square Test, 470 servers', 63
in column summary reports, 524 new features
in Explore, 303 SPSS 12.0, 2
in Factor Analysis, 436
667
Index
Newman-Keuls, 368 One-Way ANOVA, 349, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353,
in GLM, 368 356
noise handling assumptions, 350
in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443 contrasts, 352
nominal, 77 factor variables, 349
measurement level, 77 missing values, 356
nonparametric tests, 466 multiple comparisons, 353
Chi-Square Test, 466 options, 356
normality tests, 302 polynomial contrasts, 352
in Explore, 302 post hoc tests, 353
normal probability plots, 302, 398 statistics, 356
in Explore, 302 online Help, 12, 13
in Linear Regression, 398 Statistics Coach, 12
normal scores, 142 opening files, 19, 19, 19, 19, 19, 19, 19, 20, 22, 22
in Rank Cases, 142 data files, 19, 20
number of cases, 319, 326, 332 dBASE files, 19, 22
in Means, 326 Excel files, 19
in OLAP Cubes, 332 Lotus 1-2-3 files, 19
in Summarize, 319 spreadsheet files, 19, 22
numeric format, 78, 80 SYSTAT files, 19
tab-delimited files, 19
object browser, 628 options, 568, 568, 570, 571, 573, 575, 579, 581,
objects, 622, 624, 625, 628 582, 582, 583, 585
overview, 622, 624 charts, 575
using in scripts, 622, 625, 628 currency, 583
variable-naming conventions, 624 data, 582
observed count, 313 Draft Viewer, 571
in Crosstabs, 313 general, 568
observed means, 373 interactive charts, 579
in GLM Univariate, 373 output labels, 573
OK button, 8 pivot table look, 581
OLAP Cubes, 329, 329, 330, 332, 336 scripts, 585
assumptions, 329 temporary directory, 568
statistics, 332, 332 two-digit years, 582
titles, 336 Viewer, 570
OLE automation, 609, 622, 624, 625, 627, 628 ordinal, 77
methods, 627 measurement level, 77
overview, 622, 624, 625, 628 outliers, 301, 398
properties, 627 in Explore, 301
scripting with, 609 in Linear Regression, 398
using objects, 622, 625, 628 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443
variable-naming conventions, 624 outline, 202, 203, 203
OMS, 643, 643 changing levels, 203
using XSLT with OXML, 646 collapsing, 203
expanding, 203
in Viewer, 202
668
Index
outlining a cell, 267 partial plots, 398

output, 197, 199, 200, 200, 200, 201, 201, 206, 206, in Linear Regression, 398
209, 210, 227, 229, 269, 570, 597 password protection, 227
alignment, 201, 570 Paste button, 8
centering, 201, 570 pasting, 208, 208, 209, 210
changing output language, 568 charts, 208
copying, 200, 201 pivot tables, 208, 209
copying and pasting multiple items, 209 pivot tables as tables, 208
copying into other applications, 206 special objects, 210
deleting, 200, 200 pattern difference, 389
draft, 229 in Distances, 389
exporting, 210, 597 pattern matrix, 423
hiding, 199 in Factor Analysis, 423
modifying, 269 Pearson chi-square, 309
moving, 200, 200 in Crosstabs, 309
pasting into other applications, 206 Pearson correlation, 309, 377
saving, 227 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
showing, 199 in Crosstabs, 309
Viewer, 197 percentages, 313
Output Management System, 643, 643 in Crosstabs, 313
overview, 649 percentiles, 286, 301
OXML, 646 in Explore, 301
in Frequencies, 286
page control, 516, 523 percent sign, 264
in column summary reports, 523 in pivot tables, 264
in row summary reports, 516 permissions, 70
page margins, 223 phi, 309
page numbering, 223, 226, 516, 524 in Crosstabs, 309
in column summary reports, 524 phi-square distance measure, 389
in row summary reports, 516 in Distances, 389
page setup, 223, 224, 226 PICT files, 210, 215, 217, 597
chart size, 226 exporting charts, 210, 215, 217, 597
headers and footers, 224 pie charts, 288
parallel model, 527 in Frequencies, 288
in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530 titles, 552
parameter estimates, 373 pivot tables, 199, 206, 206, 206, 206, 207, 208, 208,
in GLM Univariate, 373 209, 209, 210, 220, 239, 239, 239, 239, 240,
Partial Correlations, 383, 383, 384, 386, 402 241, 241, 241, 241, 242, 242, 243, 243, 244,
assumptions, 383 249, 251, 252, 254, 255, 255, 256, 257, 258,
control variables, 384 260, 260, 262, 269, 270, 271, 581, 597, 603
in Linear Regression, 402 adding captions, 270
missing values, 386 borders, 258
options, 386 cell formats, 257
statistics, 386 cell widths, 262
zero-order correlations, 386 changing appearance, 251
changing display order, 241, 241
669
Index
changing the look, 252 PNG files, 210, 218

continuation text, 260 exporting charts, 210, 218
controlling table breaks, 271 polynomial contrasts, 352, 365, 366
copying, 206 in GLM, 365, 366
copying and pasting multiple tables, 209 in One-Way ANOVA, 352
copying into other applications, 206 portable files
default column width adjustment, 581 variable names, 52
default look for new tables, 581 port numbers, 63
deleting group labels, 242 post hoc multiple comparisons, 353
displaying hidden borders, 260 PostScript files (encapsulated), 210, 218, 597
editing, 239, 239 exporting charts, 210, 218, 597
editing two or more, 239 power estimates, 373
embedding as ActiveX objects, 207 in GLM Univariate, 373
exporting as HTML, 210, 597 power model, 411
finding label definitions, 244 in Curve Estimation, 411
footnote properties, 256 predicted values, 399, 412
format control for production jobs, 603 saving in Curve Estimation, 412
general properties, 255 saving in Linear Regression, 399
grid lines, 260 prediction intervals, 399, 412
grouping rows or columns, 242 saving in Curve Estimation, 412
hiding, 199 saving in Linear Regression, 399
identifying dimensions, 241 price-related differential (PRD), 543
inserting group labels, 242 in Ratio Statistics, 543
layers, 244 principal axis factoring, 431
manipulating, 239 principal components analysis, 423, 431
moving rows and columns, 241 printing, 93, 220, 221, 223, 224, 226, 236, 237, 255,
pasting as metafiles, 208 260, 271
pasting as tables, 206, 208 charts, 220
pasting as text, 209 chart size, 226
pasting into other applications, 206 controlling table breaks, 271
pivoting, 239, 240 data, 93
printing large tables, 271 draft output, 236, 237
printing layers, 220 headers and footers, 223, 224
properties, 254 layers, 220, 255, 260
resetting defaults, 243 page numbers, 226
rotating labels, 243 page setup, 223
scaling to fit page, 255, 260 pivot tables, 220
selecting rows and columns, 269 print preview, 221
showing and hiding cells, 249 scaling tables, 255, 260
transposing rows and columns, 241 space between output items, 226
ungrouping rows or columns, 242 text output, 220
using icons, 240 prior moving average function, 149
procedures, 629
scripts, 629
670
Index
Production Facility, 568, 570, 571, 595, 595, 596, in OLAP Cubes, 332
597, 600, 602, 602, 602, 603, 606, 607 in Ratio Statistics, 543
command line switches, 606 in Summarize, 319
exporting charts, 595, 597 rank correlation coefficient, 377
exporting output, 597 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
format control for pivot tables, 603 ranking cases, 140, 142, 142, 143
format control with command syntax, 605 fractional ranks, 142
macro prompting, 602 percentiles, 142
options, 602 Savage scores, 142
output files, 595 tied values, 143
publishing output, 607 Rankit estimates, 142
publishing to Web, 607 Rao's V, 419
scheduling production jobs, 606 in Discriminant Analysis, 419
specifying a remote server, 602 Ratio Statistics, 541, 541, 542, 543
substituting values in syntax files, 600 assumptions, 541
syntax rules, 596 statistics, 543
using command syntax from journal file, 568 r correlation coefficient, 309, 377
using command syntax from log, 570, 571 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
profile plots, 367 in Crosstabs, 309
in GLM, 367 recoding variables, 134, 135, 137, 138, 144
programming with command language, 273 reference category, 365, 366
properties, 254, 255, 627 in GLM, 365, 366
OLE automation objects, 627 regression, 391, 398
pivot tables, 254 Linear Regression, 391
table, 255 multiple regression, 391
proportion estimates, 142 plots, 398
in Rank Cases, 142 regression coefficients, 402
Proximities, 449 in Linear Regression, 402
in Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 449 R-E-G-W F, 353, 368
publishing output, 608 in GLM, 368
with Production Facility, 607 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
R-E-G-W Q, 353, 368
quadratic model, 411 in GLM, 368
in Curve Estimation, 411 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
quartiles, 286 relative risk ratio, 309
in Frequencies, 286 in Crosstabs, 309
quartimax rotation, 433 Reliability Analysis, 527
in Factor Analysis, 433 ANOVA table, 530
random number seed, 131 assumptions, 528
random sample, 131, 169 command additional features, 532
random number seed, 131 data considerations, 528
selecting, 169 descriptives, 530
range statistic, 286, 294, 319, 326, 332, 543 example, 527
in Descriptives, 294 Hotelling's T-square, 530
in Frequencies, 286 inter-item correlations and covariances, 530
in Means, 326 intraclass correlation coefficient , 530
671
Index
Kuder-Richardson 20, 530 Report Summaries in Rows, 511, 511, 514, 515,
related procedures, 528 516, 516, 516, 518, 519, 519, 524
statistics, 527, 530 break columns, 511
Tukey's test of additivity, 530 break spacing, 515
remote servers, 61, 61, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 70, 71, column format, 514
602 command syntax, 524
adding, 63 data columns, 511
available procedures, 70 footers, 518
data file access, 66, 68 missing values, 516
editing, 63 page control, 515
logging in, 62 page layout, 516
Production Facility, 602 page numbering, 516
saving data files, 67 sorting sequences, 511
UNC paths, 71 titles, 518
removing group labels, 242 variables in titles, 518
reordering rows and columns, 241 Reset button, 8
repeated contrasts residual plots, 373
in GLM, 365, 366 in GLM Univariate, 373
replacing missing values, 151 residuals, 313, 399, 412
linear interpolation, 151 in Crosstabs, 313
linear trend, 151 saving in Curve Estimation, 412
mean of nearby points, 151 saving in Linear Regression, 399
median of nearby points, 151 rho, 309, 377
series mean, 151 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
reports, 511, 519, 522, 522 in Crosstabs, 309
column summary reports, 519 right mouse button Help, 10
comparing columns, 522 in dialog boxes, 10
composite totals, 522 risk, 309
dividing column values, 522 in Crosstabs, 309
multiplying column values, 522 ROC Curve, 557, 557, 560
row summary reports, 511 data considerations, 557
total columns, 522 statistics and plots, 560
Report Summaries in Columns, 514, 516, 522, 523, rotating labels, 243
524, 524 row percentages, 313
column format, 514 in Crosstabs, 313
command syntax, 524 rows, 269
grand total, 524 selecting in pivot tables, 269
missing values, 524 R-square, 326, 402, 402
page control, 523 in Linear Regression, 402
page layout, 516 in Means, 326
page numbering, 524 R-square change, 402
subtotals, 523 R statistic, 326, 402
total columns, 522 in Linear Regression, 402
in Means, 326
running median function, 149
672
Index
Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple F, 353, 368 scatterplots, 398

in GLM, 368 in Linear Regression, 398
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 Scheffé test, 353, 368
Ryan-Einot-Gabriel-Welsch multiple range, 353, in GLM, 368
368 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
in GLM, 368 scientific notation, 78, 264, 568
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 in pivot tables, 264
suppressing in output, 568
sampling, 169 scree plot, 431
random sample, 169 scripting tips, 609, 614, 617, 622, 623, 625, 627,
SAS files 628, 629, 632, 632, 636
saving, 52 adding a description, 632
Savage scores, 142 custom dialog boxes, 632
saving charts, 210, 215, 216, 217, 217, 218, 218, debugging, 636
218, 218, 219, 579, 597 getting automation objects, 625
BMP files, 210, 215, 217, 597 how scripts work, 622
EPS files, 210, 215, 218, 597 object browser, 628
JPEG files, 210, 215, 216, 597 procedures, 629
metafiles, 210, 215, 597 properties and methods, 627
PICT files, 210, 215, 217, 597 script window, 614
PNG files, 218 starter scripts, 617
PostScript files, 218 variable declarations, 623
saving interactive charts with data, 579 scripts, 585, 587, 591, 609, 609, 610, 611, 613, 617,
TIFF files, 218 618, 618, 632, 632, 636
WMF files, 210, 215, 219 adding a description, 632
WMF format, 597 adding to menus, 587
saving files, 48, 52, 52, 67 autoscript file, 585, 621
data files, 52, 52, 67 autoscripts, 611, 618, 621
SPSS data files, 48 creating, 613, 618
saving output, 210, 214, 227, 237, 238, 597, 608 debugging, 636, 638
draft output, 237 declaring variables, 623, 624
Excel format, 213 dialog boxes, 632, 634
Excel format, 210 global procedures file, 585, 630
HTML format, 210, 213, 597 overview, 609
password protection, 227 running, 609
publishing to Web, 608 running with toolbar buttons, 591
saving draft output as text, 238 script window, 614, 616
text format, 210, 214, 597 starter scripts, 617
Word format, 210, 213 using automation objects, 622, 624, 625, 628
saving pivot table views, 248 with command syntax, 639, 639, 641
scale, 77, 527, 533 script window, 614, 616, 628
in Multidimensional Scaling, 533 Debug menu, 636
in Reliability Analysis, 527 immediate tab, 638
measurement level, 77 loaded tab, 638
scaling exported charts, 215 object browser, 628
scaling pivot tables, 255, 260 properties, 616
673
Index
stack tab, 638 sizing exported charts, 215

watch tab, 638 skewness, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, 515, 521
seasonal difference function, 149 in Descriptives, 294
selecting cases, 166, 168, 168, 169, 170, 170 in Explore, 301
based on selection criteria, 168 in Frequencies, 286
date range, 170 in Means, 326
random sample, 169 in OLAP Cubes, 332
range of cases, 170 in Report Summaries in Columns, 521
time range, 170 in Report Summaries in Rows, 515
selection methods, 269 in Summarize, 319
selecting rows and columns in pivot tables, 269 S model, 411
selection variable, 397 in Curve Estimation, 411
in Linear Regression, 397 smoothing function, 149
servers, 62, 63, 63 Somers' d, 309
adding, 63 in Crosstabs, 309
editing, 63 sorting cases, 153
logging in, 62 Spearman-Brown reliability, 530
names, 63 in Reliability Analysis, 530
port numbers, 63 Spearman correlation coefficient, 309, 377
session journal, 568 in Bivariate Correlations, 377
shading, 267 in Crosstabs, 309
in cells, 267 split-file analysis, 165
Shapiro-Wilk's test, 302 split-half reliability, 527
in Explore, 302 in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530
shared drives, 70 splitting tables, 271
showing, 199, 250, 250, 250, 251, 588 controlling table breaks, 271
captions, 251 spreadsheet files, 19, 21, 22, 55
dimension labels, 250 opening, 22
footnotes, 250 reading ranges, 21
results, 199 reading variable names, 21
rows or columns, 250 writing variable names, 55
titles, 251 spread-versus-level plots, 302, 373
toolbars, 588 in Explore, 302
Sidak's t test, 353, 368 in GLM Univariate, 373
in GLM, 368 SPSS
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 basic steps, 11
similarity measures, 390, 449, 453 new features, 2
in Distances, 390 SPSSTMPDIR environment variable, 568
in Hierarchical Cluster Analysis, 449, 453 squared Euclidean distance, 389
simple contrasts, 365, 366 in Distances, 389
in GLM, 365, 366 S-stress, 533
size difference, 389 in Multidimensional Scaling, 533
in Distances, 389 stack tab, 638
sizes, 204 script window, 638
in outline, 204
674
Index
standard deviation, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, stress, 533
373, 515, 521, 543 in Multidimensional Scaling, 533
in Descriptives, 294 strictly parallel model, 527
in Explore, 301 in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530
in Frequencies, 286 string data, 87
in GLM Univariate, 373 entering data, 87
in Means, 326 string format, 78
in OLAP Cubes, 332 string variables, 7, 83, 129, 144
in Ratio Statistics, 543 computing new string variables, 129
in Report Summaries in Columns, 521 in dialog boxes, 7
in Report Summaries in Rows, 515 missing values, 83
in Summarize, 319 recoding into consecutive integers, 144
standard error, 286, 294, 301, 371, 373, 560 Student's t test, 337
in Descriptives, 294 Studentized residuals, 399
in Explore, 301 in Linear Regression, 399
in Frequencies, 286 Student-Newman-Keuls, 353, 368
in GLM, 371, 373 in GLM, 368
in ROC Curve, 560 in One-Way ANOVA, 353
standard error of kurtosis, 319, 326, 332 subgroup means, 323, 329
in Means, 326 subroutine procedures, 629
in OLAP Cubes, 332 subsets of cases, 166, 168, 169, 170
in Summarize, 319 random sample, 169
standard error of skewness, 319, 326, 332 selecting, 166, 168, 170
in Means, 326 subtitles
in OLAP Cubes, 332 in charts, 551
in Summarize, 319 subtotals, 523
standard error of the mean, 319, 326, 332 in column summary reports, 523
in Means, 326 sum, 286, 294, 319, 326, 332
in OLAP Cubes, 332 in Descriptives, 294
in Summarize, 319 in Frequencies, 286
standardization in Means, 326
in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443 in OLAP Cubes, 332
standardized residuals, 371, 399 in Summarize, 319
in GLM, 371 Summarize, 315, 315, 316, 318, 319
in Linear Regression, 399 assumptions, 315
standardized values, 291 options, 318
in Descriptives, 291 statistics, 319
starter scripts, 617 sum of squares, 363, 364
Statistics Coach, 12 in GLM, 363, 364
status bar, 6, 7 syntax, 13, 273, 274, 275, 276, 278, 279, 280, 568,
hiding, 7 570, 571, 591, 596, 639, 641
showing, 7 installing command syntax reference, 13
stem-and-leaf plots, 302 journal file, 278, 280, 568
in Explore, 302 log, 570, 571
stepwise selection, 396 output log, 276
in Linear Regression, 396 pasting, 275
675
Index
pasting into scripts, 640 exporting output as text, 210, 214, 597
Production Facility rules, 596 in cells, 269
running, 279 TIFF files, 218
running command syntax with toolbar buttons, exporting charts, 210, 215, 218, 597
591 time series analysis, 407, 412
syntax rules, 274 curve estimation, 407
with scripts, 639, 639, 641 forecast, 412
SYSTAT files, 19 predicting cases, 412
opening, 19 time series data, 145, 145, 147, 149, 150
creating new time series variables, 147
T4253H smoothing, 149 data transformations, 145
tab-delimited files, 19, 21, 52, 52, 55 defining date variables, 145
opening, 19 replacing missing values, 150
reading variable names, 21 transformation functions, 149
saving, 52, 52 titles, 204, 336
writing variable names, 55 adding to Viewer, 204
table breaks, 271 in charts, 551
TableLooks, 252, 252, 253 in OLAP Cubes, 336
applying, 252 tolerance, 402
creating, 253 in Linear Regression, 402
tables, 271 toolbars, 588, 590, 591, 591, 592
controlling table breaks, 271 creating, 588, 591
Tamhane's T2, 353, 368 creating new tools, 591
in GLM, 368 customizing, 588, 591
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 displaying in different windows, 590
target lists, 565 editing bitmap icons, 592
tau-b, 309 showing and hiding, 588
in Crosstabs, 309 total column, 522
tau-c, 309 in reports, 522
in Crosstabs, 309 total percentages, 313
templates, 84, 86, 575 in Crosstabs, 313
in charts, 555, 575 totals, 610
variable definition, 84, 86 automatically bolding in output, 610
temporary directory, 568, 568 transformation matrix, 423
setting location in local mode, 568 in Factor Analysis, 423
SPSSTMPDIR environment variable, 568 transposing rows and columns, 241
tests for independence, 309 transposing variables and cases, 154
chi-square, 309 tree depth
tests for linearity, 326 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 443
in Means, 326 trigger events, 620
text, 204, 205, 210, 214, 229, 238, 269, 597 autoscripts, 620
adding a text file to the Viewer, 205 trimmed mean, 301
adding to Viewer, 204 in Explore, 301
creating text output, 229 t tests, 337, 373
exporting draft output as text, 238 in GLM Univariate, 373
in Independent-Samples T Test, 337
676
Index
Tukey's biweight estimator, 301 variable importance plots

in Explore, 301 in TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 446
Tukey's b test, 353, 368 variable information, 561
in GLM, 368 variable labels, 7, 81, 159, 568, 573
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 in dialog boxes, 7, 568
Tukey's honestly significant difference, 353, 368 in merged data files, 159
in GLM, 368 in outline pane, 573
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 in pivot tables, 573
Tukey's test of additivity, 527 inserting line breaks, 82
in Reliability Analysis, 527, 530 variable lists, 565
Tukey estimates, 142 reordering target lists, 565
two-sample t test, 337 variable names, 7, 76, 568
in Independent-Samples T Test, 337 in dialog boxes, 7, 568
TwoStep Cluster Analysis, 439 mixed case variable names, 76
assumptions, 441 portable files, 52
options, 443 rules, 76
plots, 446 wrapping long variable names in output, 76
save to external file, 447 variables, 7, 9, 9, 75, 91, 91, 134, 135, 137, 138,
save to working file, 447 144, 158, 561, 563, 568
statistics, 447 defining, 75
defining variable sets, 563
uncertainty coefficient, 309 definition information, 561
in Crosstabs, 309 display order in dialog boxes, 568
unstandardized residuals, 371 in dialog boxes, 7
in GLM, 371 inserting new variables, 91
unweighted least squares, 431 moving, 91
in Factor Analysis, 431 recoding, 134, 135, 137, 138, 144
user-missing values, 83 renaming for merged data files, 158
V, 309 selecting in dialog boxes, 9
in Crosstabs, 309 variable information in dialog boxes, 9
value labels, 81, 88, 93, 159, 573 variable sets, 563, 564
in Data Editor, 93 defining, 563
in merged data files, 159 using, 564
in outline pane, 573 variance, 286, 294, 301, 319, 326, 332, 515, 521
in pivot tables, 573 in Descriptives, 294
inserting line breaks, 82 in Explore, 301
using for data entry, 88 in Frequencies, 286
values, 264 in Means, 326
pivot table display format, 264 in OLAP Cubes, 332
Van der Waerden estimates, 142 in Report Summaries in Columns, 521
variable attributes, 84, 86 in Report Summaries in Rows, 515
copying and pasting, 84, 86 in Summarize, 319
variable declarations, 623, 624 variance inflation factor, 402
in scripts, 623, 624 in Linear Regression, 402
naming conventions, 624 varimax rotation, 433, 433
in Factor Analysis, 433
677
Index
vertical label text, 243 weighted predicted values, 371

Viewer, 197, 199, 200, 200, 201, 202, 203, 203, in GLM, 371
204, 204, 205, 210, 226, 227, 570, 573 weighting cases, 171, 171
changing outline font, 204 fractional weights in Crosstabs, 171
changing outline levels, 203 Welch statistic, 356
changing outline sizes, 204 in One-Way ANOVA, 356
collapsing outline, 203 Wilks' lambda, 419
copying output, 201 in Discriminant Analysis, 419
deleting output, 200 windows, 3, 5
displaying data values, 573 active window, 5
displaying value labels, 573 designated window, 5
displaying variable labels, 573 WMF files, 210, 215, 219, 597
displaying variable names, 573 exporting charts, 210, 215, 219, 597
display options, 570 Word format
expanding outline, 203 exporting output, 210, 213
hiding results, 199 wrapping, 255
inserting charts, 205 controlling column width for wrapped text, 255
moving output, 200 variable and value labels, 82
outline, 202
outline pane, 197 XML
pasting special objects, 210 OXML output from OMS, 646
results pane, 197 saving output as XML, 643
saving document, 227 XSLT
space between output items, 226 using with OXML, 646
Waller-Duncan t test, 353, 368 Yates' correction for continuity, 309

in GLM, 368 in Crosstabs, 309
in One-Way ANOVA, 353 years, 582
watch tab, 638 two-digit values, 582
script window, 638 zero-order correlations, 386
Web, 608 in Partial Correlations, 386
publishing output to, 608 z scores, 142, 291
weighted least squares, 391 in Descriptives, 291
in Linear Regression, 391 in Rank Cases, 142
weighted mean, 543 saving as variables, 291
in Ratio Statistics, 543

Spss Base Users Guide 120

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spss Base Users Guide 120

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spss Base Users Guide 120

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

SPSS Base 12.0 User’s Guide

Tell Us Your Thoughts

4 Distributed Analysis Mode 61

8 File Handling and File Transformations 153

9 Working with Output 197

10 Draft Viewer 229

11 Pivot Tables 239

12 Working with Command Syntax 273

19 OLAP Cubes 329

21 One-Way ANOVA 349

22 GLM Univariate Analysis 359

23 Bivariate Correlations 377

24 Partial Correlations 383

26 Linear Regression 391

28 Discriminant Analysis 413

29 Factor Analysis 423

31 TwoStep Cluster Analysis 439

32 Hierarchical Cluster Analysis 449

33 K-Means Cluster Analysis 457

35 Multiple Response Analysis 499

36 Reporting Results 511

37 Reliability Analysis 527

38 Multidimensional Scaling 533

39 Ratio Statistics 541

41 ROC Curves 557

44 Customizing Menus and Toolbars 587

45 Production Facility 595

47 Output Management System 643

A Database Access Administrator 649

B Customizing HTML Documents 651

Online Help. Detailed tutorials provide a comprehensive overview; context-sensitive

E From the menus, choose

What's New in SPSS 12.0?

Improved Charting Features

New Data Management Features

New Complex Samples Option

Designated versus Active Window

Changing the Designated Window

E From the menus choose:

Showing and Hiding the Status Bar

Variable Names and Variable Labels in Dialog Box Lists

Dialog Box Controls

You can also select multiple variables:

Getting Information about Variables in Dialog Boxes

E Select Variable Information in the pop-up context menu.

Getting Information about Dialog Box Controls

E Select What's This? on the pop-up context menu.

A pop-up window displays information about the control.

Basic Steps in Data Analysis

Finding Out More about SPSS

Online Help is provided in several ways:

Using the Help Table of Contents

E Click the Contents tab.

E Double-click items with a book icon to expand or collapse the contents.

E Click an item to go to that Help topic.

Using the Help Index

E Click the Index tab.

E Enter a term to search for in the index.

E Double-click the topic that you want.

format FILTER FILTER.;